JP7446783B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A gaming machine, for example, a pinball gaming machine, uses the entry of a ball into the starting slot as an opportunity to perform a jackpot lottery, as well as a symbol variation display game. The structure is such that the player can enjoy the game by displaying a preview effect. In this type of gaming machine, there is a known gaming machine that, when a jackpot is won, shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state, after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1 listed below)

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-239986

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the time-saving state cannot be entered unless the player hits a jackpot, and the degree of freedom in terms of gameplay and production is limited, making the game less interesting.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the fun of the game by providing a new winning type that allows the player to enter a time-saving state without going through a jackpot.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) A symbol display means configured to be able to perform variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols based on a predetermined variation pattern, and capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative symbols in a display mode according to a game result;
a production control means capable of controlling production modes;
Equipped with a special electric accessory that can open and close the grand prize opening,
A gaming machine capable of controlling the winning state of opening and closing the big prize opening,
a special state that can be transitioned to via the winning state;
has a specific state that can be transitioned to without going through the hit state,
The specific state includes a first specific state and a second specific state each having a different degree of advantage,
The effect control means controls to a first effect mode in both the special state and the first specific state, and the effect mode is different from the first effect mode in the second specific state. configured to control to a second production mode,
The variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns includes a first variable display in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a high transmittance state, and a low transmittance state lower than the high transmittance state after the first variable display is executed. It is possible to execute the second fluctuation display displayed in
The execution time of the first variable display of the decorative pattern that starts the stopping action first is configured to be different depending on the variation pattern, and the decorative pattern that starts the stopping action first starts the stopping action. It is configured to be able to execute multiple stop motion patterns with different stop motion periods from when the decorative pattern stops until all the decorative patterns stop.
The specific effect can be executed in both cases where it is scheduled to be controlled to the winning state and when it is scheduled to be controlled to the first specific state, and the second specific state is The specific performance is configured not to be executed when it is scheduled to be controlled.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

1 is an external view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a game board and performance buttons. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining winning types and game state transitions. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining screen display of a liquid crystal display device. It is an explanatory diagram provided for explanation of a look-ahead preview performance. This is a game flow for explaining the game contents (normal, time saving, variable probability mode). It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the probability variable mode according to the number of consecutive games. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the time saving mode according to the remaining number of time reductions. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 10. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol fluctuation in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing special electric accessory management processing in FIG. 10. It is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control side. It is a flowchart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing. 17 is a flowchart showing a pending addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. 16. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a decorative design designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. 16. It is a figure showing a winning random number determination table (lottery form for winning/losing lottery). It is a diagram showing a symbol table selection table (lottery format for winning/losing lottery). It is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol table (lottery form for winning/losing drawings). It is a diagram showing a support time saving pattern table (lottery format for winning and losing lottery). It is a figure showing a losing pattern table (lottery form for winning and losing lottery). It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning type and game state transition according to the winning type target lottery form (modified example 1 of the lottery form). It is a figure showing a winning random number determination table (winning type object lottery form). It is a diagram showing a symbol table selection table (a lottery format for winning types and a lottery format for losing types). It is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol table (lottery format for winning types). It is an explanatory diagram provided for explanation of the winning type and game state transition according to the lottery form for loss types (modified example 2 of the lottery form). It is a diagram showing a losing pattern table (loss type target lottery form). It is a diagram showing a normal mid-win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (lottery form for winning/losing lottery). It is a figure showing a normal medium-loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (lottery form for winning and losing lottery). It is a figure showing a variable pattern distribution table (lottery form for winning/losing lottery) of winning/supporting time-saving winnings with variable probability. It is a diagram showing a probability-variable-loss variation pattern distribution table (lottery form for winning/losing lottery). 34 is a diagram illustrating a modification (modification A) of the probability variable mid-win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 33. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a modification (modification A) of the probability variation/loss variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a modification example (modification example B) of the probability variable mid-win/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 33. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a modification (modification B) of the probability variation/loss variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 34. FIG. It is a diagram showing a time-saving medium winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (lottery form for winning/losing lottery). It is a figure showing a time-saving, loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (lottery form for winning and losing lottery). It is a diagram showing a normal medium-loss variation pattern distribution table (loss type target lottery form). It is a diagram showing a gaming state transition table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern distribution designation number table. It is a timing chart showing the decorative pattern performance related to the normal variation 13s. This is a timing chart that focuses on the stop motion pattern of decorative patterns. It is a diagram showing an example in which the stopping operation pattern of the decorative pattern performance differs depending on the performance to be performed. It is a diagram showing an example in which the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern performance is different when the same performance is executed with variation patterns having different variation times. It is a diagram showing an example in which the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern performance is different when the same performance is executed with variation patterns having different variation times. 33 is a reference diagram for comparing the decorative pattern effects shown in FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which a stop operation pattern differs according to the performance type to perform, and its presence or absence. It is a figure which shows the example which a stop operation pattern differs according to a production stage. It is a figure which shows the example which a reach stop operation pattern differs according to the performance type to perform and its presence or absence. It is a figure which shows the example which a reach stop operation pattern differs according to a production stage. It is a figure which shows the modification of a stopping operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of a stopping operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of a stopping operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of a stopping operation pattern. It is a figure provided for explanation of the time-saving entry notification performance when support time-saving is won. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the production|presentation of the time-saving rush notification production. It is a figure showing example 2 of production of time-saving rush notification production. This is the first half of the game flow for explaining the game contents (normal, time saving, variable probability mode). This is the second half of the game flow for explaining the game contents (omens, ceiling, heaven mode). FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a pre-read notice according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ceiling function management processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ceiling activation management processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart showing gaming state transition preparation processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first half of the special symbol confirmation time processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the latter half of the special symbol confirmation time processing according to the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing a gaming state transition table according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing the winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (general, for portents) according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing the winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (for ceiling and heaven) according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general use) based on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a loss variation pattern distribution table (for omen, ceiling, and heaven (heaven time reduction)) according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a variation pattern distribution designation number table according to the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of a modification of a privilege provision form. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of a modification of a privilege provision form. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a ceiling time saving state (in a case of a ceiling game activation type). It is a diagram showing a case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time saving state (case of activation type at the start of the ceiling game). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a support time saving state (in a case where the ceiling function is activated at the start of a ceiling game). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a ceiling time reduction state (a case of activation type when a ceiling game ends). It is a diagram showing a case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time saving state (case of activation type at the end of the ceiling game). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a case in which a ceiling function is activated during a support time saving state (a case in which a ceiling function is activated at the end of a ceiling game). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an output form of an outer end signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an output form of an outer end signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an output form of an outer end signal.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pinball game machine will be explained as an example of a game machine according to the present invention.

[First embodiment]
<1. Configuration overview: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the external appearance of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of this gaming area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and by inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be changed. , by operating the front frame 2 to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 relative to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

A front operation panel 7 is disposed below the glass door 6 and is pivotally supported to the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing ejected game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 also includes a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 downward from the gaming machine 1, and a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 downward from the game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of balls and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of valuable media inserted into the game ball lending device are provided.

In addition, the upper tray unit 8 includes a push-button type production button 13 (first operation means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be operated in a direction is provided. The production button 13 and direction keys 75 function as operation means that can be operated by the player, and are used during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period ), and if a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, continuous press, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the performance may change before and after that operation. It is possible. In addition, these operating means can be used to display the game setting screen (menu screen: for example, 58 to 60)", it is also used when the player makes his/her favorite game settings. In this game setting, for example, the player can set the game environment, such as adjusting the volume and light amount as desired, within a predetermined range (for example, see FIG. 58). The production button 13 is provided with a button LED 13b inside, and depending on the lighting mode of this LED, there is a valid operation acceptance period (lit or flashing in a predetermined color) and an operation reception invalid period (for example, the light is turned off). (middle) can be notified.

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 is provided for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3). The firing device 32 according to this embodiment has a firing performance of about 100 rounds per minute.

Further, on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided to produce a sound production effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, decorative lamps 45 (for display purposes) are placed in appropriate places of the gaming machine, such as decorative members around the front frame of the glass door 6 and inside the center decoration body 48 (see FIG. 2). A plurality of LEDs are provided.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 is attached to the game board 3 in an annular manner as a board partitioning member to guide the launched game balls, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is The four corners of the gaming area 3a are non-gaming areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided approximately in the center of the gaming area 3a. This liquid crystal display device 36 independently displays a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, the left pattern , the middle symbol, and the right symbol (see, for example, FIG. 5A)).

Further, within the game area 3a, a center decoration body 48 is provided in the form of a winding circle around the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36. The center decoration body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration body 48 and the front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. It is integrally equipped with an armor frame part 48b, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and also distributes the flow path of the game balls to the left and right depending on the strength of the launch of the game balls or the stroke length. It acts as a flow path distribution means that makes it possible to do this. In this embodiment, a play area through which game balls can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration body 48 and the ball guiding rail 5, and the game balls shot into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left downstream path 3b on the left side of the center decorative body 48 or the right downstream path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 serves as a display area for various functions, with a 7-segment display (with dots) located at the upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b ( A second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a ``special symbol variable display game'' is executed by a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a "special symbol" expressed by 7 segments. The above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36 displays a decorative pattern based on an image in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays various preview effects (effect images). At the same time, a ``decorative symbol variation display game'' is executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be explained later.

Further, in the various function display section, a composite display device (LED display for pending composite display) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. What is called "compound" is the display of the number of pending balls for special symbol 1, the display of the number of pending pitches for special symbol 2, the display of the number of pending pitches for normal symbol, notification of the status favoring right-handed players, and the variable time shortening function. A hold/time-saving/high-accuracy combined display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a "combined display device") that has multiple display functions, such as game status information such as status notification during operation (time-saving mode) and high-probability state (high-accuracy mode). This is because it is called

Further, in the various function display section, a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) formed by arranging a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, a normal symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of normal symbols expressed by two LEDs. For example, as a fluctuating display operation, the normal symbols by LEDs alternately turn on and off like a seesaw, and by stopping with one side lit, it becomes clear whether the normal symbol fluctuating display game is correct or not. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-hand hitting display device 39b shows whether it is advantageous to hit the game ball to the right, which aims so that the game ball passes (flows down) the right-hand downstream path 3c, depending on the combination of lighting and non-lighting states of the LEDs. It is reported whether it is advantageous to "hit the ball to the left" by aiming so as to pass (flow down) the downstream path 3b. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is reported that the player is advantageous for right-handed players, and when the LED is turned off, it is reported that the player is advantageous for left-handed players.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-hand hitting display device 39b, and is formed by arranging two LEDs (round display LEDs). This round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot based on a combination of the lighting/extinguishing states of a plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, there are an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means). Detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper starting hole sensor 34a, lower starting hole sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of them to detect the passage of a game ball. has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of ``Special Figure 1'' (also sometimes abbreviated as ``Special Figure 1''), and does not have a ``starting opening/closing means'' that allows the starting opening to be opened or enlarged. It is configured as a prize-winning device. In this embodiment, due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the ball flows down the left flow path to the upper starting port 34. The game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3b has a configuration that allows the ball to enter (win) easily, whereas the game ball that has flown down the right flow path 3c has a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible for the ball to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a ``winning rate variable winning device'' that can vary the winning rate of game balls in the starting hole by means of opening and closing the starting hole. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wings (movable members) 47 are provided as the starting port opening/closing means, and when the movable wings 47 perform the opening/closing operation, the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port, is provided. can be opened or expanded.

In addition, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is connected to the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol will be referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , sometimes abbreviated as "Special Figure 2") is a winning opening related to the starting conditions for the variable display operation of the lower starting opening 35, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. The state is converted into an open state (easy-to-win state) that makes it easy to win a prize, and a closed state (difficult-to-win state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it maintains a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which winning to the lower starting port 35 is impossible.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are 4 general winning holes 43 on the left side (43a to 43d) and 1 on the right side (43e), a total of 5 general winning holes 43. A general winning hole sensor 43h (corresponding to each general winning hole 43a to 43e) is formed to detect the passage of a ball.

In addition, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passage gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally above the right side of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right downstream path 3c. It is being This normal symbol starting opening 37 is a winning opening related to the normal symbol fluctuating display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside thereof is a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) that detects a passing game ball. is formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downstream path 3c side, and is not formed on the left downstream path 3b side, but is not limited to this, and may be formed in both downstream paths. .

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start opening 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downstream route 3c, there is a special variable winning hole configured to allow the large winning hole 50 to be opened or enlarged by a retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a big winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that enters the big winning hole 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The area around the big prize opening 50 is a bulge (decorative member) 55 that bulges out from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulge 55 forms the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c. There is. When the big winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (big winning opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of this bulging part 55, the downstream guide part of the right downstream path 3c ( It forms part of the upper side 55a). In addition, in the downstream area of the right downstream path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, or more precisely, in the gaming area above the big prize opening 50, there is a flow path correction plate approximately parallel to the downstream direction of the game ball. 51d is provided in a protruding manner, and serves to draw the game balls flowing down toward the big prize opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the top surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is placed on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulge 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along the Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, whereby the flowing direction of the game ball is corrected in the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the grand prize opening 50 is covered by the push-in type open door 52b (grand prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls on this, and further the gauge structure (not shown) (The arrangement of the game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting opening 35). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winning state (starting port open state), a game ball can be won in the lower starting port 35, but the opening door 52b has retreated into the game board surface and the big winning port 50 When the game ball is in an open state (big winning hole open state), the game ball is guided into the big winning hole 50.

In the case of this embodiment, when the player aims the firing position toward the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball aims so that it passes through the right downstream path 3c), the upper starting port 34 side The game ball is configured to be difficult to be guided or not guided. Therefore, if it is in the "big winning hole closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each starting hole 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

If we classify the above-mentioned prize winning means to which of the left and right downstream paths they belong, that is, which of the left downstream path 3b or the right downstream path 3c can win prizes, the winning means belongs to the left downstream path 3b. , there are an upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole 35, and the general winning holes 43a to 43d on the left side, and winning means belonging to the right downstream route 3c include an upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole. 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. Note that when the movable wing piece 47 is in an open state (starting port open state), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left downstream path 3b and the right downstream path 3c, and prizes cannot be won from either the left or right downstream path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition for the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage of a game ball (winning) into the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the gaming area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 actually flows rightward. It can be said that this is a winning method that belongs only to route 3c. Moreover, the big prize opening 50 belongs only to the right downstream path 3c, and only game balls from the right downstream path 3c can win.

(Composition favoring right-handed hitting under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is aimed to "hit right" so as to pass through the right downstream path 3c, the game ball tends to land in the normal symbol start opening 37, but the upper start opening The game ball is configured to be difficult or not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, if it is in the "big winning hole closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each starting hole 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, the movable wing pieces 47 are designed to operate in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal gaming state) when a later-described "electrical support state" occurs. Therefore, under this electric support state, instead of "left-handed" aiming so that the game ball passes through the left downstream path 3b, "right-handed hitting" where the game ball aims so that it passes through the right downstream path 3c. ``Uchi'' is said to be advantageous. On the other hand, if it is the "state without electric support (during non-electric support)" which will be described later, on the contrary, the game ball will be left to the left instead of the "right-handed" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right downstream path 3c. It is said that "left-handed hitting" in which the target is aimed so as to pass through the downstream path 3b is advantageous. That is, depending on the game state, the progress of the game is made to work advantageously or disadvantageously for the player depending on which of the left downstream path 3b and right downstream path 3c the game ball is caused to flow down. The details will be described later, but gaming states with electric support include a "time saving state" and a "variable probability state," and gaming states with no electrical support include a "normal state" and a "potential state."

Each winning opening, such as the above-mentioned upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, normal symbol starting opening 37, big winning opening 50, or general winning opening 43a to 43e, functions as a winning means arranged within the gaming area 3a. , In addition, detection switches (winning detection switches) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43h are used to detect when a ball enters the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting game balls that have been played. It should be noted that the number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the winning means described above can be changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In addition, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flowing downward path 3b and/or the right flowing downward path 3c is difficult to win, impossible to win, or possible to win is changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. be able to.

When a game ball enters each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning hole is paid out from a game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). For example, the upper starting opening 34 has 3 pieces, the lower starting opening 35 has 1 piece, the normal symbol starting opening 37 has 0 pieces (no prize balls)), the big winning opening 50 has 15 pieces, and the general winning openings 43a to 43e have 3 pieces. is paid out. The game balls that do not enter into each of the above-mentioned winning holes are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out hole 49. Here, "winning" refers to a winning opening that does not have a structure in which the winning opening takes in a game ball into its interior, or a winning opening that takes in a gaming ball into its inside, but is a passing type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37 ), it means that a game ball passes through that gate, and in reality, if a game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, a "winning" is detected in that winning hole. is treated as having occurred. The game balls related to this winning are also referred to as "winning balls."

<Movable role object>
Furthermore, within the game area 3a, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game balls. In this embodiment, a first movable accessory 80 is disposed on the upper right side of the center ornament 48, and a second movable accessory 90 is disposed diagonally below the right side. The first movable accessory 80 includes a clock face part 81 consisting of a number display part divided into 12 number sectors with numbers from Roman letters "I" to "XII" attached, and a clock face part 81 on the clock face part 81. It has a clock hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand that are rotatably formed, forming a "wall clock section" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable accessory 80 is also referred to as a "watch-type accessory." The clock face section 81 has full-color LEDs on the back side or inside each sector section indicated by the hour hand, or the number sectors themselves are composed of full-color LEDs, and each number sector has a different color independently. It has a configuration that allows it to emit light.

In addition, the second movable accessory 90 arranges a corolla consisting of a plurality of petals around the flower center, and further arranges a calyx around the outside of the corolla to make the perianth double, thereby changing the shape of the flower. A flower-shaped part 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging motion, and the whole is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90. In addition, in the flower-shaped portion 91, a plurality of petals can rotate around the flower center. This flower-shaped accessory 90 normally remains stationary at its original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) on the edge inside the LCD screen or on the side outside the LCD screen, and when predetermined operating conditions are met, the arm 90 is tilted, and the flower-shaped portion 91 moves together with the arm 92 to a position (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 2) covering the liquid crystal screen. When the flower-shaped part 91 is moved to the production position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 2, it rotates at the tip of the arm, and the semi-transparent flower center and petal parts are illuminated from behind by a lamp or full-color LED, making them beautifully illuminated. . When the flower-shaped accessory 90 completes its operation, it returns from the performance position indicated by the broken line to the origin position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 is capable of a plurality of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as a rotation motion of the petals, and the arm 92 is capable of performing a predetermined tilting motion in addition to a full-open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of operation patterns are possible, such as a semi-tilting operation in which the arm is tilted to a tilting angle, a vibration operation in which the arm vibrates rattling, and an inching operation. The above-mentioned clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hands 82) and flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for preview effects and to suggest settings as described below, depending on their operation mode. It is also used when performing (appearing) a performance.

<2. Control device: Figure 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that centrally controls control related to overall gaming operations (gaming operation control). Then, upon receiving a production control command from the main control unit 20, a production control board (production control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "production control unit 24") that centrally controls the execution (appearance) of production by the production means. ), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a payout control board (payout control means) that generates the necessary power (including a backup power supply) from an external power source to each board of the gaming machine. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG. 3.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 201 (main control CPU), and a ROM 202 (main control It is equipped with a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to the Z80 system) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with periodic interrupts, constant cycle pulse output generation functions (bit rate generator), and time measurement functions. An interrupt controller circuit that enables/disables interrupts such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that detects when the power is turned on, shut off, or a power abnormality, and outputs a system reset signal to reset the CPU, and a control program. A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors malfunctions of the computer; an IAT circuit that monitors whether programs are being executed correctly within a preset address range; It also includes a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). In addition, at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown), and start backup processing prior to power cutoff. The game operation that was in place before the power was cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). This gaming machine 1 is capable of retaining each memory content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers and a sampling circuit that samples random numbers from the random number generation circuit at predetermined timing, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number (random number for jackpot determination (random number size: 65536)) by sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state. , and use that random number for the jackpot lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent cheating such as trying to win.

The main control unit 20 also includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winnings in the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winnings in the lower starting hole 35, and a game ball that detects winnings in the normal symbol starting hole 37. The normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a that detects the passage of the symbol, the big winning hole sensor 52a that detects the winning to the big winning hole 50, and the general winning hole sensor 43h that detects the winning to the general winning hole 43 are connected, The main control unit 20 receives detection signals from these sensors and determines which winning hole the game ball has won (entered).

In addition, an "OUT monitoring switch 49a" that detects game balls (so-called out balls) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port is connected to the main control unit 20, and can receive the detection signal. It has become. The main control unit 20 includes an out pitch counting means for counting the number of out pitches based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out pitches is one of the "gaming performance information" defined by a specific value. For example, if "today's total number of out balls is 30,000 shots", the operation information that gaming machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes today ("total number of out balls (pieces) / firing performance (100 shots per minute) = operation time") can be obtained. Further, the number of out pitches is used to calculate a base value (one of the game performance information), which will be described later.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraud on the gaming machine 1. Based on the detection signal, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activities against gaming machines.

In addition, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected to each other, and the main control section 20 can transmit control signals for driving and controlling these.

Further, special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbols.

Further, a composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c are connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can display and control various information displayed on these devices. ing.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to an external terminal board 21 for the frame, and the main control unit 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine via the external terminal board 21 for the frame. It is possible to send the data to external devices such as "data counter DT" and "hall computer HC". The predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start/end information, winning information, special symbol fluctuation start/fluctuation stop information, prize ball number information, and various security information (cheating detection information, RAM clearing, door opening, occurrence information such as setting changes). The above-mentioned "data counter DT" is based on the gaming information included in the outer end signal, and collects specific information about the gaming machine, such as the number of jackpots, the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations), and the number of games executed between jackpots. This is a gaming information notification device that can notify users, and is usually installed on the top of a gaming machine. In addition, the hall computer HC is a so-called "hall computer" that monitors and collects the game progress status of gaming machines based on the gaming information included in the outer terminal signal, and is installed in a pachinko hall. This is a management computer dedicated to the hall that comprehensively manages the operational status of gaming machines. The data counter DT and the hall computer HC are both conventionally known devices.

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type test of gaming machines based on the regulations regarding the certification of gaming machines, type testing, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronic Communication Technology Association (HOTSUKYOU). Therefore, a type test signal for specifying gaming operations in real time can be outputted from the frame external terminal board 21. Furthermore, when a gaming machine that has passed the type test is installed in a pachinko hall, no changes to the compliant control program are permitted. Therefore, even after installation in a pachinko hall, the type test signal is repeatedly output and processed.

The main control unit 20 also includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory within the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key that can be inserted and turned on/off to change setting values. A setting key switch 94 that can be switched between a setting change permissible state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF), and a setting change switch for changing set values (details will be described later) in the setting change permissible state. 95 and a setting change completion switch 96 for finalizing the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. The RAM clear switch 98, setting change switch 95, and setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. These switches 94, 95, 96, and 98 are formed at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine that cannot be seen by the player, from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activities with respect to the set values. ON/OFF operation is not possible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information regarding setting values is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal to display and control the display. . The setting display 97 according to this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display, and is mounted on the main control section (main control board) 20. Note that the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but also includes a payout control board 28, a firing control board 29, and a relay board (a relay board that relays connections between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: (not shown), or the performance control unit (performance control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate location inside the gaming machine.

(About setting values)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that allows the expected value (profit) of the profit to be given to the player, such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, payout rate), to be changed in stages. The above-mentioned "setting value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be checked on the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk solely based on the business strategy of the pachinko hall (gaming parlor).

For example, the "setting value" defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of a jackpot (a winning type that will cause the condition device described below to operate) in stages, and the higher the setting value, the higher the lottery probability of a jackpot ( The probability of winning a jackpot is set high, which is advantageous to the player. Such setting values can be provided in at least two stages (at least a first setting value and a second setting value). In this embodiment, setting values are provided in six stages from settings 1 to 6. For example, when the probability is low, setting 1 is 1/200, setting 2 is 1/196, setting 3 is 1/192, and setting 4 is 1/188, setting 5 is 1/184, setting 6 is 1/180, etc. That is, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win a jackpot (the machine discount becomes higher), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "set value" is a value that defines events that affect the machine allocation by stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a special event such as a jackpot. In other words, the lottery probability of a jackpot when the probability is low and/or the lottery probability of a jackpot when the probability is low can be configured to differ depending on the set value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability changing function described later is activated), the probability can increase to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/200 to 1/180 and the increase rate is 4 times, then the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/50 to 1/45.

Furthermore, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the probability of winning one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots, jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the setting value is, the higher the winning probability for all jackpots 1 to 4 may be. It may be configured such that only the winning probability of certain jackpots 1 to 3 is increased (in this case, jackpot 4 will have a common winning probability for all setting values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, only jackpot 1) ) may be configured so that only the winning probability is increased (in this case, jackpots 2 to 4 will have a common winning probability for all set values). Further, it may be configured such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the total winning probability of jackpots 1 to 4 is. In addition, the winning probability of the small winning type and/or the support time saving type that does not trigger the activation of the conditional device may be changed according to the setting value, as in the case of the jackpot described above, or the winning probability may be the same for all settings. It may also be a probability. The details of the jackpot, small win, and support time reduction will be described later.

(About changing settings)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is allowed, and when the power is turned on by other switch operations, It is controlled in a state where setting changes are prohibited. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change permissible state, the current display value of the setting display 97 changes to "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→..." The display is switched in a cyclical manner within the usage range of settings 1 to 6, as shown below. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (setting confirmation operation), the current displayed value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 ( Setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permissible state is terminated, and the game will thereafter be started under the determined setting values. The main control unit 20 has a setting function (setting means) that can set a setting value regarding the winning probability by a jackpot lottery (random number lottery). Note that the present invention can also be applied to a "setting-less gaming machine" that does not have a setting function. Alternatively, the game machine may be a "gaming machine with a one-stage setting function" that does not allow setting values to be switched to a plurality of levels, but only has one setting value. A "gaming machine with a one-stage setting function" refers to a type in which setting values can be set, but there is only one setting value. It is used to facilitate design by providing design compatibility and versatility when designing new models. This gaming machine with a one-stage setting function is substantially the same as a "gaming machine without setting" in that there is only one setting value. In the case of a one-stage setting gaming machine, even if the setting change switch 95 is operated, the display value on the setting display 97 will not change to a certain setting value, for example, "1→1→1→1→..." Only the settings are displayed, and the setting operation itself is possible.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information regarding the special symbol variation display game and error information to the performance control unit 24 using a performance control command, depending on the processing state. . However, in order to prevent acts of fraud from outside, the main control section 20 only transmits signals to the production control section 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which it is not possible to receive signals from the production control section 24. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Furthermore, a performance display device 99 (information display means) that notifies information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") regarding game results for a predetermined period (specific gaming period) is connected to the main control section 20. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display thereof. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) in which a display part and a circuit part are unitized are arranged horizontally. are arranged and mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to constitute a display capable of displaying a four-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above-mentioned "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko halls and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. This is information for investigating whether the game machine's original ball output performance (designed ball output performance) is being properly demonstrated, in other words, "information regarding gaming performance (gaming performance information)". . Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player is playing the game, unlike the preview presentation, setting suggestion presentation, etc. that will be described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location that is visible to the player, but is mounted at an easily visible location inside the gaming machine, such as on the control board or on the board case that protects it.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (the state where the jackpot lottery probability is low probability (normal probability) and there is no electric support, which will be described later) (the number of paid out balls at normal time), and the cumulative number of out balls during the normal state (normal The number of pieces out at normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of pieces paid out at normal times by the number of pieces out at normal times multiplied by 100 (base value calculated as number of pieces paid out at normal times ÷ number of pieces out at normal times x 100: Normal time base value) is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information", and this is displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance display 99. Note that the base value is displayed on the performance display 99 as a value rounded to the first decimal place. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), if the number of out pitches being measured reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000), the measurement will be stopped once. , the base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of the measurement is not the number of pieces out in normal times, but the cumulative number of pieces out that is measured during all gaming states (including during winning games). The number of pitches (number of outs in all states) is used, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. In addition, the processing program related to display control and base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are set in an area (outside area memory) that is different from the area (in area memory) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress. ing. Furthermore, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, but is not particularly limited as long as it is useful gaming performance information.

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and this payout control board 29 includes a launch control board (fire control unit) 28 that controls the firing device 32 and A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that performs the following is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and to send information regarding the payout operation status to the main control unit 20 ( status signals), etc. When it is necessary to pay out balls, the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control command regarding payout (a “payout control command” that specifies the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, and on the other hand, The payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 that detects the storage state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether the upper tray 9 is full or not), and a front frame 2 and/or a front operation panel. A door open sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) that detects the opening/closing state of 7 is connected, and the dispensing control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 receives detection information from a supply-out detection sensor 19a that detects a lack of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b that detects game balls (prize balls) to be paid out, which are provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. The payout control board 29 is also capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (the motor that drives the ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls). ing.

The dispensing control board 29 uses detection signals from various sensors such as the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the out-of-supply detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b as the state signals to detect a "ball jam" indicating a full state. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2/front operation panel 7 is open, "Out of supply signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, abnormality in prize ball payout (insufficient payout, excessive payout) The configuration is such that various status signals can be transmitted to the main control unit 20, such as a "counting error signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are in the open state (door open error), and whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal ( It monitors whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball clogging error).

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal ES (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The firing control board 28 controls the energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the firing permission signal ES outputted from the dispensing control board 29, and controls the firing operation handle 15. The game ball launch operation is realized by the operation of . Specifically, the payout control board 29 outputs the firing permission signal ES, and a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 detects that the player is touching the handle. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on the condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated (detection of touch state). Therefore, when the firing permission signal ES is not output, no firing operation is performed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Furthermore, the strength with which the game ball is launched can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control section 24)
The production control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), a ROM 242 (production control ROM) that stores production data required for production control processing, and a RAM 243 (which functions as a work area and buffer memory). It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), an audio control section (sound source LSI), an RTC function section (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16-bit (8-bit counter, 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc., to control the overall production operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and it also contains real-time time information such as the current time ("what hour, minute, and second it is now") and/or date (month, day, day of the week). Serves as a clock means of providing calendar information. In addition, like the main control unit 20, it is also provided with a backup function and a soft random number generation means (for example, a random number generation means for a lottery for performance).

The main roles of the production control unit 24 are to receive production control commands from the main control unit 20, to select and decide production based on the production control commands, to control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, to control the sound of the speaker 46, and to perform various functions. These include light emission control of performance LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other performance LEDs), operation control of various movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90), and the like.

The effect control section 24 also includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and an image ROM that the VDP develops. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs the control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and buffer memory.

The production control unit 24 also controls a light display device 45a that includes various production LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b to display a light display in order to perform an image display production, a light production, a sound production, a movable body production, etc. A control unit, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generating device 46a including the speaker 46, and movable accessory motors 80c and 91c that operate the movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped part 91, and arm 92). , 92c, etc. are provided.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable accessory is connected to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24 detects the current movement of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). The performance control unit 24 also monitors malfunctions in the operation of the movable accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs a predetermined error notification process if a malfunction occurs.

Further, the production control unit 24 is connected with a production button switch 13a that detects the operation of the production button 13, and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' that detects the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d), and controls the production. The unit 24 is capable of receiving operation detection signals from the performance buttons 13 and direction keys 75.

When the production control unit 24 receives a production control command sent from the main control unit 20, the production control unit 24 selects a production pattern by lottery or uniquely from among a plurality of types of production patterns prepared in advance based on the information included in the command. Then, various presentation means are controlled at the necessary timing to produce the desired presentation. As a result, the display of an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and other LEDs for effect (light effect) are realized. A "performance scenario" in a broad sense is realized by chronologically developing various performance patterns (fluctuating decorative pattern display operations, preview performances, etc.). Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 determines which direction to perform with respect to the performance button 13 and/or direction key 75 based on operation detection signals from the performance button switch 13a and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' during a predetermined operation acceptance valid period. The structure is such that it is possible to identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, a press, a long press, a continuous press, the order in which the direction keys 75 are pressed in the up, down, left, or right directions, etc.) (operation identification means). It has a configuration that allows execution and control of the performance.

The production control command defines the function with a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is ON, EVENT Bit 7 is OFF. When transmitting this information as valid information, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be sent, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for sending the command to the production control unit 24, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sends the command for the first time. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, event information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the strobe signal was transmitted, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period to ensure that the CPU 241 (performance control CPU) can receive commands.

In addition, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, so that the production control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal, the CPU 241 is in the middle of executing interrupt processing based on another interrupt (timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically). Even if a command reception interrupt occurs, the command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the corresponding processing, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interruption processing is performed with priority.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the above-mentioned control device (FIG. 3) will be explained.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 operates based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, a game ball enters the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 (winning). A "jackpot lottery" will be held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game by displaying special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, displays the result as a special symbol. It is derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the upper starting slot 34 and the jackpot lottery based on winnings in the lower starting slot 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result regarding the upper starting opening 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result regarding the lower starting opening 35 is derived on the special symbol displaying device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the first special symbol variable display game is started by displaying the special symbol 1 in a variable manner on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and a second special symbol variable display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variable display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is “jackpot”, a predetermined jackpot symbol mode is displayed. In the case of "Small hit", the predetermined small hit pattern is displayed, in the case of "Support time reduction", the predetermined support time reduction pattern is displayed, and in other cases, the predetermined loss pattern is displayed. The special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game result (jackpot lottery result) is derived from this.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2." In addition, unless otherwise necessary, "Special Symbol 1" and "Special Symbol 2" will be simply referred to as "Special Symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "Special Symbol"), and "Special Symbol Variation Display Game 1" and " It may be referred to as the ``special symbol variation display game'' without distinguishing it from the ``special symbol variation display game 2''.

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (actual game symbols) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various performances will be held. When the special symbol variable display game ends, the decorative symbol variable display game also ends, a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result is displayed on the special symbol display device, and the jackpot lottery result is reflected on the liquid crystal display device 36. Decorative patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by a decorative symbol variation display game that includes a decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is a "jackpot", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (for example, 7 segments is displayed as “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left,” “middle,” and “right.” In each display area of ``, the display mode in which the decorative pattern reflects the ``jackpot'' (winning pattern: For example, in each display area of ``left'', ``middle'', and ``right'', 3 decorative patterns are ``7'', ``jackpot'') 7”, “7” display mode, etc.).

When this "jackpot" occurs, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "jackpot" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the big winning hole solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 is activated, and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big winning hole 50, making the game more enjoyable than in the normal state. A special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, until the opening time of the grand prize opening by the opening door 52b passes a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or the number of winning balls into the grand prize opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number ( With one activation of the accessory, its entrance opens or the winning area is opened or expanded until the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning hole (for example, 10) is reached. A "round game" in which the big prize opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the round game end condition (closing condition) is met) is played for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above-mentioned jackpot game starts, the opening performance (performance during start INT) is performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game starts for a predetermined number of rounds (maximum round (number) is performed multiple times. When the maximum number of rounds ends, an ending performance (performance during end INT) is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and the series of jackpot games ends. Note that when the current round game ends, the next round game starts after a predetermined interval time (inter-round INT). Further, during a round game, an "in-round effect" appears, and between round games (during inter-round INT), an "inter-round INT effect" appears. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary to execute the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 specifically determines the information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35 (winning). , "Jackpot", "Small hit", or "Lose" on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper starting hole sensor 34a or the lower starting hole sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding special symbols) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the type of the jackpot is determined. If it is a "small win", it is the type of the small win, and if it is a "loss", the Perform a jackpot lottery including a 'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' that draws the type of loss (if there is only one type of jackpot, small hit, or loss, there is no need to conduct a symbol lottery, so the lottery can be omitted) Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (special stop symbol) are determined. , FIG. 25, FIG. 29, etc.), which will be explained later). Then, as a production control command that specifies the processing state, a "variation pattern specification command" that includes at least variation pattern information of special symbols (for example, jackpot lottery results, information regarding variation time of special symbols, etc.) is transmitted to the production control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the performance control section 24. In this embodiment, in order to provide a rich variety of performances, a "decorative design designation command" including information regarding special stop symbols (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the performance control section 24.

In addition to the jackpot lottery results, the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern information may also include information specifying the execution of a specific preview effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-continuation effect (including the number of pseudo-continuations) described below). can. In detail, the fluctuation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into "win fluctuation patterns" in the case of a hit and "loss fluctuation patterns" in the case of a loss, depending on the jackpot lottery result.These fluctuation patterns include, for example, "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of a reach effect (including specifying the type of reach), "Normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of a reach effect, and 'pseudo combination pattern' that specifies the execution of a pseudo-link effect and a reach effect. A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a "normal variation pattern with pseudo-coupling" that specifies the execution of a pseudo-coupling effect but not specifying the execution of a ready-to-reach presentation. In addition, for the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuation variation pattern, a longer variation time is basically determined than the variation time of the normal variation pattern in order to secure the performance time for the preview performance. Hereinafter, the reach variation pattern may be abbreviated as "reach variation" and the normal variation pattern may be abbreviated as "normal variation."

The performance control unit 24 performs time-series display during the decorative pattern fluctuation display game based on information included in the performance control commands (here, the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The contents of the performance (performance scenario) to be developed and the decorative symbols to be displayed in the final stage (decorative stop symbols) are determined, and according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, the preview performance during the decorative symbol fluctuation display game is decided. Controls the fluctuating display performance of decorative designs. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 36 in time synchronization with the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. The period has substantially the same time width. Furthermore, the performance control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, in accordance with the performance scenario, and develops various performances in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of images (image production) on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reproduction of sound effects (sound production), and the lighting and blinking driving of the production LEDs such as the decorative lamps 45 (light production) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. , these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise necessary. In addition, for the convenience of explanation, the number of executions (number of games) of a symbol variation display game (especially a special symbol variation display game) is expressed as "number of symbol variations," "number of variations," or "* rotation ("*" is a natural number. (for example, 1 rotation, 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.).

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main control unit 20 performs an "assistance winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol displayed by the LED is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the result is displayed on the LED lighting and non-lighting. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance win", the display section of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lighting).

When this "assistance hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see Fig. 3) is activated, which causes the movable blade 47 to open in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 to open. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged and becomes in a state where it is easy to flow in (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal power open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this normal power opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 operates (opening operation), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting port open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) has elapsed, or until the number of winning balls into the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be in an open state where it is opened or expanded, and either of these conditions is satisfied. In this case, the opening operation of the movable blade 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation holding ball)
In this embodiment, a prize is won at each start opening 34, 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37 during a symbol variation display game, a normal symbol variation display game, a jackpot game, a small win game, or a normal power release game. If this occurs, that is, if a detection signal is input from the upper starting port sensor 34a, the lower starting port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition is established, this is set as the starting right of the variable display game. Such data, except for data related to variable display, is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit, which is the maximum number of held storages. The pending data that has not been subjected to this symbol variation display operation or the game balls related to the pending data are also referred to as "operation pending balls." In order to clarify the number of active and reserved balls to the player, a dedicated reservation display (not shown) provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine 1 or a reservation display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is used. Display the device by lighting it.

Further, in this embodiment, up to four operation-reserved balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of confirmed fluctuations of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) regarding the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of stored symbols may be different, and the number can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are referred to as "special symbol 1", "special symbol 2", "special symbol 1", "special symbol 2", and "special symbol 2". It is also called ``Puzu action holding ball''.

(3-2. Gaming status)
Next, the gaming state will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various gaming states will be explained.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" whose function is played by the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). There are two types of this: a probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and a probability variation function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special symbol probability variation function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (high probability jackpot state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. . In a gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the jackpot lottery probability becomes high, making it easier for jackpots to occur. In addition, as already explained, in the case of this embodiment, the jackpot lottery probability at low probability and high probability differs depending on the setting value (see FIG. 4).

The normal pattern probability variation function changes the lottery probability of winning the assistance from a predetermined probability (normal probability) from a low probability to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. This is a function that generates a variable state of probability of receiving assistance. Under the gaming state in which this normal symbol probability variable function is active (assistance hit probability variable state), the lottery probability of winning assistance becomes a high probability state, making it easier for assistance hits to occur, and general power open games occur frequently. , the operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable blade 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment also includes a "fluctuating time reduction function (time saving function)" for which the main control section 20 is responsible. There are two types of this: a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special symbol time-saving function generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts changing until it is stopped and displayed). This function allows you to Under the gaming state in which this special symbol time saving function is active (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average variation time required for a no-reach loss variation). (the time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), resulting in a state where the number of jackpot drawings increases per unit time compared to the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the regular symbol starts changing until it is stopped and displayed). This function allows you to Under the gaming state in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated (normal symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the normal symbols in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (shortened), the number of drawings per unit time is increased compared to the normal state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an "opening extension function" in which the main control section 20 serves as a functional section. This opening extension function is a function that generates an "open extension state" in which the opening operation period (opening time of the movable wing pieces 47) of the movable wing pieces 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is extended than the normal state. Under the open extension state, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable blade 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of opening and closing times is, for example, once (open extension function (when the opening extension function is in operation) is extended twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), resulting in an operation rate improvement state in which the operation rate of the movable blade 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the frequency of winnings to the lower starting port 35 increases, and therefore, in the gaming state, the frequency of fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game that derives the jackpot lottery result is higher than in the normal state. This creates a gaming state that is advantageous for the player compared to a state in which the opening extension function does not operate (non-operating). In this respect, the open extended state is also referred to as the "electric support state".

By operating one or more of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Below, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function are activated will be referred to as the "probability change state", and among these functions, A gaming state in which the special symbol probability varying function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and is a gaming state in which at least the special symbol probability varying function operates and the opening extension function does not operate (in this embodiment, a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability varying function operates) ) is called a "latent state", and a state where all functions are not operating (non-operating) is called a "normal state". Therefore, if we focus on the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot drawing probability will be 'low probability state (normal probability)', and if the gaming state is In the case of the "potential probability state" or the "probability variable state", the jackpot lottery probability is in the 'high probability state'. In addition, during the jackpot related to the operation of the conditional device, a winning game in which the jackpot is opened and closed occurs, but all of the above functions are inactive, and basically the game state is the same as the normal state above. The variable display of the special symbol is also interrupted.

(High base gaming state)
In this embodiment, the three functions related to the above-mentioned normal symbols, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function, operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the opening extension function described above individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the probability is improved and the frequency of winning in the lower starting slot 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), the gaming state is based on the frequency of fulfillment of the starting conditions of the special symbol variation display game that derives the lottery result of the jackpot, or the winning of balls. It becomes a "high base gaming state (advantageous state for balls entering the starting opening)" in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. In addition, the "high base gaming state" here refers to the gaming state when the functions related to normal symbols (at least one of the normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) are activated, and the special symbol This is different from the gaming state when at least one of the related functions, ie, the special symbol probability changing function and the special symbol time saving function, is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time saving function), when the above-mentioned special symbol probability changing function is activated, it becomes a "high probability state" where the jackpot lottery probability is higher than the normal state, When the above-mentioned special symbol time saving function is activated, a "special symbol time saving state" is established in which the average execution time of the special symbol variation display game (average variation time of special symbols) is shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high base gaming state" in which the frequency of fulfillment of the starting conditions for the special symbol variation display game is higher than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high base gaming state", an electric chew support state to which at least an opening extension function is provided is treated as a "high base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of openings) of the movable blade 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 improves, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 increases, and the winning frequency per unit time increases. Since this increases, the game state becomes more advantageous for the player compared to the case where there is no electric chew support state (low base game state). When focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the gaming state is "normal state" or "potential state", it will be 'no electric chew support state', and if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "probable variable state" If so, it is determined that 'electronic chew support status exists'. In this specification, "no electric support state" is referred to as "no electric support state" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric support state" is referred to as "electric support state" or "electric support state". ”.

(3-2-1. Internal gaming status (gaming status determination number YJ): Figure 43)
Regarding the operation status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) that determine the gaming state, the main control unit 20 side controls these functions. Its activation (5AH)/non-activation (00H) is managed by the ON/OFF state of the corresponding flag. The gaming state that focuses on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state." The current internal gaming state is managed using an identifier called "gaming state determination number YJ". For example, if the gaming state determination number YJ is "00H", specify 'normal state (normal)', if it is "01H", specify 'variable state (probable variable)', and if it is "02H", specify 'time saving'. Specify the status (time saving)', and in the case of '03H', specify the 'potential status (potential)'.

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern selection mode (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode): Figure 43)
Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various performances related to the above-mentioned internal gaming states, the configuration is such that one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. The details will be explained later, but for example, the variable probability state includes multiple types of variable probability states such as "variable probability modes 1 to 3", and the time saving state includes multiple types of time saving states such as "time saving modes 1 to 3". These are managed as different gaming states using an identifier called "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The entity of this "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode" is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode data). For example, when classifying a variable probability state (gaming state determination number YJ = 01H) into "variable variable modes 1 to 3", the variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode corresponding to the variable state (YJ = 01H) is set to "01H (probable variable mode)". By setting "mode 1),""02H (variable probability mode 2)," and "03H (variable probability mode 3)," it becomes possible to select different fluctuation pattern distribution tables for each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of special symbols related to the symbol variation display game, and one or more types of variation patterns (variation patterns of special symbols) are used at least It is determined in association with the current gaming state (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result (see S413 in FIG. 12, FIGS. 31 to 41, etc. described later). For example, if the fluctuation pattern distribution specification number Tcode is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 1 is specified, and if it is "02H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 2 is specified. is specified and is "03H", the variable pattern distribution table for variable probability mode 3 is specified. That is, even if the internal gaming state is the same "probable variable state", a variation pattern related to a different variation pattern distribution table is selected depending on the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode from "01H" to "03H". It turns out.

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, that is, the "internal game For example, when paying attention to the state (gaming state determination number YJ), even if the same "probable variable state" is concerned, regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, there are different gaming states (variable pattern distribution) such as "probable variable mode 1 to 3". It becomes possible to select a variation pattern corresponding to the specified number Tcode).

Also, due to this, multiple types of "performance modes" related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode (variable pattern selection mode) are provided, and the production control section 24 side controls the production under each production mode. It is now possible to make it appear (execute). Note that details regarding the production mode will be described later.

In this way, the "internal gaming state" focuses on the functions related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "gaming state" focuses on determining the fluctuation pattern of special symbols (determining the performance). By managing the "variable pattern selection mode)" as different, even if the internal gaming state (for example, probability variation state) is the same, special It is now possible to select a variation pattern of the symbols. As a result, even under the same internal game state, it is possible to bring about dynamic changes in the consumption time of the symbol variation display game (the variation time of special symbols) and the performance related thereto.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the types of the above-mentioned "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc. (see the column "YJ" in FIG. 43). On the other hand, there are more types of gaming states (gaming modes) related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of special symbols, that is, gaming states (gaming modes) related to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode (fluctuation pattern selection mode) than there are types of internal gaming states. , "Normal mode", "Variable variable mode 1", "Variable variable mode 2", "Variable variable mode 3", "Time saving mode 1", "Time saving mode 2", "Time saving mode 3", etc. are included (see the "Tcode" column in Figure 43). .

In this specification, unless otherwise required, at least the gaming state associated with the variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as a "gaming mode" (see the "gaming mode type" column in FIG. 43). As shown in FIG. 43, this gaming mode is the gaming state related to the "fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode and gaming state determination number YJ (internal gaming state)", in other words, the "gaming state taken as a whole of the gaming machine". ” can also be treated as For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may be simply referred to as "gaming state" without distinguishing between them. Further, the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode may be referred to as a "variation pattern selection mode" or simply "Tcode".

<4. About winning＞
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, "winning" according to this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining winning types (jackpot type, support time saving type, loss type), winning game operation mode, and destination gaming state (transitioning destination gaming mode) after winning game.

(4-1. About the hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning types (win types) for the jackpot lottery include, as shown in the figure, "10R certain variable jackpot,""4R certain variable jackpot,""4R time-saving jackpot (4R non-probable variable jackpot)," etc. Includes multiple types of hits. These hits belong to the "jackpot type" that triggers the activation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small wins) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the activation of the conditional device. Here, "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device that continuously operates special electric accessory) for playing round games, and is a specified device. Activates when a combination of special symbols is displayed or the game ball passes through a specific area in the grand prize opening (excluding those that enter the grand prize opening while the accessory continuous activation device is operating) . In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing the electric support state (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (transition from one internal game state to another internal game state).

Therefore, if a "small hit" is won, the conditional device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device also does not operate, so there is no transition of the internal gaming state (transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small winning) is not carried out). However, transition control of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. In addition, in the winning game based on the small winning (small winning game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, a round game like a jackpot is not executed, but depending on the way the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined, It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being played. If such a transition form is used, for example, the gaming state after a small winning game and the gaming state after another jackpot game can be transferred to the same fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode). In this case, it is possible to have both sides stay in a performance mode that produces the same performance. Also, due to winning a small hit, it is possible to shift from the first variable pattern selection mode to the second variable pattern selection mode, or to transfer from the second variable pattern selection mode to the first variable pattern selection mode again. It is. Although this embodiment does not provide a "small win," it is possible to provide one or more types of small wins for the lottery targets on the special map 1 side and/or the special map 2 side in consideration of gameplay etc. can.

The operating mode of the small winning game is basically the same as that of the jackpot game, except that a round game is not executed. Specifically, after a predetermined start INT elapses, an "opening/closing action game (pseudo round game)" is executed to open the big prize opening, and when the opening/closing action game ends, after a predetermined end INT, a series of The small winning game ends. Such a small win is different from a mere "loss" in that it is a winning type that triggers a transition (execution trigger) to a winning game (special game state) that involves the opening and closing of the big winning opening, just like a jackpot. make a difference. Although this embodiment does not provide a "small win," it is possible to provide one or more types of small wins for the lottery targets on the special map 1 side and/or the special map 2 side in consideration of gameplay etc. can.

(4-2. Regarding winning games)
Next, the contents of the winning game based on each winning mentioned above will be explained.

"10R Guaranteed Variable Jackpot" has a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening in one round game is such that there is a possibility that the number of prizes in the big prize opening will reach the maximum number of prizes (10 pieces). The jackpot is set to a "long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)" that can be fully expected. In addition, the maximum number of rounds for "4R sure-change jackpot" and "4R time-saving jackpot" is 4 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening in one round game is the same "long opening time" as for 10R sure-change jackpot. It has become a jackpot to be set. Regarding the profit state (profit degree) during a jackpot game, the larger the maximum number of rounds is, the higher it becomes, and the longer the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening becomes, the higher it becomes. In the case of this embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds is for a jackpot, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the opening pattern of the big prize opening related to the round game is freely determined. For example, the opening pattern of the big winning opening for at least some round games (round games of a certain number of rounds) may be changed to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" that is shorter than the long opening time. , it may be set to an even shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". Also, during the maximum opening time, the big prize opening may continue to be opened, or an opening pattern that involves closing one or more times (for example, "1.3 seconds open + 0.5 seconds closed + 27 seconds open" etc.) You can also use it as

(4-3. About the destination game state after a winning game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of the game state to which the game state is transferred after each jackpot game described above ends. The column “Game state at the time of winning/Destination game state” shown in FIG. The relationship is shown. In addition, "gaming state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the internal gaming state type at the time of winning (the corresponding gaming mode type is in parentheses), and "transfer destination gaming state" indicates the internal gaming state type to which the transfer is made. (The number in parentheses indicates the corresponding game mode type). Details regarding the gaming mode to which the game mode is transferred will be described later.

(If you win the 10R definite strange jackpot or 4R sure strange jackpot)
In the case of a ``10R variable probability jackpot'' or a ``4R variable probability jackpot,'' regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the game is shifted to the ``probability variable state'' after the jackpot game. These jackpots are called "probable variable jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a variable probability state.

If the state changes to the above-mentioned "determined variation state", the special symbol variation display game continues until the number of executions (number of symbol variations) reaches a predetermined number of times, or until a jackpot is won within a predetermined number of times. When this is possible and the special symbol variable display game ends without winning a jackpot within the specified number of times, the variable probability state ends and a transition is made to the normal state from the next game. In addition, whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of executions of special symbol fluctuation display games 1 and 2 (number of fluctuations of special symbols 1 and 2) (the same applies in the case of the time saving state described later) )). That is, when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbols 1 and 2) ends for the specified number of times without hitting the jackpot, the variable probability state is ended.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a gaming state where the probability is at least high (probable variable state or potential state), a jackpot (however, excluding "small wins" that do not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state) If the special symbol fluctuation display game ends a predetermined number of times without winning, the high probability state is ended and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability state. ))”. Hereinafter, if necessary, the upper limit number of times of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol) in which this high probability state is continued will be referred to as the "ST number of times."

Therefore, when the state is shifted to a variable probability state, as in this embodiment, when the ST number ends, the variable state ends and the state is shifted to the normal state (YJ=00H) (probable variable → normal). , Unlike this embodiment, there is a case where only the high probability state ends when the ST number ends. There is a case (probability variation → time saving) in which only the "special symbol probability variable function" is completed and transferred to the "time saving state (YJ=02H)". In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 65,535 (see Note (3) in Fig. 4), and due to the jackpot lottery probability, the "infinite" state is virtually guaranteed until the next jackpot is won. However, in reality, if the ST number of 65,535 times ends without winning a jackpot, the state will be shifted to the normal state.

It should be noted that whether the number of STs is infinite (including the number of STs that can be continued until the next jackpot win) or finite can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. When setting the number of STs to a finite value, consider the fact that ``the number of STs cannot continue until the next jackpot win.'' ”, if the ST number is “F2 (natural number)”, then “0<F2<F1 (any ST number less than the probability denominator)” or “F1≦F2≦5×F1 (1 to 5 times the probability denominator)”. It is preferable that the number of STs satisfies the following: (within 63% to 99%): Any number of STs with a consecutive winning rate of approximately 63% to 99%).

(If you win the 4R time-saving jackpot)
In the case of "4R time-saving jackpot", regardless of the gaming state at the time of the winning, the game is shifted to the "time-saving state" after the jackpot game. These jackpots are referred to as "time-saving jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the above-mentioned "time saving state" is entered, the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation display game will continue until a predetermined number of times is reached, and within that number of times a jackpot (however, the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation display game will continue until the end of the specified number of times). When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning (excluding winning), the time saving state ends and a transition is made to the normal state from the next game. In the case of this embodiment, the prescribed number of times related to the time saving state (time saving number) includes the time saving state related to "support time saving" described later, "100 times (support time saving A, time saving jackpot: finite time saving)", "200 times", "200 times (support time saving A, time saving jackpot: finite time saving)" There are 65,535 times (Support Time Saving B: Limited Time Saving), 65535 Times (Support Time Saving C: Infinite Time Saving that can continue until the next jackpot win) (see Note (2) in Figure 4). , one type of 4R time-saving jackpot is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-savings may be provided.In this case, at least one time-saving jackpot is a time-saving jackpot due to support time saving. The number of time-saving jackpots may be the same as the number of times, and the other time-saving jackpots may be different from the number of time-savings due to support time-saving.Also, all the time-saving jackpots may be different from the number of time-savings due to support time-saving.

It should be noted that whether the number of time-saving jackpots related to the time-saving jackpot is infinite (including the number of time-savings that can continue until the next jackpot win) or finite can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. When setting the number of time savers to a finite value, take into consideration the fact that ``the number of time savers is not something that can continue until the next jackpot win.'' If F3 is the number of time saving times F4 (natural number), then "0<F3<F4 (any number of time saving times less than the probability denominator)" or "F3≦F4≦5×F3 (within 1 to 5 times the probability denominator: It is preferable that the number of shortened working hours satisfies an arbitrary number of shortened working hours with a consecutive rental rate of approximately 63% to 99%).

(About losing)
Further, as shown in the figure, on the special drawing 1 side, there are a plurality of loss types such as loss A, B, and C, each having a different symbol lottery rate. In this embodiment, the relationship satisfies "loss A>loss B>loss C", and for example, loss A is 95%, loss B is 4%, and loss C is 1%. Although the special drawing 2 side shows an example in which one type of loss A is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of loss may be provided.

(About shortening support time)
In this embodiment, as one aspect of the addictive relief function (supportive benefit) or for the purpose of increasing the degree of freedom in the game and improving the fun of the game, we use the jackpot win (time-saving jackpot win) as an opportunity. Instead, there is a ``Support Time Saving'' that gives you a ``Time Saving State.'' This "Support time saving" is characterized in that the time saving state is given without going through the jackpot winning (operation of the conditional device, operation of the accessory continuous operation device) (without going through the jackpot game).

(A. Special electric activation type support time reduction)
If you win "Support time reduction", the conditional device will not operate (because the conditional device does not operate, the continuous accessory actuating device will not operate), but the special electric accessory will be activated in the same way as if you won "Small hit". may be activated to execute an opening/closing action game (opening/closing the grand prize opening in a predetermined opening pattern), and then providing a time saving state. In this specification, the time-saving support for operating the special electric accessories is referred to as "special electric actuation type support time-saving", and the series of opening/closing operation games based on this is referred to as "supporting time-saving opening/closing game". This support time-saving opening/closing game, like the small winning game, can be configured to include a predetermined start INT, an opening/closing operation game in which the big prize opening is opened/closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and a predetermined end INT. . Therefore, if you win the "Special electric actuated support time saving", the time saving state will be granted through the support time saving opening/closing game.

To put it simply, special electric activation type support time reduction includes support time reduction that gives a time reduction state via small hit winning (small hit winning type support time saving), and support time reduction that gives a time saving state via small winning winning type, and support time saving that gives a time saving state via small winning winning type, and supporting time saving that gives a time saving state via small winning winning type and ``small winning winning type support time saving'', and There is a support time saving (time saving symbol winning type support time saving) that gives a time saving state. The former "small hit winning type support time saving" is suitable when it is desired to provide a special electric activation type support time saving that provides a time saving state via a small winning game. On the other hand, the latter "time saving symbol winning type support time saving" is useful if you want to manage the small winning type and the supporting time saving type separately, for example, the small winning game related to the small winning and the support time saving release related to the special electric activation type support time saving. This is suitable when you want to control games separately or when you do not want to provide a small win itself. In addition, the type of time-saving symbol winning type support time-saving includes the time-saving state without activating the special electric accessory (without performing the support time-saving opening/closing game), such as "special electric non-activation type support time saving" described later. There is a support time reduction provided. It should be noted that which of the support time reductions, the small hit winning type support time reduction and the time saving symbol winning type support time reduction, to be provided or not, and which support time reduction to provide one or more can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

(When providing a small hit and special electric activation type support time reduction)
If we provide "Small hit (here, it means "simple small hit (hereinafter referred to as "normal small hit") that does not give a time saving state)" and "Special electric activation type support time saving", the small hit game and support time-saving opening/closing game aspects (opening/closing pattern of the grand prize opening, production during the game (opening production (production during start INT), ending production (production during end INT), right hit instruction production (fire guidance notification production), etc. )) are the same or similar, it is possible to keep which one won a secret state (support time-saving win secret state). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether he has won the regular small win or the shortened support time. In particular, at least a part of the performance during symbol fluctuation (fluctuation performance) in the case of winning the small hit and the case of winning the special electric activated support time reduction is made common, and in terms of performance, the small hit winning and the support time reduction It is preferable to configure the system so that it is possible to hide which of the winnings has been won for a predetermined period of time. For example, during the fluctuating period and at least part of the winning game period (small winning game and support time-saving opening/closing game), which one won is kept secret for performance purposes. More preferably, a configuration is adopted in which a common winning variation pattern can be selected in cases where a small winning is won and a case where a support time reduction is won, and the performance during the variation is made into a common performance mode. Then, during the period of the winning game executed after the end of the winning fluctuation, the performance mode is such that it is possible to notify which of the small winning and the short support time win has been won. Note that the "common performance" herein may also include a combination of stop decoration patterns. For example, when the decorative pattern associated with a small winning win is "123", it is preferable that the decorative symbol associated with a support time saving win also be "123", and which one has been won is hidden from the stop shape of the decorative symbol. Of course, by changing the fluctuating effects, changing the opening pattern of the grand prize opening, or changing the start INT and/or end INT (opening effect and/or ending effect), you can change the appearance or effect. It may be configured such that it is possible to notify (recognizable to the player) whether or not the player has won.

In addition, when providing multiple types of small winning winning types including small winning winning type support time saving, the following configurations (1st grade) to (3rd grade) can be used.
(Small 1) Among the plurality of small wins, at least one small win can be made to function as a "normal small win", and the remaining small wins can be made to function as a "small win winning type support time saving". For example, when a plurality of small winnings A, B, and C are provided, small winnings A and B function as "small winning type support time saving", and small winning C functions as a "normal small winning". In this case, for "Small win A" and "Small win B" that function as small win type support time savers, the same number of time savings may be given to both, or the number of time savings may be different for each (for example, Small win A In the case of , the number of time reductions may be given as 1000 times, and in the case of small win B, the number of time reductions may be given as 100 times). Regarding the probability of winning a small win, considering the degree of advantage (profit status) for the player, if the same or almost the same number of time savings is given for small wins A and B, "Small win C < Small win B ≦ Small win If the number of times saved is greater for the small win A than for the small win B, it is preferable to set the winning probability to satisfy the relationship ``Small win C<Small win B<Small win A.'' In addition, the above-mentioned support time-saving winning concealment state is executed in the case of winning the regular small hit (small winning C) and winning the small winning type support time saving (in this example, small winning A and/or small winning B). This may be a possible configuration.
(Elementary 2) All of the support time reductions A, B, and C shown in Figure 4 can be made into small winning type support time reduction (in each figure, support time reduction A to C are read as small win A to C, may be applied as appropriate). For example, if you win small win A, the number of time savings is 100 (small win A = the same time saving performance as support time saver A), and if you win small win B, the number of time savings is 200 (small win B = support time saver B). If you win the small win C, you can be awarded 65,535 time savers (small win C = the same time saver performance as the support time saver C).
(Elementary 3) When multiple small winning type support time reductions are provided, if a specific small winning type support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, a new number of time reductions can be set (updated). (Same case as for (1st grade) and (2nd grade) mentioned above). For example, in the case of a small win type support time reduction where small win A gives 1000 time savings and small win B gives 100 time savings, if small win B is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction number is set to 100 times. However, if the small win A that gives a larger number of time savings than the small win B is won, the number of time savings can be configured not to be set. More specifically, for example, if the small win B (100 time savings) is won on the 30th remaining time saving number, a new time saving number of 100 is set in the winning game, and the remaining time saving number is 100. Updated every time. However, if the small win A (1000 times of time savings) is won, a new number of time savings will not be set, and the current small win A win will be treated as invalid (can be treated as a loss), and the remaining number of time savings will remain. The amount of the current game will be subtracted from this (remaining number of time reductions - 1).

(B. Special electric non-activated support time reduction)
In addition, without activating the special electric accessories, the time saving state will be activated after the winning game ends (after the special symbol fluctuation time ends or after the special symbol final display time elapses) or when the next game starts. You may let them. In this specification, such support time reduction is referred to as "special electric non-operation type support time reduction."

In addition, it is free to adopt one or more of the above-mentioned special electric power activation type support time reduction or special electric non-operation type support time reduction, or whether to employ one or more of both types of support time reduction. In this embodiment, an example will be mainly described in which "special electric activation type support time saving" is adopted.

The "Support time reduction" according to this embodiment is subject to a jackpot lottery, and like the jackpot, there is a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/500) of winning (a winning lottery target form). To be more specific, either a "big hit", "shorter support time", or "lose" (including a "small win" if a small win is provided) is drawn through a lottery, and the winner of the "shorter support time" is selected. If so, then the type of support time reduction (for example, any of support time reduction A to C) is determined by drawing a symbol lottery (see the remarks column (4) in FIG. 4). Note that the lottery probability for shortening support time is the same for all setting values, but it may be different for each setting value, or it may be the same lottery probability for a part of each setting value.

(Support time saving performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, multiple types of support time savings A, B, and C are provided on the special map 1 side, and multiple types of support time savings B and C are provided on the special map 2 side, and the symbols One of the support time reductions is determined by lottery based on a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see the column of symbol lottery rate in FIG. 4). Furthermore, support time saving A to C each have different time saving performance. Specifically, the details are as follows.

(A) If you win "Support Time Saving A", you will be given 100 time saving times, which is the same as the time saving state granted by the jackpot (4R Time Saving Jackpot) (small benefit).
(B) If you win "Support Time Saving B", you will be granted 200 time saving times, which is more than the time saving state granted by winning the jackpot (medium benefit).
(C) If you win "Support time saving C", you will be given 65,535 time reductions (substantially continuing until the next jackpot), which is more than the time reduction status granted by the jackpot (big benefit). When the number of times of time saving is set to 65,535 times, it is considered as "infinite time saving" in which the time saving state is virtually guaranteed until the next jackpot is won due to the jackpot lottery probability.
To be precise, infinite time saving means that the number of time saving times is "unlimited (infinite)", but it is actually the number of time saving times that guarantees the time saving state until the next jackpot (for example, 10,000 times or 65,535 times). are treated as belonging to "infinite time saving" in this specification. Note that even when a number of time reductions that cannot be completed during business hours of a pachinko hall (for example, about 5000 times) is given, it can be treated as belonging to "infinite time reduction".

It should be noted that it is free to adopt one or more types of support time reductions among support time reductions A to C. Further, there is no particular restriction on what kind of support time reduction is provided for which special map side. For example, at least one of the support time savings A to C may be provided on the special map 1 side and/or the special map 2 side, or at least one of the support time savings A to C may be provided only on one special map side. good.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, it is easier to win the support time saving with high time saving performance on the special drawing 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) than on the special drawing 1 side (upper starting port 34 side), and , 10R probability-variable jackpot is also easy to win. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special drawing 2 side.

In addition, in the illustration, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, if you win support time reduction A, B, or C, the number of time reductions will be 100 times (finite time reduction), 200 times (finite time reduction), and 65535 times (infinite time reduction), respectively. However, the special feature of "support time reduction" may be utilized to configure the following (structure A) to (structure G).

(Structure A: Fall transition avoidance function)
In order to prevent the occurrence of a "falling transition" situation in which the system shifts to a time-saving state with a low profit level, the following configurations (α1) to (α4) can be adopted.
(α1) After the infinite time reduction is granted, if a support time reduction that grants a finite time reduction (for example, 100 or 200 times) is won, the infinite time reduction remains. For example, if support time reduction A (100 time reductions) or support time reduction B (200 times) is won during infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is controlled not to be updated.
(α2) During a gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) involving electric support, the support time saving is excluded from the lottery target. Specifically, if a support time reduction is won during a gaming state (work time reduction state, variable probability state) that involves electric support, the winning will be treated as invalid and the time reduction state due to support time reduction (hereinafter, the time reduction state due to support time reduction will be referred to as a "support time reduction state"). By executing a jackpot lottery in which the support time reduction is not granted or the support time reduction is excluded from the lottery target, the support time reduction is treated as invalid, and the time reduction state due to the support time reduction is not granted. In the former case, if you win a short support time, you can perform the same process as if you won a loss (if there are multiple types of losses, the same process as if you won any of the losses). ). Note that the support time reduction may be excluded from the lottery target only in gaming states (variable probability state or potential state) that involve a high probability state. Further, only in a variable probability state, the support time reduction may be excluded from the lottery target.
(α3) It may be configured such that the time saving state due to the support time reduction (support time saving state) is not provided only during the variable probability state. Since the variable probability state (high probability state + electricity support state) is a more advantageous gaming state than the time saving state (low probability state + electricity support state), if you recklessly apply the support time reduction state during the variable probability state, the gaming state will fall. This is because In addition, if the number of STs is not an infinite number but a finite number (for example, a finite variable number such as 100 times or 50 times), depending on the number of STs, the next jackpot is not guaranteed during the number of STs. There are cases where the probability of consecutive winnings of a jackpot is low (for example, the consecutive winning rate during ST is about 30% to 50%). In such a case, considering the number of time reductions due to support time reduction and the degree of profit with finite probability variation (degree of advantage to the player (profit state (profit degree) given to the player), even if it is in a state of probability variation. , it may be configured such that a support time-saving state can be given.For example, considering the jackpot lottery probability (considering the so-called "TS" value), even if the time-saving state is reached, the next jackpot will not be won during the time-saving state. It is not necessary to treat winnings of support time reduction that can give a number of time reductions that can be highly expected (for example, the consecutive winning rate is about 95% to 99%) as invalid.For example, in this embodiment, when the probability is low The probability of winning the jackpot is 1/189 to 1/240 (setting 6 to setting 1), and support time reduction A (number of time reductions: 100 times), support time reduction B (number of time reductions: 200 times), and infinite time reduction (number of time reductions: 65535 times) are available. In the case of grant, the consecutive rental rates for each short-time situation are approximately 41.2% to 34.1% (100 shortened working hours) and approximately 65.4% to 56.6% (200 shortened working hours). , is approximately 100% (65,535 times of time saving).Support time saving C that gives infinite time saving has a consecutive winning rate of about 100%, that is, it gives a benefit that can virtually guarantee the next jackpot win during the time saving state. Therefore, the support time saving C does not have to be treated as invalid even if the probability is variable.Also, as mentioned earlier, it is possible to give a number of time saving times during which the time saving state can be highly expected to win the next jackpot. Support time reduction, for example, if the number of time reductions is three times or more than the TS (1/240) of setting 1 (720 or more time reductions), it is possible to give a continuous stay rate of about 95% or more in settings 1 to 6. Yes, support time reduction that grants such a finite time reduction does not have to be treated as invalid even if it is in a variable probability state.
(α4) In this embodiment, when the electric support state is reached, a situation may occur in which the player can “hit right” and receive the lottery on the special drawing 2 side, aiming for a jackpot consecutive winning state. Therefore, in order to avoid falling down when receiving the lottery on the special drawing 2 side, the special drawing 2 side should (1) not provide a support time reduction, (2) provide a support time reduction that grants infinite time reduction, or (3) It is preferable to provide a support time reduction that provides a greater number of time reductions than the time reduction jackpot (in the case of this embodiment, the number of time reductions is greater than 100).

(Structure B: Additional function)
(Italy 20) If the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, it is added to the current remaining number of time reductions (the configuration is such that it is possible to add the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction to the current number of time reduction counters). For example, if you win support time reduction A when the remaining number of time reductions is 50, it is updated to "remaining number of time reductions 50 times + 100 times = 150 times". Further, support time reduction that can be added on and support time reduction that cannot be added on may be provided. For example, if you win support time saving A, you can add it, but if you win support time saver B, you can not add it. The add-on function can expand the range of playability and improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.
(Means for restricting the number of additional hours saved)
In addition, in order to prevent excessive additions from occurring, it may be configured such that additions are not made more than a predetermined number of times (time saving number addition restriction means). For example, the upper limit of the number of additional time saving times can be set to "300 times." If support time reduction B (200 time reductions) is won when the remaining number of time reductions is 150, it will be limited to the upper limit of ``300 times'' instead of ``150 remaining time reduction times + 200 times = 350 times''. Ru. In addition, even if there is an additional limit, if you win the support time reduction C that grants infinite time reduction, in order to prevent the player from feeling a loss, the restriction will be lifted and the infinite time reduction will be applied. (65535 times) may be given. In addition, if there is an additional amount, the number of notifications (displays) using the "remaining time reduction number notification presentation (for example, countdown display)" described later, which visually announces the remaining number of time reductions, will be increased by ``+50!'' or ``+100.'' It is preferable to perform an "additional notification effect" such as "!" to notify that the number of time savings has been added (increased).

(Structure C: Infinite/finite time saving promotion function)
When the support time reduction is won during the time reduction state, infinite time reduction can be granted (time reduction state promotion means). In addition, when the time saving state is due to infinite time saving, even if the support time saving is won, the number of time saving times does not need to be updated, or may be updated. Further, instead of granting infinite time savings, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of time savings can be granted. For example, if you win support time saving B while in the time saving state, you would originally be given 200 time savings, but if you win during the time saving state, you will receive a larger number of time savings, for example 300 time savings. May be granted. Furthermore, the maximum number of time savings that can be given due to a jackpot and/or support time reduction may be provided. In the case of this embodiment, infinite time savings (65535 times) is the maximum number of time savings, so infinite time savings will be granted. Further, it may be configured such that infinite time reduction or a predetermined number of time reductions are granted only when a specific support time reduction is won during the time reduction state. For example, if support time reduction A (high probability of winning) is won, only 100 time savings will be given, but if support time reduction B (low probability of winning) is won, infinite time savings will be granted. Good too. In addition, when the number of times of time saving increases, it is preferable to display the above-mentioned "additional notification effect".

(Structure D: Regarding time-saving jackpot and support time-saving according to special symbols)
When the number of types of support time saving on the special map 1 side is "X" and the number of types of support time saving on the special map 2 side is "Y", the following relational expression (a) is satisfied.
"X" = "Y", "X"<"Y", or "X">"Y"... (a)
In addition, if the above relational expression (a) is satisfied, "X = 0 (support time reduction on the special map 1 side is not provided)" or "Y = 0 (support time reduction on the special map 1 side is not provided)". Good too.
Also, one or more types of support time savers with the same time saving performance (number of time savers) may be provided on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (for example, support time saver B is provided for special figures 1 and 2). You may provide one or more types of support time-savings with different time-saving performance (for example, providing support time-saving C for special map 1 and support time-saving B for special map 2). Further, the support time saving may be a finite time saving or an infinite time saving, and the number of types thereof is not particularly limited. In addition, when providing a time-saving jackpot on the special map 1 side and/or the special chart 2 side, a time-saving jackpot with the same time-saving performance as support time-saving may be provided, or a time-saving jackpot with different time-saving performance may be provided ( For example, when providing a time-saving jackpot and a support time-saving on one special drawing side, these may have the same time-saving performance or may have different time-saving performances). In addition, in the case of this embodiment, during electric support, it is "advantageous for right-handed players", that is, it becomes easier to receive the lottery on the special chart 2 side, so the support time saving provided on the special chart 2 side has a better time saving performance than that on the special chart 1 side. It is preferable to set a high support time reduction. In addition, when providing support time saving that gives infinite time saving and infinite time saving jackpot, it is preferable to share the number of time saving times (for example, 65535 times) set as infinite time saving to reduce the control burden.

(Structural E, F: Regarding the lottery probability of shortening support time)
(Structure E) It is possible to determine the probability of winning the support time reduction according to the set value. For example, the lower the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the short support time can be. In this case, the lower the setting is, the more the user can benefit from shorter support time, which can help avoid getting stuck. Moreover, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the support time reduction can be. In this case, the higher the setting, the higher the ball payout rate, without making any difference in the probability of winning the jackpot depending on the setting value.
(Structure F) The probability of winning the support time reduction (if there are multiple support time reductions, the total winning probability may be used) is the same (almost the same) as the probability of winning the jackpot when the probability is low, preferably lower than that. It is preferable to do so. This is because the support time reduction is a "support-like benefit," so it is preferable not to blindly let people win with a high probability. For example, with setting 1, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/200 (see Figure 4), so set the probability of winning the short support time to be the same or approximately the same as 1/200, or set it to a lower probability. It is preferable to set it to approximately 1/500 (in this embodiment, it is set to about 1/500). Furthermore, if the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as, or almost the same as, or lower than the jackpot winning probability of the setting value that can be set on the gaming machine, the winning probability of the support time reduction will not be excessively high, so it is not necessarily the case that a specific It is not necessary to use the jackpot winning probability of the set value, for example, the jackpot winning probability of the minimum setting 1 or the maximum setting 6, as the standard.

(Structure G: About the support time-saving opening/closing game by special electric activation type support time-saving)
When a plurality of special electric actuation type support time savers are provided, the support time saver opening/closing game mode corresponding to each support time saver may be the same, but at least one of the support time savers may be different. For example, in the support time saving opening/closing game using support time saving A to C, the opening patterns of the big prize openings are made different. Specifically, the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is 0.4 seconds for the support time reduction A, 0.8 seconds for the support time reduction B, and 1.8 seconds for the support time reduction C. In this case, the number of prize balls acquired by the support time saving opening/closing game can be made different. In this way, if the opening pattern of the big winning opening is different depending on the type of support time reduction, even if the number of time reductions granted is the same, the support time reduction can have different advantages (profit status). There is an advantage.

(About the grant form of the number of working hours reduced due to support working hours reduction)
Here, when granting finite time savings or infinite time savings through support time savings, the following grant forms (Ω1) to (Ω4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form Ω1)
If there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to a jackpot (the number of time reductions granted due to winning a jackpot (worktime reduction state)), the number of time reductions due to support time reduction (support time reduction state) is set to be less than that number. It is determined by type (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A". For example, if two types (number of types A) are provided as the number of time reductions due to jackpots: 100 times (number of time reductions A) and 50 times (number of time reductions B), one type of number of time reductions due to support time reduction (for example, 100 time reductions). ). Note that as long as the relationship "Number of types B<Number of types A" is satisfied, the support time saving may be provided with a different number of time reductions (for example, 150 times) than the number of time reductions due to a jackpot. Further, two or more types of time saving times (time saving states) due to support time saving may be provided (in this case, the relationship is "2≦number of types B<number of types A").

(Limited time saving form Ω2)
When the average number of time reductions due to jackpot is N and the average number of time reductions due to support time reduction is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 1) to (Equation 3).
(Equation 1) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N<average number of time reductions M". For example, if there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the time saving jackpot, the average number of time savings N is 75 times, so the average number of time savings due to support time reduction M is set to be a larger number of time savings (for example, 100 times). do. In this case, the time-saving state due to the support time reduction has a higher degree of profit than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so it can be a nice support benefit for the addicted player. Note that the average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number of times.
(Equation 2) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship: "average number of time reductions N=average number of time reductions M". In this case, the time-saving state due to the jackpot and the time-saving state due to the support time reduction have the same degree of profit. In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in both the time saving state due to the jackpot and the time saving state due to support time saving. In this case as well, "average number of time reductions N (infinite number of times) = average number of time reductions M (infinite number of times)", which satisfies (Formula 2).
(Equation 3) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N>average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit in the time-saving state due to the support time reduction is relatively lower than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so the position of the support time reduction as a "support benefit" can be maintained without giving an excessive benefit. . In addition, "infinite time saving" may be included in the time saving state due to the jackpot, and in this case, "infinite time saving" is not included in the time saving state due to support time saving.

(Limited time saving form Ω3)
(4) Similarly to the above (Formula 3), focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of time reductions can be set to satisfy the following relationships (4α) and (4β).
(4α) Determine the number of time reductions that satisfies at least the relationship “number of time reductions due to support time reduction≦maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot”. In this example, the number of time savings due to support time saving is set to be less than or equal to the number of time savings due to time saving jackpot (for example, 100 times of time saving with 4R time saving jackpot). For example, the number of time reductions due to support time reduction is 100 times, 90 times, 70 times, etc.
(4β) In addition, when multiple time-saving jackpots with different numbers of time-savings are provided, focus on the minimum number of time-savings MIN and maximum number of time-savers MAX due to time-saving jackpots, and calculate the following: The number of time reductions may satisfy the relationship ``maximum number of time reductions MAX''. For example, if multiple time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are provided, and the number of time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are set to 100 and 50, respectively, the number of time-savings due to support time-saving is 50 times due to time-saving jackpot 2. As described above, the number of time saving times that satisfies 100 or less times due to the time saving jackpot 1 can be set. For example, the number of time reductions due to support time reduction is 60, 99, etc.
Note that the time saving state due to the jackpot may include "infinite time saving", and in this case, the time saving state due to support time saving does not include "infinite time saving". Further, the minimum number of time savings due to the jackpot may be 100 times or more, and as long as the above (Formula 3) is satisfied, the number of time savings due to support time reduction may be 100 times or more. Hereinafter, the "time saving state due to jackpot (time saving state given due to jackpot)" will also be referred to as "jackpot time saving state".

(Limited time saving form Ω4)
Regarding the jackpot or support time saving, it is possible to provide a number of time saving times that is greater than the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability when the probability is low. Further, it may be configured to give the same or substantially the same number of time reductions as the probability denominator of the jackpot lottery probability when the probability is low. Note that if the probability denominator is not a natural number, a value obtained by rounding down the decimal point may be used as the number of time reductions. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability is 1/300.15, it is "300 times", which is the value rounded down to the nearest whole number. Further, if the probability denominator is less than 100, a value calculated by "value of the tens place x 10", and if the probability denominator is less than 1000, a value calculated by "value of the hundreds place x 100" may be adopted as the number of time saving times.
In this way, by employing the same, substantially the same, or an approximate value as the probability denominator, it is possible to cause an appropriate number of successive purchases during the time-saving state due to the support time reduction. Specifically, since it is possible to achieve a consecutive play rate of approximately 63% to 64%, it is not an excessive benefit, and it is possible to shorten the number of games in a time-saving manner that balances the interests of both the player and the hall. can.

(Regarding the power supply release game related to the support time reduction state and the power supply release game related to the time reduction state or variable probability state due to jackpot)
The operation mode of the power supply release game related to the support time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "support time reduction power supply release game") and the power supply release game related to the time reduction state or variable probability state due to a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot power supply release game") ) can be configured as follows. The operating mode of the normal power opening game mainly means the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 when the assist hit occurs.
(Italy 4) At least the support time-saving general electricity release game and the jackpot general electricity release game are common. By standardizing the general electricity release game, the number of programs related to the general electricity release game can be reduced. Also, at the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the ball payout rate during the electric support state. Furthermore, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in a jackpot time-saving state or a support time-saving state.
(Italy 5) At least the support time-saving general electricity release game and the jackpot general electricity release game are different. According to this configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the winning rate between the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state, thereby improving the gameplay.

<5. About the production＞
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the performance mode (performance state) will be explained. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of performance modes are provided that perform performances related to the gaming state, and the system is configured to be able to control transition between the performance modes in response to the transition (update) of the gaming state. Specifically, the performance mode can be shifted when the internal gaming state or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated (changed). The production modes include "normal production mode" related to the "normal state", "probable variation production mode" related to the probability variation state, "time saving production mode" related to the time saving state, and "win production mode" related to the winning game. There are multiple types of production modes depending on each gaming state, such as "Mode". In addition, in each production mode, a background display (background effect) is displayed as the background of the fluctuating display screen of decorative symbols so that the player can understand which production mode corresponds to the gaming state he/she is staying in. , and are each changed to a performance mode related to the gaming state.

For example, under the "Normal Production Mode", the first background production (for example, a background display displaying a background image of a cherry tree) is reminiscent of the season 'Spring', while under the 'Time Saving Production Mode', the first background production is reminiscent of the Season 'Summer'. The second background effect (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea), and the third background effect that evokes the season 'autumn' (for example, a background image of a tree with autumn leaves) under the "variable effect mode" (background effect that displays), etc., and this can indicate the gaming status during the stay. It should be noted that not only the background display is changed, but also the BGM, decorative patterns (pictures), pending display mode, etc. can be changed to a performance mode related to the gaming state. Although the details will be described later, the performance mode can be changed depending on the number of successive jackpots and the number of remaining time reductions (for example, see FIGS. 7A and 7B described below).

(5-1-1. Production stage)
Furthermore, at least one production mode includes a plurality of types of "production stages", and it is possible to shift between these production stages. Like the performance mode, this performance stage is an aspect of the performance mode that performs a performance related to the game state. For example, in the normal state, the production stages belonging to the normal production mode include the "cherry blossom stage (production stage A)" that displays a background image of cherry blossom trees, and the "rapeseed flower stage (production stage B)" that displays a background image of rape blossoms. )", and "Kamakoei Stage (Production Stage C)" where the background image of Kamikoei is displayed, and a production corresponding to each production stage will appear. These performance stages A to C may be shifted to, for example, upon execution of a certain preview performance (for example, a stage change performance to be described later). Note that the above-mentioned production stages A to C belong to the normal production mode, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of each production stage is the same. Therefore, in any of the production stages A to C, the variation pattern distribution table used when selecting a variation pattern is the same.

The performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be able to control the transition between each performance mode in accordance with the transition (update) of the gaming state, and includes a functional unit (performance state transition control means) that controls the transition between multiple types of performance modes. ). Out of the performance control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), the performance control unit 24 uses a performance control command that includes information regarding the gaming state, specifically, designates the current gaming state, and specifies the gaming state. Based on the information included in a specific production control command that specifies that the The production mode is managed in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state of the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing status. has been done. The above-mentioned specific performance control commands include, for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, and a specific command (a jackpot start command and a jackpot end command) sent during a win. In addition, if the performance control section 24 side can independently determine the gaming state, it is possible to control the transition of the performance mode or performance stage without depending on a specific performance control command.

(5-2. Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be explained. The production control unit 24 executes the jackpot based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern specification command (specifically, the variation pattern specification command and/or the decorative pattern specification command, information included in the winning command described below). It is configured to be able to execute and control various "notice performances" related to lottery results (notice performance execution control means). The main role of the preview performance is to suggest (notice) the level of expectation (well-known ``win expectation level'') as to whether or not the winning type (including support time reduction) has been won, and the level of expectation for the occurrence of a specific preview performance (notice). This includes hints regarding the degree of expectation for specific advance notices to occur. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute performances related to at least the above-mentioned performance mode (including a performance stage described below) and the jackpot lottery result (at least the winning/losing lottery result). Many of the preview performances function as "inciting performances" to arouse players' expectations of winning. Typical preview performances include ``reach performance'', ``pseudo continuous performance'', ``player participation type performance'', ``step-up performance'', ``stage change performance'', and ``pre-read preview performance''. Accompanying these performances, there are various preview performances (cut-in performances, etc.) that occur in combination (simultaneously, overlappingly) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach performance)
The above-mentioned "reach performance" refers to a performance mode that involves a reach state (a variable display mode that involves a reach state), and specifically refers to a performance mode that derives and displays the game result via a reach state. "Reach state" means that before the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display game is derived, some decorative symbols derived and displayed during the decorative symbol fluctuation display game indicate that a jackpot has occurred (jackpot winning). This is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that forms part of the display mode and which has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and a jackpot is generated by using the fluctuating display mode of decorative patterns that are dramatic. This refers to a variable display mode that suggests that the display mode shown is easy to derive (that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot) and makes the player expect to win the jackpot. For example, if the combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) indicating a jackpot win (jackpot occurrence) is a set of symbols such as "7 (left symbol),""7 (middle symbol)," and "7 (right symbol)," the prescribed On the hit effective line, the left and right symbols, where part of the decorative symbol is part of the pattern alignment, display "7" (so-called tenpai state), and the middle symbol (the rest that does not constitute the tenpai state) This is a state in which the symbol (symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner through high-speed fluctuations, frame-by-frame feeding, rocking, scaling, deformation, etc. Therefore, even if a reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol fluctuation display game does not necessarily mean a "jackpot", and the final result will not be a stop display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating a jackpot. In this case, the result of this game will be a “lose”. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the tenpai state (ready-to-reach symbol) are symbols constituting the ready-to-reach state, and are also referred to as "ready-to-reach constituent symbols." Furthermore, the timing of reaching the ready state is also referred to as "reach timing" or "tenpai timing."

The above-mentioned "reach effects" include multiple types of reach effects associated with the expectation of winning. For example, it includes the conventionally known "N reach (normal reach)" and "SP reach (super reach)" where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when N reach appears. '' have a relatively longer performance time (fluctuating time) than N reach in order to stimulate expectations of winning the jackpot. Further, SP reach includes special SP reach such as "SP reach", "SP reach + SPSP reach", and "SPSP reach". The contents of each reach are explained below.

(r1) "N Reach" is a system that notifies game results (hits or losses (information related to jackpot lottery results)) without SP Reach occurring by simply passing through the Normal Reach state after normal fluctuations. This is the variation mode when the winning bid ends, and it is the reach performance with the lowest expectation of winning. N Reach includes N Reach 1 and N Reach 2, which have different winning expectations, and the relationship between the winning expectations is "N Reach 1 < N Reach 2".
(r2) "SP reach (normal SP reach)" is the first reach effect (SP reach) that occurs via normal reach (N reach 1 or N reach 2), then the game result is announced and the game ends. This is how the reach changes depending on the situation.
(r3) "SP Reach + SPSP Reach", after the normal fluctuation, the first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via the normal reach, and once the loss is announced, the winner is won than the above first reach effect. This is a reach fluctuation mode when a highly anticipated second reach effect (SPSP reach) occurs (develops into other SP reach types) and ends after announcing the game result (hereinafter also referred to as "developed SPSP reach") ).
(r4) "SPSP reach" normally changes and then goes through the normal reach state, but the first reach effect (SP reach) is not passed through, that is, it is omitted, and the second reach effect (SPSP reach) is immediately performed. This is a reach fluctuation mode when a game occurs (directly develops into SPSP reach) and ends after announcing the game result (hereinafter also referred to as "direct SPSP reach").

The degree of expectation of winning in the reach effect mainly changes depending on the selection rate of the reach effect. For example, among normal reaches, the selection rate is related to the jackpot lottery result, so that the winning expectation relationship is "N reach 1 < reach N2 < SP reach < advanced SPSP reach < direct SPSP reach". is determined. Also, for example, between the reaches during the probability change shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, "Zhongrensho middle reach A < Zhongrensho middle reach B" and "Daliansho middle reach A < Daliansho middle reach B < Daliansho middle reach C '', and between the time-saving medium reaches shown in Figures 39 and 40, the winning expectation relationship is ``time-saving medium reach A < time-saving medium reach B < time-saving medium reach C''. The selection rate is determined in relation to the results.

Note that the actual winning expectation level changes depending on whether or not other preview performances (for example, pseudo-continuation performances) are included. For example, even if an advanced SPSP reach appears, if a preview performance with a high expectation of winning is involved, the expectation of winning can be equal to or higher than that of a direct SPSP reach. In addition, in this specification, for convenience of explanation, Zhongrensho middle reach A, Zhongrensho middle reach B, Daliansho middle reach A, Daliansho middle reach B, Daliansho middle reach C, time-saving middle reach A, time-saving middle reach B. Time-saving medium reach C is treated in the same way as reaches belonging to "SP reach," but in some cases, medium-time reach medium reach A and time-saving medium reach A, which have low expectations of winning, are treated in the same way as "N reach." Can be done.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ready-to-win effect is used in the process of deriving and displaying a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot. Therefore, for the player, the presence or absence of reach is a clue to know the possibility of winning the jackpot. Therefore, a plurality of types of "anticipation preview performance" are provided as a performance mode that foretells (suggests) the possibility of a reach, in other words, a performance mode that can more clearly predict the degree of expectation of winning. This "expectation preview performance" plays the role of an inciting performance that foretells the degree of expectation of winning, but it also serves as a notice that a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) may occur, or a specific performance. It also plays the role of foretelling that a performance is certain to occur. Therefore, for example, in a ready-to-win performance scenario, a certain preview performance may occur before the ready-to-win performance occurs, not only foretelling the possibility of the occurrence of a ready-to-win performance but also foretelling the degree of expectation of winning. In other words, when accompanied by one or more expected preview performances, the degree of expectation of winning becomes clearer and the degree of expectation of winning may also increase, rather than when the reach effect occurs alone. Such expected preview performances include ``pre-notice performances'' that can occur before the reach performance, and ``post-notice performances'' that can occur during the reach performance.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-linked performance (pseudo-linked))
In this embodiment, one of the expected preview performances is a "pseudo-continuation performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "pseudo-continuation").""Pseudoseries" refers to a performance mode that involves a pseudo continuous variation display state (so-called "pseudo variation") of decorative patterns. This "pseudo fluctuation" means that during one decorative symbol fluctuation display game, some or all of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (using one or more pseudo-continuous exclusive symbols instead of normal decorative symbols). This refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated one or more times, such as performing a re-variable display operation of decorative symbols from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it differs from the later-described "pre-read preview effect" which can be executed over multiple symbol change display games.

Basically, the occurrence rate of "pseudo-links" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, if the number of pseudo fluctuations is two times than once, the expectation of occurrence of a preview performance with high expectation of winning, such as SP reach, is higher. Therefore, in the case of a performance scenario that includes a reach effect, the reach state is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect), and after one or more pseudo fluctuations are performed, the real change in the reach The effect will be executed and the final game result will be derived and displayed. In this specification, when it is referred to as "pseudo N", it means the total number of pseudo fluctuations M times and real fluctuations. For example, when written as "Pseudo 2", it means "one pseudo fluctuation + real fluctuation", and when written as "Pseudo 3", it means "two pseudo fluctuations + real fluctuation" (for example, the pseudo fluctuation in Figure 32 2+SP reach, pseudo 3+SP reach, etc.). Furthermore, if pseudo 2 or 3 are not attached, it means "no pseudo link", and pseudo link does not occur (for example, N reach 2, SP reach, etc. in FIG. 32).

(5-2-3. Player participation type performance)
Further, in this embodiment, one of the expected preview effects is a "player participation type effect.""Player participation type performance" belongs to the so-called "button preview performance", in which a predetermined operation (for example, single press, long press, This is a preview performance mode in which the content of the performance can change based on the operation details when a player presses the button repeatedly (such as repeatedly hitting the player). In a player participation type performance, when a predetermined button is valid, an "operation instruction performance" that instructs the operating means to perform a predetermined operation is executed, and during the button valid period, the player operates the operating means. Then, based on the content of the operation, the current production changes to another production (production at the time of operation), and depending on the production mode before and after the operation (production content), the winning expectation level, winning/losing result, or setting suggestion information is displayed. etc. can be reported. The production control unit 24 performs an operation validity period setting that sets an operation validity period (button validity period) during which the operation of the operating means is valid based on predetermined setting conditions (for example, a predetermined timing during a player participation type production). means, a pre-operation effect control means for controlling a pre-operation effect during the button validity period, and a post-operation effect control means for controlling a pre-determined post-operation effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation validity period. and means.

(5-2-4. Step-up production)
Further, in this embodiment, there is a "step-up preview performance" as one of the expected preview performances. "Step-up preview performance" is a performance mode with one or multiple stage performance steps, specifically, from the first stage performance (Step 1) to the multiple stage performance (Step N (N≦2) This is a preview performance mode in which the expectation of winning increases when the stage progresses to a later stage (the expectation of winning is the highest when the stage progresses to the final stage).For example, the 3-stage performance SU1 ~ If it is a step-up production consisting of SU3, "Production SU1 (Step 1): Low expectation of winning", "Production SU1 → Production SU2 (Step 2): Medium expectation of winning", "Production SU1 → Production SU2 → Production "SU3 (Step 3): High expectation of winning", the higher the production step stage is, the higher the expectation of winning is.Furthermore, some step-up productions belong to player participation productions, such as , the next stage can be developed in response to the operation of the operating means (the effect button 13 or the direction key 75), or in response to the expiration of the button validity period.

(5-2-5. Stage change production)
Further, in this embodiment, a "stage change effect" may occur as one of the expected preview effects. "Stage change production" means that during a symbol variation display game (for example, at the start of a symbol variation display game, or at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display game), the current production stage is changed to another production stage. This is a preview performance mode that indicates the degree of expectation of winning by shifting. "Stage change production" includes production modes that indicate the degree of expectation of winning depending on which production stage the current production stage will transition to, and the type of cut-in production that occurs when the production stage transitions (for example, after a blue background This is a preview performance mode in which the expectation level of winning is suggested by a transition to a performance stage with a low expectation of winning, and a transition to a performance stage after a red background indicates a high expectation of winning. However, this stage change performance is a performance mode in which the "performance stage" changes as a preview performance, and even if a stage change performance occurs, a transition (change) of the game state (YJ, Tcode) occurs and the background display This does not mean that things have changed. In addition, stage change production is not done as a preview performance, but in order to prevent the production from becoming monotonous due to the same production mode continuing, there are cases where the stage change production is a transition from one production stage to another production stage (for example, , see the production stage in FIG. 51 described below).

(5-2-4. Pre-read preview effect: Figure 5A, Figure 5B)
"Pre-reading notice performance" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") refers to balls with pending operation (unexploited pending balls) that have not yet been used for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of special symbols). , by using the pending display mode and the effect during the symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order, the winning expectation level (not only the winning expectation level regarding the jackpot) regarding the activated pending ball (not only the winning expectation level regarding the jackpot, but also the support time reduction described below) This is a performance mode that can notify in advance the winning expectation level (which may also include the degree of expectation of winning).

An overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to this embodiment, including the above-mentioned pre-read notice, will be explained using FIG. 5A. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the illustration, below the decorative pattern display area), there is a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls and a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls. A holding display area 77 is provided to display whether or not there is a holding ball, and the presence or absence of a holding ball is indicated by a lighted state (with a holding ball: "○ (white circle)" shown in the figure) or an unlit state (no holding ball: "O"). Information regarding the current number of active pending pitches is notified by the dashed circle shown in the figure.

The display regarding the presence or absence of this action pending ball (hereinafter referred to as the "pending display") is displayed in order of occurrence (order of winnings), and in each of the pending display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action pending ball is It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) activated suspended ball that occurred on the time axis among all activated suspended balls in the suspended display. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with hold display areas a1 to d1 ( (corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Normally, the display mode of these reservation display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is switched to the operation state (lit state) for the same number of active reservation balls, for example, three, as the number of active reservation balls that exist when making a pre-read determination. Therefore, this reservation display section functions as a reservation display means for displaying the number of active reservation balls. However, when executing the pre-read notice described later, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-read notice display mode (special hold display mode). This serves as a means of generating advance notice.

Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a fluctuating display area 78 is provided to show the activated holding balls that are currently being used in the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which an icon of a game currently being played pending K appears on top of the icon of the catch J. That is, when the variable display of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending a1 or a2 displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is changed to the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the catch J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the LCD screen shown in Figure 5A, there is a display area for sub effects (sub effects) that are different from the main effects such as decorative patterns and preview effects. A sub-display area 79 is provided which can display information regarding the number of pending pitches for regular symbols, information regarding the variable display operation of the special symbols 1 and 2, and information regarding the variable display operation of the regular symbols. The information in this sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern display and/or the hold display area are hidden when displaying the preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to identify from the information in the sub-display area 79 whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently being played and how many balls are on hold.

Note that depending on the gaming state (gaming mode or internal gaming state), the hold display area 76 may be displayed more emphatically than the hold display area 77, or conversely, the hold display area 77 may be displayed more emphatically than the hold display area 76. You can also display it. For example, during the first gaming state (during the normal state (performance mode belonging to the normal mode)), the hold display area 76 can be displayed in an emphasized manner. When displaying the hold display area 76 emphatically, for example, the hold display area 76 may be displayed preferentially, the hold display area 76 may be displayed in a large size, the hold display area 77 side may be hidden. The same holds true when displaying the hold display area 77 in an emphasized manner, such as preferentially displaying the hold display area 77, displaying the hold display area 77 in a larger size, or hiding the hold display area 76 side.

Further, during the second gaming state (for example, during the time saving state (performance mode belonging to the time saving mode) or the variable probability state (performance mode belonging to the variable probability mode)), the hold display area 77 can be displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, during the first gaming state, both the pending display areas 76 and 77 are displayed, and during the second gaming state, the pending display area 77 is preferentially displayed (for example, only the pending display area 77 is displayed). Can be done.

(About advance notice)
Next, a look-ahead notice will be explained. Regarding the appearance control regarding this pre-read notice, first, in the main control unit 20, when a pending ball occurs (when the starting condition is met), the pending ball is displayed in the symbol fluctuation display game (special symbol fluctuation display operation). Before the ball is used for execution, a "pre-read hit judgment (pre-read win/loss judgment, pre-read symbol judgment)" is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result (win/loss lottery result, symbol lottery result) related to the operation pending ball. See the random number determination process to special stop symbol data creation process (steps S318 to S319) in FIG. 11, and the "random number determination process for special electric accessory operation determination to special stop symbol creation process (steps S410 to S411)" in FIG. 12, which will be described later. ).

Furthermore, by using the result of the above-mentioned "preread hit determination", the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the activated pending ball is used in a symbol fluctuation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see "Random number determination process (step S320)" in FIG. 11). This special symbol variation pattern determined in advance is referred to as a "preread variation pattern." In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, it is determined in advance, for example, what kind of reach state the reach variation pattern will pass through, or whether it will be a normal variation pattern that does not pass through the reach state.

Note that the above-mentioned pre-reading fluctuation pattern is determined using at least the winning/losing lottery results (in this embodiment, the pre-judgment results of the winning/losing lottery and symbol lottery), so the pre-reading fluctuation pattern information includes the "winning fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning. In addition to information on whether it is a "loss pattern" or a "loss fluctuation pattern" when winning a losing lottery (information about winning/losing lottery results), there is also information on the presence or absence of reach (if there is reach, its type) and the presence or absence of pseudo-relationships (pseudo Information regarding the execution of a specific preview performance may also be included, such as information regarding the number of times (if there is a series). In this way, a series of processes for determining a prefetch variation pattern through a prefetch hit determination is referred to as a "prefetch determination."

When information on this pre-reading variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control process regarding the pre-read notice is performed in the effect control unit 24. Specifically, when a look-ahead judgment is executed, a "hold addition command" that can specify the number of balls on hold at the time of look-ahead judgment (the existing number of balls on hold, including the ball on hold that occurred this time) and the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern are used. "Winning commands" that can specify information (at least information pre-reading and determining the winning/losing lottery results at the start of variation) are transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the performance control unit 24, and when the performance control unit 24 receives these commands. Based on the information included in the command, effect control processing regarding the hold display and pre-read notice is performed.

Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the pending addition command and the winning command, it performs a "pre-read preview lottery" regarding whether to execute (appear) the pre-read preview based on the pre-read fluctuation pattern information. When executing a pre-read notice, a presentation scenario related to the pre-read notice is created, and the pre-read notice is made to appear according to the presentation scenario (see FIGS. 5A and 5B). The pre-read notice is executed with a higher probability for a ``jackpot'' than for a ``lose'', and for a pre-read fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning is indicated by whether or not a pre-read notice occurs. A look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice that targets the current action-pending ball at the timing when the action-pending ball occurs, at the same time as the start of a symbol change display game that is played earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during that game. A notice may appear.

The above-mentioned pending addition command includes data on the upper byte side that makes it possible to specify the special figure type information (special figure 1 and 2), and data on the lower byte side that makes it possible to specify the number of balls on hold at the time of look-ahead judgment. It consists of 2 bytes. In addition, the winning command consists of two bytes: upper byte data (MODE1) that specifies the winning or losing result, and lower byte data (EVENT) that allows the content of the prefetch fluctuation pattern to be specified as prefetch judgment information. . Note that instead of using two commands, the pending addition command and the winning command, one command may be sent. For example, reservation addition in which the data that can specify the special figure type information and the information on the number of balls on hold during look-ahead judgment is the data on the upper byte side, and the data that allows the identification of winning/losing result information and the information on the change in look-ahead fluctuation pattern is the data on the upper byte side. A configuration may also be adopted in which a command (or a winning command) can be transmitted and a pre-read notice can be executed based on the command.

(Award winning timeline advance notice: Pending change notice)
In this embodiment, when a pre-read notice is executed (if a pre-read notice lottery is won), among the pending icons in the hold display areas a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon that is the target of the pre-read notice is, for example, , from the normal white color of the hold display (normal hold display mode) to a flashing white notice display, and a hold display with special hold colors or colors such as blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors (special hold display mode). A pending change notice that changes may be executed. This pending change notice is also referred to as a "winning time-based advance notice" because it can appear when a prize is won (pending display).

As this reservation change notice, FIG. 5A shows an example in which the hatched operation reservation sphere of the reservation display section b1 changes to a special reservation display. Here, the display of the pending icon blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors means that the probability of winning is high in this order. In particular, the display of the rainbow-colored pending icon means that the jackpot is confirmed. It is a premium-like hold icon (probable reservation notice) that is displayed as (probable). The blinking white icon is a pending icon that indicates the possibility of a "step-up pending change notice," which will be described later, and makes you look forward to what the final pending color will be. (In some cases, the indicator may remain blinking white without changing.) In the case of blinking white, if the pending display remains as it is, the expectation of winning is the lowest among the special pending displays, but if it changes to another pending color, the expectation of winning by that pending color increases.

In this embodiment, regarding the preview performance, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, it will be selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a jackpot, it will be selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a preview performance with a high expectation of winning, such as a preview performance with a high expectation of winning, a preview performance with a high expectation of winning of 20% or more (in this embodiment, a preview performance with an expectation of winning of 20% or more) In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectation of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color is 1%, respectively. If the percentages are 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, and 100%, then "green, red, and rainbow colors" belong to the high expectation preview performances, and the others (flashing white, blue, yellow), and low expectations. It belongs to the expectation level preview performance.When a look-ahead notice occurs, during the symbol change display game for the activated pending ball, a high expectation level notice with a relatively high winning expectation (high number of pseudo consecutive, SP reach, etc.) ) occurs, combined with the content of the preview performance, the expectation of winning will further increase.

The existing operation pending balls are sequentially consumed with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one action-holding ball has been used up, the display position of the holding display section corresponding to the existing action-holding ball is moved forward (sequentially shifted to the left), and the number of displayed balls is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display. In this respect, the look-ahead notice can appear over multiple symbol change display games (multiple symbol change display actions), and is different from the one-time symbol change such as pseudo-continuation. This is different from the preview performance that takes place during the operation.

The special reservation display related to the reservation change notice is (A) a case where it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case where it appears at the timing of the reservation display, and (B) a case where it is usually a reservation display (white) when a prize is won. (C) Cases in which the normal pending display changes to a special pending display (blue, etc.), (C) A change to a special pending display that has a relatively higher winning expectation than the current special pending display (for example, a change from blue to yellow or higher) There are also cases where the color is changed in a step-up manner. In this case (B) or (C), the predetermined timing during the shift display, the predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, the predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific preview effect, and the pending It is possible to change from one pending display mode to another pending display mode during a player participation type presentation for change notice (for example, during a valid button operation period). It should be noted that a pending change notice such as (B) or (C) above, which changes to a pending display with a higher winning expectation, is referred to as a "step-up pending change notice."

Additionally, when the pending K is placed on the catch J during game execution, basically the same display mode as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the display mode is the same as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77. A pre-read notice (special suspension display) for the activated pending ball may be notified to the player even during the game, but at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, the pending display mode of the pending K during the game execution may be notified to the player. may change to other pending display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the game suspension K is also treated as belonging to the step-up suspension change notice.

In addition, as a general rule, there is no "special pending display fall" that changes from the current pending color to a pending color with a relatively low winning expectation, but in the exceptional case where a falling change occurs, the activated pending ball will be the winning ball. It is suggested that this is the case, and it becomes a premium reservation change notice similar to this reservation notice. An example of a downward trend is when the pending color changes to a pending display with a lower expectation of winning than the current pending display, such as "blue → white" or "red → blue." In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display as a still image (static display mode), but also the hold icon display as a moving image (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon can be rotated, vibrated, rocked, blinked, etc.). It may also be displayed with high-speed blinking or slow blinking).

(Pre-reading notice during pattern fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "winning time series" look-ahead preview performance, it is possible to display a "fluctuating look-ahead notice" that is triggered by the start of the symbol change display game. This pre-reading notice during fluctuation is different from the above-mentioned pending change notice and can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol fluctuation display, so it is also referred to as a "pre-reading notice during symbol fluctuation system (change system at the start of fluctuation)".

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or more symbol fluctuating display games (single or continuous display). ) is a preview notice. In other words, when a game ball enters the starting hole during a certain symbol variation display game and the starting condition is met, the pre-read notice during variation temporarily suspends and stores the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the starting condition. At the same time, a pre-read preview lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and when executing this pre-read preview lottery, if there are multiple active pending balls (pending memory) existing at that time, , all or some of these reserved memories can be expressed in a way that has some kind of relation to the symbol variation display game. For example, during a game where all or some of the existing motion pending balls from the oldest motion pending ball to the motion pending ball subject to the look-ahead notice are displayed in a game, a look-ahead-only preview image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. (For example, a preview image imitating a lightning bolt in FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, pre-read previews that are different in whole or in part may be displayed. For example, if the symbol is displayed over three symbol variation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thundercloud image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image displaying rain falling from a thundercloud) or The thundercloud image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. Furthermore, the degree of expectation of winning may vary depending on the preview image. In the above example, a thundercloud image can have a low expectation level, a rain image can have a medium expectation level, and a lightning image can have a high expectation level. In this case, if the game ends with only the thundercloud image, the expectation of winning is low, but if the lightning image is displayed, the expectation of winning can be dramatically increased. Furthermore, it may be a step-up type pre-read notice in which the degree of expectation develops (the degree of expectation increases) in stages such as "Thundercloud image→Rain image→Lightning image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead notice during change and the pending change notice can each appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the pending change notice and the lottery for executing the look-ahead notice during fluctuation are each independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases in which a pending change notice occurs alone, a case in which a look-ahead notice during variation occurs independently, and a case in which a pending change notice and a look-ahead notice during change occur simultaneously (overlappingly). Note that the performance means used when executing the pre-read notice during fluctuation and the content of the performance can be determined as appropriate.

(Example of look-ahead preview performance: Figure 5B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5B, an example of a pre-read preview performance created by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.

In the figure (1), during the symbol fluctuation display game (the "↓" shown in the diagram indicates that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner), the activation hold ball enters the upper starting hole 34 and the special symbol 1 side is activated. Assume that the number has become 3, and among the 3rd ball, the movement holding ball whose fluctuation start action is executed second is the target of the look-ahead notice performance, and here, the hold change notice and the look-ahead notice during fluctuation This shows a case in which the two cases overlap. Further, here, it is assumed that the first ball that was put on hold earlier and the third ball that was put on hold after that were action-reserved balls that did not execute the pre-read notice (not won the pre-read lottery).

The performance control unit 24 changes the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the pre-read notice, to a special hold display, as shown in FIG. 1 (1). At this time, the suspension display corresponding to the first and third operation suspension balls that are not subject to the pre-read notice is maintained as the normal suspension display (white). The illustration shows a case in which the display mode of the second action-holding ball that was the target of the advance notice changes from the normal holding display (white circle (○)) to the special holding display (hatched circle). It shows. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read preview performance has started. Note that (1) in the same figure shows a situation where the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed has ended and the decorative symbols have been stopped and displayed at "246" corresponding to a loss.

The game progress moves to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol fluctuation display game based on the action pending ball on the special symbol 1 side, which is the first (oldest action pending ball). The performance control unit 24 exhausts the operation hold balls (one is consumed), and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, so that the operation hold ball A hold display mode is set to indicate that one ball has been consumed, and a decorative symbol variation display game based on the first activated hold ball is started. At this time, a special background image (a lightning bolt effect by displaying a lightning bolt image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 as a pre-read notice during fluctuation. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 takes on a display mode as shown in FIG. 2(2).

Then, the game progress moves to (3) in the same figure, and it is assumed that the symbol variation display game currently being executed is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at "351" corresponding to a loss.

Next, the game progress moves to (4) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol fluctuation display game based on the second action-holding ball, that is, the action-holding ball that was the target of the pre-read preview performance. The production control unit 24 shifts the pending display modes corresponding to the respective operation pending balls to the left at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and the performance control unit 24 shifts the pending display mode corresponding to each operation pending ball to the left. A decorative symbol variation display game based on the activated pending balls is started. At this time, the special hold display of the hold change notice disappears from the screen at the time of the above shift, and is terminated with the start of the current symbol change display game (as well as the expiration of the operation hold ball), and thereafter is displayed as game execution hold K. be done. Also, the look-ahead notice during fluctuation (in this case, lightning effect) will end after it occurs during this symbol fluctuation display game. This figure (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in the same figure (4), the lightning effect of the look-ahead notice during fluctuation (the look-ahead notice during fluctuation) is the same as that of the current symbol change display game (the symbol change display game related to the operation pending ball (second) that is subject to the look-ahead notice). Although it has been explained that the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game is ended last, the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game may be ended last. In this case, the look-ahead notice during fluctuation is ended at the same time as the "special pending display" of the pending change notice is provided for execution of the symbol variation display game.

(5-2-6. Setting suggestion effect)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a presentation mode (setting suggestion presentation) that suggests information regarding the above-mentioned "setting value." For example, the following settings (a) to (b) are suggested.
(a) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests low setting ranges (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(Sa) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests high setting ranges (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(Me) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that definitively notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, "Setting N confirmation effect" that definitely announces "Setting N". However, it is not desirable to definitively notify internal setting values blindly. The reason for this is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting area, such as setting 1 or setting 2, reduces the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitely notify one of settings 4 to 6 of the high setting area. In particular, if a setting suggestion performance that confirms a high setting such as setting 5 or setting 6 appears, the player's desire to play can be improved.
(iii) ``Specific setting negative effect'' that definitively informs that the specified setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable).
(c) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests setting values in a specific range. For example, it suggests settings 3 to 5 (α≦set value≦β), suggests settings 4 or more (α≦set value), suggests multiple specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6”, etc. . In addition, the appearance rate can be varied depending on the setting value, so that a certain setting value has a high probability of appearing, for example, a certain effect is difficult to appear with setting 1, a certain amount with setting 4, and easy to appear with setting 6. It is also possible to suggest /low.

Note that the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be determined as appropriate according to the setting value. For example, it may be determined that the lower the setting value is, the lower the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is. Further, there is no particular restriction on the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation, and one or more presentations among sound presentation, light presentation, image display presentation, and movable body presentation may be used.

Further, the setting suggestion performance can be made to appear at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with the preview performance or independently. In addition, it will appear not only during symbol variation games, but also during jackpot games, and during waiting for the game to start, such as the "Customer waiting display (demo start waiting display)" and "Customer waiting display (demonstration screen)" etc. be able to.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific preview performance according to a set value, the preview performance itself can function as a "setting suggestion performance." For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-sequence (a specific pseudo-sequence mode or a specific number of pseudo-sequences), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific pre-read notice. By varying it according to the setting value, the preview presentation itself can function as a "setting suggestion presentation." For example, if a specific SP reach is likely to appear in the event of a loss, "high setting rich", if a loss is likely to result in 3 pseudo-sequences (2 pseudo fluctuations + real variation), "high setting rich", or a specific button. When an operation effect appears, it is a suggestion such as "Setting 6 confirmed". Further, by using the look-ahead preview performance, a look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion performance can be made to appear. For example, if the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich, and if one or all of the hold icons change to a dedicated hold icon (a dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

(About setting suggestion effects during support time reduction state)
(Italy 6) It is possible to execute a plurality of setting suggestion performances, and during the support time reduction state, execution of some or all of the plurality of setting suggestion performances is prohibited (restricted). Alternatively, the execution probability can be set to be different when compared with other gaming states. These include the following (Italy 6-1) to (Italy 6-4).
(Italy 6-1) During the support time reduction state, the execution probability of setting suggestion effects can be lowered than in the normal state. In this case, the probability of executing one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be lowered.
(Italy 6-2) During the support time reduction state, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects can be made higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be increased.
(Italy 6-3) During the support time reduction state, execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). There are no particular restrictions on the specific settings-suggesting effects, but for example, if settings-suggesting effects such as those shown in (a) to (b) above can be executed, execution of at least one of the settings-suggesting effects may be prohibited. Can be done. Specifically, during the support time reduction state, execution of setting suggestion performances that are less useful as setting guessing factors, such as (ki) even number setting suggestion performance and (y) odd number setting suggestion performance, can be prohibited. preferable.
(Italy 6-4) There is one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the support time reduction state. For example, only during the support time reduction state, a setting N confirmation effect of (me), which is highly useful as a setting estimation element, can appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of setting suggestion notices can be varied depending on the gaming state. In addition, a specific setting suggestion performance can be made to appear only in a specific gaming state (support time saving state). Thereby, the effects can be varied and the fun of the game can be improved.

(About decorative patterns during support time reduction state)
The display mode of the decorative pattern in the support time saving state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 9) At least a decorative pattern (e.g., arithmetic numerals) during the support time-saving state and a decorative pattern (e.g., Chinese numerals) during the normal state or a decorative pattern (e.g., Roman numerals or Chinese numerals) during the jackpot time-saving state. and have different decorative designs. In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the support time is being reduced. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during pre-waiting performances), players can easily confirm that they are in a support time-saving state by simply checking the display screen when selecting a game machine. can be identified.
(Italy 10) At least the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state, the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state, or the decoration after the power is restored during the jackpot time reduction state. The stop display eye is different from the stop display eye of the symbol. According to this configuration, when players and hall personnel check the state of the game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily determine whether or not the support time is being reduced.

(Regarding the hold display area related to the support time reduction state)
(Italy 11) After the end of the winning game for short support time (at the end of the symbol fluctuation time (see Figure 13), during the final symbol display time, or after the final symbol display time (see Figure 14)), The reservation display area 77 (the reservation display area on the special figure 2 side) can be displayed emphatically (preferentially). When displaying the hold display area 77 emphatically, as already explained, the hold display area 77 is displayed preferentially, the hold display area 77 is displayed in a large size, or the hold display area 76 side is hidden. and so on.
If you win the short support time in the symbol fluctuation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the pending display from the special figure 1 side to the special figure 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends ( During the support time shortening state, right-handed hitting is advantageous and the symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side becomes the main one). By changing the priority of the pending display at the timing when the game on the special map 1 side ends, before the first symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side starts during the support time shortening state, The reserved display of special figure 2 can be displayed preferentially.

(About the management form of support time reduction state and jackpot time reduction state)
The support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, but the internal gaming state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 12) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electronic support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the support time-saving state is in effect and the flag indicating that the jackpot time-saving state is in effect may be managed by a "common flag (first specific time-saving state flag)". By using a common flag for both, the RAM capacity can be reduced. Moreover, the data and the transmission process for the effect control unit 24 can be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 13) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as different winning easy states. For example, the game state determination number YJ relating to the support time saving state may be set to 05H, the gaming state determination number YJ relating to the jackpot time saving state may be set to 07H, etc., and these may be managed as different internal gaming states. According to this configuration, the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed using separate flags, so that the main control unit 20 can easily grasp each gaming state. Further, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the production control unit 24 regarding the support time saving state and the jackpot time saving state. Thereby, on the performance control section 24 side, it becomes possible to shift to different performance modes or easily execute different performances during the support time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state.

(Conditions for activation of support time reduction state)
(Italy 14) In order to shift to the support time-saving state, it is necessary to win the support time-saving type in the jackpot lottery, but the number of times the special electric accessory is activated by the normal small win (the number of times the small win game is executed) is the predetermined condition. You may transition to the support time reduction state on the condition that the number of times (for example, three times) has been reached. In this case, it is possible to shift to the support time reduction state without going through a jackpot lottery, so that the gameplay can be improved. In addition, the mere existence of a small win becomes important, and the significance of providing a normal small win increases, greatly expanding the range of gaming possibilities.
(Italy 15) If a specific support time reduction is won, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) are played from that winning game, after the end of that game (after the third game), the support time reduction can be moved to the state. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a novel gameplay in which a support time reduction state is scheduled to be entered in a game to be executed after the game in which the support time reduction is won, and the degree of freedom in the gameplay is expanded.

(About special gameplay that utilizes support time reduction)
(Italy 17) If you win the support time reduction during the normal state, a predetermined number of time reductions will be given, and you will win the support time reduction in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state (such as the time reduction state, variable probability state, or potential state). If this is the case, the number of time reductions will be 0 times. For example, as a virtual gaming machine, the winning type on the special drawing 1 side is set at least support time saving D (low probability of winning of 1/5000), and the jackpot type on the special drawing 2 side is ``10R that gives 1000 time saving times. It is assumed that only ``time saving jackpot (winning at 1/100)'' and ``special support time saving with 0 time saving times (winning at 1/200)'' are provided. During the normal state, the game progresses while receiving the jackpot lottery on the special map 1 side. If the support time saving D with an extremely low probability is won, the time saving state is entered and the game progresses while receiving the jackpot lottery on the special map 2 side. On the special map 2 side, "10R time saving jackpot" and "Special support time saving with 0 time saving times" are subject to the jackpot lottery, so the 10R time saving jackpot will be won before the special support time saving with 0 time saving times is won. For example, it will be a jackpot series, but if you win the special support time reduction before the 10R time saving jackpot is won, the number of time reductions will be given to you 0 times, the time saving state will be forcibly terminated, you will be transferred to the normal state, and you will not be able to continue winning. So chance ends. In other words, if the special support time reduction is not won, the transition to the normal state will be avoided, and the possibility of successive jackpots will remain. It becomes possible to create gaming machines. By providing a special support time reduction with 0 time reductions, the range of gameplay expands and innovative gameplay can be expected.

(About the conditions for ending the support time reduction state)
(Italy 18) The condition for ending the support time saving state according to this embodiment is such that it is ended when the number of time saving times is exhausted or when a jackpot is won. However, other termination conditions may be adopted. For example, if a normal open game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), if a normal small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when a small win game based on a normal small win is played a predetermined number of times) , if one of the special drawings (either special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) fluctuates a predetermined number of times, if the "ceiling privilege" described below is granted (if the conditions for activating the ceiling function are met), the ceiling described below If the game is reached, etc., it can be adopted. One or more termination conditions can be provided. As a result, the conditions for ending the support time saving state can be varied, broadening the range of playability and improving the fun of the game.

<6. Direction means>
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine. Such presentation means may be any stimulus transmission means that can produce a presentation effect by appealing to human senses such as visual, auditory, and tactile senses, and may include light generating means (light presentation means) such as decorative lamps 45 and LED devices. ), a sound generating device (sound production means) such as the speaker 46, a presentation display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, and a vibration device that provides vibration to the player. Typical examples include a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body (for example, the firing operation handle 15 vibrates), and a movable accessory that produces a visual performance effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a visually appealing display device like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it refers to a type that mainly displays effects (image display effects) by displaying images, and devices that express effects by means other than images, such as a 7-segment display, are based on the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. contained within.

<7. Game mode transition form: Figure 6>
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the contents of the "gaming mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), the transition control between each gaming mode (between each gaming state), and the gaming mode according to the present embodiment are explained. The production mode related to this will be explained. FIG. 6 is a game flow showing an outline of each game mode and the production mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, there are multiple types of game modes such as "normal mode," "time saving mode," and "variable probability mode," and the game can be played under these game modes. progress is controlled. In the following explanation, it will be assumed that the player follows the advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed hitting (normal state), the game will be called "Special Figure 1 Side Symbol Variation Display Game 1". is executed, and when the right-hander is advantageous (variable probability state, time saving state), the description will be made assuming that "symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed.

(7-1. Regarding “normal mode”)
The normal mode is a gaming mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the normal state (YJ = 00H), and this normal mode is an initial mode that starts when the internal RAM is cleared by a RAM clearing operation or a setting change operation. This is the game mode. .

This normal mode includes a "normal mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H". This "normal mode" is the game mode in which you can stay the longest during the game, and basically, you can win the jackpot or support time reduction from the normal mode, and use other game modes (definite variable mode and time saving mode described later). will be moved to

(7-1. About normal mode)
During the above-mentioned "normal mode", the controller stays in the "normal performance mode" which performs a performance related to the normal mode. In the normal production mode, a production representing an air battle in which fighter jets fly over each other appears as a background production, for example, as shown in FIGS.

(7-2. About "Definitely variable mode")
Next, the "variable probability mode" will be explained. As shown in the figure, the probability variation mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the probability variation state (YJ=01H), and the probability variation mode includes "probability variation modes 1 to 3"(Tcode="01H") in which the variation pattern selection mode is different. ” to “03H”)” are included. This variable probability mode can be entered when a 10R variable jackpot or a 4R variable jackpot is won (see FIG. 4).

In the case of this embodiment, when you win for the first time (winning in normal mode), you will be transferred to "Probability Mode 1" which belongs to Probability Variable Mode, and you will continue to win the jackpot from this Probability Variable Mode 1 without falling to the normal mode. (Consecutive winnings) Then, depending on the number of winnings (number of consecutive winnings), the mode is changed in stages as follows: "Probable variable mode 1 ⇒ Probable variable mode 2 ⇒ Probable variable mode 3". In other words, the number of consecutive games is determined as a change condition (transition condition) of the game mode. For example, the number of consecutive games is changed to variable variable mode 1 until the number of consecutive games is 3, and the variable mode is changed to fixed variable mode when the number of consecutive games is from 4th to 6th. 2, and after the seventh consecutive game, the mode is shifted to variable probability mode 3 (see FIG. 7A). By changing the variable probability mode according to the number of consecutive games, the performance and gameplay during the consecutive games can be varied, and the player's interest in the game can be greatly increased. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the definite variable state is assumed to be infinite definite variable (ST number is 65535 times, practically infinite), it is actually impossible to fall from the definite variable state to the normal state (from the definite variable mode to the normal mode). do not have. However, if a finite variable state (for example, the number of STs is 50, 100, etc.) is adopted as the variable state, the entire number of STs will be exhausted without winning the jackpot during the variable state (variable mode), and the normal state will be reached. (Normal mode) There is a possibility of falling.

Here, in order to make the present invention easier to understand, first, a method of counting the above-mentioned "number of consecutive games", which is used as an opportunity to change the game mode, will be explained.

The above-mentioned "number of consecutive games" will be explained with reference to the "example of counting the number of consecutive games" shown in FIG. 7A (A). As shown in Figure (A), the number of consecutive wins is basically counted as follows: ``Probable variable jackpot (first hit) ⇒ Probable variable jackpot (2 consecutive wins) in a variable variable state ⇒ Probable variable jackpot (3 consecutive wins) in a variable variable condition. ⇒ Guaranteed jackpot during a definite change state (4 consecutive games) ⇒ Guaranteed strange jackpot during a definite change state (5 consecutive games) ⇒ Guaranteed strange jackpot during a definite change state (6 consecutive games) ⇒ Guaranteed strange jackpot during a definite change state (7 consecutive games) ...'', the number of consecutive winnings (number of successive wins) of probability-variable jackpots is counted until the game shifts to the normal mode (normal state). In addition, "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", and "probability variation 3" shown in the figure indicate probability variation mode 1, probability variation mode 2, and probability variation mode 3, respectively.

Here, in this embodiment, since a time-saving jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) is provided, the question is whether or not to count the time-saving jackpot in the number of consecutive games.

<(A-1) Case where time-saving jackpot is not counted (no count)>
As shown in the figure (A-1), time-saving jackpots may be excluded from the count of consecutive wins. In the illustrated case, the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive game in probability variable mode 1 and the time-saving jackpot won during the third consecutive game in probability variable mode 1 are not counted (no count). In this case, the actual number of consecutive jackpots is 7, but the number of consecutive wins is counted as "5 consecutive wins."

<(A-2) Case where the count of consecutive games is cleared when winning the time-saving jackpot>
As shown in FIG. 2 (A-2), if the time-saving jackpot is won, the count of consecutive winnings may be cleared to zero. In the illustrated case, the number of consecutive wins becomes "zero" due to the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive game in the variable probability mode 1, and the subsequent probability-variable jackpot won in the time-saving state is the first consecutive game jackpot, that is, the first win. It is treated as the same count as time.

When counting probability-variable jackpots, it is up to you which of the above-mentioned counting methods (A-1) and (A-2) to adopt.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2(B), all jackpots may be counted. In this case, as shown in the figure, even if the first hit is a time-saving jackpot, it is counted as the first consecutive win, and from then on, each time you win a jackpot, the number of consecutive wins is counted until the situation falls to the normal state (normal mode). +1 and go. In the illustrated case, the time-saving jackpot occurs 3 times (first hit, 3rd consecutive game, 4th consecutive game), and the definite change jackpot occurs 4 times (2nd consecutive game, 5th game, 6th game, 7th game in a row). ), the player won the jackpot seven times in total, so the number of consecutive wins is seven.

Note that the "number of consecutive games" is counted by a "number of consecutive games counting means" whose function is the main control unit 20. The number-of-consecutive-games counting means works as a functional unit that counts the number of consecutive games in a specific game period on the condition that the player has won a winning game. The main control unit 20 is configured to count the number of successive games. +1 per time), or the number of activations of the condition device or continuous feature actuating device related to the jackpot to be counted (for example, monitoring the ON (operation)/OFF (non-operation) of the condition device or continuous feature actuating device) , it may be set to +1) each time it is turned on. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the jackpot winning game, the process of specifying the gaming state after the jackpot game is performed (the "gaming state transition preparation process during the special symbol fluctuation start process (step (See S412), the number of consecutive wins counts the number of jackpot wins.

Further, although the support time reduction is not included in the count since it does not belong to the jackpot, the support time reduction may also be included in the count. However, when counting support time reduction, "Special electric activation type support time reduction" in which a special electric accessory is activated and a prize ball is obtained is counted, and a special electric accessory is activated and a prize ball is obtained without being activated. It is preferable that "special electric non-operating type support time reduction" that cannot be counted be excluded from counting. Furthermore, a "small win" in which a special electric accessory is activated may also be counted. Since the condition device and the continuous accessory actuator do not operate for special electric actuation type support time saving and small winning, when counting these, the number of executions of the support time saving opening/closing game and small winning game (the number of times the special electric accessory is activated) All you have to do is count.

(7-2-1. Features of definite variable mode)
Next, the characteristic points of the variable probability modes (variable probability modes 1 to 3) according to this embodiment will be explained. As already explained, variable probability modes 1 to 3 are game modes with different variation pattern selection modes (Tcodes) (see FIG. 43), and variable pattern distribution tables corresponding to variable probability modes 1 to 3 (see FIG. 33, (see FIG. 34) is selected. Utilizing this, it is possible to create probability variation modes 1 to 3 each having its own characteristics.
For example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (for example, normal fluctuation) is selected with high probability, and in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for definite variable mode 2, A variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected with a high probability, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability in the variation pattern distribution table for definite variation mode 3 (Fig. 34 FH11, FH15, FH19). In this way, the average variation time of the special symbols related to each probability variation mode, in other words, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time or unit time of the symbol variation display game per game) The number of executions of the symbol fluctuation display game (hereinafter also referred to as "average digestion time") can be adjusted. It should be noted that the average consumption time of the above-mentioned symbol variation display game is the average consumption time at least at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the loss variation pattern" in each probability variation mode.

In the case of the present embodiment, the relationship between the average consumption times related to the variable probability mode is determined to satisfy "variable probability mode 3<variable probability mode 2<variable probability mode 1". That is, regarding the relationship of the fluctuation states between the variable variable modes, variable variable mode 1 is controlled under the "high speed variable state", variable variable mode 2 is controlled under the "medium speed variable state", and variable variable mode 3 is controlled under the "low speed variable state". In other words, the average digestion time is controlled to become longer as the number of consecutive games increases. In addition, as long as the average consumption time in each mode satisfies the above relationship "Probability variable mode 3 <Probability variable mode 2 <Probability variable mode 1", there is no particular restriction on the time, but Probability variable mode is a game related to a probability variable state. mode, and during the probability variation mode, the "special symbol time saving function" operates, so any variation state is at least shorter than the average digestion time of the normal mode (normal state).

As described above, the reason why the relationship between the average consumption time (game completion speed) related to the variable probability mode is set as "variable probability mode 3<variable probability mode 2<variable probability mode 1" is as follows.

In recent years, legal requirements have imposed regulations on the ball output performance of gaming machines in order to moderately suppress the excitement of gambling. For example, the ball output rate (safe balls/out balls) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the type test above is limited from the upper limit ball output rate "300% (old standard)" to "220% (new standard)". (Regulations on Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines, Attached Table 4 Technical Standards Related to Pachinko Gaming Machines (Related to Article 6) (1) Performance Standards B (C), etc.) This regulation has a large impact on the ball output performance, especially during consecutive hits, and if this regulation is complied with, the ball output speed can drop to about two-thirds of the conventional ball output performance. Specifically, if the firing time is one hour, the number of out balls will be 6,000 (firing performance of the firing device 32 100 shots/min x 60 minutes = 6,000 shots), and under the old standard, the upper ball output rate would be ``300. %, so the safe ball is allowed up to 18,000 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots/h). However, under the new standards, the maximum ball release rate will be limited to ``220%,'' so the upper limit of safe balls will drop to 13,200 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 220% = 13,200 shots/h). Particularly during short time and variable probability conditions, the base condition is high (electric support condition), so if you hit the jackpot too many times in a row, you can easily exceed the upper limit of 220% (13,200 shots). As a result, it was found to be non-conforming in the type test. For example, when the base value under the electric support state is 70 (BA70), the safe ball by the normal electric power open game will be 4200 shots in 1 hour (BA70 x 100 shots / minute x 60 minutes = 4200 shots). Therefore, according to the old standard, it is possible to pay out "13,800 shots" (18,000 shots - 4,200 shots) in a jackpot game, but under the new standard, "9,000 shots" (13,200 shots - 4,200 shots) can be paid out. You will only be able to pay it out. Therefore, under the above regulations, it is necessary to devise ways to control the ball dispensing performance so as to make it easier to pass (comply with) the type test without impairing the ball dispensing feeling as much as possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as the number of successive hits becomes relatively large, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game becomes longer, and the speed at which the balls are put out when the jackpot is hit consecutively increases extremely. I am trying to suppress this.

On the other hand, by adjusting the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game according to each game mode (in this case, each probability variable mode 1 to 3), the degree of freedom in playability and production increases, and the depth of the game is increased. You can also Specifically, the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in game modes (playing states) that place emphasis on playability, such as "increasing the average game processing speed and increasing the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game." . During the probability change mode (probability change state), it becomes "electrical support state + high probability state (special symbol probability change function activated) + special symbol time saving state (special symbol time saving function activated)", and at least compared to the normal mode, the symbol change display game is The average playing time is relatively short, and the gaming state is designed to make it easier to win the jackpot, but in such a gaming state, some players may feel more anxious than enjoying the performance. Many players want to win the jackpot quickly. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of probability variation mode 1, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected, and a "high-speed variation state" is generated. On the other hand, under the "medium-speed fluctuation state" or "slow-speed fluctuation state", the average completion time of the symbol fluctuation display game will be longer than in the "high-speed fluctuation state", but in exchange, the performance time may be longer. Therefore, it is useful for game modes that place emphasis on gameplay, such as ``enjoying the performance.''

As mentioned above, regarding the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the following relationship is established: "Probable variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Probable variable mode 2 (medium speed variable state) < Probable variable mode 1 (high speed variable state)" Therefore, it is preferable to have the following configurations (T1) to (T19), especially regarding the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 34)" that is referred to when a loss is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game. . Note that the present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationships among the three variable probability modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention provides a fixed variable mode in which the number of consecutive hits is less than a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable mode A"), and a variable variable mode in which the number of consecutive wins is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable mode B"). It is sufficient if the structure satisfies the relationship "variable variable mode A < variable variable mode B" when the average digestion time of variable variable mode A and variable variable mode B is compared. Same goes for B). Hereinafter, when it is referred to as "in the order of 'variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B'", it also includes the meaning of "in the order of 'variable probability mode 1⇒variable probability mode 2⇒variable probability mode 3'".

(T1) Increase the average fluctuation time of normal fluctuations in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T2) Increase the average variation time of reach variation in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T3) Increase the variation time of the normal variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B".
(T4) Increase the variation time of the reach variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T5) Decrease the selection rate of normal variation in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T6) Increase the selection rate of reach variation in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T7) Increase the variation time of the shortest normal variation in each mode in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B".
(T8) Increase the variation time of the shortest reach variation in each mode in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T9) Reduce the types of normal fluctuations in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B."
(T10) Increase the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B".
(T11) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns longer than the second variation time are increased in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern for the second variation time or longer" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T12) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns less than or equal to the first variation time are reduced in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". The "variation pattern of the first variation time or less" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(T13) When "first variation time < second variation time", probability variable mode A does not have a variation pattern longer than the second variation time, and probability variable mode B has a variation pattern longer than the second variation time.
(T14) When "first variation time < second variation time", probability variable mode A has a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time, and probability variable mode B does not have a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time.
(T15) When "first fluctuation time < second fluctuation time", there is no fluctuation pattern longer than the second fluctuation time in definite variable mode 1 and definite variable mode 2, and there is no fluctuation pattern longer than the second fluctuation time in definite variable mode 3. There is a pattern of variation.
(T16) If "first fluctuation time < second fluctuation time", definite variable mode 1 and definite variable mode 2 have a fluctuation pattern that is less than or equal to the first fluctuation time, and definite variable mode 3 has a fluctuation pattern that is less than or equal to the first fluctuation time. There is no pattern of variation.
(T17) In definite variable mode A and definite variable mode B, the variation selected when the number of active pending balls (the number of active pending balls that exist, excluding the active pending balls used for the current variation display operation) at the start of the variation is 0. The variation time of the patterns is set to be a common variation time (which may be the same or substantially the same), and when the number of operation-holding balls is other than 0, variation patterns having different variation times can be selected. For example, in fixed variable modes 1 to 3, if the number of pending pitches is 0, the normal variation 8s type (in this example, normal variation 8s during small series, normal variation 8s during medium series, normal variation during Dalian series) Only the variation 8s) is selected, and when the operation hold ball is other than 0, variation patterns with different variation times can be selected. In this case, in the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B", the variation time of the variation pattern that is likely to be selected when the number of operation-holding balls is other than 0 is lengthened.
(T18)) The normal variation is made common in the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selection rate of the reach variation is made higher in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". For example, the normal variation is made common in probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach variation is set to have a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1⇒probability variation mode 2⇒probability variation mode 3".
(T19) The normal variation is made common between the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, and the selection rate of the reach variation whose variation time is relatively long is set to have a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode A⇒probability variation mode B". For example, the normal variation is common in probability variation modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach variation with a relatively long variation time is set to have a high probability in the order of "probability variation mode 1⇒probability variation mode 2⇒probability variation mode 3".

In addition, during the power support state, it is easy to accumulate activated balls, so we focused on the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when there are relatively many activated balls, and the configurations of (T1) to (T6) above were It can be said that it is important to adopt a loss fluctuation pattern distribution table that has the following characteristics. On the other hand, since it is difficult to accumulate operation-reserved balls during a state without electric support, such as a potential state, if the above-mentioned "Definitely variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Definitely variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Definitely variable mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state), we focus on fluctuation patterns that are likely to be selected when there are relatively few balls on hold, and distribute losing fluctuation patterns having the configurations (T1) to (T19). It is important to have a table.

Further, the winning-related variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 33 can be configured as shown below (T20) to (T27).

(T20) In the order of "probability variable mode A⇒probability variable mode B", lengthen the variation time of the reach variation that is likely to be selected in the event of winning.
(T21) If the advantage degree (profit degree) is "1st winning type < 2nd winning type", the fluctuation time is relatively longer when winning the 2nd winning type than when winning the 1st winning type. A reach variation with a long reach is likely to be selected. In this case, the variation time of the reach variation can be made longer in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T22) If the advantage degree (profit degree) is "first winning type < second winning type", the reach fluctuations when the first winning type is won are the same (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is the same), The reach variation that is likely to be selected when the second winning type is won is different (the variation time of the reach variation is different). In this case, the variation time of the reach variation can be made longer in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(T23) The variation time of the longest reach variation that can be selected when winning in probability variable mode A (first winning longest reach variation) is set to "R seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected when winning in probability variable mode B (second winning longest reach variation) is set as "R seconds". If the variation time of the longest winning reach variation is "S seconds",
R/S value (variable time extension rate upon winning),
The variation time of the longest reach variation that can be selected in the event of a loss in the variable probability mode A (the longest reach variation for the first loss) is set to "T seconds", and the longest reach variation that can be selected in the event of a loss in the variable probability mode B (the longest reach variation for the second If the fluctuation time of (fluctuation) is "U seconds",
The value of T/U (loss fluctuation time extension rate) is different. In this case, it can be set as "T/U"<"R/S". Also, if the advantage degree (profit degree) is "first winning type < second winning type", the first winning type The value of "R/S" is larger for the second winning type than for the second winning type.
(T24) In the order of "probability variable mode A⇒probability variable mode B", at least lengthen the variation time of the reach variation that can be selected at the time of winning the winning type with the highest profit degree (in this embodiment, 10R probability variable jackpot).
(T25) In the order of "Probable Variable Mode A ⇒ Probable Variable Mode B", the variation time of the longest reach variation among the reach variations that can be selected at the time of winning the winning type with the highest profit degree (in this embodiment, 10R Probable Variable Jackpot) At least make it longer.
(T26) When comparing probability variable mode A and probability variable mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win is relatively longer. Become. Although not shown in the figure, for example, the fluctuation pattern distribution table that is referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 at the time of a loss may be set as the "loss variation pattern distribution table (for middle school)" corresponding to probability variation mode 2 in FIG. 34. , in the case of a win, the "probable medium win/support time saving winning variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 33 is used depending on the number of consecutive wins. Note that "winning" means "winning" and/or "shortening support time" (the same applies to (T27) described below).
(T27) When comparing probability variable mode A and probability variable mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of loss is relatively long. Become. Although not shown in the figure, for example, when winning, the fluctuation pattern distribution table that is referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 is changed to the "Probability variation medium winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (medium variation medium winning/support time saving variation pattern distribution table)" corresponding to probability variation mode 2 in Figure 32. In the case of a loss, the ``Probability Variable Loss Fluctuation Pattern Distribution Table'' shown in FIG. 34 is used depending on the number of consecutive wins.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, after shifting to the variable probability mode 3, the shift from the variable probability mode 3 to other game modes is not made until the jackpot is won or the ST number is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variable number of times) is executed during variable probability mode 3, the game may be shifted to another gaming mode (variable probability mode 1 or variable probability mode 2). This is because if the variable rate mode 3 in the low-speed variable state continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition form "Probability mode 3 ⇒ Probability mode 2 or Probability mode 1", but also "Probability mode 3 (first variation number is exhausted) ⇒ Probability mode 2 (second variation number is used) ⇒ Probability variation mode 3" "Mode 1" or "Definitely variable mode 3 (first variation number used)⇒Probable variable mode 1 (second variation number used)⇒Probable variable mode 2". Note that when the first number of fluctuations is K times and the second number of fluctuations is L times, "K times" = "L times", "K times < L times", or "K times > L times". can.

(Modification A)
In this embodiment, as described above, using the loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 34) corresponding to each of the probability variation modes 1 to 3, Although the relationship of "medium-speed fluctuation state)<probable fluctuation mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state)" is realized, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, by using the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to one certain variable mode (one Tcode), It is possible to realize the relationship of "speed fluctuation state)<probability fluctuation mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" and the fluctuation state of the same event. FIG. 35 shows an example of a probability variable medium hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (winning type variation pattern distribution table) according to modification A, and FIG. 36 shows a loss pattern distribution table according to modification A. An example of a variation pattern distribution table is shown.

First, the outline of this example will be explained with reference to the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. In this example, the reference table is the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for small consecutive games (1st to 3rd consecutive games) (see Figure 36 (a)), and the medium consecutive games (4th to 6th consecutive games) (time), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the current fluctuation is obtained by adding the first addition time (for example, 5 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table (Fig. 36 (See (b)). In addition, when playing Dalian (from the 7th time onwards), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in the above standard table plus the second additional time (for example, 10 seconds) is calculated as the start of the current fluctuation. Obtained as a time fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 36(c)). That is, this is a variation pattern selection technique that uses a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to one game mode to obtain variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of game modes. In the case of this example, the selection rate of the variation pattern does not change as shown in FIGS. The same applies to the "winning/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(b).

FIG. 36(A) shows a loss variation pattern distribution table used for the first to third consecutive winnings. For convenience of explanation, here, as the variation pattern types to be selected, normal variation 1 to 4 (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds) during probability variation, N reach during probability variation, SP reach A during probability variation ( A representative example is shown in which SP reach B (low expectation of winning) and medium probability SP reach B (high expectation of winning) are shown.

As can be seen from FIGS. 36(a) to (c), although the selection rate of each variation pattern is the same, as the number of consecutive hits increases, the variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time becomes selected. (The same applies to Figures 35 (a) to (c)). As a result, the above-mentioned relationship of "Definite variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" and the fluctuation state of the same event, that is, "Xiao Renzhuang (high speed fluctuation state)" It is possible to realize a fluctuating state that satisfies the following: state) < Zhonglianzhuang (medium speed fluctuating state) < Dalianzhuang (low speed fluctuating state).

In addition, Fig. 36 (b) shows the result obtained by adding 5 seconds (first addition time) to each variation pattern in the reference table, and Fig. 36 (c) shows the result obtained by adding 10 seconds (second addition time) to each variation pattern in the reference table. time) is configured so that the added value is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as shown in (S1) to (S7) below.

(S1) A predetermined time is not added (hereinafter simply referred to as "addition") to the normal fluctuations (Normal fluctuations during definite fluctuations 1 to 4), and at least one reach fluctuation (N reach during definite fluctuations, It is added to medium SP reach A and variable medium SP reach B). For example, in the case of Zhongrensho, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the N reach in the standard table (Figure 36 (a)), and in the case of Daliansho, 10 seconds (first addition time) is added to the N reach in the certain variable. 2 addition time) Add. Note that it is preferable that the reach variation that is relatively likely to be selected (here, among the reach variations, the N reach in the probability variation with the highest selection rate) is to be added. Further, the first addition time and the second addition time may satisfy the relationship “first addition time<second addition time” (the same applies to (S2) to (S5) described later).
(S2) Addition is made to at least one normal variation (normal variation 1 to 4 during probability variation), and addition is not performed to reach variation (N reach during probability variation, SP reach A during probability variation, SP reach B during probability variation). do not have. For example, in the case of Zhongrensho, 5 seconds (first additional time) will be added for the normal fluctuation 1 during definite change in the standard table (Figure 36 (a)), and in the case of Dairensho, 10 seconds will be added for the normal fluctuation 1 during definite change. (Second addition time) Add. Note that it is preferable that a normal variation that is relatively easily selected (here, normal variation 1 among probability variations that has the highest selection rate among normal variations) is to be added.
(S3) In the case of a loss, no addition is made, but in the case of a win, it is added. For example, in the case of a win, 5 seconds (first addition time) and 10 seconds (second addition time) are added, as shown in Figures 36 (b) and (c), but in the case of a loss, no addition is made. (In case of a loss, use the reference table: Figure 36 (a)). In other words, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Note that "winning" means "winning" and/or "winning for short support time" (the same applies to (S4) described below).
(S4) If you lose, add it up; if you win, don't add it up. For example, in the case of a loss, 5 seconds (first addition time) and 10 seconds (second addition time) are added, as shown in Figures 36 (b) and (c), but in the case of a win, no addition is made (winner In this case, use the reference table: Figure 35 (a)). In other words, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a loss becomes relatively longer.
(S5) At least the longest variation pattern is not added. For example, SP reach B during variable probability is excluded from addition, and at least one variation pattern with a shorter variation time than this is included (addition contents are (T7) or (T8) above). be able to). The longest fluctuation pattern is due to the long original fluctuation time. The "longest fluctuation pattern" may be the longest one among the losing fluctuations (Figure 36) (in this example, SP reach B during the probability change), or the longest one among the winning fluctuations (Figure 35) in the table. It may be the longest one (in this example, SP reach B in variable probability).
(S6) A common effect can be performed during the first addition time or the second addition time. For example, "effect A" can be executed for an additional 5 seconds (during the first addition time), and "effect B" can be executed for an additional 10 seconds (during the second addition time). In addition, during the 10 seconds of addition (during the second addition time), "effect A (same effect as during the first addition time)" is executed for the first 5 seconds, and "effect C (same effect as during the first addition time)" is executed for the latter 5 seconds. It is possible to perform a different performance than during the time). Note that "effect A" is preferably a pseudo-connection. Furthermore, "performance B" is preferably a player participation type production.
(S7) If the number of active pending balls at the start of fluctuation (the existing active pending balls excluding the active pending balls used for the current fluctuation display operation) is 0, it will not be added, and the active pending ball number is other than 0. is added. This is because when the number of active pending balls is 0, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected (in this example, only the reach variation is selected), so it is not preferable to add them blindly. Note that the longest variation pattern among the normal variation types (in this example, normal variation 3 during probability variation or normal variation 4 during probability variation) may be configured to be easily selected.

(Modification B)
Furthermore, the above-mentioned relationship of "variable variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < variable variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < variable variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" is not limited to the above modification A, and for example, FIGS. As shown in 38, this can also be realized by using a variable pattern distribution table that changes the selection rate (distribution value) of the variable pattern depending on the number of consecutive games.

First, an overview of this example will be explained with reference to FIG. In this example, the reference table is the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table used for small consecutive games (1st to 3rd consecutive games) (see Figure 38 (a)), and the medium consecutive games (4th to 6th consecutive games) (time), the "first selection rate variation table (FIG. 38(b)") is referred to, in which the selection rate of the variation pattern defined in this reference table is changed.
In addition, when playing Dalian (from the 7th time onwards), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern set in the above standard table is changed, but the "first selection rate fluctuation table (Figure 38 (b))" Refer to the "second selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 38(c)") for the selection rate different from the selection rate.
Here, the reference table (Fig. 38 (a)) used for small consecutive games (1st to 3rd consecutive games),
The above-mentioned "first selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 38 (b))" used in the middle consecutive games (4th to 6th consecutive games);
The relationship between the average fluctuation time of the above-mentioned "second selection rate fluctuation table (Figure 38 (c))" used when playing Dalian (7th consecutive game or later) is as follows.
The selection rate is changed so as to satisfy at least the relationship of "second selection rate variation table (low speed)<first selection rate variation table (medium speed)<reference table (high speed)". This makes it possible to realize the above-mentioned relationship of "variable variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < variable variable mode 2 (medium speed variable state) < variable variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)".
In the case of this example, since the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the reference table is obtained by changing the selection rate, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern related to each fluctuation pattern distribution table is It does not change (the fluctuation pattern designation command (MODE2+EVENT1) also does not change) (the same applies to the "winning/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 37). In this point, it is greatly different from the above modification A in which the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table changes, but the selection rate does not change.

FIG. 38(A) shows a loss variation pattern distribution table used for the first to third consecutive winnings. Here, for convenience of explanation, as in the above modification A, the variation pattern types to be selected are normal variation 1 to 4 (variation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds) during probability variation, N reach during probability variation. , a variable probability SP reach A (low expectation of winning), and a variable probability SP reach B (high expectation of winning) are shown as representative examples.

As can be seen from Figure 38 (a) to (c), although the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern changes depending on the number of consecutive hits, and as the number of consecutive hits increases, the Fluctuation patterns with relatively long times are easier to select (the same applies to FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c)). As a result, the above-mentioned relationship of "Definite variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Definite variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" and the fluctuation state of the same event, that is, "Xiao Renzhuang (high speed fluctuation state)" It is possible to realize a fluctuating state that satisfies the following: state) < Zhonglianzhuang (medium speed fluctuating state) < Dalianzhuang (low speed fluctuating state).

Note that this modification can be configured as shown in (P1) to (P15) below.

(P1) The average fluctuation time of the "standard table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is " Z seconds'', the following relational expression (α) is satisfied.
"Y/X"<"Z/Y"...(α)
The extension rate of the average fluctuation time of "Probability variable mode 2⇒Probability variable mode 3" is greater than the extension rate of the average variation time of "Probability variable mode 1⇒Probability variable mode 2".

(P2) The fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern in the "standard table" is set to "X seconds", the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is set to "Y seconds", and the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern in the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is set to "X seconds". When the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern of " is Z seconds", the following relational expression (β) is satisfied.
"Y/X"<"Z/Y"...(β)
The extension rate of the variation time of the longest variation pattern of "Probability variation mode 2 ⇒ Probability variation mode 3" is greater than the extension rate of the variation time of the longest variation pattern of "Probability variation mode 1 ⇒ Probability variation mode 2".

(P3) Let the combined selection rates of the normal fluctuations of the "standard table", "first selection rate fluctuation table", and "second selection rate fluctuation table" be "X1", "Y1", and "Z1",
When the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "standard table", "first selection rate fluctuation table", and "second selection rate fluctuation table" are "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relational expression (γ ) is satisfied.
"X2"<"X1","Y2"<"Y1", and "Z2"<"Z1"...(γ)
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game time from becoming unnecessarily long. However, for tables other than the reference table, the reverse total selection rate may be used (“Y2” > “Y1” or “Z2” > “Z1”).

(P4) If the total selection rate of the reach fluctuations of the "standard table", "first selection rate fluctuation table", and "second selection rate fluctuation table" are "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relationship is established. Formula (ε) is satisfied.
"X2"<"Y2"<Z2"...(γ)

(P5) The total selection rate of the N reach fluctuation of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y3", "Z3", and the total selection rate of SP reach is "Y4", "Z4"'', the following relational expression (ε) is satisfied in the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table".
“Y4”≦“Y3”, “Z4”≦“Z3”...(γ)

(P6) One or more specific variation patterns are not selected in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or "second selection rate fluctuation table" (selection rate 0: target for lottery, but selection rate is (not selected for 0).
(P7) The shortest normal variation in the "reference table" is not selected in the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table" (selection rate 0).
(P7) The longest reach variation in the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table" is not selected in the "reference table" (selection rate is 0).

(P8) In the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table", the longest normal variation has the highest selection rate. When we refer to the "selection rate" of a certain variation pattern, if there are multiple variation patterns, we include the total selection rate of these variations (the same applies hereinafter).
(P9) In the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table", the selection rate of N reach variation is the highest.
(P10) In the "first selection rate variation table" and/or the "second selection rate variation table", the selection rate of SP reach variation is the highest.

(P11) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table" have a low selection rate of normal fluctuations in the "standard table", and the selection rate of normal fluctuations in the "standard table" is lowered. are distributed in order to make the selection rate of at least one reach variation high probability. In this case, if there are at least multiple types of reach variations such as "first variation time < second variation time < third variation time", the reach variation of the third variation time is varied with high probability, and the reach variation of the first variation time and the third variation time are varied with high probability. 2. The selection rate of the reach variation of the variation time is not varied. Alternatively, the selection rate of reach variation in the first variation time is not changed, but the selection rate of reach variation in the second variation time and the third variation time is varied (in this case, the selection rate of reach variation in the second variation time is changed). ≦Increase in the selection rate of reach variation in the third variation time” or “Increase in the selection rate in reach variation in the third variation time ≦Increase in the selection rate in reach variation in the second variation time” be able to).

(P12) The average fluctuation time of the "standard table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Z". seconds", by changing the selection rate of fluctuation patterns other than the longest fluctuation pattern,
It is configured to satisfy "X seconds"<"Yseconds"<"Zseconds".
In this case, the variation pattern (variation pattern other than the longest variation pattern) that changes the selection rate may be a "normal variation" or a reach variation.

(P13) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" is a table in which the selection rate of one or more fluctuation patterns in the standard table is changed, and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is a table different from the standard table. Make use of it.
In this case, the following configurations (P13-1) to (P13-7) can be used.
(P13-1) The "second selection rate variation table" has more types of variation patterns (normal variation and/or reach variation) than the reference table (first selection rate variation table).
(P13-2) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" has fewer types of fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuations and/or reach fluctuations) than the standard table (first selection rate fluctuation table), but the average fluctuation time is longer. .
(P13-3) The longest variation pattern in the "second selection rate variation table" is longer than the longest variation pattern in the reference table (first selection rate variation table).
(P13-4) The shortest variation pattern of the "second selection rate variation table" is longer than the shortest variation pattern of the reference table (first selection rate variation table).
(P13-5) In the "second selection rate variation table", reach variation is more likely to be selected than normal variation.
(P13-6) The "second selection rate variation table" and the "standard table (first selection rate variation table)" have a common variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending pitches is 0. When the number of pending pitches is other than 0, the variation patterns to be selected are different).
(P13-7) The "second selection rate variation table" and the "standard table (first selection rate variation table)" have a common variation pattern that is selected when the number of pending pitches is 0 to 2. Yes (the variation patterns to be selected are different when the number of pending balls is 3).

(P14) When losing, a table with a different selection rate of the standard table is used, but when winning (big hit and/or support time reduction winning), a common table is used.
(P15) When winning (big hit and/or short support time winning), a table with a different selection rate of the standard table is used, but when a loss, a common table is used.

(7-2-2. About the production in fixed change mode)
Next, the performance in the variable probability mode will be explained. In this embodiment, variable probability performance modes 1 to 3 corresponding to variable probability modes 1 to 3 are provided as variable probability performance modes. FIG. 7A (c) shows examples of performances in variable probability performance modes 1 to 3.

Referring to FIG. 7, variable production mode 1 is an "intercept mode" that depicts intercepting an enemy aircraft, and variable production mode 2 is a display that depicts an air attack on an enemy fleet or enemy base by dive bombing. ``Bombing Mode'' is a production that creates a dramatic effect, and variable production mode 3 is a ``War Bombing Mode'' that produces a production that depicts a strategic bomber raiding an enemy city. In other words, the fixed change mode period is divided into three groups depending on the number of consecutive games: a small-scale performance mode, a middle-class performance mode, and a large-scale performance mode, and the user stays in any of these three categories. Shirika is a series of multi-game presentations, and is mainly based on dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and the accompanying effects (switching of background effects, preview effects, etc.). person will be notified. It should be noted that the illustrated display of "Right hit ⇒" is a "Right hit instruction performance (fire guidance notification performance)" that urges the player to play right. Further, regarding the hold icon, although not shown in the drawing, hold icons corresponding to the variable probability performance modes 1 to 3 are displayed. In addition, the illustration shows that the decorative symbols are in a fluctuating display state, which means that the current game is being executed, and if there is a pending ball after the current game ends, the decorative symbols will be The variable display game is executed sequentially.

In addition, if you win the time-saving jackpot, you will be transferred to the "time-saving performance mode" shown in FIG. The mode is shifted to the time-saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") shown in FIG. :Lightning mode)".

This special time-saving performance mode is only available during consecutive games, so for example, if you win a time-saving jackpot in addition to the first win, or when you have reached a predetermined number of consecutive games (for example, 4 consecutive games (mid-term consecutive games)) or more. It is preferable to transfer if you win. Specifically, the time-saving state after the time-saving jackpot in the case of "time-saving jackpots are not counted" in Figure 7A (A-1), and the case 3 in which "all jackpots are counted" in Figure 7A (B) It can be used as a performance mode related to the time-saving state after the time-saving jackpot of the 1st to 4th consecutive games. In addition, in the case of FIG. 7A(B), since the time-saving jackpot is counted, it is preferable to display an effect image 761 that notifies the current number of consecutive wins, such as "〇 consecutive wins!" In the case of -1), since the time-saving jackpot is not counted (no count), it is preferable to display an effect image 761 such as "Continue winning challenge" instead of notifying the number of consecutive winnings. In the case of "clearing the number of consecutive games by winning the time-saving jackpot" in FIG. 7A (A-2), it is preferable to shift to the time-saving production mode as usual.

(Result performance)
In addition, if you win a time-saving jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) during a series of games, a result performance can be made to appear at the final variation (100th rotation) when the number of time-savings ends. This "result performance" refers to predetermined game information when the symbols change when the time-saving state ends, such as the number of consecutive jackpots won up to that point and the total number of balls won in winning games (total number of prize balls). It is an effect that notifies the final results such as (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-086102: Fig. 50, Fig. 54 to Fig. 56, etc.). Here, if the support time reduction is won without going through the first win and enters (transfers) to the time reduction state (support time reduction state), specifically, due to support time reduction A or support time reduction B that grants a finite time reduction. When entering the time saving state, in the final variation where the number of time reductions ends (Support time reduction C is an infinite time reduction, so it is virtually impossible to reach the final variation, so it is excluded here). Although it may be executed, it is preferable not to execute it. The reason for this is that if you enter the time saving state without ever winning a jackpot, and the time saving state ends without winning a jackpot, the total number of prize balls will be very small, and the result effect will not be effective. This is because there is little need to release it. Further, the same applies when the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction) due to the ceiling benefit described below is activated and the time reduction state is entered. In addition, in general gaming machines, the ball output rate (ball output rate at low base) when there is no electric support (normal condition or probability condition) is approximately 30% to 40%, The ball output rate (ball output rate at high base) is approximately 80% to 95% in (condition), and since the ball output rate is less than 100% in both cases (if you keep hitting it), from this point, If you enter the support time saving state without going through the first hit, or if you enter the time saving state by activating the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction) due to the ceiling benefit described below, the time saving state ends without winning the jackpot. In this case, there is no need to show the result performance.

However, when going through the first hit, the significance of reporting the number of consecutive hits and the total number of pitches won (total number of prize pitches) increases. Therefore, if you win support time reduction A or support time reduction B after the first win, it is preferable to execute the result effect in the final variation. For example, as shown in the notes columns (3) and (4) in Figure 40, when the final variation is used as the variation pattern for result presentation, and in time saving mode 1, the longest normal variation in time saving mode 1 (for example, normal variation 40 seconds), in the case of Time Saving Mode 2, the longest normal fluctuation in Time Saving Mode 2 (for example, normal fluctuation 45 seconds) is configured to be selectable, and the result performance is created using that performance time width (variation time). can be done. In this case, different result performances (for example, different display modes of game information, background images, etc.) can be produced between the time saving mode 1 and the time saving mode 2. Of course, the longest normal variation is the same in time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2, as the same variation time or the same variation pattern, and the same result effect (for example, the same display format of game information, the same background image, etc.). You can let it come out.

(About other performances)
In addition, the performance related to the variable probability mode can be configured as follows (Confirmation Performance 1) to (Confirmation Performance 5).
(Confirmed Performance 1) The probability of appearance of player participation type performances is set to be high in the order of "Probable Variable Mode 1⇒Probable Variable Mode 2⇒Probable Variable Mode 3".
(Confirmation 2) The probability of appearance of the pre-read notice is made low probability or high probability in the order of "variable probability mode A⇒variable probability mode B".
(Confirmation 3) In the order of "probable variable mode A⇒probable variable mode B", the appearance rate of pseudo-connection is made high (the selection rate of the specified variation pattern with pseudo-continuous is increased).
(Confirmation performance 4) Increase the number of pseudo consecutives in the order of "Probability variation mode A ⇒ Probability variation mode B". For example, definite variable mode 1 is up to "pseudo 2", definite variable mode 2 is up to "pseudo 3", definite variable mode 3 is up to "pseudo 4", and so on.
(Confirmation performance 5) Regarding reach variation (reach performance), probability variation mode 3 includes at least a first variation pattern of a first variation time,
The probability variation mode 2 includes at least the second variation pattern of the second variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern,
The probability variation mode 1 includes at least the third variation pattern of the third variation time, but does not include the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern.
In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the relationship "third variation time<second variation time<first variation time" is satisfied. For example, the variable probability mode 3 includes at least the "developed special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after the developed SPSP reach (SP reach + SPSP reach), and the fixed variable mode 2 includes at least the "developed SPSP reach". "Advanced special reach variation" is not included, and variable probability mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include "evolving SPSP reach" and "developed special reach variation". In this case, the SP reach effect executed in the first half will be standardized, and when the SP reach effect appears, you will be able to enjoy how far the reach effect will develop depending on the difference in probability mode. Become.
For example, the variable probability mode 3 includes at least a "direct hit type special reach variation" that performs a full rotation effect after a direct hit type SPSP reach (SPSP reach), and the variable variable mode 2 includes at least a "SP reach variation that includes the execution of a specific preview effect". ", but does not include "direct hit type special reach variation", and variable mode 1 includes at least SP reach, but does not include "SP reach including the execution of a specific preview effect" and "direct hit type special reach variation". . In this case as well, you can enjoy how far the reach effect will develop depending on the difference in probability mode.

(7-3. About time saving mode)
Next, the "time saving mode" will be explained. As shown in the figure, the time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to a variable probability state (YJ=01H), and the time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is a variable probability state (YJ = 01H), and the time saving mode is a game mode in which the variable pattern selection mode is different (Tcode = "04H" to "06H"). is included. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned "special time-saving effect mode", a time-saving mode 4 (Tcode="07H") can be provided (see FIG. 7A (b), the remarks column of FIG. 42, and FIG. 43). This time-saving mode is entered when the 4R time-saving jackpot or support time-saving A to C is won (see FIG. 4).

In this embodiment, if you win the 4R time-saving jackpot or any of the support time-savings A to C, you will first be transferred to time-saving mode 1, and then depending on the number of time-savings awarded, you will be transferred to time-saving mode 2 and time-saving mode. 3. In other words, the mode is shifted from one time-saving mode to another according to the number of games being executed in the time-saving state. In other words, the mode is shifted from one time saving mode to another time saving mode according to the remaining number of time saving times. Specifically, with reference to the "time saving mode" block frame in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7B, the time saving mode 1 stays in the time saving mode 1 until the number of time saving times is 100, and the time saving mode 2 stays in the time saving mode 2 when the number of time saving times is 101 to 200. , and stays in time saving mode 3 when the number of time saving times is 251 or more.

Therefore, if you win the 4R time-saving jackpot or support time-saving A that gives you 100 time-savings, you will only stay in time-saving mode 1, and if you win support time-saving B that gives you 200 time-savings, you will stay in the time-saving mode. If the user stays in time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2 and wins support time saving C which gives infinite time saving (65535 times of working time saving), the user will stay in time saving mode 1 to 3. In addition, if the number of time reductions can be increased due to the above-mentioned "additional function" etc., even if you win support time reduction A or support time reduction B, there may be cases where you stay in time reduction mode 2 or time reduction mode 3. However, here, unless it is particularly necessary, a configuration without any additions will be mainly explained.

(7-3-1. Features of time-saving mode)
Next, the characteristic points of the time-saving modes (variable probability modes 1 to 3) according to the present embodiment will be explained. As already explained, time saving modes 1 to 3 are game modes with different variable pattern selection modes (Tcodes) (see FIGS. 39 to 40 and 43), and the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to time saving modes 1 to 3 is different. The minute table (see FIGS. 39 and 40) is selected. By utilizing this, it is possible to create time saving modes 1 to 3 each having its own characteristics. This point is based on the same method as the variable probability mode described above.

The time-saving mode of this embodiment is determined so that the relationship of average digestion time satisfies "time-saving mode 1<time-saving mode 2<time-saving mode 3" (see note 2 in FIG. 7B). In other words, the average time taken is controlled to be shorter as the number of time reductions increases, in other words, each time the game mode is stepped up. In this respect, it differs from the probability variable mode in which the average consumption time is controlled to be longer each time the game mode is stepped up. The reason why the relationship between the average completion time (game completion speed) related to the time saving mode is determined as "time saving mode 1 < time saving mode 2 < time saving mode 3" is as follows.

Unlike the variable probability mode (variable probability state), during the time saving mode (time saving state), it is an electric support state in which the jackpot lottery probability is low, so it is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot than under the variable probability mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game is adjusted to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the time saving mode. Specifically, in the case of time-saving modes 1 and 2, emphasis is placed on the gameplay of ``enjoying the performance'' in the ``low-speed fluctuation state'' or ``medium-speed fluctuation state'' where the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game is long. In the case of Time Saving Mode 3, there is a "high-speed fluctuation state", which is a gaming mode that emphasizes gameplay, such as "increasing the average game completion speed and improving time efficiency regarding game progress". It is said that In particular, when the relationship between the average completion time (game completion speed) is set as "Time saving mode 1 < Time saving mode 2 < Time saving mode 3", there are the following advantages.

In this embodiment, a greater number of time reductions than the conventional number of 100 time reductions can be provided. In particular, if you are given a number of times that can take a long time to complete, such as 200 time savers or infinite time savers, the speed of game completion may be slow and you will finish the time savers lazily. This causes players to feel stressed and dissatisfied. Therefore, as the number of times the game is executed during the time saving state increases, the game completion speed is increased so that the next jackpot can be won in as short a time as possible.

Specifically, with reference to the "time saving medium loss variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 40, the normal variation 4s is made more likely to be selected in time saving mode 1, and the normal variation 2s is made more likely to be selected in time saving mode 2. In time saving mode 3, normal fluctuation 1 s (shortest normal fluctuation) is made easy to select. This makes it possible to increase the game completion speed in the order of "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3".

As mentioned above, regarding the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game, there is a relationship of "time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) < time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" Therefore, in the time-saving modes 1, 2, and 3 of this embodiment, the following (J1) is used in particular regarding the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 40)" that is referred to when a loss is most likely to be encountered in the progress of the game. It is preferable to have a configuration like ~(J20). Note that the present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three time saving modes 1 to 3. That is, the present invention provides a time-saving mode (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode A") in which the number of times the game is executed in the time-saving state (variable number of times) is less than a predetermined number of times, and a time-saving mode in which the number of game executions in the time-saving state (variable number of times) is less than a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode B"). It is sufficient if the configuration satisfies the relationship "time saving mode A < time saving mode B" when comparing the average digestion time between time saving mode A and time saving mode B. Hereinafter, when it is referred to as "in the order of 'time saving mode A ⇒ time saving mode B'", it also means "in the order of 'time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ time saving mode 3'".

(J1) Shorten the average fluctuation time of normal fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J2) Shorten the average variation time of reach variation in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J3) Shorten the variation time of the normal variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J4) Shorten the variation time of the reach variation with the highest selection rate in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J5) Increase the selection rate of normal fluctuation in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J6) Reduce the selection rate of reach variation in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J7) Shorten the variation time of the shortest normal variation in each mode in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J8) Shorten the variation time of the shortest reach variation in each mode in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J9) Increase the types of normal fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J10) Reduce the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J11) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns longer than the second variation time are reduced in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". The "variation pattern for the second variation time or longer" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J12) When "first variation time < second variation time", the types of variation patterns less than or equal to the first variation time are increased in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B". The "variation pattern of the first variation time or less" may be a normal variation or a reach variation (the same applies hereinafter).
(J13) When "first variation time < second variation time", time saving mode A has a variation pattern longer than the second variation time, and time saving mode B does not have a variation pattern longer than the second variation time.
(J14) When "first variation time < second variation time", time saving mode A does not have a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time, and time saving mode B has a variation pattern shorter than the first variation time.
(J15) When "first variation time < second variation time", time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2 have a variation pattern that is longer than the second variation time, and time saving mode 3 has a variation pattern that is longer than the second variation time. There is no pattern of variation.
(J16) When "first variation time < second variation time", there is no variation pattern below the first variation time in time saving mode 1 and time saving mode 2, and there is no variation pattern below the first variation time in time saving mode 3. There is a pattern of variation.
(J17) In time saving mode A and time saving mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 0 is set as a common (may be the same or almost the same) variation time, and the number of pending balls is If the value is other than 0, variation patterns with different variation times can be selected. For example, in time saving modes 1 to 3, if the number of pending balls is 0, only the normal variation 8s type (in this example, normal variation 8s during time saving, normal variation 8s during time saving, normal variation 8s during time saving) is available. When the operation holding ball is other than 0, a variation pattern having a different variation time can be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the operation hold ball is other than 0 is increased in the order of "time saving mode A⇒time saving mode B".
(J18)) Normal fluctuations are common in time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B, and the selection rate of reach fluctuations is set to have a low probability in the order of "time-saving mode A⇒time-saving mode B". For example, the normal variation is common in time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach variation is set to have a low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1⇒time saving mode 2⇒time saving mode 3".
(J19) Normal fluctuations are common in time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B, and the selection rate of reach fluctuations with relatively long fluctuation times is made low probability in the order of "time-saving mode A⇒time-saving mode B". For example, the normal variation is common in time saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach variation with relatively long variation time is set to be low probability in the order of "time saving mode 1⇒time saving mode 2⇒time saving mode 3".
(J20) When comparing time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Further, although the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win does not change, the variation time that can be selected in the case of a loss becomes relatively longer. Note that "winning" means "winning" and/or "winning for short support time".

In addition, in this embodiment, the common time-saving medium reach A can be selected in time-saving modes 1 to 3, and the common time-saving medium reach A and B can be selected in time-saving mode 1 and time-saving mode 2. However, if there is a relationship of "Time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) < Time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)" regarding the average consumption time of the symbol fluctuation display game, the time saving mode can be reduced. In at least one of the time-saving modes of modes 1 to 3, a different reach variation may be selected from that in the other time-saving modes.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, after shifting to the time saving mode 3, the shift from the time saving mode 3 to other game modes is not made until the player wins the jackpot or the number of time saving times is exhausted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variable number of times) is played during time saving mode 3, the game may be shifted to another game mode (time saving mode 1 or time saving mode 2). Time-saving mode 3 is a "high-speed fluctuation state," so the game speed progresses at a good tempo, but if the same game mode continues for a long time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. Resulting in. Therefore, when a predetermined number of games are played during time saving mode 3, it is preferable to shift to another time saving mode. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition mode "Time saving mode 3 ⇒ Working time saving mode 2 or Time saving mode 1", but also "Time saving mode 3 (first variable number is exhausted) ⇒ Time saving mode 2 (second varying number of times is exhausted) ⇒ Time saving "Mode 1" or "Time saving mode 3 (first variable number of times used) ⇒ Time saving mode 1 (second varying number of times used) ⇒ Time saving mode 2". Note that when the first number of fluctuations is G times and the second number of fluctuations is H times, "G times" = "H times", "G times < H times", or "G times > H times". can.

(7-3-2. Regarding production during time saving mode)
In this embodiment, time-saving effect modes 1 to 3 corresponding to time-saving modes 1 to 3 are provided as time-saving effect modes. FIG. 7B shows examples of effects in time-saving effect modes 1 to 3.

Referring to FIG. 7B, time-saving production mode 1 is an "underwater acoustic warfare mode" that produces a production that depicts a battle between submarines, and time-saving production mode 2 is an "underwater acoustic warfare mode" that produces a production that depicts a battle between fleets. "Battle Mode", time-saving production mode 3 is "Land Battle Mode", which produces a production that depicts tanks fighting each other. In other words, the time-saving mode period is divided into three time-saving modes 1 to 3 depending on the number of times the game is executed during the time-saving state, and which of these three categories you are staying in depends on the above-mentioned variable mode and Similarly, the player is notified mainly by dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and the accompanying effects (switching of background effects, preview effects, etc.).

Furthermore, the production stage may be different depending on whether the mode is shifted to the time saving mode due to a time saving jackpot or the case where the mode is shifted to the time saving mode due to the support time saving. In this case, although the time-saving jackpot and support time-saving are the same time-saving mode (the Tcode is the same), the background effects, decorative patterns, hold icons, firing guidance notification effects (right-handed instruction effect), and various At least one of performances such as a preview performance and a look-ahead notice (a look-ahead notice during fluctuation and/or a pending change notice) can have a different performance mode. Thereby, even though the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving mode are transferred to the same time-saving mode, it is possible to visually distinguish and notify whether it is the jackpot time-saving state or the support time-saving state.

(About the preview performance related to the support time reduction win)
As already explained, there are two types of support time reduction: "Special electric activation type support time reduction" and "Special electric non-operation type support time reduction," but in either case, round games such as jackpot games are not executed, and the game is infinite. There are exceptions such as support time reduction that grants a high number of time reductions, but basically the profit level is lower than that of a jackpot. For this reason, if a flashy inciting effect similar to the one at the time of winning a jackpot is made to appear in a preview effect during a symbol change display game in which the support time reduction is won, the player's expectations will be excessively aroused. Therefore, when the support time reduction is won, it is preferable not to display a "probable performance" that definitively announces the winning of the jackpot as a preview performance. For example, if it is a reservation change notice, the rainbow color reservation of premium reservation will not appear (in the case of a gaming machine that does not execute premium reservation, the reservation change notice with the highest winning expectation at the time of winning a jackpot will not appear), fluctuation In the case of a preview performance in the middle, specific characters or items that indicate the probability of success may not be displayed. In other words, when the support time reduction is won, it is possible to make a high expectation preview performance appear, excluding at least the high expectation preview performance that indicates the highest expectation level at the time of winning the jackpot. However, only the support time reduction that provides infinite time reduction with the highest profit among the support time reduction (in this embodiment, support time reduction C) may be configured to be able to perform the same winning performance as the jackpot. Further, when the support time saving is won, the same winning performance as the jackpot does not appear, but the winning performance for the support time saving may be executed.

In addition, in the pre-reading notice, if a support time-saving winning operation pending ball holding occurs, the pre-reading notice is prohibited for a predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of pending memories (4 times in the case of this embodiment)). Good too. Furthermore, after the start of the time-saving state due to support time-saving, pre-reading notices may be prohibited for a predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of pending memories).

(Regarding the winning performance related to the starting gate)
In the case where a "winning performance" is configured to be executed when a prize is won in the upper starting slot 34 and/or the lower starting opening 35, different winning performances are executed in the jackpot time saving state and the support time saving state. Good too. Note that the winning performance may not be performed during the jackpot time saving state, and the winning performance may be performed during the support time saving state (or vice versa).

(Remaining time reduction notification performance)
In addition, during the time saving mode (time saving state), a ``remaining time saving number notification effect (for example, countdown display)'' that visually announces the remaining number of time saving times can be displayed. The remaining time reduction number notification performance may be the same (the countdown display mode is the same) for at least support time reduction A and support time reduction B (support time reduction with limited time reduction), or may be the same for time reduction jackpot and support time reduction (support time reduction A and support time reduction). /Or the same presentation mode may be used for support time reduction B). Further, different performance modes may be used depending on the type of support time saving, or different performance modes may be used for time saving jackpot and support time saving. In the case of the former same performance mode, it is preferable to start the countdown display when the remaining number of times of the same break and time saving reaches a predetermined number. For example, a countdown display is performed from the remaining 10 times to the final variation. In the latter case, the countdown display can be started at different intervals. For example, in the case of 4R time saving jackpot, the countdown display can be started from the remaining 50 times, and in the case of support time saving A (or support time saving B), the countdown display can be started from the remaining 10 times.

In addition, in the case of a finite time reduction, it is preferable to configure the remaining time reduction number notification effect to be executable. On the other hand, in the case of infinite time reduction, since the remaining number of times is infinite, there is no need to perform the remaining time reduction number notification effect, and there is no need to perform the remaining time reduction number notification effect. However, there are cases where it is appropriate to notify that the remaining number of times is infinite. Therefore, when executing the remaining number of times display effect related to infinite time saving, for example, if it is an image display effect, it is possible to display "∞ times remaining" or "continue until the next jackpot".

(Concealed remaining time reduction notification performance)
Furthermore, which support time saving program has been won may be kept secret. For example, the effects (notice effects, etc.) in the game that won each support time reduction will be a common effect, and the remaining time reduction number announcement effect will also be a common effect, for example, "Remaining number of times??? times" or "Remaining number of times 〇〇 times (no matter which support time saving is won, the same initial value will be displayed and a countdown will be displayed)" or "0 times (the initial value will start from zero and a countdown will be displayed)" can do. As a result, the number of time reductions is kept secret, and it is possible to create a sense of tension by not knowing how many times it will last (not knowing when it will end).

In addition, when displaying the above-mentioned "remaining number of times" and performing a countdown display, it is preferable to use the remaining time reduction number notification effect as described below. For example, if any of the support time savings A to C is won, "100" with the least number of time savings will be displayed. When the count reaches zero, if you have won Support Time Reduction B or Support Time Reduction C, which gives you more time reductions than 100 times, additional display effects such as "+50 times!" and "+100!" will be displayed. and notify that the time saving condition will continue. On the other hand, in the case of a count-up display, no matter which support time saver is won, the count-up display will start from zero, and when a predetermined number of times is reached, or every time a predetermined number of times is reached, the message "It's still going on! ”, ``50 left!'', ``Infinite time saving confirmed!'', etc. are displayed to notify that the time saving state will continue. In either case, it is preferable to perform an additional display performance after performing a performance to incite whether or not the time-saving ends, in order to arouse the player's sense of tension.

In addition, in the case of a time saving state due to support time reduction, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification performance" is not executed, and in the case of a jackpot time reduction state, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification performance" may be executed.Also, in the jackpot time reduction state In this case, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification effect" may not be performed, and in the case of the support time reduction state, the above-mentioned "remaining time reduction number notification effect" may be performed.

(Regarding the production related to the winning game with short support time (win fluctuation pattern))
In addition, in normal mode (normal state), if you win a short support time in this game, an "electronic support state" will occur after the end of this game, so we will inform you of the short support time win during the game. As the effect, for example, a "time saving rush notification effect 770" as shown in FIG. 6(a) is displayed. This time-saving entry notification performance is one aspect of a gaming state transition notification performance that notifies (suggests) that the game will shift to a gaming state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the current gaming state (normal state). In the illustrated example of production, a character image 778 saying "We are about to enter into a short time" is displayed as the time-saving entry notification production 770, a dedicated character image 777 is displayed as the background display of the decorative pattern 775, and the decorative pattern 775 is , indicates a state in which the support time-saving winning symbols "hour,""☆," and "short" are stopped and displayed (usually, for example, numerical symbols).As a result, after the end of this game, the time-saving state will be activated. You will be notified in advance that there will be an intrusion.

The reason for creating such a "time-saving rush notification performance" is as follows. In particular, if the winning support time reduction is "special electric non-activated support time reduction", when the current game ends (variable time ends), the time reduction state will enter after the extremely short confirmation display time (500ms) has elapsed. (Refer to the process during special symbol fluctuation (step S307) and the process during special symbol confirmation time (step S308) in FIG. 10). To be more precise, the current game ends after this fixed display time (500 ms) has elapsed. For this reason, the purpose is to notify the player of the occurrence of a situation in which right-hand playing is advantageous at an early stage, and to prevent the player from continuing to "left-hand playing" (incurring a disadvantage) during the time-saving state. Note that a firing guidance notification performance (right-handed hitting instruction performance) may be displayed during the winning game of short support time. However, in reality, until the final display time has elapsed, the device is not in the "time saving state" but in the "normal state". Therefore, if the player runs ahead and plays right-handed, a firing guidance notification performance (left-handed instruction performance (warning notification)) may be performed to encourage left-handed hitting. In this case, it is preferable to preferentially display (higher display priority) the left-handed batting instruction presentation over the right-handed batting instruction presentation. It should be noted that the judgment as to whether or not the ball is being hit to the right during the normal state is determined based on whether or not entry (passage) of the game ball into the normal symbol starting port 37 is detected.

On the other hand, in the case of "Special electric activation type support time saving", the time saving state is entered after the support time saving opening/closing game (in the case of small hit winning type support time saving, the small winning game) is executed, so during the support time saving opening/closing game (For example, during the start INT), it is sufficient to display the firing guidance notification effect (right-handed shot instruction effect), and no particular problem will occur. In the case of special electric activation type support time saving, it is preferable that the period of the support time saving opening/closing game is approximately several seconds or more.

(About the confirmed display time for winning games with short support time)
Further, in a winning game with short support time, the confirmed display time can be different from the normal confirmed display time (500 ms). Specifically, it can be set to a longer time (for example, about 1 second to 10 seconds) than the normal fixed display time (500 ms). By utilizing this long fixed display time, there is an advantage that a sufficient margin performance time width for executing the above-mentioned "time-saving rush notification performance" can be secured. In addition, after the execution time (win variation time) of the winning game ends, there is a longer than usual confirmation display time, so players can change from "left-handed" to "right-handed" with some margin. There is also the advantage that the firing operation handle 15 can be operated. In addition, only for winning games with short support time, a "right-handed hitting notification" (for example, a right-handed hitting instruction image such as right-handed hitting notification image 779) can be sent in advance during a predetermined period during the winning game, or at least by using the confirmed display time. May be executed.

<Example of time-saving rush announcement production: Figure 59, Figure 60>
Next, an example of the time-saving rush notification performance when the support time-saving is "special electric non-operating type support time-saving" will be described. First, in order to facilitate understanding of this performance example, the transition of the performance when the number of pending balls is zero after the end of the game will be explained using FIG. 58.

The time chart in Figure 58 shows that after the current game ends with a "loss (big hit, small hit, and non-winning for support time reduction)", the number of active pending balls is zero (special figure 1 active pending ball and special figure 1 active pending ball). 2 shows a case where the state (the number of balls held in action is zero) continues.

Referring to the time chart in FIG. 58, when the variable display of the current special symbol ends (time T2), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the jackpot lottery result (here, the special symbol for loss is (stop display), and the current game is ended (time T3). At this time, if there are any pending balls, the next game (variable display of special figures) will start immediately, but if there are no pending balls (no pending balls), after the fixed display time Tb has elapsed, Until the next game starts (until a new operation pending ball occurs), the performance state is shifted to "waiting for customers (waiting for customers)" (times T3 to T5).

Specifically, if the number of pending balls is zero after the confirmed display time Tb has elapsed, the main control unit 20 transmits a “customer waiting command” to the performance control unit 24 (see S419 in FIG. 12 described below). ). When the production control unit 24 receives this customer waiting command, it performs production processing related to the production state "waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer)".

Specifically, when the production control unit 24 receives a customer waiting command, it understands that the game is stopped and is "waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer)", and from receiving the customer waiting command, a new pending ball is placed. If a predetermined waiting time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed without any occurrence (in this embodiment, without receiving the winning command and/or the pending addition command that are transmitted when an operation pending ball occurs) ( When the illustrated time T4 has arrived), that is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the number of pending balls becoming zero and the game has not started (when the customer waiting performance start conditions are met), the game machine 1 A ``customer waiting effect (demonstration display)'' is displayed in which a demo movie is played to explain the game and introduce (demonstrate) the game machine. Note that when an operation related to game settings by the player, such as a menu screen display operation to be described later, is detected, the measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) is cleared and 120 seconds is set again. Note that measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) may be started after the game settings are completed and the game returns to the "pre-customer waiting performance" described later.

Figure (C) shows an example of a customer waiting performance. The example in Figure (C) shows a part of a demo movie as a customer waiting effect. Here, the name of the gaming machine ("CR Fujimaru Senki") is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the name is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. A specific character (Fujimaru-kun) is displayed in the corner. During the customer waiting period, a predetermined demo movie is repeatedly played and displayed to effectively promote the appeal of the game machine.

However, during the period until the customer waiting performance starts (until the predetermined time Td elapses), the "pre-customer waiting performance (demonstration start waiting display)" is made to appear (times T3 to T4). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is set to a display state that includes a background effect (background image) corresponding to the game state and a decorative pattern that has been stopped in the current game (decoration stop pattern), and the start of a customer waiting effect (demonstration). This display state is maintained until the movie starts).

Figure (A) shows an example of a performance before waiting for a customer. The example in Figure (A) shows a display state in which decorative symbols corresponding to losses (decoration stop symbols corresponding to losses), which are the most recent game results, are stopped during the normal performance mode (air battle mode). In this embodiment, after the start of the pre-customer waiting presentation (after receiving the customer waiting command), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (when time Tm has arrived), "Menu screen display →" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. A "menu displayable notification effect 811" including a character display and a button image (here, an image imitating the effect button 13) appears. The role of this menu display possible notification effect 811 is to notify that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened by operating the effect button 13, in other words, to notify that the menu operation is possible. . When the production button 13 is pressed during the menu operation enabled period, a "menu screen" as shown in the figure is displayed, and various game environment settings such as volume and light intensity can be set.

Figure (B) shows an example of the menu screen. Here, a character image of the game machine's name "CR Fujimaru Senki" is displayed at the top of the menu screen 811a, a specific character 813 is displayed at the center right side of the screen, and examples of menu items include "Character selection" and "Volume Menu items such as "adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", "background music selection", and "back" are displayed. On this menu screen 811a, when the player operates the cursor 812 using the direction keys 75 to select a desired menu item, and presses the production button 13 with the cursor 812 pointing to the menu item, the menu item is determined. Corresponding game settings can be made.

For example, when "volume adjustment" is selected as a menu item, a volume adjustment screen 811b as shown in FIG. 8(D) is displayed. On this volume adjustment screen, a desired volume level can be selected using the cross key 75 and determined using the production button 13. Once the volume level is determined, the screen returns to the pre-waiting-for-customer presentation screen shown in Figure (A). In the example shown in FIG. 3(D), adjustment can be made in five stages from a reference volume value (MIN) to a predetermined maximum volume value (MAX).
Although not shown, a light intensity adjustment screen similar to the volume adjustment screen is also displayed when "Light intensity adjustment" is selected, and this light intensity adjustment can also be adjusted in multiple stages (for example, 4 levels). It becomes. Furthermore, when "character selection" is selected, a related ally character or enemy character can be selected during the current performance mode. This allows a favorite character to appear in a preview effect (such as a specific reach) or in a winning effect. Further, when selecting and deciding on "BGM selection", it is possible to select BGM related to the current production mode from a plurality of types of BGM.

In this example, four game settings are possible: "character selection," "volume adjustment," "light intensity adjustment," and "BGM selection." good. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that only allows volume adjustment, there is no need to display the menu screen (menu item) 811a as shown in Figure (B), so the volume adjustment screen (not shown) in Figure (D) is directly displayed. adjustment screen 811b) can be displayed. When displaying the adjustment screen 811b, for example, the adjustment screen 811c including a background image related to the current performance mode can be displayed in the background effect, like the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, a background image related to the normal performance mode is displayed, and a five-level volume adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the background image. In the case of this adjustment screen 811c, since it is a game setting screen that can notify the current performance mode, it has the advantage that it can notify the current game state (game mode) when adjusting the volume or light intensity. . Hereinafter, a mode in which the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed without displaying the menu screen 811a will be referred to as an "adjustment screen direct display mode."

The above-mentioned "menu operable period" may start immediately when the customer waiting command is received. For example, after the fixed display time has elapsed (after time T3 has elapsed), the menu operable period can be started. Specifically, the menu operable period in this case is the "menu operable period A" shown in the figure.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "menu operation possible period" may start after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting command. For example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the fixed display time has elapsed (for example, when the time Tm at which the menu display possible notification effect 811 is started has arrived), the menu operation possible period can be started. Specifically, the menu operable period in this case is "menu operable period B" shown in the figure.

Note that the menu display possible notification effect 811 may be made to appear at the start of the menu operation possible period (in a case where the start of the menu operation possible period is notified), or may be made to appear at a predetermined timing of the menu operation possible period. Good too.

<Example of production: Figure 59, Figure 60>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, a presentation example will be described when the current game is a winning game of "special electric non-operating type support time saving". FIGS. 59 to 60 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the transition of effects when the number of pending balls is zero for a while after the end of the current game. Example 2 is shown. Further, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 58 described above will also be used as appropriate.

(Example 1: Figure 59)
First, production example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

(1-1. Execution start timing of time-saving rush notification effect)
In the case of production example 1 shown in FIG. A time saving notification effect 871 appears.Specifically, at the arrival of a predetermined timing during symbol fluctuation (for example, time T1 in FIG. 58), or during a fixed display period (time T2 in FIG. 58). Taking the arrival as an opportunity, a time-saving entry notification performance 871 appears.The time-saving entry notification performance 871 of this example includes the words "Sound War Mode Entry" that notifies (suggests) that the time-saving mode (time saving state) is to be shifted. This is a performance image that includes an image 802, a character image 803, etc. In addition, in Figure (β), three decorative patterns are displayed in a small space on the right corner of the LCD screen (decorative pattern 801a shown), and this time An example is shown in which a decorative stop pattern (a support time saving winning pattern) indicating the game result is displayed.Here, an example in which the decorative pattern 801a is stopped and displayed at "3", "5", and "7" is shown. However, it may be "hour", "star", or "short" as shown in FIG.

(1-2. Display period of time-saving rush notification effect)
The above-mentioned time-saving entry notification effect 871 continues to appear for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the symbol variation is finished and the fixed display time has elapsed (after time T3 in FIG. 58) (Figure (γ)) . However, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, it enters the "time saving state", so the time saving entry notification effect 871 is additionally displayed with a firing guidance notification effect (right shot instruction effect) 851, as shown in Figure (γ). This results in a time-saving rush notification effect 872. As a result, it is notified that the player has entered a time saving state and that the player has entered a situation advantageous for right-handed batting. Note that the time-saving rush notification effect 872 here is displayed as part of the effect before waiting for the customer.

Then, after displaying the time-saving rush notification effect 872 shown in FIG. The front effect 890 is made to appear (Figure (δ)). The normal performance before waiting for customers 890 here is a performance mode related to the time-saving mode (time-saving state), and as shown in the figure (δ), it is a performance mode related to the time-saving performance mode as a background image according to the gaming state. A background image (for example, underwater acoustic warfare mode: see Figure 7B) is displayed (if a production mode dedicated to reducing support time is provided, a background image related to that production mode may be displayed), and the decoration is stopped. As the symbol, the most recent game result (in the case of this production example, "579": support time saving decorative stop symbol) is displayed. In addition, regarding the right-handed hitting instruction performance, as it has been switched to the normal performance before waiting for customers, “right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 related to the time-saving entry notification performance (first right-handed hitting notification: confirmed display time elapsed in the support time-saving winning game) After that, the right-handed hitting instruction performance (which is executed for a predetermined period of time) is finished, and the right-handed hitting instruction performance 852 (second right-handed hitting notification during electric support) is displayed in a display mode (performance mode) different from the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851. ：Right-handed instruction for electric support)” will appear.

In addition, the above-mentioned "Right hit instruction performance for electric support (second right hit notification)" can be made into the following (Instruction performance 1) to (Instruction performance 7).
(Instruction performance 1) A common right-handed instruction performance (second right-handedness notification) is provided during electric support, that is, during a time-saving state (time-saving state due to jackpot), during a probability change state, and during a support time-saving state.
(Instruction performance 2) During the game state other than the support time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state and the variable probability state), the "common right-handed hitting instruction performance (second right-hitting notification)" is used, and during the support time reduction state, it is A different right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting instruction performance dedicated to the support time reduction state: third right-handed hitting notification) is provided.
(Instruction performance 3) A common right-hand hitting instruction performance (second right-hand hitting notification) is used at least during the time saving state and during the support time saving state.
(Instruction performance 4) During the time-saving state and the support time-saving state, a common right-handed instruction performance (time-saving right-handed notification: for example, the first right-handed notification (second right-handed notification) for electric support) is used, and in the variable state, A different right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting notification for probability variation: for example, second right-handed hitting notification (third right-hitting notification) for electric support) is used.
(Instruction Performance 5) Different right-handed instruction performances are provided during the time saving state, during the probability variable state, and during the support time saving state.
(Instruction performance 6) A first right-hitting instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hitting notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the support time-saving winning game, and a second right-hitting instruction performance during the support time reduction. At least, it is possible to perform a right-hitting instruction performance during a hit during a jackpot game due to a time-saving jackpot (a right-handed hitting instruction performance that is executed during at least a part of the period during the jackpot game), and the first right-hitting instruction performance and the winning instruction performance are possible. To make a performance mode different from a performance instructing a right-of-center hit. In this case, the right-hand hitting instruction performance during the time-saving state after the jackpot game and the second right-hand hitting instruction performance are a common right-hitting instruction performance.
(Instruction performance 7) A first right-hitting instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hitting notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmation display time has elapsed in the support time-saving winning game, and a second right-hitting instruction performance during the support time reduction. At least, it is possible to perform a right-hitting instruction performance during a hit during a jackpot game due to a time-saving jackpot (a right-handed hitting instruction performance that is executed during at least a part of the period during the jackpot game), and the first right-hitting instruction performance and the winning instruction performance are possible. The direction performance for hitting to the center right is the same as the performance mode. In this case, the right-hand hitting instruction performance during the time-saving state after the jackpot game and the second right-hand hitting instruction performance are different right-hand hitting instruction performances.

In addition, in the case where a small win (including a small win type support time reduction) is provided, the following (instruction performance 8) can be used.
(Instruction performance 8) A first right-hitting instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hitting notification) that is executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the support time-saving winning game, and a second right-hitting instruction performance during the support time reduction, It is possible to perform a right-hitting instruction performance during a small winning game (a right-hitting instruction performance executed during at least a part of the period during a small winning game), and at least the first right-hitting instruction performance and a winning instruction performance. The direction performance for hitting to the center right is the same as the performance mode.

In addition, although the above explained the special electric non-activated support time reduction, when the support time reduction is "special electric activation type support time reduction", the support time reduction opening/closing game (in the case of small hit winning type support time reduction, the small hit Right hit instruction performance (during a small hit game related to) (right hit instruction performance executed during at least a part of the period during the support time-saving opening/closing game) and a small hit game (here, a small hit game due to a normal small hit) ) is preferably the same performance mode as the right hit instruction performance (the right hit instruction performance executed during at least a part of the period during the small win game), but may be a different performance mode.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 59 (δ), here, a menu display possible notification effect 811 is also displayed to notify that the menu operation is possible. In addition, if the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation possible period, the menu screen shown in Figure (η) or the adjustment screen 811c shown in Figure (η-1) (here, the background image related to the time-saving production mode) (For example, an adjustment screen including an underwater acoustic warfare mode: see FIG. 7B) or an adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. 7(η-2) can be displayed.

(1-3. Regarding the end timing of right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification))
In addition, in this performance example, the end timing of the right-hand hit instruction performance 851 (first right-hand hit notification) was explained as being the timing when switching to the normal performance before waiting for a customer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following (Tim1) to (Tim4) may be used.
(Tim1) The first right hit notification may be ended before the menu displayable notification effect 811 is executed (appeared).
(Tim 2) The first right hit notification may be ended before the menu operable period starts. Specifically, in the case where menu operation possible period B is adopted, the period is ended before the arrival of time Tm (FIG. 58), for example.
(Tim 3) The first right-click notification can be ended before the menu display possible notification effect 811 is executed (appeared) and during the menu operation possible period. For example, in a case where the menu display possible notification effect 811 is started after a predetermined time delay from the start of the menu operable period, it can be ended before the menu display possible notification effect 811 is executed.
(Tim 4) The first right hit notification may be ended when a menu operation (game setting operation) is performed. For example, the process can be terminated when the operating means is operated for menu operation. For example, when the menu screen 811a shown in Figure (η), the adjustment screen 811b shown in Figure (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811c shown in Figure (η-2) is displayed, the first right-handed hit notification is terminated. be able to. Further, after the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed, when an adjustment operation (game setting operation: for example, an operation to change or determine the volume level) is performed, the first right hit notification may be terminated. In other words, the first right-handed hit notification can be ended when the adjustment operation is performed, without ending the first right-handed hit notification at the stage when the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed.
Note that when the first right-handed hit notification ends (triggered by the end of the first right-handed hit notification), the second right-handed hit notification is started.

(1-4. Customer waiting performance (demo display))
Then, when the customer waiting effect start conditions are met, that is, without any menu display operation, the time saving notification effect 872 is started (after receiving the customer waiting command) for a predetermined waiting time (120 seconds). ) has elapsed, or if an operation related to game settings by the player is detected, and the waiting time (120 seconds) has elapsed after the detection (the waiting time after the game settings are finished and returns to the pre-waiting performance) (120 seconds) may have elapsed), a customer waiting effect is displayed (Fig. (ε)). If a pending ball occurs during the performance before waiting for a customer or during the performance while waiting for a customer (while waiting for a customer (including while displaying the game setting screen)), the symbol fluctuation display game in the time-saving mode (time-saving performance mode) will be executed. (Figure (ζ)).

(1-5. Regarding the end timing of the right-handed hit instruction production 851 (first right-handed hit notification) when there is a pending ball)
In the above, the end timing of the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification) in the case where the number of balls on hold for operation is zero for a while after the winning game of shortened support time has been explained. In the following, when there is an activated pending ball during a winning game for shortening support time, or for a short period of time (for example, before the normal customer waiting effect 890 is displayed) after a winning game for shortening support time, an activated suspended ball is The timing at which the right-handed hitting instruction effect 851 (first right-handed hitting notification) ends when this occurs will be explained. In this case, the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification) can be as follows (Tim5) to (Tim12).
(Tim 5) The first right hit notification can be ended until the symbol variation of the next game starts or when the symbol variation of the next game starts. For example, there is a production transition of "figure (β) or figure (γ) → figure (ζ)". Note that if there is an operation pending ball in the winning game of support time reduction, the next game is started immediately, but the time reduction entry notification effect 871 may be displayed over the next game. For example, it may be displayed for a predetermined period of time from the start of the next game, or it may be displayed until high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols of the next game (for high-speed fluctuation, see FIG. 44, etc. described later) is started. In this case, instead of displaying the time-saving rush notification effect 871 as it is, only a part of the display, for example, the character image 802 or the character image 803, may be displayed.
(Tim 6) The first right hit notification can be finished before the start of high-speed fluctuation of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game (see FIG. 44, etc. described later).
(Tim 7) The first right hit notification can be finished before the stop operation of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game (see FIGS. 44 to 57, etc. described later) starts.
(Tim 8) The first right hit notification can be ended before at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game is stopped and displayed.
(Tim 9) The first right hit notification can be ended after the stop display of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game.
(Tim 10) The first right hit notification can be ended before the variation time of the special symbol (or decorative symbol) in the next game ends (variation time elapses).
(Tim11) The first right hit notification can be ended at least after the variation time of the special symbol (or decorative symbol) in the next game ends (after the variation time has elapsed).
(Tim 12) The first right hit notification can be ended during the confirmed display time in the next game. The first right-handed hit notification can be ended, for example, at the start, midway, or end of the final display time.
Note that when the first right-handed hit notification ends (triggered by the end of the first right-handed hit notification), the second right-handed hit notification is started.

(Example 2: Figure 60)
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a modification of the production example 1 (production example 2) will be described. The difference between the production example 1 in FIG. 59 and the production example 2 in FIG. 60 is mainly that the display period of the time-saving rush notification production is different, and the accompanying production mode is different.

In the case of production example 2 shown in FIG. 60, the time-saving rush notification production 871 is displayed until the next game starts or until the customer waiting production starts. Specifically, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without starting the next game, the customer waiting effect is displayed without the customer waiting effect appearing.

The time-saving rush notification effect 871 of this effect example is a point that continues to appear for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the symbol variation ends and the confirmed display time has elapsed (after time T3 in FIG. 58), and This is substantially the same as the above-described example 1 (FIG. 59) in that the time-saving entry notification effect 872 is additionally displayed after the display time has elapsed and the firing guidance notification effect (right shot instruction effect) 851 is additionally displayed. be. However, in the case of this performance example, the normal pre-waiting-for-customer performance 890 does not appear even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the time-saving rush notification performance 872 continues to be displayed. This point is decisively different from production example 1. In addition, in this production example, after the time-saving entry notification production 872 appears for a predetermined time, the right-handed hitting instruction performance starts from the right-handed hitting instruction performance 851 (first right-handed hitting notification), as shown in Figure (δ). , the right-hand hit instruction performance 852 (second right-hand hit notification) is switched and displayed (time-saving entry notification performance 873 in FIG. 8(δ)).

Further, in this presentation example, while the time-saving rush notification presentation 873 is appearing, the menu display possible notification presentation 811 is displayed. At this time, the transmittance of at least a part of the effect display of the time-saving rush notification effect 873 (here, the effect display of at least any one of the character image 802, the character image 803, the right hit instruction effect 852, and the decorative pattern 801a) is set to It is preferable to set it higher than the menu display possible notification effect 811 (the menu display possible notification effect 811 is displayed with priority over the time-saving entry notification effect 873). In particular, it is preferable to make the menu displayable notification effect 811 stand out by increasing the transmittance of the effect display (here, the character image 803) that overlaps with the menu display possible notification effect 811. Further, in order to emphasize the advantageous state of right-handed players, it is preferable that at least the transmittance of the right-handed player instruction effect 852 is not made high (the transmittance is set to be the same as that of the menu displayable notification effect 811).

In addition, if the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation possible period, the menu screen shown in Figure (η), the adjustment screen 811c shown in Figure (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811b shown in Figure (η-2) will be displayed. Note that as shown in Figure (η-1), the adjustment screen 811c may include a background image related to the time-saving production mode, but in the case of this production example, the time-saving entry notification production is continuously displayed, and when customers are waiting. Since the pre-effect is not displayed, the adjustment screen 811c may include a background image related to the time-saving rush notification effect. For example, instead of the submarine image, an image related to the time-saving entry notification effect (for example, the character image 803) or a specific image for the support time-saving state may be displayed. Further, instead of the specific character 813 on the menu screen shown in FIG. 7(η), an image related to the time-saving entry notification effect (for example, the character image 803) or a specific image for the support time-saving state may be displayed. Thereby, even if the screen related to game settings is being displayed, it is possible to notify that the support time reduction state is in progress.

The advantage of this production example is that the "time-saving rush notification production" appears until the next game or the customer waiting production starts, so the support time-saving state lasts for a relatively long time. The point is that it can be clearly communicated.

(Customer waiting performance during support time reduction state)
In addition, in production example 1 and production example 2, the customer waiting performance (demo screen) in the time saving state due to support time reduction (support time reduction state) is replaced with the normal customer waiting performance (customer waiting performance in other game states other than the support time reduction state). ) A different customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect for the support state) may be displayed. Preferably, at least a customer waiting effect different from the customer waiting effect in the normal state is displayed. For example, at least a part of the presentation mode by one or more presentation means used for the customer waiting presentation can be made into a different presentation mode. For example, the display color of "CR Fujimaru-kun Senki" shown in Figure (ε) is different (at least part of the display content of the demo screen (demo movie) is different: part of the image display effect is different). , the light effects are different (part of the light effects are different, etc.) In this case, by displaying a different customer waiting effect (demonstration screen) than usual, it is shown that the support time is shortened even during the customer waiting effect. Can be notified.

Further, in the second example of presentation, a configuration in which a customer waiting presentation can be displayed has been described, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the customer waiting presentation itself is not displayed. Specifically, the time-saving rush notification effect is continued until the next game starts. The performance transition in this case is the one excluding the customer waiting performance (demonstration display) of (ε) from among (α) to (ζ) shown in FIG. 60.

(2. About irregular patterns)
(A) When the variable time related to the support short-time winning game ends, the main control unit 20 transmits a “variation stop command” as a production control command to the production control unit 24, and upon receiving this, the production control unit 24 It is recognized that the variable time has ended, and the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed (see step S452 in FIG. 13). However, if this fluctuation stop command is not correctly sent to the production control unit 24 due to some malfunction (noise, etc.) (if the production control unit 24 cannot correctly receive the fluctuation stop command), the decorative pattern is The special fluctuation state (for example, so-called "sway fluctuation") is entered into the support time reduction state. In other words, the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate, but the power support state due to the shortened support time is generated (the normal symbol fluctuation display game is executed as usual). In addition, when the shaking fluctuation remains and the machine is waiting for a customer (when the performance control unit 24 receives a customer waiting command), the shaking fluctuation is ended and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (determined stop display). ing. Specifically, a pre-waiting presentation is displayed and decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.

(Modified example of time saving mode transition)
In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving mode are first shifted to the common "time-saving mode 1" (which contributes to reducing the control burden), but in order to diversify the gameplay and performance, different You may shift to a time saving mode. For example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the mode is shifted to the time-saving mode 1, and in the case of the support time-saving, the mode is shifted to the time-saving mode 2. In this case, it is possible to shift to different time saving modes (fluctuating states) between the 4R time saving jackpot and the support time saving A which give the same number of time saving times. In this case, the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the final fluctuation of the time-saving jackpot and the final fluctuation of the support time-saving may be different. For example, the variation time of the final variation can be made shorter in support time reduction than in 4R time saving jackpot.
Further, the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving may be transferred to different time-saving modes. For example, in the time-saving state due to the 4R time-saving jackpot, the game progresses under a low-speed fluctuation state (for example, time-saving mode 1), and in the case of support time-saving A, the game is played under a medium-speed or high-speed fluctuation state (for example, time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3). ) to advance the game. In this case, the average processing time (game processing speed) related to the time saving mode can be made different between the jackpot time saving state (normal time saving state) and the time saving state due to support time saving (support time saving state) (normal variation (with different variation times or average variation times). As a result, the degree of freedom in playability and production is expanded, and these can be made more diverse. In this case, although the stopping movement patterns of the decorative patterns described later may be the same, it is preferable that they be different.

Moreover, when a specific support time reduction is won among the plurality of types of support time reduction, the mode may be shifted to a different time saving mode from the case where another support time reduction is won. For example, in the case of support time reduction A and support time reduction B that give finite time savings, the transition is made to time reduction mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) or time reduction mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state), and support time reduction C that gives infinite time reduction is time reduction. For example, the mode may be shifted to mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state). That is, it is possible to shift to a different time saving mode in part or all of the plurality of types of support time saving modes. In this case, it is preferable to shift to a fluctuating state in which the average consumption time (game consumption speed) is relatively short as the number of times of time reduction provided is relatively large and the time reduction support is won. For example, if support time reduction A, B, and C (number of time reductions are 100, 200, and 65535 times), if support time reduction A is won, time reduction mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state), and if support time reduction B is won, If the support time saving C is won, the time saving mode 2 (medium-speed fluctuation state) is entered, and if the support time saving C is won, the time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state) is entered.

(Game mode related to potential state)
In addition, when providing a potential state, data values that are different from Tcode and YJ (see FIG. 43) corresponding to other gaming states may be determined. Thereby, it is sufficient to provide a "probability mode" and a "probability performance mode" as the game mode and the performance mode. Although the variable probability mode according to the present embodiment has been described as a gaming mode corresponding to a "variable probability state", the present invention is not limited to this, and all or part of the variable probability mode may be used as a gaming mode corresponding to a "probability variable state". It can also be handled. In addition, the fluctuation state under the latent mode (potential state) is the same or almost the same as the normal mode, or at least slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuating state where the average digestion time is relatively long). It is preferable that

<Processing on the main control unit side: Figures 8 to 15>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment will be explained. The processing on the main control unit 20 side consists of an infinite loop main processing (main processing on the main control side: Figure 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (timer interrupt processing on the main control side: Figure 8). 9).

<12. Main control side main processing: Figure 8>
With reference to FIG. 8, main processing on the main control unit 20 side (main processing on the main control side) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of main control side main processing.

The trigger for starting main processing on the main control side is when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power outage or power abnormality, or when the control program goes out of control, and the watchdog timer (WDT) function is activated and the CPU may be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main control side main processing is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting processing necessary for starting the gaming operation as part of the power-on processing (step S011). ).

When the initial setting process in step S011 is finished, it is then determined whether the state is a transition state to a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed (step S014). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (the door open sensor 61 is ON (open detection)), the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned ON. If the gaming machine 1 is powered on while the operation is continued (both the setting key switch signal and RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change permissible state where the setting value can be changed is assumed as the conditions for transitioning to setting change mode are met. (setting change mode transition state).

If the setting change mode is in the transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process for managing the change operation of setting values (1 to 6 levels) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, check whether the setting value Nc (setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the internal RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). Determine whether or not. If the gaming operation is normal, the set value storage area stores any set value data (set value Nc) of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to settings 1 to 6. However, the setting value data may be damaged due to some kind of malfunction, and a value that does not correspond to any of settings 1 to 6 may be set (setting abnormal error). Therefore, if the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value 00H (here, setting 1).

When the initial value is returned or when the value is normal, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97. Thereafter, the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. Regarding the setting value during setting change (setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting value changes in the range of settings 1 to 6 in a cyclical manner, and the setting change is displayed on the setting display 97. The current settings are displayed. If the ON operation of the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed, it is assumed that the setting value has been finalized, and the current setting value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203. This exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to intra-area RAM clearing processing (step S031), which will be described later.

Note that the RAM clear switch 98 may be configured to function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any one of settings 1 to 6 can be selected. Alternatively, the setting key switch 94 may be configured to function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it is checked whether the setting value data (setting value Nc) in the setting value storage area is a normal value, and whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), a power re-on standby process (step S020) related to a RAM abnormality, which will be described later, is executed.

If there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, if it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM when the backup process is normally executed in the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9) to be described later. is set to Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where some kind of problem occurs and the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠5AH). Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), a power restart wait process is executed (step S020).

In the power restart waiting process of step S020, the game is controlled to a game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. Specifically, after sending a power restart command and clearing the backup flag BF, the WDT clearing process that clears the WDT until a power outage occurs and checking the ON state of the power abnormality signal (confirming the power outage) The process (power supply abnormality check process) is repeated. Note that when a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power outage is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. In addition, when the production control unit 24 receives a power-on command, a RAM error notification (power-on command production) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 saying "RAM error. Please turn on the power again and set the setting value to 1. ” is displayed, all the LEDs for presentation such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

If the power restart waiting process is executed and the game is stopped, turn the power on to the gaming machine 1 again and operate it so that it is set to the setting change mode transition state when the power is turned on again. Unless the change process (step S023) is executed, the currently occurring RAM error state cannot be resolved. In this embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the setting value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting abnormal error), the internal RAM clearing process of step S031, which will be described later, is executed. This clears virtually the entire area of the RAM 203 (excluding the RAM area related to performance display (RAM area outside the area)), which returns the RAM 203 to its initial state and eliminates the RAM error. ing.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear mode transition state is entered (step S025). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is operated OFF (do not operate to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is operated ON (setting key switch signal OFF). , RAM clear signal ON) When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, it is assumed that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the RAM clear mode transition state.

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clearing process, at least the out-of-area RAM area related to performance display out of the storage area of the RAM 203 and the storage area in the in-area RAM area except for the setting value storage area are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF, the checksum value, etc. that were set when the power was cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Also, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, a "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the production control section 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes an initialization notification performance to notify RAM clear, and sets the performance mode to "normal performance mode" as the performance mode in the initial state. That is, when the area RAM clearing process is executed, the game mode is set to the initial mode, normal mode, and the production mode is also set to a normal production mode related to the normal mode (for example, normal (normal A production mode), simple (normal B effect mode) or premium mode (usually C effect mode)).

After completing the intra-area RAM clearing process in step S031, an initial setting process when clearing the RAM (initial data setting process at power-on) is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process when the power is turned on, for example, a timer for transmitting a RAM clear signal (one of the security signals) is set to 30,000 ms, and the special symbols (special symbol 1 stop symbol, special symbol 1 stop symbol, Loss pattern data is set as special figure 2 stop pattern) data. Then, CTC setting processing (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether the current setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation allowed state). (Step S026). In the case of this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power to the device 1 is turned on, it is assumed that the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied, and the device is controlled to transition to the setting confirmation mode (see steps S014 to S026).

If it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: YES), a setting confirmation process (step S027) is executed to control the current setting value to a setting confirmation state where the current setting value can be confirmed. Then, a backup restoration process (step S028) is executed to restore the gaming process from the backup data backed up at the time of power outage. In the setting confirmation process in step S027, display processing is performed to display the current setting values on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display). The display of the set values is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process described above is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, if the power is simply turned on to the gaming machine 1, the backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and based on the backup data, the game at the time of backup is Resume processing.

After executing any of the above-mentioned settings change processing (step S023), area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC settings The process is executed (step S036). Here, CTC setting processing is executed to periodically generate a timer interrupt every 4 ms. As a result, from now on, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game is ready to start, the firing control signal (firing permission signal ES) that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from the OFF state (firing prohibited state) to the ON state (firing permitted state), and the game starts. A start command is sent to the production control section 24 (step S037). This allows the firing operation of the game ball from the firing device 32. Further, when the production control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initialization operation regarding the movable accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check regarding the movable accessory when the power is turned on.

Note that after executing the backup restoration process in step S028, and before executing the CTC setting process in step S036, necessary operations are performed to confirm whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally. The configuration may be such that the "operation confirmation setting process" can be executed. In this confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display mode of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d is changed to "all blinking" which periodically repeats all lights on and all lights off for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). display (operation confirmation display)” mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, display processing related to operation confirmation is performed in performance display monitor processing (step S102: out-of-area program) during main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, so the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process. ) or during the setting confirmation process (step S027), the performance display 99 does not display the base value at this stage. Taking advantage of this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance display 99 is configured to be usable as the setting display 97, and the performance display 99 is temporarily used as the setting display 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, the setting display 97 can be replaced by the performance display 99, which can contribute to reducing control burden and cost.

When the above-mentioned series of power-on processing is completed, an infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled to be in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, the CPU is set to an interrupt disabled state (step S040), and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In this various random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical value range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, random numbers for special symbol determination used in symbol drawings, random numbers for auxiliary winning lottery (random numbers for auxiliary winning determination used in auxiliary winning lottery, normal symbol determining random numbers used for auxiliary winning symbol lottery) random numbers) used to change the initial value (start value) (initial value random number for special symbol determination, initial value random number for assistance hit determination, etc.), random number for fluctuating pattern used to select fluctuating pattern, etc. Update.

After completing the above various random number updating processes (step S041), next, performance display monitor total division processing for out-of-area programs is executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor total division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor total division process in step S043 is finished, interrupts are enabled (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeated (main loop process). . The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes and performance display monitor total division processes, except while performing timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 9>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt processing is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power level supplied from the power board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power outage occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF←5AH), the checksum value is Backup processing is performed, including checksum calculation (in this case, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the internal RAM) and storage of the calculation results. The power abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power is shut off.

Next, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (times) used to control the gaming operations of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, input management processing is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, a winning counter for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on input information (detection information) from various sensors and switches installed in the gaming machine 1. (input data creation process). In addition, input data is also created here based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, predetermined error processing is performed in accordance with the abnormality in the error management process (step S089), which will be described later.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the setting value data is a normal value (a value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, an abnormality has occurred in the setting value data and a setting error is detected. Set the flag to ON state (5AH). Then, a setting value abnormality command is sent to the production control section 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, it uses the effect means to execute setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). Note that, when this setting abnormality check process is executed again, if the setting error flag is in the ON state, the process exits without doing anything.

Next, timer interrupt random number management processing is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, random numbers related to each variable display game are updated regularly. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for assistance hit determination is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and the random number counter is updated in one round. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Note that the internal lottery random numbers (jackpot determination random numbers) are generated by the random number generation circuit, so they are not updated here.

Next, error management processing is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on detection information related to various switches and sensors, status signals from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming operation, and whether or not an error has occurred is monitored. If so, an error command that can specify the error type is sent to the production control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. Moreover, when the error is canceled, an error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control section 24 to execute error cancellation processing.

Next, prize ball management processing is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the entered prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute a payout operation for the specified number of prize balls.

Next, normal symbol management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, processing necessary for the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol variable display operation) is executed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and when a game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for determining a support hit) necessary for the support win lottery is sent. The game information is stored as pending data (normal pattern action holding balls) up to the maximum number of pending memories (here, 4 pieces) (normal pattern holding memory processing). Then, when the predetermined starting conditions are met, a supplementary winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol operation holding ball, and based on the supplementary winning lottery result, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected and the normal symbol stop display mode (normal stopping symbol). Determine. Also, here, in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, if the symbol is in motion, create LED display data for the variable display, and if it is not in motion, create LED display data for the stop display (normally symbol display data update processing).

Next, a normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the normal electricity release game is executed based on the lottery result of the above-mentioned auxiliary winning lottery. Specifically, solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is generated and set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal based on the solenoid control data is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, and the operation pattern of the movable blade 47 is controlled. be done.

Next, special symbol management processing is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processing necessary for the special symbol variation display game is executed. This special symbol management process mainly includes reservation memory regarding special symbol activation reserved balls, pre-reading judgment, determining a pre-reading fluctuation pattern based on the pre-reading judgment result, jackpot lottery, determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation based on the jackpot lottery, special It performs processing related to determining stopping symbols, controlling the variable display operation of special symbols, setting transitions to gaming states, etc. Note that details of the special symbol management process will be described later using FIG. 10.

Next, special electric accessory management processing is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, processes necessary for winning games (big winning games, small winning games) are executed. The special electric accessory management process mainly performs processing related to execution control of the winning game based on the jackpot lottery result, setting of the destination gaming state after the jackpot game, etc. Note that details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later using FIG. 15.

Next, right-handed hit notification information management processing is executed (step S097). In this right-handed hitting notification information management process, when the game state is "advantageous for right-handed hitting" (during a winning game, in an electric support state (time saving state or variable probability state)), a control is performed to light up the right-handed hitting display device 39b. LED data is created to turn off the right-handed display device 39b when the game condition is "advantageous for left-handed players" (normal state).

Next, LED management processing is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. Control signals based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right hit notification information management process (step S097), etc. are output in this LED management process. be done.

Next, external terminal management processing is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various external terminal signals are created and output control is executed to the external device through the frame external terminal board 21.

Next, solenoid management processing is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094), the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the grand prize opening solenoid 52c are The output control of the excitation signal is executed for the excitation signal. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the opening door 52b are driven and controlled, and the opening/closing operation of the lower starting port 35 and the big prize opening 50 is realized.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitor processing belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor process, necessary processes related to calculation of a base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control are executed. In addition, type test signals are created and output processed here.

Next, the count value of WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt, and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the above steps S081 to S104 are completed, the timer interrupt process is ended and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<8. Special symbol management processing: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be explained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs a "special map 1 starting port check process" regarding the special map 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) (step S301), and then on the special chart 2 side (lower starting port 35 side). "Special figure 2 starting gate check process" related to this is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 starting opening check process and the special figure 2 starting opening checking process will be described later using FIG. 11.

When the starting port check process of steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the support time saving opening/closing game flag is determined (step S303). This "Support time saving opening/closing game flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not the supporting time saving opening/closing game is in progress, and if the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it means that the supporting time saving opening/closing game is in progress. If the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the support time saving opening/closing game is not in progress. In addition, in the case of small hit winning type support time saving, the support time saving opening/closing game flag can function as a "small winning game flag" which specifies whether or not a small winning game is being played.

If the support time saving opening/closing game flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303:≠5AH), then the state of the conditional device activation flag is determined (step S304). This "conditional device activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and the flag is When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

If the support time saving opening/closing game is in progress (step S303: = 5AH) or if the jackpot game is in progress (step S304: = 5AH), the process for changing the display of special symbols in steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and the step is continued. The process advances to special symbol display data update processing in S309. Therefore, during either the support time saving opening/closing game or the jackpot game, the special symbol variable display operation is not performed. That is, during the support time-saving opening/closing game or the winning game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is maintained as determined and displayed as the support time-saving symbol or the jackpot symbol.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the conditional device activation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304:≠5AH), that is, if the support time saving opening/closing game is not in progress or the jackpot game is not in progress (step S303:≠5AH, and step S304 :≠5AH), perform processing according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is: "Waiting (00H, 01H)," "Fluctuating (02H)," or "Checking (03H)." Then, any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) is performed, and when it is "fluctuation (02H)", special symbol fluctuation start processing (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and "changing" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in the process of variation (fluctuating display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the special symbol has finished changing and is stopped (confirmed) and being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). Through these processes, a special symbol variable display operation (a display operation that sets one set of a variation start and a variation stop) will be realized. Note that details of steps S306 to S308, which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later using FIGS. 12, 13, and 14A to 14B, respectively.

After completing any of the processes in steps S306 to S308, special symbol display data update process in step S309, which will be described later, is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (7-segment blinking display data that is fluctuating) is determined. ) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for a stop display (data for a 7-segment blinking display during a stop display) is created. The special symbol display data created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) in FIG. 9, and variable display and static display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. . As a result, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<9. Special figure 1 starting gate check process: Figure 11>
Referring to FIG. 11, the special figure 1 starting opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special drawing 1 starting gate check process. This special figure 1 starting hole check process plays a role as a winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a process related to reservation storage when a game ball enters the upper starting hole 34. It is mainly composed of processing related to read-ahead determination. In addition, the difference between the special figure 1 starting gate check process and the special figure 2 starting gate check process is whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. Substantially, the processing contents are the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the explanation will focus on the special figure 1 start opening check process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning ball (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When a winning of the upper starting opening 34 (special drawing 1 side starting opening) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether the number of special drawing 1 action pending balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4 balls). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting opening check process is exited without doing anything.

If the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is 4 or more, that is, if an over-winning that exceeds the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command that specifies an over-winning (for example, the special figure 1 B406H in case of special figure 2, B506H in case of special figure 2) is transmitted to the production control section 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls is not 4 or more, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of special figure 1 operation reservation balls (step S313), and step S314 Proceed to processing.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special symbol 1 action pending ball that has occurred this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, and random numbers for fluctuation patterns are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random values are stored in the reserved storage area of the internal RAM. This reservation storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation reservation ball (retention data), and this reservation storage area stores the above-mentioned various random numbers as reservation data. Until the first variable display operation is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the symbols are held and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are met (in the winning order). In addition, the above-mentioned holding storage area includes holding storage areas corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (the special figure 1 holding storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 holding area corresponding to the special figure 2). A storage area) is provided, each of which can store pending data for the maximum number of active pending balls.

Next, prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits prefetch determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command (step S315), and then, It is determined whether the "prefetch prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting a pre-reading determination, specifically, a condition for prohibiting a pre-reading notice. If the special figure 1 starting opening check process is in progress, the pre-reading prohibition condition for the special figure 1 activated pending ball is in effect, and if the special figure 2 starting opening check process is in progress, the pre-reading prohibition condition for the special figure 2 activated reserved ball is set. Determine whether the prohibition condition is met. In this embodiment, when the current gaming state is a gaming state with an electric support state (time saving state or variable probability state), that is, a gaming state in which the special drawing 2 action holding ball is likely to occur, 'special drawing 1 pre-reading is prohibited' In the case of a "gaming state with no electric support (normal state or potential state)", in other words, if it is a gaming state in which special drawing 1 activated pending balls are likely to occur, it is marked as 'special drawing 2 pre-reading prohibited'. There is. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, if the current gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the determination result becomes 'YES' as the special symbol 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that which of the special drawings 1 and 2 is prohibited from pre-reading can be determined according to the internal gaming state (gaming state determination number YJ) and/or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the above-mentioned special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the setting error flag determination process (step S317) and the process related to look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) are skipped, and the process of step S321 described below is skipped. Proceed to. In this case, the pre-reading judgment for the current special figure 1 activated pending ball will not be executed, and a winning command with pre-reading prohibited data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (starting entrance winning command described below). time random number determination process (see step S320)). As a result, the execution of the pre-read notice for the current operation-suspended ball is prohibited (the pre-read notice for the current operation-reserved ball is not executed).

If the special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317:=5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting abnormality error) has occurred, the process related to the prefetch determination (steps S318 to S320) is skipped, and the process in step S321 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the pre-reading judgment for the current operation pending ball is not executed, and a winning command having the pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the pre-reading notice is not executed. In other words, the prefetch prohibition data (9FH) is data that specifies that the process related to prefetch determination (steps S318 to S320) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317:≠5AH), a setting value command is transmitted and random number determination processing is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, the 'winning/losing lottery at the start of fluctuation' (described later) is performed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A 'look-ahead hit/fail determination' is performed to determine in advance the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12).

(Set value command)
The above-mentioned "setting value command" includes information that can identify the current setting value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to control the appearance of a preview effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the setting value. be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation pending ball occurs in the starting port check process. As a result, the performance control unit 24 can control the appearance of a preview performance related to the operation pending ball (for example, a setting suggestion performance related to a pre-read preview performance) based on correct setting value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first a "hit random number determination table" is acquired, and then a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the hit random number determination table, a winning/losing lottery (pre-read winning/losing determination) targeting the current operation pending ball is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning/losing result) is obtained.

(T-1. Hit random number determination table: Figure 20)
FIG. 20 shows an example of a winning random number determination table according to this embodiment. Figure 20 (A) shows the case where the support time reduction is provided on the special drawing 2 side, and Fig. 20 (B) shows the case where the support time reduction is not provided on the special drawing 2 side (since the lottery probability is 0, it is practically not provided). This table shows the winning random number determination table (including cases equivalent to those that are not given). Note that the "Support Time Reduction" in this embodiment is determined as a subject of a lottery. From this point of view, the lottery format related to the reduction in support time is referred to as the "winning/losing lottery target lottery format."

The above hit random number determination table includes a hit random number determination table (special figure 1 hit random number determination table) for the special figure 1 operation reserved ball (special symbol fluctuation display game 1) and a special figure 2 operation reserved ball (special symbol fluctuation display game 1). A winning random number determination table (winning random number determination table for special figure 2) corresponding to the symbol variation display game 2) is provided. That is, during the special figure 1 starting opening check process, the ``special figure 1 winning random number determination table'' is referred to, and during the special figure 2 starting opening checking process, the ``special figure 2 winning random number determination table'' is referred to. This winning random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the later-described "random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory object (step S410 in FIG. 12)".

These hit random number determination tables contain information for determining the type of win or loss (jackpot, short support time, or loss (may include small wins)) for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability or low probability). The determination area (judgment value) and the random number value for jackpot determination (size of random number for jackpot determination: 65536) are determined in association with each other, and depending on which determination value the random number value for jackpot determination belongs to, The winning/losing type is determined.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table (a table with at least a different jackpot lottery probability depending on settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6). (In the illustration, determination values for settings 1, 3, and 6 are representatively shown.) In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at low probability (probability increase rate: high probability / low probability) is the same for each setting value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that cannot be exceeded. For example, setting 6 "1/180 when low probability, 1/45 when high probability", setting 5 "1/184 when low probability, 1/46 when high probability", setting 2 "1/46 when low probability", etc. 196, high probability 1/49'' and setting 1 ``low probability 1/200, high probability 1/50'' to win the jackpot. Note that the probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

FIG. 20(B) is a random number judgment table for special drawing 2 when support time saving is not provided on the special drawing 2 side, but in this embodiment, it corresponds to the judgment value (65405 to 65535) of support time saving winning. All the data in the section is "00H". In other words, even if the random number value for jackpot determination belongs to "65405 to 65535", the winning result is forced to be "lose". In this way, if you later want to shorten the support time on the special map 2 side, you only need to change the data corresponding to the judgment value to "5AH" and change the entire data structure again. There is no need for this, and adjustments can be made easily when developing a new model or at the design and development stage.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, a special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'pre-read judgment' process, and here, the 'symbol at the start of fluctuation' process is performed when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. ``Lottery (Step S411 in FIG. 10, which will be described later)'' is determined in advance by ``pre-read symbol determination''.

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table" is selected according to the pre-read win/loss result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) to be processed this time. .

(T-2. Design table selection table: Figure 21)
This symbol table selection is determined based on the "symbol table selection table" shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the symbol table selection table includes symbol table selection tables corresponding to special symbol variation display game 1 and special symbol variation display game 2 (symbol table selection table for special symbol 1, symbol table selection table for special symbol 2). A table) is provided. For example, if the current change is on the side of special drawing 1 and the result of the lottery is "Support time saving", "Support time saving symbol table 1" is selected. These symbol table selection tables are also used when selecting a symbol table at the start of variation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 21, the above-mentioned "symbol table" includes a "jackpot pattern table", "support time-saving pattern table", and "loss pattern table" for determining the jackpot type, support time-saving type, and loss type. , each symbol table is provided corresponding to the special symbol type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later. In addition, in Figures 21 (a) and (b), when there is a short support time in the lottery target on the special map 2 side, in Figure 21 (b) and (c), there is no "short support time" in the lottery target on the special map 2 side. It shows the symbol table selection table for the case. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since no small winnings are provided, a "small winning symbol table" is not provided.

Then, the random value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery (pre-reading) for the current operation pending ball is The lottery result (pre-read symbol result) is obtained.

(T-3. Design table: Figures 22 to 24)
22 to 24 show the above-mentioned "jackpot symbol table", "support time saving symbol table", and "loss symbol table". As shown in Figures 22 to 24, the symbol table includes a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and a random value for special symbol determination (for example, a random value for special symbol determination). size: 200) is defined in association with the above. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the random number value for special symbol determination belongs to, and the special symbol determination data special stop symbol is used as data indicating the lottery result. The number and offset value for variation pattern selection (offset value shown) are acquired. In this embodiment, according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, see the "Design lottery rate" column in FIG. 4), the winning type (winning type: jackpot type (10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R time saving jackpot) ), the support time reduction type (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, and support time reduction C) and loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C)) are determined.

In addition, the above-mentioned "special symbol judgment data" is data that identifies the above-mentioned winning type, and specifically, the winning type (10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R time saving jackpot) and the support time reduction type (support time reduction This is data for identifying which of the winning types (loss A, loss B, loss C) has been won. This special symbol determination data is used in processes that require winning type information (for example, the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12, which will be described later), the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413), and the execution of jackpot games. It is used in control-related processing (special electric accessory management processing in FIG. 15).

In addition, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data that specifies the special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and the stop symbol type of the special symbol ('7 in this embodiment) is stored on the main control unit 20 side. It is used to specify the display mode of segment. In this embodiment, for example, even if the winning type is the same, depending on the judgment value, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, the display mode of '7 segments') ) may differ. In this way, even if the winning type is the same, by determining multiple types of special stop symbol numbers according to the random value for special symbol determination, even when looking at the special stop symbols displayed on the special symbol display device, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to distinguish what kind of jackpot or support time reduction he or she has won. Note that, like the special symbols, normal symbols are also provided with normal symbol determination data and normal stop symbol numbers.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "offset value for variation pattern selection" is data used to select a target variation pattern distribution table.

In addition, in the illustration, for convenience of explanation, the value of the special symbol judgment data special stop symbol number and the offset value for fluctuation pattern selection is expressed as "**H", but the appropriate values corresponding to each winning type are shown here. The value is determined.

(About other jackpot lottery formats)
In this embodiment, one or more types of "support time saving (time saving granting symbols)" that give a time saving state are provided for the "winning/losing lottery" that uses random numbers for jackpot determination, and the winning/losing lottery result and special symbol It is a lottery format in which the first "Support time reduction" is drawn by a "design lottery" using random numbers (a lottery format for winning and losing lottery). Specifically, this is a case where a predetermined determination area (winning area) related to support time reduction is provided in the winning random number determination table, and a "support time reduction symbol table" shown in FIG. 23 is provided as the symbol table. In the case of the winning/losing lottery target lottery format, since the jackpot and support time reduction are drawn independently, there is a feature that even if the jackpot lottery probability changes, the support time reduction lottery probability does not change (see FIG. 20).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lottery formats are possible. Specifically, the following "lottery format for winning type (FIG. 25)" and "lottery format for losing type (FIG. 29)" may be used.

(“Lottery format for winning type”: Figure 25)
"Lottery format for winning type" is, as shown in Figure 25, a lottery format in which a support time reduction is provided for the winning type (a winning type that belongs to a jackpot or a small win), and the support time reduction is treated as a winning type that belongs to "win". be. Specifically, this is a case where a judgment area related to one or more types of support time reduction is provided in the jackpot symbol table or the small prize symbol table (see FIG. 28). One or more types of support time reduction can be provided for the winning type on the special figure 1 side and/or the special figure 2 side. In addition, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the explanation will focus on the special figure 1 side, and the explanation of the special figure 2 side will be omitted. In addition, regarding the details of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery, content that is substantially the same as the content already explained will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

In this winning type lottery format, first, either a "big hit" or a "loss" is determined by a lottery. This winning/losing lottery is performed based on the winning random number determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the random numbers for jackpot determination. As shown in the figure, the winning random number determination table of this example does not include a winning area for shortening support time.

Next, a symbol table is selected based on the result of the lottery. In this example, the symbol table selection table shown in FIG. 27 is referred to, and the symbol table corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is selected. In this example, since the winning type includes support time saving, a "support time saving symbol table" like the above embodiment is not provided, but "jackpot symbol tables 1 and 2" for when winning a jackpot, and "jackpot symbol tables 1 and 2" for winning a loss. ``Loss symbol tables 1 and 2'' are provided for times when the game loses.

Next, by drawing a symbol, one of the winning types belonging to the jackpot, for example, on the special drawing 1 side, one of the winning types (symbol type ) to determine. This symbol lottery is performed based on the symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination. FIG. 28 shows a jackpot symbol table according to this example (the losing symbol table is omitted because it is the same as FIG. 24). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "symbol lottery rate" shown in FIG.

In the case of the winning type lottery format, since the support time saving belongs to the jackpot type, the probability of winning depends on the jackpot lottery probability. In other words, when the probability is high (for example, in a variable probability state), the lottery probability of shortening support time also increases (in a state in which the probability of reducing support time is variable). For example, when the probability of winning the jackpot is low (normal state, time saving state), the lottery probability for shortening support time (settings 1 to 6) is approximately 1/1333 to 1/1200, but when the probability is high ( When the state becomes (variable state, potential state), the lottery probability of shortening the support time also increases and becomes about 1/333 to 1/300 (the same increase rate as the jackpot lottery probability).

(“Loss type lottery format” (variation example 2 of lottery format): Figure 29)
Next, the "loss type target lottery format" will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 29, the "loss type target lottery format" is a lottery format in which support time reduction is provided as a loss type and support time reduction is treated as a winning type belonging to "loss". Specifically, this is a case where a determination area related to one or more types of support time reduction is provided in the losing symbol table (see FIG. 30). One or more types of support time reduction can be provided for the winning type on the special figure 1 side and/or the special figure 2 side.

This lottery format for loss type treats support time reduction as a form of "lose", which is different from the above-mentioned "winning type lottery form" where support time reduction is treated as a form of "win". different. However, the contents of the lottery processing procedure itself are substantially the same.

In this lottery format for loss types, first, either a "jackpot" or a "loss" is determined by a lottery. This winning/losing lottery is performed based on the winning random number determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the random numbers for jackpot determination.

If a "loser" is drawn in the lottery, the winning type that belongs to the loser will be determined by the symbol lottery, for example, if it is on the special drawing 1 side, one of the winning types from "loser A to C and support time reduction A to C" (Design type). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "symbol lottery rate" shown in FIG. 29. FIG. 30 shows a losing symbol table according to this example (the jackpot symbol table is omitted because it is the same as FIG. 22 of the above embodiment (winning/losing lottery form). Which winning type is determined is determined according to the "symbol lottery rate" shown in FIG. 29.

However, in the case of the lottery format for loss type, if the size of the random number for special symbol determination (the numerical range that the random number can take) is small, for example, the size of the random number for special symbol determination is 200 (0 to 199). In this case, the probability of winning for short support hours can only be lowered to 1/200 of the winning probability of losing, and there is a lack of freedom in adjusting the probability of winning for short support hours.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in the figure, the size of the random number for special symbol determination is set to 16384 (0 to 16383) to allow flexibility in adjusting the winning probability of shortening support time. Here, the relationship is ``the size of the random number for special symbol determination used in the jackpot symbol lottery (200)<the magnitude of the special symbol determination random number used in the losing symbol lottery (5000).'' Of course, depending on the gameplay, the special symbol determination random numbers used for the jackpot symbol lottery may also be used for the losing symbol lottery.

In the case of the lottery format for the loss type, since the support time reduction belongs to the loss type, the winning probability depends on the loss lottery probability. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery probability reaches a high probability, the probability of losing the lottery decreases accordingly, so contrary to the case of the above-mentioned lottery format for winning types, the lottery probability of shortening support time decreases. For example, when the probability of winning the jackpot is low, the lottery probability for shortening support time (settings 1 to 6) is about 1/500, but when the probability is high, the lottery probability for shortening support time decreases, and about The probability is lower than 1/500.

A feature of the lottery format for loss types is that a bonus can be obtained even though the lottery is a "lose". For example, as shown in FIG. 41, a configuration may be adopted in which the loss variation pattern distribution table includes a variation pattern distribution table related to support time-saving winnings (a configuration in which a variation pattern related to support time-saving winnings can be selected). Note that the parts omitted with "..." have the same content as the normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. 32 according to this embodiment, and are omitted for convenience of explanation. . Similarly, other loss variation pattern distribution tables (FIGS. 34, 36, 38, 40, etc.) can be configured to allow selection of variation patterns related to support time saving winnings.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the support time reduction is won, the reach variation is selected in the same way as when the winning is successful. However, for the variation pattern designation command, the command data belonging to the loss is selected. This is because the support time reduction belongs to the loss. As a result, in terms of performance, during the symbol fluctuation display game, the same preview performance (performance according to the loss performance scenario) as when you lose appears, but in the end, it is a surprising performance that says "You win to shorten the support time". can be made to appear. In addition, at the final stage of the reach performance, the same winning performance (success performance) as at the time of winning the jackpot may appear even though it is a loss. Furthermore, the performance mode may be different from that at the time of winning the jackpot.

Which of the "Lottery format for winning type (FIG. 25)" and "Lottery format for losing type (FIG. 29)" according to the above-mentioned modification, and "Lottery format for winning/losing lottery (FIG. 4)" of this embodiment Although it is up to you to choose the lottery format, it is preferable to adopt the "winning lottery format (FIG. 4)", and more preferably the "loss type lottery format (FIG. 29)". The reason for this is that in the case of the "Lottery format for winning types (Figure 25)", the support time reduction is treated as belonging to the winning type, so especially if it belongs to the jackpot type, "the jackpot will be won through the winning lottery". This becomes a condition for winning the support time reduction, and it gives the player a feeling of loss (for example, a feeling of disappointment that ``Even though I won the jackpot, I won the support time reduction with a low profit level''). It is.

In addition, if there is only one type of support time reduction in any lottery format, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery. In addition, a time-saving state will be granted based on the jackpot lottery related to a specific special pattern (either special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) among the jackpot drawings related to multiple special patterns (special pattern 1, 2). It may be configured as follows. For example, among the special drawings 1 and 2, "support time reduction" can be provided only for the lottery target of the jackpot drawing on the special drawing 1 side.

Further, although a common symbol table may be provided for all settings, symbol tables may be provided according to setting values. For example, it can be configured as shown in (A) and (B) below.
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or more winning types differs in some or all of the set values. For example, the symbol lottery rate of a specific probability variable jackpot (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot) can be determined such that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability becomes relatively.
(B) For all or part of each setting value, the variable probability entry rate (total symbol lottery rate of at least a jackpot with a high probability state (probable variable jackpot and/or potential probability jackpot)) is different. In the case of this embodiment, the probability change entry rate is set at 65%, which is common to all settings (see the symbol lottery probability of 10R probability variation jackpot and 4R probability variation jackpot in Figure 4), but the probability variation entry rate of settings 1 to 6 is set to 65%, which is common to all settings. It can be set such that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability is (easier to enter a probability change), such as "60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%". The same applies to the time-saving entry rate (total symbol selection rate of time-saving jackpot).
In any case, it is sufficient to set the ball payout performance (machine rate) to be more advantageous to the player as the set value becomes higher.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11. When the above-described special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 is finished, the starting opening winning time random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This random number determination process at the time of winning the starting opening is also performed as part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, the 'fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation' when the current operation pending ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is determined. Perform a 'look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination' that is determined in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, the results of the pre-read symbol determination obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning/losing lottery results obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the fluctuation pattern data obtained in step S314 are used. A random number (size of random number: 10,000) is used to pre-read and determine the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" regarding the current operation pending ball. Note that pre-reading pattern determination is to determine the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, so a "pre-reading determination table" is separately provided that has the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Do this by referring to However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, a fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided for "both the time of winning (at the time of look-ahead determination) and the time of fluctuation start" (MODE 1 as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32). , MODE2, EVENT), both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is read in advance based on this fluctuation pattern distribution table and the random value for fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314. judge.

Then, "winning command data" is obtained as the pre-reading determination result. Here, as the command data that constitutes the winning command, the command data on the "MODE1 (1st byte (upper byte))" side that can identify whether it is a win or a loss, and the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern can be identified. The command data on the EVENT (second byte (lower byte)) side is acquired.In other words, the command data determined in the random number judgment process at the time of winning the starting opening is used to determine the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the information on the number of pending balls). ) will be specified.

Regarding the above-mentioned "random number determination process (step S320) at the time of winning the starting opening," in order to make it easier to understand the present invention, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. The explanation will be given not only at the time of determination) but also the content at the start of variation (special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12).

The starting opening winning time random number determination process includes the following processes (a) and (b) as a process for determining a "winning command" for specifying a look-ahead fluctuation pattern.
(a) Refer to the “variable pattern distribution table selection table (not shown)” for selecting a variable pattern distribution table, and determine the “winning time fluctuation pattern” that will be referred to this time. "Distribution table determination process"
(b) Refer to the "variation pattern distribution table" determined in (a) above, and determine the winning command data corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern based on the random value for variation pattern acquired in the process of step S314. ``Winning command data determination processing (pre-reading variation pattern determination processing)''.

(Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table (at the time of winning): not shown)
The above-mentioned "fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table" includes multiple types of "fluctuation pattern distribution tables" associated with the special symbol type, winning type, number of active pending balls, and fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode). It is determined. The variable pattern distribution table selection table has multiple types of variable pattern distribution tables (FH1 to 7) based on the special symbol type, winning type, number of balls on hold, and variable pattern selection mode (Tcode). The configuration is such that any one "variation pattern distribution table" can be determined.

This variation pattern distribution table selection table is used not only to determine the "win command" at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment), but also to process ( It is also used in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12, which will be described later, and serves as a common variation pattern distribution table selection table at the time of winning and at the start of variation. However, at the time of look-ahead determination (the above-mentioned "Winning variation pattern distribution table determination process"), the number of pending balls is ignored (the number of pending balls is set to zero), and the purpose is selected from the above variation pattern distribution table selection table. (This will be described later). On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, the value obtained by subtracting the number of active pending balls to be used for the current fluctuation display operation from the existing active pending balls (number of active pending balls - 1) is referred to as information on the active pending ball number (Figure 32 (See steps S403 and S413 of the special symbol fluctuation start process in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

(Fluctuating pattern distribution table (at the time of winning))
Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern distribution table will be explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to normal mode shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be used as a representative example. Fig. 31 shows the "Normal mid-win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" that is referred to when a jackpot or support time-saving winning occurs in the normal mode (normal state), and Fig. 32 shows the "normal mid-hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" that is referred to when losing in the normal mode. ``Normal-medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table'' is shown.

Referring to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the normal mode includes the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FB1 to FB6" for winning and the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH7" for losing. and is included. These fluctuation pattern distribution tables are provided as tables for both the time of look-ahead determination and the time of start of fluctuation. Therefore, the following data groups are defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table.

(B) The fluctuation pattern distribution table contains the command data ("MODE1" shown in the figure) on the upper byte (1st byte) side for configuring the "winning command" that specifies the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte ("MODE1" in the figure). The command data ("EVENT" in the figure) on the second byte) side and a random number value for a variation pattern (size of random number number for a variation pattern: 10000) are defined in association with each other. The above "MODE1" is command data that can specify whether it is a win or a loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the look-ahead variation pattern. At the time of look-ahead determination, this fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to (a lottery using the random value for the fluctuation pattern), the command for configuring the winning command is determined. Command data is now determined. As a result, a winning command is created and the contents of the prefetch variation pattern are specified. When this prize-winning command is sent to the effect control section 24, the effect control section 24 grasps the content of the pre-read variation pattern and uses it for effect processing regarding the pre-read notice.

(b) The variation pattern distribution table also defines data regarding a "variation pattern designation command" that specifies the variation pattern at the start of variation. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern distribution table includes command data ("MODE2" in the figure) on the upper byte (1st byte) side and the lower byte (2nd byte) side for configuring the fluctuation pattern specification command. The command data ("EVENT" in the figure) and the random number value for the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. The above "MODE 2" is command data that can specify whether it is a win or a loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation pattern distribution table is also referred to at the start of fluctuation (see special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12 described later), and a fluctuation pattern designation command is constructed by lottery using random numbers for fluctuation patterns. The command data for the command is determined. As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command (upper byte MODE2+lower byte EVENT) is created, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation are specified. The “fluctuation pattern designation command” is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of “MODE2” and “EVENT” in the same way as the winning command, and when this fluctuation pattern designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, On the performance control unit 24 side, the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is grasped and used for performance processing regarding the performance during symbol fluctuation.

Although the illustration shows "selection rate," in reality, the judgment area (judgment value: 0 to 9999), and these command data are determined depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to.

The relationship between the random number value for the fluctuation pattern and the judgment value is as follows. For example, to explain the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1" shown in FIG. They are listed in the order of "10", "8990", and "1000", but this content means that the random number value for fluctuation pattern (BRND = 0 to 9999) is within the judgment value range of 0 to 9 (the above "10"). If it belongs to the judgment value range of 10 to 8999 (corresponding to the entry column of "8990" above), the command data specifying "normal fluctuation 13s" is selected. If the command data that specifies is selected, and the judgment value falls within the range of 9000 to 9999 (corresponding to the column for writing ``1000'' above), the command data that specifies ``N reach 1'' is selected. . In the case of this embodiment, the blank part in the figure, that is, the address where the determination value is stored, does not mean that no determination value data is stored, but "0" is stored as the determination value. This is to facilitate adjustment of the selection rate when developing a new model or at the design and development stage.

To explain this using a simple example, for example, in the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1", judgment values are distributed to normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, and N reach 1. If it is desired to additionally select 8s, it will be necessary to change the entire data structure again, and the design may have to be restarted from scratch. Further, although not shown in the figure, if a variation pattern distribution table is provided for each setting value, it may be necessary to change the data structure of all these tables. Generally, when developing a new model, various judgment values are set and the design is made while adjusting the judgment values in consideration of the balance of fluctuation time (suppression of fluctuation slump) and the balance of effects such as reach effects. go. Therefore, the design may be based on the initially set determination value, or it may be necessary to make changes.

Therefore, in the design stage, we temporarily set "0 (zero)" as the judgment value data in the storage address of the judgment value of the variation pattern that is considered not to be selected, and if there is a change, we change the value as appropriate. is changed so that it can be easily included in the variation pattern of the selection target. For example, the judgment value data of the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1" actually includes normal variation 4s "0", normal variation 8s "0", normal variation 13s "10", normal variation 16s "8990", Data including a zero (blank part in the figure) such as normal fluctuation 16s for advance notice "0", N reach 1 for advance notice 1 "0", and N reach 1 "1000" is stored.

In the case of this embodiment, when losing A is won, as shown in the figure, N reach 2 and later are defined as fluctuation patterns that are not eligible for selection, so in each of "FH1" to "FH4", normal fluctuation 4s to N Judgment value data including "0" within the address range (consecutive addresses here) related to reach 1 is stored (of course, the selection target may be a variation pattern after N reach 2). Even when the judgment value is "0", the lottery process (determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) is executed, but the fluctuation pattern with the judgment value of zero is actually selected. Therefore, in practice, it can be registered as an "unused variation pattern". If it is necessary to adjust this "judgment value zero" part during the design stage, etc., by setting a value other than zero, you can change the "variation pattern not to be used" to "variation pattern to be selected". , can be easily modified. In this way, for fluctuation patterns that are not used, the judgment value is left as zero, and when developing a new model, by assigning the same addresses as those at the development stage, the table data structure can be changed one by one. There is no need to make any changes, making design changes extremely easy. Note that the same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables.

As described above, in the variation pattern distribution table, the command data that constitutes the "winning command" is determined at the time of winning depending on which judgment value the random value for variation pattern belongs to, and at the time of the start of variation. The command data constituting the "variation pattern designation command" is determined.

Here, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the target variation pattern distribution table is selected by ignoring the number of pending balls (the number of pending balls being released is set to zero) when making a look-ahead determination. The reason for this is described below. That's right.

The fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in Figure 32 is a table that can be used both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation (the same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables), but in reality, it is used for the number of balls on hold at the time of winning and the time at the start of fluctuation. It does not necessarily match the number of pending operations. Therefore, at the time of look-ahead determination (at the time of winning), the number of balls on hold is set to zero, and the target variation pattern distribution table is selected. For example, referring to FIG. 32, when the current gaming state is normal (Tcode=00H), the operation pending ball to be read ahead this time is on the special symbol 1 side, and the winning type is loss A (special (Loss A win on the side shown in FIG. 1), the variable pattern distribution table "FH1" will be selected regardless of the number of active pending balls at the time of winning.

However, just because the number of pending pitches at the time of look-ahead judgment and the number of pending pitches at the start of fluctuation do not match, it is not possible to blindly ignore the number of pending pitches and judge the look-ahead variation pattern. There is a possibility that there will be a big difference between the content of the fluctuation pattern and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation. To be more specific, when winning a prize, the main control section 20 sends a "winning command" including pre-read fluctuation pattern information to the production control section 24, and upon receiving this, the production control section 24 executes the command based on the pending addition command. , performs performance control regarding advance notice performance. On the other hand, at the start of the fluctuation, the main control section 20 sends a "fluctuation pattern designation command" containing the fluctuation pattern information at the time of the start of fluctuation to the performance control section 24, and upon receiving this, the performance control section 24 processes the fluctuation pattern designation command. Based on this, performance control is performed including a decorative pattern variable display operation performance (decorative pattern variable display performance (decorative pattern performance to be described later)) and a notice performance (a notice performance during variation) during a decorative pattern variable display game. Based on this relationship, if there is a large difference between the content of the look-ahead variation pattern and the content of the variation pattern at the start of variation, the relationship between the content of the look-ahead notice and the content of the notice during change will collapse, and the reliability of the notice performance will be affected. There is a risk that the fun will be reduced and the player's desire to play will be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the following characteristic element (first characteristic element) is provided for the look-ahead determination.

(First characteristic element)
For example, if the current gaming state is normal, and the pending ball to be read ahead this time is on the special chart 1 side, and the winning type is loss A (special chart 1 side loss A), as described above, At the time of look-ahead determination, the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of pending pitches. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected depending on the number of pending balls (column "00H (normal), special chart 1, loss A" in Fig. 32). reference).

Here, referring to FIG. 32, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH3 to FH4", "normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s", etc. belonging to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern) type can be selected ( (determinable), but these are defined as "non-pre-reading notice variation pattern types" in which the pre-reading notice is not executed. Specifically, this non-pre-reading notice variation pattern is a pre-reading variation pattern such as "Not eligible for the pre-reading notice lottery" or "Eligible for the pre-reading notice lottery, but the probability of winning is zero (pre-reading notice not executed)" be. In this embodiment, among the normal variation types, the only one that is subject to the look-ahead notice is the "normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" that can be selected in the case of loss B (see FH5).

Further, in the variation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in addition to "normal variation 13s and normal variation 16s" belonging to the normal variation type, N reach 1 belonging to the N reach type can be selected. Here, simple "N reach 1" is different from N reach 1 for lookahead notice and belongs to the above-mentioned variation pattern for non-lookahead notice. Therefore, if you win the special drawing 1 side losing A in the regular, at the time of winning ("FH1" is selected at the time of look-ahead determination), the fluctuation pattern that is the target of the look-ahead notice (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) never selected. In other words, there is a case where different fluctuation patterns are determined at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation, for example, a case where it is determined that N reach is 1 at the time of look-ahead determination, and it is determined that it is normal fluctuation at the time of start of fluctuation. However, in the case of a loss A on the special drawing 1 side during normal play, no particular problem occurs because the pre-read notice does not appear. It should be noted that the structure does not necessarily have to be such that no look-ahead notice appears at all, and a problem will arise especially if the look-ahead notice rarely appears when normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1 is selected. It is thought that there is no. For example, at least any one of the normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, and N reach 1 can be used as the pre-read notice variation pattern. Preferably, "normal variation 13s" and/or "N reach" have a relatively low probability of selection rate, and more preferably "normal variation 13s" has the lowest selection rate. However, in this case, in order to prevent the pre-read notice from appearing excessively, the appearance rate of the pre-read notice (probability of winning the pre-read lottery) is higher than "Normal variation 16s for pre-read notice" and/or "N Reach 1 for pre-read notice". It is preferable to set the probability to be low.

Also, as shown in Figure 32, if you win on the special drawing 1 side losing B (normal medium special drawing 1 side losing B) or when you win the special drawing 1 side losing C (normal medium special drawing 1 side losing C), as shown in FIG. ), or if you win the losing A on the special drawing 2 side (normally the winning on the special drawing 2 side), both at the time of winning and at the start of the fluctuation, regardless of the number of pending balls, each is the same. The loss variation pattern distribution tables "FH5", "FH6", and "FH7 (common to all losses)" are selected. In other words, when making a pre-read judgment when winning a regular medium special drawing 1 side loss B, a normal medium special drawing 1 side loss C, or a winning special drawing 2 side loss A, the number of pending balls for each operation is used both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation. Since the common fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to in the table, it is possible to accurately pre-read and determine the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation.

(Regarding the second characteristic element)
Generally, even without an electric support, the number of balls on hold can change by about 1 or 2 in a relatively short period of time. If this is used to configure a variable pattern that can be selected according to the number of balls on hold, the production time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) will change for each symbol variation display game, allowing for a variety of productions. It is possible to generate In particular, if the average execution time (symbol fluctuation time) of one symbol fluctuation display game at the time of a loss is short (for example, about a few seconds), the so-called "fluctuation slump" (symbol fluctuation display game is not being executed) The occurrence rate of ``periods'' increases, making it easier for players to feel that ``it's not fun or interesting,'' leading to a decrease in interest in the game and a decrease in the repeat rate of the game. Therefore, it is thought that if the average execution time of one symbol variation display game is lengthened, the number of pending balls can be accumulated more easily, and the occurrence rate of variation slump can be reduced.

However, if the execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game is made to be unnecessarily long, the progress speed of the game will slow down, the performance during the fluctuation will be slow, and the tension of winning the jackpot due to the preview performance will be interrupted. This gives players a sense of boredom and dissatisfaction. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game is unnecessarily extended, an overflow of the activated reserved balls (starting prize winning exceeding the maximum reserved memory number (4)) will easily occur, in other words, the right to execute the game will be lost. There is a risk that the player will lose a lot of money and lose his or her desire to play. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a well-balanced execution time for the symbol variation display game. For example, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that takes into account the number of balls on hold at the start of the variation, the game state, etc. In particular, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that focuses on the failures that players often encounter during the course of the game.

In view of such problems, in this embodiment, the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 32 has a characteristic configuration. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given focusing on the "loss variation pattern distribution table 'FH1 to FH7'" which is selected in the case of a winning result.

<A. Features of the fluctuation pattern distribution table for winning during regular losses>
In this embodiment, the loss types include multiple types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C. (See the remarks column in Figure 4). Here, as shown in FIG. 32, if the special drawing 1 side loss A is won, one of the variable pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected depending on the number of balls on hold. However, if you win the special figure 1 side loser B, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected regardless of the number of active pending balls, and even if you win the special figure 1 side loser C, the number of active pending balls Regardless, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected. Further, even when winning on the special drawing 2 side, the common variable pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the number of pending balls.

These variable pattern distribution tables (FH1 to FH7) related to winnings during regular losses have the following characteristics (α) to (Δ). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variation pattern distribution table that is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold will also be referred to as a "common variation pattern distribution table."

(A-1. Variation pattern distribution table related to winning of special drawing 1 side normal medium losing A (variation pattern distribution table by number of reservations) "FH1 to FH4")
(α) Each of the loss variation pattern distribution tables “FH1 to FH4” has at least “a plurality of types of normal variations available for selection”. Specifically, when "FH1" is selected, normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1 (variation time 26s) may be selected, and when "FH2" is selected , normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1 may be selected. In addition, when "FH3" is selected, there is a possibility that normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s is selected, and when "FH4" is selected, normal fluctuation 4s or normal fluctuation 8s is selected. There is a possibility that The normal fluctuation 16s belongs to the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" which has the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types, and the normal fluctuation 4s belongs to the "shortest normal fluctuation (shortest normal fluctuation pattern) type" which has the shortest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types. It belongs to the "normal fluctuation pattern) type". In this embodiment, the "normal variation 16s", which has a variation time that is approximately the same as the "normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice", has a different selection rate depending on the number of active pending balls (the number of pending memories). It has a configuration that allows selection (decision).
Note that (Z1) the present invention can include a loss variation pattern distribution table in which the longest normal variation and/or the shortest normal variation can be selected at different selection rates depending on the number of pending pitches. (Z2) The present invention also provides a first specific variation pattern (for example, a normal variation of 16 seconds) and a shortened variation pattern (for example, a normal variation of 4 seconds) with a shorter variation time than the first specific variation pattern, depending on the number of balls on hold. , normal variation 8s or normal variation 13s), and a variation time that is approximately the same as the variation time of the first specific variation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold. It is possible to include a second loss variation pattern distribution table that can determine a second specific variation pattern (for example, 16s of normal variation for look-ahead notice). (Z3) The present invention also provides a first loss variation pattern distribution table that can determine the first specific variation pattern (for example, normal variation 16s) at different selection rates depending on the number of balls on hold; a second loss variation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific variation pattern (for example, a normal variation of 16 seconds for look-ahead notice) having a variation time that is substantially the same as the variation time of the first specific variation pattern without depending on the can be included. In this case, the selection rate of the first specific variation pattern (normal variation 16s) can be configured to be different for each number of active pending balls.

Therefore, if we focus on the overall picture of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", when winning a loss (in this embodiment, loss A), which the player often encounters in the course of the game, the number of balls on hold is relatively low. If there are many (2 to 3 pending balls), a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected, and if there are relatively few activated balls (0 to 1 pending), the variation pattern will have a relatively short variation time. Relatively long fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, the fluctuation time can be appropriately slowed down, contributing to a reduction in the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump, and the player feels as if the balls on hold are accumulating and spinning. In addition, in the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", the normal variation is selected with a high probability, and as the number of pending balls decreases, the probability of selecting the reach variation becomes higher. The reach variation to be selected is "N reach (reach variation with a relatively short variation time)" which belongs to the low expected reach. This prevents the expectation of winning from being incited in the event of a loss. According to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" according to the present embodiment, a well-balanced structure that contributes to a reduction in the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump and does not recklessly arouse the expectation of winning in the event of a loss. It becomes possible to generate a symbol variation display game.

In addition, in the loss variation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", "reach variation (reach variation)" can be selected, in other words, reach variation is selected when the number of pending balls is relatively small. Although this configuration is possible, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach variation can be selected only in the variation pattern distribution table "FH1", that is, a configuration in which the reach variation is selected only when the number of pending pitches is the smallest. Further, in the variation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", only the normal variation may be selected.

In this embodiment, when normal fluctuation types are distinguished by the length of fluctuation time, fluctuation patterns of 10 seconds or more, such as normal fluctuation 16s type and normal fluctuation 13s type, are treated as "long fluctuation patterns" whose fluctuation time is relatively long. . On the other hand, fluctuation patterns of less than 10 seconds, such as the normal fluctuation 4s type and the normal fluctuation 8s type, are treated as "short fluctuation patterns" whose fluctuation time is relatively short. The reason for this distinction is that in a general pinball game machine, if the game ball is continuously fired for about 10 seconds, it is thought that a ball with suspended operation will occur with a high probability. In the case of this embodiment, short fluctuation patterns include normal fluctuations 4s and 8s that can be selected during normal fluctuations, as well as normal fluctuations that can be selected during definite fluctuations (normal fluctuation 2s during small series, small fluctuation 8s). There are normal fluctuations that can be selected during time reduction (such as 8s of normal fluctuation during time reduction, etc.: see Figure 34), and normal fluctuations that can be selected during time reduction (such as 4s of normal fluctuation during time reduction, 8s of normal fluctuation during time reduction, etc.: see Figure 40). It is likely to be selected when there is a large number of balls currently in play, or in a gaming state involving an "electrical support state" where balls in play are likely to occur.

(β) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" are determined such that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern with the highest selection rate (high frequency fluctuation pattern) among the fluctuation patterns determined by each is different ( The fluctuation time of the high-frequency fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of balls on hold). Specifically, regarding the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is long in this order of "FH4 (pending 3), FH3 (pending 2), FH2 (pending 1), FH1 (pending 0)". It is determined that it will become. In other words, it is determined that as the number of pending balls decreases, the fluctuation time of the high-frequency fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long. In the case of this embodiment, the high frequency fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern)" (high frequency normal fluctuation pattern), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1" is used. In case of , "normal fluctuation is 16 seconds", in case of "FH2", "normal fluctuation is 13 seconds", in case of "FH3", "normal fluctuation is 8 seconds", and in case of "FH4", "normal fluctuation is 4 seconds". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is selected, the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) is "FH4 (on hold 3), FH3 (on hold 2), FH2 (Pending 1), FH1 (Pending 0)'' in this order, the average fluctuation time is determined to be a long time. In other words, it is determined that the average fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of pending balls decreases.

(A-2. Common fluctuation pattern distribution table when winning regular medium special drawing 1 side losing B: "FH5")
(γ) The loss variation pattern distribution table “FH5” allows selection of variation pattern types with winning expectations of “less than SPSP reach type (highest expected reach type)”. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to the N reach type and the SP reach type, the "longest normal variation type" which has the longest variation time among the normal variation types can be selected. Specifically, the "SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach)" which has a higher winning expectation than the "SP reach type" (has a longer fluctuation time than the SP reach type) is not selected. The average fluctuation time when this loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected is relatively longer than the aforementioned loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4".

(A-3. Common fluctuation pattern distribution table when winning C on the normal medium special drawing 1 side loss C: "FH6")
(δ) In the loss variation pattern distribution table "FH6", at least the "SPSP reach type" can be selected, that is, the highest expected level reach variation type can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the table configuration is such that the reach variation with the longest variation time among the reach variations is selected. In the case of this embodiment, only the SPSP reach types (developed type SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach) can be selected, as shown in the figure. Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected is longer (the longest average fluctuation time ).

(Special figure 2 side common fluctuation pattern distribution table when winning in normal medium: "FH7")
(ε) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH7" is a fluctuation pattern distribution table when the special drawing 2 side loses and wins. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the normal variation type (here, normal variation 16s) is selected. That is, if a reach occurs during the special symbol variation display game 2 (during the special symbol variation 2) during normal play, the winning confirmation is notified at that time. The reason why there are fewer types of fluctuation patterns at the time of losing winnings on the special drawing 2 side than on the special drawing 1 side is as follows. During normal operation, there is no electric support, there are almost no prizes entered into the lower starting port 35, and it is rare for the special map 2 operation reserved ball to occur. Therefore, there is no need to be able to select a wide variety of variation patterns, and providing a wide variety of variation patterns blindly would lead to an increase in control burden.

The above-mentioned "fluctuation pattern distribution table related to losing winnings" can provide the following effects.

(A) The loss types include multiple types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C (the lottery probability is high or low). The relationship is "Loss A > Loss B > Loss C" (see the remarks column in Figure 4). In the present embodiment, by utilizing the relationship between the symbol lottery rates, in the case of winning the losing A in the normal mode, a plurality of short fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times are selected when there are relatively many pending balls. If there are relatively few balls on hold, a plurality of long fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times are likely to be selected. Furthermore, when losing A is won, reach variation is selected with a lower probability than when losing B or C is winning. As a result, a structure in which symbol fluctuations with long fluctuation times do not occur recklessly, in other words, an appropriate speed and speed are exhibited in the fluctuation time, which not only contributes to lowering the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump, but also allows balls to be held in action to accumulate and spin. It is possible to generate a well-balanced execution time of a symbol variation display game in which the player feels as if the player is playing the game (for example, see (α) to (δ) above).
(B) In addition, in the case of winning a loss A during normal play, the smaller the number of pending balls, the longer the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) becomes. In other words, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the average fluctuation time (for example, see (α) and (β) above). As a result, the execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game is not unnecessarily prolonged, the occurrence rate of fluctuation slump can be suppressed, and the occurrence rate of overflow of the operation-held ball can also be suppressed. Execution time can be incurred. This is particularly suitable during "normal play" where the stay period may be long in terms of game progress.
(Γ) Also, if you win loser A during normal times, normal variation will be selected with higher probability than reach variation, and if you win loser B, low expectation reach types (N reach and SP reach) will be selected with higher probability. is selected, and if you win the loss C, the high expectation reach type (advanced SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach) is selected with high probability (for example, see (α) to (δ) above). In other words, in most cases of losing, a performance related to the normal variation (normal variation performance) is displayed, and the reach performance can be made to appear at an appropriate frequency. This prevents players from becoming overly excited about their expectations of winning. In addition, interest in the game (expectation of winning) can be greatly increased by the highly anticipated reach performance that appears rarely.
(Δ) During probability variation or time saving, a common variation pattern distribution table is selected regardless of the type of loss and the number of pending pitches (see (ζ) above). This reduces the program capacity and significantly reduces the control burden.

(Third characteristic element)
In addition, in this embodiment, as already explained, "normal variation 16s for advance notice" and "N reach 1 for advance notice" are provided. These variation patterns are defined as pre-read notice variation patterns and have the following characteristics.
(A) As shown in FIG. 32, the variation time of "Normal variation 16s for lookahead notice" is approximately the same as the variation time of "Normal variation 16s" belonging to the variation pattern type for non-lookahead notice, and "Normal variation for lookahead notice The fluctuation time of "Reach 1" is approximately the same as the fluctuation time of "N Reach 1" which belongs to the non-pre-reading notice fluctuation pattern type. These fluctuation patterns belong to long fluctuation patterns. In the case of this embodiment, "16 seconds of normal variation for advance notice" and "16 seconds of normal variation" are defined as the longest variation time among the normal variation types (belonging to the longest normal variation type).
(B) Also, as shown in FIG. 32, "16s of normal fluctuations for look-ahead notice" and "16s of normal fluctuations" are the same type of fluctuation patterns, but the values of the winning commands are different. In addition, "N Reach 1 for advance notice" and "N Reach 1" are also the same type of variation pattern, but the values of the commands at the time of winning are different.
(C) “Normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice” and “Normal variation 16s” are variation patterns that belong to low expectation variation patterns (normal variation type, N reach type), and their winning expectations are almost the same. be. Similarly, "N reach 1 for advance notice" and "N reach 1" are fluctuation patterns that belong to the low expectation fluctuation pattern, and their winning expectations are also approximately the same.

The functions of the above-mentioned "Normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" and "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice" will be explained using the loss variation pattern distribution table in Figure 32, while touching on the relationship with the appearance control of lookahead notice. do.

Referring to FIG. 32, if losing A is won during the normal period, at the start of variation, loss variation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" (variation pattern distribution table by number of pending balls) according to the number of active pending balls. Normal variation 16s or N reach 1 can be selected. In addition, in rare cases, loss B (symbol lottery rate 4%) is won, but in this case, it is selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" (common fluctuation pattern distribution table), and the normal fluctuation 16s for advance notice is selected. Alternatively, "N reach 1 for advance notice" may be selected. Here, in the "normal mode" where the period of stay can be long during the game, the gaming situation that the player is most likely to encounter is the winning of loss A (symbol lottery rate of 95%).

Therefore, as a first effect, when a variation pattern with a low expectation degree is selected, a pre-read notice is not excessively displayed, and the player's expectation of winning is not unduly stimulated.
Moreover, as a second effect, when the operation-reserved ball related to the advance notice is used in a symbol variation display game, the expectation of winning due to the advance notice can be maintained for a long time. To be more specific, when generating a prefetch notice related to a short variation pattern such as normal variation 4s or normal variation 8s, the execution time of the symbol variation display game related to the operation pending ball that is the target of the prefetch notice is short, so Even though the preview performance was not shown, it ended quickly. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol change display game is short, a flashing white hold icon (suggesting a step-up hold change notice) may be displayed, or an occurrence that suggests a step-up hold change notice using hold K during game execution. It ends quickly without stirring up any sense of anticipation. Such a case leaves the player wondering, ``What on earth was the point of that pre-read notice?'' However, in the case of this embodiment, "16 seconds of normal variation for lookahead notice" and "N reach 1 for lookahead notice" belong to a long variation pattern (in the case of this embodiment, the longest normal variation). This can prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, although there is a difference between "16s of normal fluctuations for advance notice" and "16s of normal fluctuations" in terms of whether or not they are subject to advance notice, it is possible to configure the same effect during both symbol fluctuation display games. This is preferable (the same applies to the relationship between "N reach 1 for advance notice" and "N reach 1"). In other words, the "Normal variation 16s" for non-prefetch notices and the "Normal variation 16s" for prefetch notices with approximately the same (including the same) variation time as this, the same production mode for the production during symbol variation. No matter which variation pattern is selected, the player is made to recognize that the same variation pattern has been selected in terms of performance. In this way, by distinguishing the variation patterns that are the same in content but have different selection rates into those for non-pre-reading notices and those for pre-reading notices, in the event of a loss, a moderate amount of pre-reading notices will appear and excessive pre-reading can be avoided. By preventing the advance notice from being executed, it is possible to moderately arouse the player's expectation of winning (preventing the player from feeling stressed due to the appearance of excessive advance notice). ). It should be noted that the "same performance" as used herein preferably refers to the same performance mode, including at least the fluctuating display of decorative patterns (decorative design performance described below) and the preview performance; /Or the "preview performance" may be the same. However, in terms of performance, in order to make it look like the same performance, it is preferable that the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different, but the other effects are the same. Further, it is also possible to provide only one or more normal variation types for lookahead that have the same function as "Normal variation 16s for lookahead notice", or only N reach type for lookahead that has the same function as "N reach 1 for lookahead notice". One or more may be provided.

Furthermore, as already explained, "normal variation 16s" and/or "N reach 1" may be determined as the prefetched notice variation pattern. In this case, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is set to a lower probability than the "normal variation 16 seconds for look-ahead notice" and/or the "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". For example, with respect to the appearance rate (execution rate) of pre-read notices, there is a relationship that satisfies "normal variation 16s<normal variation for pre-read notices 16 seconds" and a relationship that satisfies "N reach 1<N reach 1 for pre-read notices".

Although not shown in the figure, the variable pattern distribution table is provided with a variable pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, the probability that one or more specific variation patterns will be drawn may vary depending on the setting value, and for example, setting inference factors may be given based on differences in the appearance rate of effects related to the specific variation pattern. is now possible.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11 again, when the starting opening winning random number determination process in step S320 is finished, a "winning command" is created based on the command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determining process, and this is used for production control. 24 (step S321). In addition, if pre-reading is prohibited or if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the pre-reading prohibited data "9FH" is maintained as it is, and a winning command having the "pre-reading prohibited data" is sent to the production control unit 24. It turns out. In this case, an appropriate value, for example, "B3H" is acquired as the value on the upper byte (MODE1) side, and a winning command (B39FH) that prohibits pre-reading is transmitted.

Next, a "pending addition command" that specifies the number of pending balls at the time of pre-reading judgment is created (step S322), and this is sent to the effect control section 24 (step S323). This "reservation addition command" consists of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies whether the operation reservation ball that is the target of pre-reading is on the special drawing 1 side or the special drawing 2 side, and the upper byte (MODE) side when winning a prize. and a lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the number of pending pitches. The hold addition command is used by the performance control unit 24 to notify the hold display areas 76 and 77 of information regarding the current number of held balls when an active hold ball occurs, or when a pre-read preview effect is executed. is also used when displaying a pre-read notice regarding the pending notice.

When the above-mentioned winning command and pending addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 that has received them sends a pre-read notice if the information included in the command is “other than the pre-read prohibition designation”. A lottery is held to determine whether or not the ball can be executed (a pre-read notice lottery), and if the lottery is won, a pre-read notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the execution of the pre-read notice for the current pending ball is controlled. . On the other hand, if "pre-reading prohibition designation" is specified, the pre-reading notice lottery will not be executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery will be executed but the lottery result will be forcibly treated as a loss (not executing the advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice lottery will be executed. Prohibit the occurrence of This embodiment is configured to send a winning command specifying that pre-reading is prohibited, either when pre-reading is prohibited or when an abnormal setting error occurs.The reason for this is as follows. .

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting abnormality error occurs, the gaming operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason for this is that, as explained above, setting abnormal errors can be resolved by changing settings, but changing settings during business hours is a matter of incitement to gambling from the perspective of legal requirements. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Second, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when an abnormal setting error occurs, the player will become distrustful of the sudden stop of the game. For example, if a symbol fluctuation display game in progress is executed during normal operation, or if a jackpot game is in progress, an abnormal setting error may occur and the game will be immediately disabled. If this happens, the profits that the player should have originally gained will be lost, leading to a sense of distrust among the players. Taking these circumstances into consideration, when an abnormal setting error occurs, the error is only notified and the game itself is allowed to proceed, although there are conditions. The reason why I say "conditionally" is because if an abnormal setting error occurs, advance notice will be prohibited and the result of the symbol fluctuation display game will be forced to be a loss (see Figure 11). Step S317 (=5AH), refer to the processing route of Step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited, and subsequently, the special figure 2 starting opening checking process (step S302) is executed.

<12. Special symbol fluctuation start processing: Figure 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be explained. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of active pending pitches in FIG. 2 is executed. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is zero (step S402), and the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) targeting the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is executed. Through the processing of steps S401 and S402, the "priority" of which of the special figure 1 action reserved ball and the special figure 2 action reserved ball should be preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which action reserved ball to be used) is determined. "Fluctuation rank" is determined. In this embodiment, when there are operation reservation balls in both the special figure 1 operation reservation sphere and the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere, the special figure 2 operation reservation sphere is preferentially extinguished.

In addition, when the number of active pending balls for both the special figure 2 active pending ball number and the special figure 1 active pending ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state is "no active pending balls". becomes. This state of "no action pending ball" is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory. If the state becomes "no ball pending operation", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "no ball pending operation" ( Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "standby (01H)" when the above-mentioned state of "no action pending ball" occurs (step S417: NO) (process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 14A described later) (see step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (step S418). Then, as a performance control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the performance control section 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. When the performance control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, it causes the customer waiting performance to appear, and then causes the "customer waiting performance (demonstration display)" to appear.

Furthermore, after the start of the customer waiting performance (demonstration display), if a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied, the performance control unit 24 ends the customer waiting performance and shifts to the "power saving mode". In the case of this embodiment, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the customer waiting effect (demonstration screen) without any pending balls occurring and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , the presentation mode is shifted to the power saving mode, a power saving screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the words "Power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and some or all of the decorative lamps 45 and other presentation LEDs are displayed. Control all lights to be turned off (power saving control).

If the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls or the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. In addition, regarding the processing method of steps S403 to S416 explained below, the only difference is whether the target is the special figure 1 action reserved ball or the special figure 2 action reserved ball, and the contents are not substantial. is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, unless there is a particular need, the explanation will be made without distinguishing which operation-holding ball the processing is intended for.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of pending balls on the special figure side to be used for the current variable display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including the information on the number of pending balls after the subtraction is sent to the production control unit 24. (step S404).

Next, special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is data for specifying the special symbol type on the current variation start side, and if special symbol 1 is on the variation start side, it is "01H", and special symbol 2 is on the variation start side. If there is, "02H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (pending 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 is read out, and is stored in the random number storage area for judgment in the internal RAM. , the pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are respectively stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free space (step S407). As a result, the starting order of the special symbol fluctuation display game matches the order of the number of active pending balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the active pending balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening are in any pending memory. It is specified whether the ball corresponds to the area, and it is possible to store a new operation-reserved ball.

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the gaming state information transmission process, a "gaming state designation command" is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command here includes gaming state information that can specify the gaming state at the start of the game. When the production control section 24 receives this gaming state designation command, it grasps the current gaming state based on the information contained in this command, and sets the production mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed by the main control section 20 side. Manage. The gaming state information included in the gaming state designation command may be any minimum necessary information when performing the intended gaming process, for example, "internal gaming state (gaming state determination number YJ)" and/or "fluctuation pattern". The information may include "selection mode (Tcode)". In addition, as a gaming state specifying command, it is possible to send an "internal gaming information command" that can specify the gaming state determination number YJ and/or a "distribution mode specifying command" that can specify the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode). Good too. The gaming state information transmission process for transmitting such a gaming state designation command includes steps S482, S487, and S492 during the special symbol confirmation time process in FIG. 14B, which will be described later.

In addition, here, if necessary, if the time is in the time saving state, a "time saving number command (information regarding the special symbol time saving number counter)" that can specify the remaining time saving number is sent, and if in the variable probability state, the remaining ST number is transmitted. Sends an identifiable "ST number command (information regarding special symbol probability change number counter)". Based on the information included in these commands, the production control unit 24 grasps the remaining number of time reductions and the remaining number of STs, and displays a "remaining number display effect" that visually announces the remaining number of time reductions or the remaining number of STs. (In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned remaining time reduction number notification effect is displayed). Note that if the time saving state or variable probability state continues until the next jackpot (including the case where it substantially continues until the next jackpot (infinite system)), the time saving number command and the ST number command do not need to be sent.

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route that follows S410)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409:≠5AH), a setting value command is sent to the performance control unit 24, and then a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory activation random number determination process, the random number value for jackpot determination is used to execute a "winning/losing lottery at the start of fluctuation" targeting the operation pending balls that will be used for the current fluctuation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process of step S318 in FIG. 11, which has already been described, so the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410, first. Based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the current variation start side), a "hit random number determination table (FIG. 20)" corresponding to the current processing target side is acquired. For example, if the current fluctuation is on the side of special figure 1, the ``hit random number table for special figure 1'' is acquired, and if the current variation is on the side of special figure 2, the ``hit random number table for special figure 2'' is acquired. Next, the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is obtained, and a "winning lottery" is performed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the acquired random number determination table. If the lottery result is a "jackpot" win, the jackpot determination flag is set to "5AH", and if it is not a jackpot win, that is, a 'lose', the jackpot determination flag is set to "00H". In addition, in this embodiment, since the support time reduction is also subject to the winning/losing lottery (the lottery form for winning/losing lottery), if the winning/losing lottery result is a "support time saving" win, "5AH" is set in the support time saving determination flag (Fig. 20 reference).

Next, special stop symbol creation processing is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed using the winning/losing lottery result in step S410 and the random number value for special symbol determination. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 that has already been explained, so the explanation will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information on the current fluctuation side) and the winning/losing lottery result in step S410, symbol tables (jackpot symbol table, losing symbol table , support time-saving pattern table: see FIGS. 21 and 22 to 24). For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current fluctuation start side is the 'Special Figure 1 side' and the winning/losing lottery result is 'Jackpot', then the 'Special Figure 1 jackpot symbol table” is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination result is the lottery result. The data and the special stop symbol number are respectively stored in corresponding areas of the in-area RAM.

(Number of consecutive games counter)
In addition, in the special stop symbol creation process, based on the result of the symbol lottery, a process of counting the number of consecutive wins regarding the above-mentioned variable probability mode is also performed. Here, when winning a winning type for which the number of consecutive wins is counted (for example, a probability-variable jackpot: see FIG. 5E (a)), the consecutive winnings number counter is incremented by 1. This makes it possible to manage how many consecutive jackpot games will be executed after the current winning game. However, if all jackpots are to be counted for the number of successive wins, counting processing can also be performed based on the results of the winning/losing lottery. In this case, it can be performed, for example, in step S410, a random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessories (winning/losing lottery process). Specifically, in the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory, that is, in the winning/losing lottery, if a winning type is won to be counted, the consecutive winnings counter may be incremented by 1.

Note that instead of counting up the current number of consecutive games by incrementing the number of consecutive games counter by 1, a countdown method may be used in which the number of consecutive games is determined by decrementing from the initial value. Specifically, when transitioning to the normal state or clearing the RAM, the initial value of the consecutive game counter is set to "07H". Then, each time a winning type to be counted is won, the consecutive winnings counter is decremented by 1 until it becomes zero. In this case, if the value of the consecutive winnings counter is "06H", it indicates the first winning (first consecutive winning), and if it is "05H" to "00H", it means the second to seventh consecutive winnings. shows. Therefore, in the case of the countdown method, if the value of the consecutive winnings counter is "06H" to "04H" (1st to 3rd consecutive winnings) in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later, the variable probability mode 1 is selected. The data for transitioning is set in the buffer, and if it is "03H" to "01H" (4th to 6th consecutive shot), the data for transitioning to variable mode 2 is buffered, and if it is "00H", Data for transitioning to variable probability mode 3 is set in the buffer (see the remarks column in FIG. 42).

After finishing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412). In this gaming state transition preparation process, necessary setting processing is performed to specify the gaming state to which the player will transition in the event of winning a jackpot or shortening support time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, a data group specifying the destination gaming state is determined according to the winning type (special symbol determination data) determined by the symbol lottery and the gaming state determination number (YJ). Obtain the "gaming state transition table" and store various data in the corresponding state buffer.

The gaming state transition table shown in FIG. 42 is provided with JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 for specifying each gaming state (gaming mode). As shown in the figure, JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 are defined with data for specifying the internal gaming state, data for shifting to variable probability modes 1 to 3, and time saving modes 1 to 3. In this embodiment, "JTTBL1" is used for 10R and 4R variable jackpots, "JTTBL-4" is used for 4R time-saving jackpots, "JTTBL-4" is used for support time-saving A, and "JTTBL-4" is used for support time-saving C. In the case of support time reduction C, "JTTBL-6" is referred to. Thereby, the gaming state after the jackpot game and the gaming state after the support time saving opening/closing game are specified.

Note that JTTBL-1 is data for transitioning to the variable probability state (variable probability mode 1), but as shown in the remarks column in the figure, the fluctuation pattern vibration is In the minute designation number buffer, "01H" to "03H" are set as appropriate.

In the case of a jackpot, the value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot end process (step S509) shown in FIG. It is read out in the object operation process (step S504) and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 203 (flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to each status buffer). As a result, the gaming state after the jackpot game or the support time-saving opening/closing game (the destination gaming state in FIGS. 4, 29, and 42) is designated.

The roles of the various status buffers mentioned above are as follows.
(α) "General symbol opening extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time-saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time-saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
Designation data of ON (in operation)/OFF (inactive) of each function for designating the internal gaming state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time-saving function, the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function, and the normal symbol time-saving state flag specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function. Data is set for the symbol probability changing state flag, the special symbol time saving state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, and the special symbol probability changing state flag specifying the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function.
(β) “Special symbol time saving number counter buffer”
Data (data for the special symbol time saving number counter) for specifying the number of time reductions (electronic support number) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIGS. 14A to 14B). The special symbol time saving number counter functions as a remaining time saving number counting means for counting the remaining number of time saving times.
(γ) “Special pattern definite change number counter buffer”
Data for specifying the ST number (data for the special symbol probability change number counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 14B). The special symbol probability variation number counter functions as a remaining ST number counting means for counting the remaining number of ST times.
(δ) “Special symbol variation counter 1-3 buffer”
Data (data for the special symbol variation number counter) for specifying the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set.
(ε) “Fluctuation pattern distribution specification number 1-3 buffer”
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) specifying the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set. The update conditions include, for example, when the jackpot is won (step S475 in FIG. 14A), when the time saving ends (step S481 in FIG. 14B), when the probability change ends (step S486 in FIG. 14B), and when the special symbol change number counter becomes zero. (Step S490 in FIG. 14B), when the jackpot game ends (S509 in FIG. 15), and when the support time reduction is won (Step S476 in FIG. 14B, Step S504 in FIG. 15).

Next, special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result (result of the special stop symbol creation process in step S411), variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), setting value information (obtained as necessary), and operation pending ball A fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the number of active pending balls (0 to 3 existing active pending balls, excluding the active pending balls used for the current variable display operation: see step S403) is obtained.

Then, referring to the fluctuation pattern distribution table, based on the fluctuation pattern lottery using the random numbers for fluctuation patterns (obtained in the process of step S314 in FIG. 10), the operation pending balls to be used for the current fluctuation display operation are targeted. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. Next, a "variation pattern designation command" that can specify the contents of the determined variation pattern is created and transmitted to the production control section 24 side. In addition, since the basic processing procedure of this process is the same processing procedure as the starting opening winning time random number determination process of step S320 of FIG. 11 which has already been explained, the explanation will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413 includes the following processes (A) to (F).

(A) "Fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation" for selecting (determining) the "fluctuation pattern distribution table" to be referred to this time;
(B) "Variation pattern determination processing" which refers to the "Variation pattern distribution table" determined in (A) above and determines a fluctuation pattern according to the random value for fluctuation patterns;
(C) Determine the fluctuation time (including the additional time required for pseudo-association) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination process, and use the "special symbol accessory movement timer" in the timer management area of the internal RAM. "Fluctuating time setting process" to be set to "
(D) A "command transmission process" for transmitting a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the contents of the variation pattern obtained in (B) above to the effect control section 24. Note that the variation pattern determination process (B) is a process of acquiring command data of a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern.

At the start of the variation, unlike at the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading determination), the variation pattern distribution table can be selected in consideration of the number of pending balls (the number of pending balls at the start of the variation in step S403). Once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the command data for the upper byte side (MODE2: specifying whether it is a hit or miss) and the lower byte side (EVENT: fluctuation pattern information) for configuring the "variation pattern specification command" is determined. . As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command is determined, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation are designated.

As the fluctuation pattern is determined, a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined. In addition, this fluctuation time becomes the game time (fluctuating display time (performance time) of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol fluctuation display game that is executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation display game.

The information regarding the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least the winning/losing lottery results (in the case of this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current gaming state, and the fluctuation time. information, execution designation information of a specific preview performance (the presence or absence of a reach performance and its type, pseudo-link designation information), etc. The main control unit 20 transmits a “variation pattern specification command” whose contents can be specified to the production control unit 24, and the information included in this variation pattern specification command is used by the production control unit 24 to determine the current game. It is used when determining such performance scenarios (fluctuating displays of decorative patterns, various preview performances, etc.).

When the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413 is finished, the flag during variation corresponding to the current variation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "fluctuating flag" is a flag that indicates which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is fluctuating, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, a "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special symbol 1 and a "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special symbol 2 are handled. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the current processing target (fluctuation start side), the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command that can specify the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the performance control section 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type on the fluctuation side and the winning type (design lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command is mainly used to control the combination of decorative symbols when forming a ready-to-reach state (symbol types whose constituent elements are ready-to-reach symbols), the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbols), It is used to determine the preview performance corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the performance control unit 24 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, it determines the performance to be performed during the symbol fluctuation display game (fluctuation performance) based on the information included in these commands, and Start the decorative pattern variation display game.

Then, as a fluctuation start setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to "Fluctuating (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for judgment (cleared to zero) (step S416 ).

(Regarding the case where a setting abnormality error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the explanation of the determination process in step S409, if the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) in step S409, that is, if a setting abnormality error is occurring (step S409:=5AH), the special electric function in step S410 The random number determination process for object operation determination (winning/losing lottery) is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is executed. That is, if a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning/losing lottery at the start of the variation is not executed, and the current winning/losing lottery result is always treated as a "loss" (forced losing control). In the case of an abnormal setting error, it is preferable to provide a variation pattern exclusively for errors and select this, but it may be configured such that an existing specific variation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing variation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting abnormality error" has occurred, and select only the normal variation pattern type without selecting the reach variation type that will arouse the expectation of winning. It is preferable to select. Note that in a situation of forced loss, the game no longer makes sense, so it is preferable to select the long variation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal variation pattern (in this embodiment, the normal variation is 16 seconds). Select only. Further, in the case of an abnormal setting error, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (symbol variation is not started) as "game continuation is not possible". In this case, the error notification continues until the gaming machine is powered off. Note that in this embodiment, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is canceled.

As described above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

<13. Special symbol fluctuation processing: Figure 13>
Next, the special symbol variation process (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be explained. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation process (step S307) in FIG. 10.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol fluctuation time has not yet passed, that is, the special symbol is fluctuating, so do nothing and perform this special symbol fluctuation processing. Go through.

If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (step S451: YES), a "variation stop command" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the production control unit 24 as a production control command (step S452). With this fluctuation stop command, the production control section 24 grasps that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, and causes the decorative symbol currently being fluctuated to be stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is ended, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also ended.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, a special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of the RAM 203, and a confirmation display time (for example, 500ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), the special symbol operation status is changed to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol fluctuation flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is the margin time to ensure the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal that notifies the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. It is. Further, the "determined display time" is the time (stop display time) for maintaining the stop display when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol ends. During this fixed display time, the decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) (for example, fixed display period CT in FIG. 44).

After passing through the above special symbol fluctuation processing, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management processing is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management processing of step S095 of FIG. 9.

<13. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): Figures 14A and 14B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be explained. 14A and 14B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10.

In FIGS. 14A and 14B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory action timer is zero (step S471). The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set with a "confirmed display time" (see step S453 in FIG. 13). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (step S471: NO), the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol accessory motion timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the current special symbol fluctuation display game is assumed to have ended, and the special symbol motion status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol motion 01H is stored in the status (step S472), and gaming status number YJ is stored (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) in the determination at step S474 (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the jackpot determination flag, the condition device activation flag is set to ON state (5AH), and other settings are set to low probability and no electric support state, and the game is played. 00H is stored in the game status notification LED output number that specifies whether the status notification LED (not shown) should be turned on or off, and the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time.

Note that the above-mentioned "game status notification LED" is provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine (for example, it may be provided as one of the display functions of the composite display device 38c, or a dedicated LED may be provided separately), This is a status notification means for notifying current gaming status information. The gaming state notification LED of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine whether or not the game is in a time-saving state (special symbol time-saving state), whether it is in a support time-saving state, and whether it is in a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving described below (hereinafter referred to as It is used to notify whether or not the current state is in progress (also referred to as the "ceiling time reduction state"). The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the gaming status notification LED according to the gaming status notification LED output number, and can notify the current gaming status information. The notification mode by the gaming status notification LED can be determined as follows.
(Italy 8) During the support time reduction state, the game status notification LED for support time reduction is turned on. The right hit notification LED (right hit display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off.
(Italy 93) During the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state, the ceiling/support time saving LED (combined LED) is turned on. In this case, the right hit notification LED (right hit display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current gaming state is a ceiling time reduction state, a support time reduction state, or a jackpot time reduction state. In particular, the hall side can immediately grasp whether the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is a ceiling time reduction state, a support time reduction state, or a jackpot time reduction state.
(Italy 94) The ceiling time saving LED is lit during the ceiling time saving state, and the support time saving LED is lit during the support time saving state. In this case, the right hit notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current gaming state is a ceiling time reduction state, a support time reduction state, or a jackpot time reduction state. In particular, the hall side can immediately grasp whether the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is a ceiling time reduction state, a support time reduction state, or a jackpot time reduction state.
(Italy 95) If the support time saving state is won during the ceiling time saving state, the ceiling time saving LED is turned off and the support time saving LED is turned on. Even if a support time reduction is won during a ceiling time reduction state, it is easy to identify whether the current game state is in a ceiling time reduction state or in a support time reduction state.
(Italy 96) If the support time reduction state is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction LED is turned on. Even if a support time reduction is won during a ceiling time reduction state, it is easy to identify whether the current gaming state is in a ceiling time reduction state or a support time reduction state.
(Italy 28) Light up the ceiling time saving LED during the ceiling time saving state. In this case, the right hit notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to identify whether the current gaming state is in the ceiling time saving state or not.

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) in step S474 (step S474:≠5AH), then the state of the support time saving determination flag is determined (step S476). If the support time reduction determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476:≠5AH), the process advances to step S478. When the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the support time saving symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, as various setting processes when the support time-saving symbol is stopped (support time-saving start processing), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the support time-saving determination flag, and the support time-saving start is performed to specify the start of execution of the support time-saving opening/closing game. Store 5AH (ON state) in the previous flag. After completing various setting processes when the support time saving symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S478.

When the process proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time saving number counter is decremented by 1 as the amount of the current variation number (step S479), and the special symbol time saving number counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), a setting process is performed at the end of time saving (step S481). Here, as a setting process at the end of time reduction, as shown in the figure, the electric chew support function is set to OFF state, Tcode is set to "00H (normal medium)", and the continuous play count counter and support time reduction medium flag described later are set to OFF state. Clearing (00H), etc., performs transition setting processing from the time saving state to the normal state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the special symbol variation pattern related to the "normal mode" will be selected.

After completing the time saving end setting process in step S481, a game status information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control section 24. The game state designation command here includes information that designates the end of the time saving state. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the time saving state has ended in the current game, and shifts the performance mode to the normal performance mode. Note that the gaming state designation command can include information that can specify the type of time-saving state that has ended (such as a jackpot time-saving state or a support time-saving state).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability change count counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process advances to step S488. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 as the number of variations of the current special symbol (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is It is determined whether the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST number of times has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

If the special symbol probability variation count counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the specified ST number (in this embodiment, 65535 times), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to OFF state, Tcode is set to "00H (normal medium)", and the consecutive winnings counter is cleared (00H). etc., executes transition setting processing from a variable probability state to a normal state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, a special symbol variation pattern based on the "normal state" is selected. In addition, when the probability state is provided, the number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485 in the same way as in the process for the probability variation state, and the end timing of the probability state is managed in the setting process at the end of the probability variation state. Also, as a jackpot, after finishing the variable probability state, that is, after finishing the ST number, the time saving state (the number of time saving times may be 100 times or less, or the number of time saving times exceeding 100 times (150 times, 200 times) etc.), and can be determined as appropriate). When providing such a probability variable time-saving jackpot, it is preferable that the number of STs be of a finite probability type (such as 100 or 50 times). The above-mentioned variable time-saving jackpot is a “pure variable jackpot” (a jackpot that only provides a fixed variable: 10R variable jackpot or 4R variable jackpot) in that it is a jackpot that grants “a fixed variable state of a predetermined number of ST times + a time-saving state of a predetermined number of time savers”. However, in this specification, it is treated as belonging to a "probability-variable jackpot" in that it first shifts to a probability-variable state. The probability variable jackpot can include one or more "probable variable jackpots" that do not provide a time-saving state and/or "probable variable time-saving jackpots" that can provide a time-saving state.

After completing the setting process at the end of probability change in step S486, the game status information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482 above, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, but the gaming state designation command here specifies that the high probability state (variable state or potential state) has ended. Contains information to When the production control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the variable probability state (or potential state) has ended in the current game, and shifts the production mode to the normal production mode.

After completing the gaming state information transmission process in step S487, it is then determined whether the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). Here, the change timing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) based on the number of game executions (number of variations) is monitored.

If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 as the current variation count (step S489), and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that it is not the update timing (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the gaming state update process (variation pattern distribution designation number update process) is executed. (Step S491). For example, if infinite time saving is given, that is, if you want to shift from "time saving mode 1 ⇒ time saving mode 2 ⇒ working time saving mode 3", first the current time saving mode is "time saving mode 1" and the special symbol When the fluctuation number counter reaches zero, "Tcode = 04H (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 1)" which specifies the current time saving mode 1, and "Tcode = 05H (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number)" which specifies time saving mode 2. 2)" and set the special symbol variation counter to 100. If the current time-saving mode is "time-saving mode 2" and the special symbol variation counter reaches zero, "Tcode = 05H (variation pattern distribution designation number 2)" which specifies the current time-saving mode 2 to "Tcode=06H (fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 2)" which specifies time saving mode 3, and sets the special symbol fluctuation number counter to 65335 times. Similarly for other game modes, when the update timing for the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) arrives, the game state update process is performed to shift to the target game mode, and the process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7A to 7 is performed. 7B and the game mode transition control shown in FIGS. 61A to 61B described later.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode updating means that updates (changes) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.

After completing the gaming state update process in step S491, a gaming state information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482 above, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, but the information included in the gaming state designation command here is such that the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be specified. Contains information. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps the updated variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) and shifts the performance mode to the performance mode corresponding to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

As described above, when the special symbol fluctuation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. The process advances to (step S095).

<14. Special electric accessory management processing: Figure 15>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be explained. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines the ON/OFF state of the support time reduction start flag (step S501). When the support time saving start flag is in the ON state (step S501:=5AH), that is, when the support time saving is won, a support time saving special electric accessory activation process is executed (step S504). Here, first, at the start of the support time-saving opening/closing game, the "support time-saving opening/closing game flag" is set to the ON state (5AH), and the necessary setting process to execute the support time-saving opening/closing game is performed. Then, when the support time-saving opening/closing game is completed, each value of the state buffer set in the above-mentioned "gaming state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. and set the "Support time reduction mode flag" which specifies that the support time reduction mode is in ON state (5AH). After the end of the game in which the player wins (the support time reduction flag is set to ON state after the end of the variable time), the support time reduction start flag and the support time reduction opening/closing game flag are cleared. Thereby, the game state (transition to the time saving state, number of time saving times) after the support time saving opening/closing game is specified. It should be noted that a "support time saving opening/closing game start command" is sent to the production control section 24 when the supporting time saving opening/closing game starts, and a "supporting time saving opening/closing game end command" is sent to the production control section 24 when the supporting time saving opening/closing game ends. These commands cause the performance control unit 24 to display performances during the support time saving opening/closing game (opening performance (performance during start INT), performance during opening/closing action game, ending performance (performance during end INT, etc.) Here, in the case of special electric activation type support time reduction, the support time reduction opening/closing game (in the case of small hit winning type support time reduction, the small winning game) is executed first, and then the time reduction state is granted. The question is whether or not the support time-saving state is a period that includes the support time-saving opening/closing game.In this case, depending on the gameplay, if the period including the supporting time-saving opening/closing game is treated as the support time-saving state. , The support time saving medium flag may be set to ON at the start of the support time saving opening/closing game, or if the period excluding the support time saving opening/closing game is treated as being in the support time saving state, the support time saving flag may be turned on at the end of the support time saving opening/closing game. The medium flag may be set to ON state.

If the support time reduction start flag is in the OFF state (step S501:≠5AH), then the ON/OFF state of the conditional device activation flag is determined (step S502). If the conditional device activation flag is in the OFF state (step S502:≠5AH), that is, if the support time saving opening/closing game is not in progress or the jackpot game is in progress, this special electric accessory management process is exited without doing anything.

When the conditional device operation flag is in the ON state (step S501:=5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S502: special electric accessory status branching process). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value that indicates the behavior of the special variable prize winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and is stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM within the area. is stored in The special electric accessory operation status includes "Start processing in progress (00H)" which specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a jackpot game, and "In operation start processing (00H)" which specifies that it is in a standby state before the start of a round game. 01H)", "In operation (02H)" to specify that the round game is in progress, and "Continuation judgment in progress (03H)" to specify that the next round game is being determined whether to continue or not. , "Jackpot end processing in progress (04H)" which specifies that end processing is in progress at the end of the jackpot game.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S502, the special electric accessory operation status values are "starting processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", "continuing determination" ( 03H)" or "Jackpot end processing in progress (04H)", one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is executed. These processes are processes for controlling the execution of jackpot games, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, winning games corresponding to various winnings are realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be explained below.

<Jackpot game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot start process)
The "big hit start process" in step S505 will be explained. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value "starting process in progress (00H)". Therefore, in the case of a "jackpot", this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device activation flag to the ON state as a setting process (setting process at the time of start) necessary when starting the jackpot game. As a result, continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes permissible. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is updated to "operation start processing in progress (01H)", and 01H, which designates the first 1R, is set in the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this jackpot is stored in the corresponding area of the area RAM, and the "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. Set. "Start interval time (start INT)" is the period from when the special symbol display time has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 14A) and the jackpot is confirmed until the special variable winning device 52 is activated (1R round It is an interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening performance section.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is sent to the production control section 24, and the jackpot start process is exited. Note that the "jackpot start command" includes information that can specify the type of jackpot this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the performance control unit 24 receives this jackpot start command, a series of winning performances (opening performance, during the round, etc.) that are developed during the current jackpot game (during the start INT, between round games, during the round game, during the end INT, etc.) The opening performance is then started. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory activation process)
Next, the "special electric accessory actuation start process" in step S506 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory actuation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the interval time before the start of the round. As this interval time, in the first round (1Rth), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "jackpot start process (step S505)" is monitored, but from the 2nd round onwards, the main process When passing through (step S506), the "pre-release interval time", specifically, the interval time between rounds (R interval INT) from the end of the current round game to the start of the next round game, is determined. be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the current round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, the pre-release interval time (in the case of 1R, the start interval time) has passed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current round number (consecutive number counter) The opening/closing operation pattern of the big winning opening 50 is set according to the value) (big winning opening opening/closing operation setting process). Here, the big winning hole opening/closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the big winning hole solenoid 52c (the big winning hole to be executed corresponding to the number of rounds) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. (data for opening/closing operation pattern of the winning opening).

In addition, in conjunction with the operation to start opening the big winning hole, a big winning hole opening command is transmitted to the production control section 24. This "big winning opening opening command" includes current round number information, and is used by the performance control unit 24 to display an in-round performance corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)" and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the grand prize opening 50 is opened to the upper limit of the grand prize opening opening/closing operation time, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during special electric accessory operation)
Next, the "special electric accessory in operation process" in step S507 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory operation process, the CPU 201 first monitors whether the number of winning balls into the big winning hole 50 has reached the maximum number of winnings, and if it has reached the maximum number of winnings, the CPU 201 displays the special symbol role. Clear the object movement timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "Special Electric Accessory Activation Start Process (Step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and since the maximum number of prizes has been reached, the large prize opening 50 that is open will be closed. In addition, here, every time there is a prize in the grand prize opening 50, a "big winning opening prize command" is transmitted to the performance control section 24. This grand prize opening command includes information on the occurrence of a winning in the grand prize opening and information on the number of prize balls (it may also include setting value information), and is used to notify that a prize has been won in the grand prize opening 50. In addition to being used for production, it is also used to control the appearance of setting suggestion production using winning production. For example, when there is an over-winning effect that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to an appearance rate determined according to a set value.

Please do not do anything until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the big winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) passes or the maximum number of winnings is reached. Exit the special electric accessory operation process.

When the maximum number of winnings is reached or the maximum opening time has passed and the special symbol accessory movement timer reaches zero, it is assumed that the current round game has ended and the special electric accessory movement status is changed to "Continuing judgment". (03H)" and stores the remaining ball ejection time (1980ms) in the special symbol accessory action timer. This "remaining ball ejection time" refers to the extra time to eject the remaining balls inside the grand prize opening after the grand prize opening is closed. In addition, with the closing of the big prize opening (end of the round game), an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the production control section 24. This "interval interval command between rounds" includes round game end information and current round number information, and is used by the performance control unit 24 to display an inter-round INT performance during the inter-round INT. With the above, this special electric accessory is in operation process is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric accessory operation continuation determination process" in step S508 will be explained.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the remaining ball ejection time (1980ms) after the closing of the grand prize opening (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball ejection time has elapsed. be done. Until the above-mentioned special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired and it is determined whether the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, as a process when continuing the round game, add 1 (+1) to the continuous number counter, store the "interval time before opening" in the special symbol accessory movement timer, and perform the special electric prize. Switch the object operation status to "operation start processing in progress (01H)".

On the other hand, if the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, as a setting process at the end of the final round, "end INT (end interval time)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is is switched to "termination processing in progress (04H)". The above-mentioned "end INT" is an interval section from the end of the final round game and the elapse of the remaining ball discharge time until the end of the jackpot game, and refers to the time width that defines the ending performance section.

Then, a "jackpot end command" instructing the start of the ending performance is transmitted to the performance control section 24, and the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is ended. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, information that allows identification of the gaming state after the jackpot game. It is also used when deciding the production mode.

(9-5. Jackpot end processing)
Next, the "jackpot end process" in step S509 will be explained.

When entering the jackpot end process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory action timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this jackpot ending process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (end interval time elapsed), each value of the state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 10) is changed to correspond to the state buffer. Set each in the flag area and counter. Note that in this process, an initial value of a ceiling counter that counts the number of ceiling games, which will be described later, is also set. This specifies the gaming state after the jackpot game.

Next, as various setting processes at the end of the jackpot, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, and the gaming status notification LED output number is updated. , the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "starting process in progress (00H)".

When the jackpot ending process is finished, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game are finished, and the current jackpot game is ended.

To summarize the preferred embodiments of the first embodiment, the following configuration examples 1A to 9A can be used.

[Configuration example 1A]
an acquisition unit (S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires multiple types of random numbers including at least a first random number and a second random number based on the establishment of a starting condition;
A win/loss determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a win/loss determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random number value;
A symbol determining means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) that determines the type of winning based on the result of the winning/losing determination and the second random number value;
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) that can perform a variable display operation of symbols and stop displaying the symbols in a display mode according to the determination result of the symbol determining means;
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to be able to open or enlarge the entrance of the grand prize opening;
Accessory continuous operating means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operating device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory;
Game state control means (main control unit 20, S412 in FIGS. 4 and 12, S509 in FIG. 15, 42, FIG. 43),
The targets of the winning/losing judgment by the winning/losing judging means include:
A jackpot that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot: Fig. 4), and a special time-saving that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time-saving A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4, FIG. 25, FIG. 29) are included at least,
The gaming state control means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that when the special time saving is won, the game machine is controlled to the time saving state (FIG. 4, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 42).

[Configuration example 2A]
Acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires multiple types of random numbers including at least a first random number and a second random number based on establishment of a starting condition;
A win/loss determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a win/loss determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random number value;
A symbol determining means main control unit 20 (S411 in FIG. 12) that determines the type of winning based on the result of the winning/losing determination and the second random number value;
A symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) that can perform a variable display operation of symbols and stop displaying the symbols in a display mode according to the determination result of the symbol determining means;
A special electric accessory (special variable winning device 52) configured to be able to open or enlarge the entrance of the grand prize opening;
Accessory continuous operating means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operating device), FIG. 15) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory;
Game state control means (main control unit 20, S412 in FIGS. 4 and 12, S509 in FIG. 15, 42, FIG. 43),
The targets of the winning/losing judgment by the winning/losing judging means include:
A jackpot that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (for example, a 10R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R fixed-variable jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot: Fig. 4), and a special time-saving that does not trigger the operation of the accessory continuous operation means (support time-saving A, Support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4, FIG. 25, FIG. 29) are included at least,
The gaming state control means includes:
If the special time saving is won, the time saving state is controlled until the number of fluctuating displays of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The special time reduction includes multiple types of special time reduction with different upper limit numbers (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4, FIG. 25, FIG. 29),
The symbol determining means is
If the result of the winning/losing determination is the winning of the special time saving, one of the plurality of types of special time saving is determined as the type of winning (FIG. 4, FIG. 23).

[Configuration example 3A]
An acquisition unit (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires multiple types of random numbers including a first random number and a second random number based on the establishment of a starting condition;
A win/loss determination unit (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a win/loss determination regarding a win based on the first random number value;
If the result of the win/fail determination is a hit, a symbol determining means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) capable of determining the type of hit based on the second random number value;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of the symbol and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbol in a display mode according to the determination result of the symbol determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of performing the variable display operation of the symbols in a shorter varying time than in a normal state;
The symbol determining means is
If the result of the win or loss determination by the win or loss determination means is a loss, the second random number is used to perform a lottery regarding whether or not to grant the time saving state (FIGS. 25 to 28). A game machine characterized by:

[Configuration example 4A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
comprising a game state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of performing the variable display operation of the symbols in a shorter variable time than in the normal state;
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
an upper limit number of times that the time saving state is controlled when the lottery result is a hit (a time saving number given by the time saving jackpot), and an upper limit number of times that the time saving state is controlled when the lottery result is a loss (support The number of time savings given by time saving) is a different number of times (time saving performance of 4R time saving jackpot (number of time saving times 100 times) ≠ time saving performance of support time saving (number of time saving times by support time saving B 200 times or infinite time saving by support time saving C ( A game machine characterized in that the number of time saving times is 65,535 times)).
In addition, if the lottery result is a loss, it means that you did not win the jackpot in the lottery in the case of the winning lottery format (Figure 4, Figure 20). This may include a case where the time saving is won. In addition, in the case of the lottery format for loss type (FIGS. 29 and 30), it is a case of winning a "loser" lottery.

[Configuration example 5A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
comprising a gaming state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of performing the variable display operation of the symbols in a shorter variable time than in the normal state;
A gaming machine capable of controlling the time saving state until the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable manner reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The lottery result is configured to be controllable to the time saving state depending on whether the lottery result is a win or a loss,
an upper limit number of times that the time saving state is controlled when the lottery result is a hit (a time saving number given by a time saving jackpot), and an upper limit number of times that the time saving state is controlled when the lottery result is a loss (support A game characterized in that the number of time savings given by time saving) is the same (time saving performance of 4R time saving jackpot (number of time savings 100 times) = time saving performance of support time saving (number of time savings due to support time saving A 100 times)). Machine.
In addition, if the lottery result is a loss, it means that you did not win the jackpot in the lottery in the case of the winning lottery format (Figure 4, Figure 20). This may include a case where time saving is won. In addition, in the case of the lottery format for loss type (FIGS. 29 and 30), this is a case where the lottery is a "lose" lottery.

[Configuration example 6A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The reach variation pattern includes a plurality of reach variation patterns with different variation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a reach variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is higher after the number of consecutive games exceeds a predetermined number than before it exceeds a predetermined number of games (FIG. 34).

[Configuration example 7A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive games exceeds a predetermined number of games than before it exceeds a predetermined number of games (FIG. 34).

[Configuration example 8A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times,
If the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected becomes relatively longer after the number of consecutive wins exceeds the predetermined number of times than before it exceeds the predetermined number of times, but if the lottery result is a win, the fluctuation time is relatively longer. A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected does not change (configuration of (T27) above, modification example of FIG. 33).

[Configuration example 9A]
a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winnings;
A symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and is capable of stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode according to a lottery result by the lottery means;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
symbol display control means for controlling a fluctuating display operation of the symbols in the symbol display means based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means;
A gaming machine comprising: a consecutive winning number counting means for counting the number of consecutive winnings in a specific gaming period on the condition that the winning is won;
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times,
After the number of consecutive games exceeds the predetermined number of times than before, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is a hit becomes relatively longer, but when the lottery result is a loss A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected does not change (configuration of (T26) above, modification of FIG. 34).

<Fluctuating display movement of decorative patterns: Figures 44 to 57>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57, the variable display effect of decorative patterns will be explained. The decorative pattern fluctuation display performance is a series of pattern fluctuation display operation modes (decorative pattern fluctuation pattern) from the start of decorative pattern fluctuation to the stop display (in particular, final display), and here, the left pattern shown in FIG. , handles the symbol variation display mode of three decorative symbols, the middle symbol and the right symbol. The fluctuating display performance of decorative symbols is used as part of the performance during the fluctuating symbol display game. Note that unless otherwise required, the variable display performance of decorative patterns will be abbreviated as "decorative pattern performance."

Decorative design effects are used to notify reach status (ready-to-reach effects), the occurrence of pseudo-runs, final game results (jackpot lottery results), and to enliven preview effects (changing notices). It functions as important identification information to notify the start and end, and can be said to form the core of the decorative symbol variation display game. In other words, the decorative pattern effect not only enriches the variation of the effect through its display operation, but also makes it less stressful when the game ends in a loss, and makes it less likely that a fluctuating slump will occur. This is considered to be an important performance. Therefore, the present embodiment aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the performance effect of decorative pattern performance.

In this embodiment, we focus on the failures that many players encounter in the course of the game, and in order to enrich the production variations during symbol fluctuations and improve the player's hitting comfort, we focus on the "decorative symbol We have put some effort into the stopping action pattern (stopping action mode of decorative patterns).

(Summary of decorative pattern production)
In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, an overview of decorative pattern presentation will be explained. Here, first, an overview of a series of variable display operations of decorative patterns will be explained using FIG. 44. The "decorative pattern stopping motion pattern" which is closely related to the present invention will be described later using FIG. 45.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart illustrating a decorative pattern production (decorative pattern variation pattern) related to the normal variation 13s.

In the decorative pattern presentation, for example, as shown in "Stop action long" in FIG. The decorative pattern starts a "high-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation")" (at the time of 0.5 seconds). During this high-speed fluctuation, each decorative pattern is displayed in a difficult or unidentifiable display state, and the transmittance of the decorative pattern is higher than when the display is stopped. For example, the background image corresponding to the current production mode is displayed at high speed. It becomes distinguishable through the fluctuating decorative pattern. In addition, although FIG. 44 shows a state in which the three decorative patterns start variable display all at once from the stopped display state, as described above, the three decorative patterns start variable display separately and display high-speed variation. may be started. For example, the left symbol may be displayed with high speed fluctuation after 0.5 seconds, the middle symbol after 0.7 seconds, and the right symbol after 0.9 seconds. In this case, all the symbols enter the high-speed fluctuation state after 0.9 seconds.

The above-mentioned "transmittance" means the degree to which other images existing behind the image can be seen through the image for which the transmittance is set, or the ratio thereof. Specifically, when the transmittance of an image is set to 0%, other images superimposed behind that image become completely invisible (unidentifiable state), but when the transmittance is set to 100%. If it is, it becomes completely transparent and only the other image can be seen. Therefore, if the transmittance is set to an appropriate value, a semi-transparent image will be displayed according to the transmittance (0%<transmittance A<99%). The transmittance of the decorative pattern during the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuations may be at least higher than the transmittance during the low-speed fluctuations described below (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuations<transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuations). It is preferable that the display state is such that another image (background image) superimposed behind the decorative pattern has sufficient transparency to be discernible. In addition, various preview performances are also performed in response to the start of the variation of the decorative patterns.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44 again, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop operation is performed in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol" at 9 seconds, 10.5 seconds, and 12 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, respectively. Each symbol sequentially starts decelerating from high-speed fluctuation and enters a period of "low-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "low-speed fluctuation")". This period of low speed fluctuation is a "slowdown display period (deceleration period)" in which the symbol gradually slows down and stops, and the transmittance is confirmed and displayed immediately after the start of the stop action (timing of the start of the stop action). The decorative pattern is reduced to approximately the same (including the same; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the decorative pattern is redisplayed in a distinguishable state. Therefore, during the low-speed fluctuation period, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is always lower than during the high-speed fluctuation (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). The transmittance may be configured to gradually decrease as the time progresses.

When the above-mentioned period of "low speed fluctuation (slowdown display)" has elapsed, a period of "temporary stop state (hereinafter referred to as "temporary stop")" begins. In this example, each symbol sequentially enters this temporary stop period at 10.5 seconds, 11.5 seconds, and 12.5 seconds, respectively. During this temporary stop period, the symbols undergo "swaying fluctuations." The "temporary stop state" here is different from the temporary stop state of the decorative pattern related to the "pseudo-association" (the temporary stop state before the re-fluctuation display operation of the decorative pattern). Furthermore, the transmittance during temporary suspension is approximately the same as the transmittance during final display (transmittance γ% during final display = transmittance δ% during temporary suspension period = approximately 0%), so that the symbol is fully visible. Displayed in an identifiable manner. Therefore, the player can clearly understand which symbol has stopped.

Then, when the temporary stop period has elapsed (at 13 seconds), the variation time (special symbol variation time) ends, and the decorative symbol is confirmed to be displayed (confirmed display period). That is, the current decorative symbol variation display game is ended. Note that this final display period is a time width that is set corresponding to the "determined display time (500 ms: see step S453 in FIG. 13)" that is set when the special symbol finishes its variation time, and is This is used as the final display time to definitively notify the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed. The next decorative symbol variation display game will be started after this fixed display period has passed.

Although not shown, to be precise, the speed of the decorative pattern becomes zero at the end of the low-speed fluctuation, and after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, stopped display for 0.3 seconds: pause period ), a temporary stop is initiated. That is, the flow of the basic variation display operation of decorative symbols in one symbol variation display game is precisely "high speed variation → slow variation → temporary stop → temporary stop → all symbols confirmed display". Therefore, when it is referred to as "the symbol that stops first", it means the symbol that finishes its low-speed fluctuation first or the symbol that temporarily stops first. In this specification, in order to simplify the explanation, "the first symbol to stop," "the second symbol to stop," and "the last symbol to stop" are respectively referred to as "the first symbol to temporarily stop." , ``the second symbol to be temporarily stopped'', and ``the last symbol to be temporarily stopped''.

In addition, for convenience of explanation, below, we will focus on the fact that the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation period (slow-down display period)" is "the period from the start of the stop operation to the temporary stop", and we will refer to the low-speed fluctuation period as "during the stop operation". Sometimes referred to as "period". Further, the performance during this stop operation period may be referred to as "performance during stop operation."

(About the stop movement pattern of decorative patterns: Figure 45)
The outline of the series of variable display operations of decorative patterns has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the stopping operation pattern of the decorative pattern according to this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 45 is a timing chart focusing on the stop motion pattern of decorative symbols (display mode during the stop motion period). Although the details will be explained later, this embodiment deals with three stopping operation patterns: "stopping action short", "stopping action middle", and "stopping action long" shown in FIGS. 45(a) to (c). In addition, in FIG. 45, the time t when the symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) starts the stopping motion for the first time is 0 seconds, and the temporal transition of each symbol in the stopping motion pattern of each symbol is shown. The relational expressions connected by , have almost the same meaning). Further, for convenience of explanation, each period regarding the decorative pattern production (fluctuating decorative pattern display operation) in FIG. 45 is expressed as follows.
(B) The period during the left symbol's stop motion is "Left stop motion period LMT"
(b) The period during the stop motion of the right symbol is “RMT during the right stop motion”
(c) The period during which the medium symbol is in stop motion is "CMT during medium stop motion"
(d) The temporary suspension period of the left symbol is "Left temporary suspension period LPT"
(e) The temporary suspension period of the right symbol is "Right temporary suspension period RPT"
(f) The temporary suspension period of the middle symbol is “Left temporary suspension period CPT”
(G) The confirmed display period (common to each decorative pattern) is the "Fixed display period CT"
(H) The left symbol's stop motion period (LMT+LPT) is the "left stop motion period LST"
(li) The stop operation period (RMT + RPT) of the right symbol is "Right stop operation period RST"
(NU) The stop movement period (CMT + CPT) of the medium symbol is "Medium stop movement period CST"

In this embodiment, regarding the stop motion pattern, the stop motion period (here, "left stop motion period LST") is defined as the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop motion until all the symbols are stopped (determined display). A plurality of stopping operation patterns with different values (equivalent) are provided. The plurality of stop operation patterns include at least stop operation patterns of a first period, a second period, and a third period, each having a different stop operation period (stop operation time). The stop operation period becomes longer in this order of the three periods. Among these, the stop operation pattern in the first period is called "stop action short", and the stop action pattern in the second period whose stop action period is longer than the first period is called "stop action middle", and the stop action pattern in which the stop action period is longer than the first period is called "stop action middle". A stopping operation pattern with a third period longer than the second period is referred to as a "stopping operation long". For example, in the relationship between the stop operation patterns (a) to (c) shown in FIG. 45, the stop operation pattern with the shortest (shortest time) stop operation period is the "stop operation short", and the stop operation pattern with the longest stop operation period is A stop action pattern with a period (maximum time) is a "stop action long", and a stop action pattern with a stop action period that is longer than a stop action short and shorter than a stop action long is a "stop action middle".

(Specific example of short circuit in stop operation: Fig. 45(a))
The "stop action short" will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(a).

As shown in the figure, the "stopping action short" according to this embodiment starts the stopping action (slowdown display) at approximately the same timing for all the symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) (at 0 seconds). , after a 0.5 second low-speed fluctuation period (period during stopping operation), all the symbols temporarily stop (temporarily stop) at approximately the same timing. Thereafter, after a 0.5 second temporary stop (shaking fluctuation), all the symbols are finally displayed (at 1 second). In the case of this stop action short, all the symbols perform the stop action at the same time and are displayed as confirmed after just one second, so it appears that they are stopped quickly.

(Specific example of middle stop action: Fig. 45(b))
Next, the "stopping operation middle" will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(b).

The "stop action middle" according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned stop action short, and the order of the stop actions of each symbol is different. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the stop operation (slowdown display) is started in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol". In the case of this embodiment, after the left symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) first enters the stopping motion, during the stopping motion of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol sequentially enter the stopping motion (0.5 seconds , 1 second), each symbol enters a temporary stop one after another in the order in which the stopping action is started (see the illustrated time points of 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.5 seconds). Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the last temporarily stopped middle symbol, all the symbols are finally displayed (at the time of 3 seconds). Therefore, in the case of the stop action middle, the stop action period (3 seconds) is longer than the stop action short (1 second), that is, each symbol appears to stop more slowly than the stop action short. However, in the case of middle stop action, the stop action is "during the stop action of the first symbol, other symbols will stop in sequence", so each symbol stops at a good tempo. It's easy to get the feeling that things are going away. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56 (modified example of the stopping action pattern) described later, the stopping action mode in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop at the same time (left and right simultaneous stopping), and then the middle symbol stops, also applies to each symbol. It is easy to get the feeling that the tempo is coming to a halt.

(Specific example of long stop action: Fig. 45(c))
Next, the above-mentioned "long stop operation" will be explained with reference to FIG. 45(c).

"Long stop motion" according to this embodiment, like the middle stop motion, starts the stop motion (slowdown display) in the order of the stop motion of each symbol in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol". They are the same in that they do. However, they differ in the following points. In the case of a long stop motion, the left symbol first enters a stop motion, and then enters a temporary stop at the time of 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, the right symbol enters a stopping operation at 1.5 seconds when the left symbol enters a temporary stop, and then enters a temporary stop at 3 seconds. Further, the middle symbol enters a stopping operation at the time of 3 seconds when the right symbol enters a temporary stop, and enters a temporary stop at a time of 3.5 seconds. In other words, each time the symbol that started the stopping motion first in chronological order enters a temporary stop, the remaining symbols enter a temporary stop, and 0.5 seconds after the last temporarily stopped symbol, in other words, the left symbol 4 seconds after the start of the stop operation, all the symbols are displayed as confirmed. Therefore, when the long stop motion is applied, each symbol appears to stop more slowly than the middle stop motion. Although the details will be described later, in the case of a long stopping action, the symbol that is stopped last (temporarily stopped) is characterized by being stopped in a shorter time than other symbols.

Regarding each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns (stop action short, stop action middle, stop action long), the relationship when focusing on each period (periods LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) is as shown in FIG. 45, and matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the height of transmittance, and the relationship between the length of the stop operation period) etc.) are obvious matters and are included within the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.

As described above, the short stop motion, middle stop motion, and long stop motion can give different impressions in terms of performance because the stop motion modes (presentation modes during stop motion) of the decorative patterns are different.

(Application example 1 of stop operation pattern: Figure 44)
Next, application examples of each stopping operation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 shows an example in which each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long) is executed in a predetermined variable display of a predetermined variable time. Specifically, this is an example in which each stop motion pattern is applied to a decorative pattern performance in a specific normal variation pattern, and here, a decorative pattern performance related to "normal variation 13s" is representatively shown.

Stop action short, stop action middle, and stop action long have longer stop action periods in this order, so when applied to a fluctuation pattern with the same fluctuation time, as shown in the figure, the high-speed fluctuation period is short, stop action long, and stop action long. The length increases in the order of operation middle and stop operation short. In addition, in the case of the stop short in this example, each symbol starts the stopping operation at approximately the same timing, temporarily stops at approximately the same timing, and then is displayed as confirmed, so each symbol has a high-speed fluctuation period. , the stop operation period MT (low speed fluctuation period: LMT, RMT, CMT), and the temporary stop period (LPT, RPT, CPT) are approximately the same period.

On the other hand, in the case of a middle stop action, the right symbol starts stopping during the stopping action of the left symbol that stops first, and the middle symbol that stops last stops during the stopping action between the left and right symbols. starts the stop operation, so during a part of the LMT period during the left stop operation, the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed (maintains semi-transparency with high transmittance), but only the left and right symbols are slow. An overlapping period may occur in which a down display (maintains translucency with low transmittance) occurs, or an overlapping period in which all symbols exhibit a slow down display may occur.

In addition, in the case of a long stop action, the right symbol will start its stopping motion at the timing when the left symbol temporarily stops (almost the same timing), and the middle symbol will stop at the timing when the right symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing). To start the movement, during the left stop motion period LMT, the middle symbol and right symbol are fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucence with high transmittance), and during the right stop motion period RMT, only the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed. It is undergoing high-speed fluctuation (maintains semi-transparent state with high transmittance) (see figure (b)). In addition, in the case of a long stop action, the deceleration of the middle symbol that stops last is stronger than the left or right symbol, and the middle symbol stops the quickest, and the left and right symbols are different. The deceleration rate is almost the same, and it stops more slowly than the medium pattern. Therefore, in terms of performance, while the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped, the middle symbol, which is temporarily stopped last, appears to be temporarily stopped quickly. For example, "Turn ♪ (temporary stop on the left symbol) → Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the right symbol) → Tan! (temporary stop on the middle symbol)". Such a "short stop operation (short time stop operation) of the final stop symbol" is suitable in a situation where a loss is known, for example, "when the game is not tenpai (when it is not reachable)". The reason is as follows. If the last symbol to stop is slowly stopped when it is not in the reach state, the temporary stop period will be extended for a long period of time, which may make the player feel irritated, and this kind of stopping action will occur frequently. This is because the interest in the game decreases. Therefore, when the player is not in a ready-to-reach state, a short stop motion of the final stop symbol is executed to give the player a feeling that the game is progressing at a good pace. Thereby, even when the player sees the stopping action, it is difficult for the player to feel excessive stress, and it is possible to provide a decorative pattern presentation that is comfortable for the player to hit.

In addition, in FIG. 44, the decorative pattern production related to "normal variation 13s" has been described as a typical specific normal variation pattern, but there may be one or more types of specific normal variation patterns. Furthermore, it can be determined as appropriate whether one or more of the stopping operation patterns are to be applied. For example, in the case of a short variation pattern (for example, normal variation 4s), only one stop action pattern (for example, stop action short) is applied, and for a long variation pattern, multiple stop action patterns (for example, stop action short) are applied. , stop action middle, and stop action long) can be applied.

As described above, when each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is applied to the same fluctuation pattern, the high-speed fluctuation period can be changed depending on the stop operation pattern, The stop operation period can be made different. That is, even if the variation pattern is the same, it is possible to make the stopping motion modes of the decorative symbols (effects during the stopping motion) different from each other, and it is possible to give different impressions in terms of effects. Taking advantage of these effects in terms of performance, even if the variation pattern is the same, the stop motion pattern can be made different depending on the performance executed (appeared) during the symbol variation display game, thereby increasing the freedom of production. It is possible to improve the degree and variation of performance. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 46.

(Example of application of stop motion pattern according to the performance to be performed (performance during stop motion): Figure 46)
Similar to FIG. 44, FIG. 46 is a timing chart typically illustrating a decorative pattern effect related to the normal variation 13s. It is a timing chart illustrating a case where the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern presentation is different. FIG. 46(a) shows a case in which "effect A" is executed, FIG. 46(b) shows a case in which "effect B" is executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a case where the same effect is not executed (a case where another effect is executed).

``Production A'', ``Production B'', and ``Production C'' in the figure have different production contents, and also have different performance execution times (production time). The relationship between the length and shortness of the production time is "Production A>Production B>Production C".

As shown in FIGS. 46(a) to (c), regarding the decorative pattern effects, when effect A is executed, "stop action short" is executed, and when effect B is executed, "stop action middle" is executed. ” is executed, and when effects A and B are not executed (in this example, it is assumed that effect C is executed), “stop action long” is executed. The reason why the stop operation pattern is made different depending on the performance time (performance execution time) is as follows.

The execution time of the decorative symbol variation display game substantially corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, and the variation time can be used to display, for example, a preview performance that suggests the degree of winning expectation, a display that suggests settings, or a simple game. A wide variety of performances are carried out, including performances that do not suggest the level of expectation of winning (non-announcement performances), such as motifs such as explanations and copyrights (character introductions). However, due to the performance time of the performance to be executed, it may not always be possible to make good use of the variable time. Furthermore, if variable patterns are provided for all performances, the number of types of variable patterns will be enormous, leading to an increase in control burden. Therefore, in the present invention, a single variation pattern is configured to be able to execute multiple stop motion patterns (effects during stop motion), thereby improving the degree of freedom of effects and realizing a variety of effects, while also reducing the control burden. It can also contribute to mitigation. In particular, a major feature is that even if the variation pattern is relatively short, it is possible to create a variety of performances using stop motion patterns. This will be explained in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when "performance A" with a relatively long production time is executed, there is a case where production A ends immediately before the variable time ends. In this example, a case is illustrated in which the effect A ends at the time of 12 seconds. In this example, if the game result (decoration stop symbol) is announced at substantially the same timing as the end of performance A, there will be no sense of discomfort at the end of performance A, and the sense of discomfort at the end of the current game will also be reduced. However, if the stopping action of the decorative symbols starts during the execution of the effect A, the effect of the effect may be weakened or the game This may lead to confusion among people. When middle stop action or long stop action is applied to effect A, as can be seen from FIGS. 46(b) and (c), the execution period of effect A and the stop action period of the symbol overlap, This brings about the problems mentioned above. Therefore, when performance A (performance time length) is executed, "stop action short" with the shortest stop action period among the stop action patterns is used.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(b), when performance B, which has a relatively short execution time, is executed, there is a case where the variable time ends with some margin (about several seconds) before the end. . In this example, a case is illustrated in which the effect B ends at the time of 10 seconds.

In the case of FIG. 46(b), the end timing of performance B ends about 3 seconds before the end of the variable time, and that 3 seconds is the "performance idle time" in which no preview performances etc. are performed, that is, the "performance slump". ” (the illustrated time width SRT corresponds to the time width of this production slump). If a stop action short is used, there is a risk that all symbols will remain temporarily stopped for a while, that is, a performance slump will occur, causing the player to feel stressed (increased frustration, etc.). .

Therefore, if the above-mentioned problem occurs, it is preferable to use the stop-motion effect to fill up the effect slump time SRT. In the case of this example, it is preferable to use "stop action middle" or "stop action long" which has a relatively long stop action period. However, in order to avoid the overlap between the execution period of presentation B and the stop motion period of the symbols, it is more preferable to use the middle stop motion as shown in the figure. In the case of this example, the stop motion of the decorative symbols starts at approximately the same timing as the end of production B, and each symbol stops in sequence at a good tempo during the production slump time SRT (stop motion middle). is executed, there is no discomfort at the end of performance B, and the player is less likely to feel a performance slump, making it difficult for the player to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 46(c) exemplifies a case in which presentation A and presentation B are not executed, and presentation C whose presentation time is shorter than presentation A and presentation B is executed. In this case, take into account the problems explained in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b) (such as the problem that the execution period of the effect overlaps with the stop movement period of the symbol, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), and set the "long stop action". It is preferable to use The long stop action has a longer stop action period (left stop action period LST: see FIG. 45(c)) than the middle stop action, so the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the long stop action in a case where "performance C" is executed for less than the execution time of production B (a case where "execution time of production C<execution time of production B<execution time of production A"). It is.

As mentioned above, the feature of this example is that even if the variation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern differs depending on the type of performance to be performed (performance time) and whether or not there is a performance to be performed. , it can be said that the feature is that the stopping operation pattern differs depending on the timing at which the performance ends. For example, in the case of FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), the effect B (first effect) ends at the first end timing within the predetermined variable time, and the effect ends at the second end timing later than the first end timing. There is a performance A (second performance), and in the case of performance A, it is preferable to perform a short stop action, and in the case of performance B, it is preferable to perform a middle stop action.

(Modification 1)
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 46, an example was explained in which the stop operation pattern is different when performances with different production times are executed, but even when the same production is executed, the stop operation pattern may be different depending on the timing when the production ends. Therefore, the stopping operation pattern can be made different. For example, when executing a predetermined performance (herein referred to as "performance K") with a certain performance time (e.g., 6 seconds), a predetermined variation time of a predetermined variation pattern (here, the normal time of 13 seconds is taken as an example). If the start timing of the effect K in the middle is different, the end timing will also be different. If this is explained using FIG. 46, for example, the following cases (I) to (III) may occur.
(I) If the effect K starts 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, its end timing will be the 12 second time point (case where it ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 46(a)) ,
(II) If the effect K starts 4 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the end timing will be the 10 second time point (case where it ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 46(b)) ,
(III) If the effect K starts 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the end timing will be 9 seconds (a case where it ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect C in FIG. 46(c)) ).
In such a case, it is preferable to vary the stopping operation pattern depending on the end timing of the effect K, as in FIG. 46. Specifically, in case (I) above, stop action short is applied, in case (II) above, stop action middle is applied, and in case (III) above, stop action long is applied. In this way, even when the same performance is executed, if the end timing of the performance is different, the stopping operation pattern can be made different depending on the end timing.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 46, an example has been described in which, when performances with different performance times are executed, a stop motion pattern having a shorter stop motion period is applied for the relatively longer production time. However, even when performing a performance with a relatively short performance time, the end timing may be later than that of a performance with a long performance time. For example, a configuration in which "performance K" with a production time of 6 seconds and "production M" with a production time of 7 seconds can be executed during a predetermined variation time of a predetermined variation pattern (here, the normal time 13 seconds is taken as an example) In this case, for example, the following cases (IV) and (V) may occur.
(IV) If the effect K starts 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, its end timing will be at the 12 second point (case where it ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 46(a)). ,
(V) If the effect M starts 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the end timing will be 10 seconds (a case where it ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 46(b)) ). In this case, in case (IV) above, stop action short is applied, and in case (V) above, stop action middle is applied, that is, when performance M with an early end timing is executed, stop action middle is applied, When performance K with a late ending timing is executed, the middle stop action can be applied. Therefore, stop action short can be applied even if the performance K is relatively short in performance time, and stop action middle can be applied even if the performance M is relatively long in performance time. In this manner, when performing different effects, the stopping operation pattern can be varied depending on the timing at which each effect ends.

Regarding "the point that the stop motion pattern is different depending on the timing at which the performance ends" described in FIG. The same thing can be said. In other words, the reach stop operation pattern can be varied depending on the timing at which the performance ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the variation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is made to differ depending on the type of performance (performance time) to be performed. This makes it possible to deal with many productions (production scenarios) with one variation pattern (variation time). As a result, it can greatly contribute to improving the degree of freedom of performance, improving the variety of performances, and reducing the control burden. Note that the following configurations (δ1) to (δ4) can be used.

(δ1) Production A, production B, and production C may be regarded as production scenarios including one or more types of production. In addition, all of Production A, Production B, and Production C may be any production that is executed while the symbol is changing; for example, any production such as a preview production, a non-prediction production, a look-ahead preview during variation, a setting suggestion production, etc. Can be adopted.

(δ2) Each of production A, production B, and production C can be one or more types of production. For example, “Production A is “Production α + Production β”, Production B is “Production γ + Production δ”, Production C is “Production ε + Production ζ” (Production α to Production ζ are different productions, and the number of types of productions is the same. )”, “Production A is “Production α + Production β + Production γ”, Production B is “Production δ + Production ε”, Production C is “Production ζ”” (Production α to Production ζ are different productions, and the number of types of production. For example, production A can be "performance α + production β," production B can be "production α + production γ," and production C can be "production α + production δ." Among the performances A to C, at least one of the performances is the same, but the performances as a whole are different). For example, there is a case where the performance α is a pseudo-connection, and the performances β to δ are different performances. Furthermore, for example, the effects A, B, and C can be "step-up effects" consisting of multiple effect steps (for example, effects SU1 to SU3). Specifically, production A is "Production SU1 + Production SU2 + Production SU3" (developed to the final stage), Production B is "Production SU1 + Production SU2" (developed to 2nd stage), and Production C is "Production SU1" (1st stage). ).

(δ3) Production A, Production B, and Production C have been explained on the assumption that the relationship satisfies "execution time of production C<execution time of production B<execution time of production A", but they simply stop depending on the production type. The operation patterns may be different. In any case, this is because the degree of freedom and variation in production can be improved.

(δ4) It is preferable that "performance B" or "performance C", which has a relatively short production time, be a "player participation type production". Player participatory production uses operating means (production button 13 and cross key 75), and it is easy to leave a lingering impression of the production during operation, making it difficult to feel the presence of production slump. The reason for this is that even if this occurs, it can be dealt with by using a middle or long stopping action.
Note that the above (δ1) to (δ5) are the same in FIGS. 47 to 57, which will be described later.

(When executing the same effect with variation patterns with different variation times: Figures 47 and 48)
Further, as shown in FIG. 47 or 32, when the same performance is performed using variation patterns with different variation times, the stop operation pattern can be set according to each variation pattern.

In this example, when executing the same effect (one or more effects are the same) with multiple variation patterns with different variation times, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time (for example, variation time 16 seconds), , when performing a decorative pattern with a stop motion pattern that has a relatively long period during the stop motion (for example, a long stop motion), and a variation pattern that has a relatively short variation time (for example, a variation time of 13 seconds), It can be configured to execute a decorative pattern presentation with a stop motion pattern having a relatively short period during the stop motion (for example, stop motion short or stop motion middle). A specific example of this example is shown in FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47 shows that when performing effect A, if the longest normal variation is "normal variation 16 seconds", "stop action long" is set, and the variation time is shorter than the longest normal variation, and the shortest normal variation is 4 seconds. “Normal variation 13s”, which has a longer variation time than the above, indicates a case where “stopping operation middle” or “stopping operation short” is set.

In other words, when performing the same effect with multiple variation patterns with different variation times, in the case of a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (in this case, the variation time is 16 seconds), the stop motion with the longest period during the stop motion It is possible to execute a decorative pattern production with a pattern (long stop motion), and in the case of a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (here, variation time 13 seconds), a stop motion with a relatively short period during the stop motion. The configuration is such that it is possible to perform a decorative pattern presentation accompanied by a pattern (for example, stop action short and/or stop action middle).

In addition, FIG. 48 shows that when performing effect A, the longest normal variation of "normal variation 16 seconds" is set to "stop action long" or "stop action middle", and the variation time is shorter than the longest normal variation, In addition, in the case of "normal fluctuation 13 seconds", which has a longer fluctuation time than the shortest normal fluctuation, 4 seconds, a "stop operation short" is shown.

That is, when performing the same performance with multiple fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time (here, the fluctuation time is 16 seconds), the period during the stop operation is relatively long. It is possible to perform a decorative pattern production with a stop motion pattern (for example, a long stop motion and/or a middle stop motion), and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time (here, the variation time is 13 seconds), the stop motion pattern is executable. The configuration is such that it is possible to execute a decorative pattern presentation accompanied by a stop motion pattern (stop motion short) with the shortest active period.

Note that the examples in FIGS. 47 and 48 show a case where when performance A is executed, a performance slump time (the illustrated time width SRT) occurs on the normal fluctuation 16s side where the fluctuation time is long. In such a case, in view of the problems explained in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b) (problems where the execution period of the effect overlaps with the stop motion period of the symbol, the problem of effect slump, etc.), As shown in a) (c) or FIGS. 48(a) and (c), it is preferable to use "stop action long" when the normal fluctuation is 16 seconds, and use "stop action short" when the normal fluctuation is 13 seconds. It can be said. In this way, even if the same effect is executed for variation patterns with different variation times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the degree of freedom in production can be increased. In addition, FIG. 49 is a reference diagram that summarizes the decorative pattern effects shown in FIGS. 46, 47, and 48 for easy comparison.

(Other application example A: Figure 50)
In the above-mentioned FIG. 46, a configuration has been described in which different stop motion patterns (stop motion short, stop motion middle, and stop motion long) can be executed depending on the type of effect to be executed and its presence or absence. Based on the configuration shown in FIG. 46, it is preferable to adopt the configuration shown in FIG. 50 depending on the type of performance to be performed and whether or not it is performed.

Referring to FIG. 50, in this example, in the case of a first fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation time of 13 seconds), "stopping operation pattern of type number A" (for example, "stopping operation short"), It is possible to execute any one of the three types of decorative pattern presentations, ``stop action middle'' and ``stop action long'' (see FIGS. 50(a) to 50(c), FIG. 46),
In the case of a second variation pattern whose variation time is relatively short (for example, a variation time of 4 seconds), "Stop operation patterns with a number of types B smaller than the number of types A (for example, ``Stop operation short'' and "Stop operation middle 50 (d) and (e)).

Note that the number of types B only needs to satisfy the relationship “number of types B<number of types A”, and it is free to adopt any of the stop operations short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long. However, in the case of the second variation pattern, it is preferable that the decorative symbol production executed in the first variation pattern is executed excluding the stop motion pattern having the longest period during the stop motion. For example, when the normal variation is 13s, if any of "stopping action short, stopping action middle, or stopping action long" is executed, and when the normal variation is 4s, "stopping action short excluding stop action long, stopping action middle" is executed. The configuration is capable of executing any of the following. In addition, when the second fluctuation pattern is an "extremely short fluctuation pattern" such as "normal fluctuation 4 seconds", the period during the stop operation is set to be the shortest in order to give the player the feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. Preferably, only a short circuit is performed.

(Example of different stop movement patterns depending on the production stage: Figure 51)
In addition, in FIG. 46 described above, even if the variation pattern is the same, different stop motion patterns (stop motion short, stop motion middle, stop motion middle, A configuration that can execute the long stop operation has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured to be able to execute different stopping operation patterns depending on the performance stage. This will be explained using FIG. 51.

FIG. 51 shows a case where different stopping operation patterns are executed depending on the production stage even if the variation pattern is the same.

FIG. 51 is a timing chart typically showing a decorative pattern production related to the normal variation 13s, and shows a case where different stop motion patterns are executed depending on the production stage. FIG. 51 shows the stopping operation pattern executed in production stages A to C. Specifically, FIG. 51(a) shows a decorative pattern production accompanied by a "stop action short" when the production stage is A, and FIG. 51(b) shows a decorative symbol production accompanied by a "stop action middle" when the production stage B is used. Performance, FIG. 51(c) shows a case in which a decorative pattern performance with a "long stop action" is executed in the performance stage C.

First, in order to make this example easier to understand, an overview of the "production stage" will be explained. The "performance stage" is different from the performance states (such as "normal performance mode", "variable performance mode", "time-saving performance mode", etc.) that are transitioned as the game state is changed, which is managed by the main control unit 20. , is a performance state whose transition is controlled by the performance processing on the side of the performance control unit 24, and may continue over one or more games. Therefore, even if there is a change in the performance stage, the game state itself managed by the main control unit 20 is not changed, and the selection targets of the variation pattern remain the same. That is, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not updated, and the "variation pattern distribution table" referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is not changed. For example, when the current gaming state is "normal mode (normal state)", even if the performance stages are different (performance stages A to C in this example), the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 31 or A variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern distribution table for normal mode shown in FIG.

However, by controlling the performance on the side of the performance control section 24, it is possible to display performances related to each of the performance stages A to C. For example, even if the change is made from "Production Stage A to Production Stage B", the selection target of the variation pattern remains the same and the exact same variation pattern can be selected, but it is also possible to perform different productions depending on the production stage. It is. For example, when the normal variation 13s is selected, "Production A" is executed on Production Stage A, but another production (for example, Production B) is executed on Production Stage B without executing "Production A". It is. In this example, the variation patterns to be selected are the same for all production stages A to C (the exact same variation pattern can be selected), and the production according to each production stage can be executed. With this in mind, the stopping movement patterns of the decorative patterns are made to differ depending on the performance stage, thereby increasing the freedom and variation of the performance.

Typical production stages include, for example, a "customization function" that allows the player to switch to a desired production stage by operating the operating means (production button 13 or direction key 75) while waiting for a customer. be. For example, if the current gaming state is "normal state", the normal production modes are "normal mode (production stage A)", "simple mode (production stage B)", and "premium mode (production stage C)". This is a function that allows you to select one of three types of performance stages (player selectable performance stages). What should not be confused is that these production stages are production states under the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), which means that the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. It's not a thing. Therefore, some or all of the effects that appear may differ depending on the normal, simple, and premium modes, but the selection targets of the special symbol variation pattern do not change internally.

For example, "Normal mode" is the default performance state, and "Simple mode" is a performance state in which the appearance rate of a specific preview performance is low compared to normal mode, or it does not appear at all (specific preview performance appearance rate). change mode). In "Simple mode", for example, the appearance rate of a specific high-expectation preview performance with a relatively high expectation of winning (for example, 30% expectation of winning in normal mode) is lower than in normal mode. , when the specific high-expectation notice appears, the probability of appearance of a player participation type performance that greatly increases the expectation of winning is lower than that of the normal mode. In addition, in "Premium Mode", the probability of occurrence of a winning performance (for example, a performance with a winning expectation of 90% or a guaranteed jackpot winning performance) is higher than in normal mode and simple mode, and one or more types of specific low The appearance rate of the expectation level notice is low (including 0%). Therefore, even if the variation pattern is the same, depending on the production stage, the type of production (notice production, non-prediction production, pre-read notice during variation, setting suggestion production, etc.) that is executed during the symbol variation, and whether or not it is executed. , the type of pending change notice and whether or not it is executed can be made different.

Further, in each of the normal, simple, and premium production stages, a unique background display corresponding to each production stage is displayed in order to make it possible to identify which stage the player is in. For example, "Normal mode (production stage A)" has a background image reminiscent of 'morning', 'Simple mode' has a background image reminiscent of 'day', 'Premium mode' has a background image reminiscent of 'night', etc. be. For example, if the current state is normal, the base background display will be the seasonal "spring" background display of the normal production mode, and the "spring morning background" and "spring daytime background" will be displayed depending on the normal, simple, and premium production stages. , the background display is changed to express a "spring night background".

Further, the production stage may be configured to be able to be controlled (changed) by using the customization function described above, or multiple types of production stages may be configured to be able to be controlled to transition based on other transition triggers (change triggers). . For example, a specific symbol variation display game may be executed. Specifically, after a predetermined starting condition is established (for example, after a jackpot game, after turning on the power, or after clearing the RAM (including setting changes), etc.), a predetermined number of symbol change display games, a predetermined number of symbol display games, etc. For example, each time the variable display game is executed. In this case, it may be determined whether or not to move to the performance stage by a predetermined lottery. Alternatively, a predetermined transition lottery may be executed for each symbol variation display game, and the performance stage may be transitioned when a lottery is won. Furthermore, the production stage may be shifted when a specific production is executed. For example, when a stage change performance is executed, a specific reach performance (for example, a highly expected reach performance (evolved SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach, etc.)) is a loss. Note that the destination performance stage may be transferred in a predetermined order, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, one or more conditions are adopted for the transition opportunity of the production stage, and when the transition opportunity arrives (when the production stage transition condition is met), the transition from one production stage to another production stage is performed. (change). Such performance stage transition control is performed by performance processing (performance stage transition means) independently performed by the performance control section 24 side.

FIG. 51 shows an example in which the stop motion pattern differs depending on the production stage even if the variation pattern is the same. However, when determining the stop motion pattern depending on the production stage, It is preferable to determine the stop motion pattern by paying attention to the fact that the performance can be executed. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, we will representatively explain "Production A, Production B, Production C (relationship of production time = "Production C<Production B<Production A")" explained in FIG. 46. This will be explained using three types of effects. For example, on production stage A, "production A (long production time)" is likely to be executed, on production stage B, "production B (medium production time)" is likely to be executed, and on production stage C, "production C (production time is long)" is likely to be executed. If there is a relationship between the production stages such that "Neither Production A nor Production B is executed" is likely to be executed (Neither Production A nor Production B is executed), then, to put it simply, depending on the production stage, Production A, Production B, and Production C are likely to be executed. The execution probabilities (including zero) are different, and for example, there are cases where one or more performances with relatively long performance times are likely to be executed in the order of performance stages A, B, and C. In such a case, it is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern according to the performance mode that is likely to be performed (the performance time of the performance that is likely to be performed) under each performance stage. In this case, it is preferable to set the stop action short for production stage A, the middle stop action for production stage B, and the long stop action for production stage C (see Figure 53 below). The same applies to the reach stop operation).

Note that the stopping motion pattern may be fixed depending on the performance stage, but the stopping motion pattern may be variable depending on the performance stage. For example, the execution probability of each stop motion pattern may be configured to differ depending on the performance stage. Specifically, when determining the decorative pattern production (fluctuating patterns of decorative symbols), one of the stop motion short, stop motion middle, and stop motion long is determined according to the current production stage according to a predetermined selection rate. do. For example, the selection rates for "stop action short, stop action middle, stop action long" are "60%, 30%, 10%" for production stage A, and "20%, 50%," for production stage B. 30%,” and in the case of production stage C, “10%, 30%, 60%.”

Moreover, although the above description has been made regarding the stop operation pattern related to the production stage, different stop operation patterns may be executed depending on the production mode. For example, regarding the fixed variable mode, the relationship between the average consumption time (game processing speed) related to the fixed variable mode is "steady variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < fixed variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < reliable variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)" It is. Therefore, variable mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state) should be set to "stop action short," variable mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) to "middle stop action," and variable mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) to "long stop action." Can be done. The same applies to the time saving mode. The relationship between the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game related to the time saving mode is "Time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) < Time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < Time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state)". Therefore, the time saving mode 3 (high speed fluctuation state) can be set to short stop operation, the time saving mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) can be set to middle stop operation, and the time saving mode 1 (low speed fluctuation state) can be set to "stop operation long". Also, in the production mode, as in the case of the production stage described above, the stop movement pattern may be fixed depending on the production mode, or the stop movement pattern may be variable depending on the production mode. (The execution probability of each stop action pattern may be configured to be different depending on the production mode). In this case, as in the case of the above-mentioned production stage, when deciding the decorative pattern production (decorative pattern variation pattern), one of the following is selected depending on the current production mode: stop action short, stop action middle, or stop action long. can be determined according to a predetermined selectivity. For example, the selection rate for "Stop action short, Stop action middle, Stop action long" is "60%, 30%, 10%" in variable variable mode 3 or time saving mode 1, and "60%, 30%, 10%" in variable variable mode 2 or time saving mode 2. are "20%, 50%, 30%", and in the case of variable probability mode 1 or time saving mode 3, "10%, 30%, 60%", etc.

(About the stopping movement pattern in reach fluctuation: Figure 52)
In FIGS. 44 to 51 above, the stop motion pattern of the decorative pattern has been explained, focusing mainly on the normal variation pattern. Below, the stopping movement pattern of decorative symbols in reach variation will be explained.

FIG. 52 shows an example in which, in the same reach variation, the stop motion pattern of the decorative symbols before the reach state is formed differs depending on the type of production performed during the symbol variation and whether or not the production is executed. This is a timing chart. However, since the stopping action pattern handled here is a stopping action pattern related to reach variation, it is a stopping action pattern that focuses on "stopping action pattern of symbols other than the last symbol to be stopped". That is, it deals with the stopping movement pattern of the left symbol and the right symbol (ready-to-reach constituent symbols) that form a ready-to-reach state (tenpai state). Hereinafter, unless there is a particular need, the symbol stop motion pattern used to form a ready-to-reach state will be referred to as a "ready-to-reach stop motion pattern." Furthermore, regarding reach stop motion patterns, the reach stop motion patterns corresponding to stop motion short, stop motion middle, and stop motion long are referred to as "reach stop motion short," "reach stop motion middle," and "reach stop motion long," respectively. .

FIG. 52 is an example in which each reach stop motion pattern (stop motion short, stop motion middle, stop motion long) is executed in a predetermined variable display for a predetermined variable time (fluctuating display of decorative symbols related to a specific reach variation). This is what is shown. Specifically, it is a timing chart showing a part of a decorative symbol production related to a specific reach variation, and shows a case where different reach stop operation patterns are executed depending on the type of production performed during the symbol variation. It is something that FIG. 52(a) shows a case in which "effect D" is executed, FIG. 52(b) shows a case in which "effect E" is executed, and FIG. This shows a case in which this is not executed (a case where other effects are executed).

In addition, "Production D", "Production E", and "Production F" in the diagram have different production contents, and the execution time (production time) of the production is also different. . The relationship between the length and shortness of the production time is "Production D>Production E>Production F". To put it simply, the relationship between performances D and F corresponds to the relationship between performances A and C in FIG. In addition, as an example of a specific reach variation, a variation pattern that typically belongs to "SP reach specified reach variation" (in the diagram, it is expressed as "reach variation A" for the sake of simplicity) is shown. . The specific reach variation may be another reach variation (N reach, advanced SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach, etc.), or one or more types of reach variation.

First, an overview of a series of fluctuating performances (decorative symbol fluctuation pattern + preview performance scenario) due to the reach fluctuation A shown in FIG. 52 will be explained. During the high-speed fluctuation period, the predetermined effects (effects D to E in FIG. 52) are executed, and after the left and right symbols perform a predetermined stopping action, they reach a reach (tenpai) state (at time t (variation)). elapsed time from the start) = 15 seconds). At this time, a "tenpai effect" to notify the reach is executed (t=15 seconds to 16.5 seconds). The content and duration of this Tenpai production differs depending on the type of reach, and here we are explaining an example of SP reach type reach. Inciting performances etc. will be carried out. After the Tenpai performance is finished, a predetermined SP reach performance (after 16.5 seconds (not shown)) corresponding to the reach variation A is executed, and when the variation time ends, a predetermined stop is performed according to the game result. All decorative patterns are displayed in the display mode.

As shown in FIGS. 52(a) to (c), when the effect D is executed, "reach stop action short", when the effect E is executed, "reach stop action middle", effect D and the effect When E is not executed (in this example, it is assumed that effect F is executed), "reach stop operation long" is executed. The reason why different reach stop operation patterns are performed depending on the type of performance to be performed is basically the same as the reason already explained with reference to FIG. 46.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52(a), when a performance D having a relatively long execution time is executed, there is a case where the performance D ends immediately before the reach. In this example, a case is illustrated in which the effect D ends at the time of 14.5 seconds. In this case, if the reach status is announced at approximately the same timing as the end of performance D, the player can enjoy the game without feeling the performance slump and while looking forward to a highly anticipated reach such as SP reach. . In particular, in the reach stop operation short, when forming the reach state, "left and right simultaneous tenpai" is executed in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop (temporary stop) at approximately the same timing. This left and right simultaneous tenpai has a stronger impact than the "left and right different time tenpai", in which the left and right symbols stop sequentially to form a reach state, and is also used as a preview effect that suggests that there is a high probability of winning.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52(b), when performance E with a relatively short execution time is executed, there is a certain amount of extra time (about 1 to 2 seconds) than the reach timing (tenpai timing). There are cases where the process ends. In this example, a case is illustrated in which the effect E ends at the time of 13 seconds. In this case, the end timing of the effect E ends about 2 seconds before the tenpai timing, and a 2-second "effect slump" may occur (time width SRT shown). In particular, in SP reach-type high-expectation reach performances, by the ten-pai timing, a preview performance with a higher expectation of winning is executed with a high probability than in the case of normal fluctuations, and therefore, the game player thinks that ``it will be a reach.'' There are many cases where people are excited about their expectations of being elected. Under such a situation, if the "reach stop action short" shown in FIG. 52(a) is used, the period during which all symbols remain temporarily stopped (production slump time) will become long. As a result, the player may feel as if there is a waiting time until the start of the Tenpai performance, which may cause him or her to feel stressed.

Therefore, it is preferable to fill up the performance slump time by using the stop motion mode (stop motion performance) of "reach stop motion middle" or "reach stop motion long" which has a relatively long period during the stop motion. In this embodiment, in order to avoid the overlapping of the execution period of the effect E and the stop movement period of the symbols, a "reach stop movement middle" is used as shown in the figure. In this example, the stopping operation of the decorative symbols starts at approximately the same timing as the end of production E, and during the production slump time SRT, each symbol stops one after another at a good tempo to form a reach state, so all the symbols This reduces the number of situations in which the temporary stop state continues for a while, making it less likely for the player to feel stressed.

The case of FIG. 52(c) exemplifies a case in which performance F, whose performance time is shorter than performance D and performance E, is executed as a case where performance D and performance E are not performed. In this case, take into account the problems explained in Figs. 52(a) and 52(b) (such as the problem that the execution period of the effect overlaps with the stop movement period of the symbol, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), and set the "stop action long". It is preferable to use In the reach stop action long, the period during the stop action is longer than in the reach stop action middle, so the high speed fluctuation period is shortened. Therefore, it is preferable to use the long reach stop motion in the case where "effect F" is executed for a period shorter than the execution time of effect E.

In addition, the characteristic point of this example is that, as can be seen from the illustration, the tenpai timings of reach stop action short, reach stop action middle, and reach stop action long are the same (almost the same) timing. (The same applies to FIG. 53, which will be described later). Here, the end of the stop motion period (end of slowdown display) of the symbol to be stopped second (right symbol) is the tenpai timing (t = 15 seconds) (in figure (a), the left and right tenpai are simultaneously Therefore, the left and right symbols stop first). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any timing during the above-mentioned "temporary stop period (not shown)" may be set as the tenpai timing. For example, at the end of the pause period (at the start of the pause period), "at the end of the pause period (when the second symbol to be stopped (right symbol) is temporarily stopped)" (the same applies to Figure 53, which will be described later). ).

In this example, even if the reach variation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be varied depending on the type of performance (performance time) performed before the reach. Further, even if the execution time of the performance performed before the reach is different, the tenpai timing can be set to the same timing in each reach stop operation pattern. This makes it possible to respond to many pre-reach effects with a single reach variation, and makes it easy to adjust the range of effects after reach (tenpai effect, reach effect, etc.), making it possible to easily adjust the range of effects after reach (tenpai effect, reach effect, etc.). It can greatly contribute to increased design compatibility between the two systems, greater convenience, reduced control burden, greater freedom of presentation, and improved variety of presentations.

Note that when the reach performance is executed, a high expectation preview performance (including a pre-read notice) or a low expectation notice performance (including a pre-read notice) may be executed depending on the winning expectation level. Therefore, the ready-to-reach stop operation pattern can be made different depending on whether a high-expectation preview performance is executed or a low-expectation preview performance. When a highly anticipated preview performance is executed, the liveliness and excitement of the performance will be strong (for example, multiple preview performances will often occur in combination, making the execution time of the preview performance longer) ), for example, execute a decorative pattern presentation that involves at least a reach stop motion pattern other than the reach stop motion long (for example, apply the reach stop motion middle or the reach stop motion short). On the other hand, we focused on the fact that when a low-expectation preview performance is executed, the excitement and excitement level of the performance is relatively weaker than when a high-expectation preview performance is executed, and at least the reach is stopped. Execute a decorative pattern production (for example, apply middle reach stop motion or long reach stop motion) that involves a stop motion pattern other than short motion. Of course, it is free to decide what kind of reach stop operation pattern to apply, depending on the winning expectation level of the preview performance. In any case, the reach stop operation pattern can be varied depending on the winning expectation level of the preview performance to be executed.

(Example of different reach stop movement patterns depending on the production stage: Figure 53)
In FIG. 52 described above, a configuration has been described in which, even with the same reach variation, different reach stopping operation patterns can be executed depending on the type of performance executed during symbol variation and whether or not the performance is executed. Here, a configuration example that can execute different reach stop operation patterns depending on the production stage will be described.

FIG. 53 shows a case where different reach stop operation patterns are executed depending on the production stage even if the reach variation is the same. Fig. 53(a) shows a decorative pattern production accompanied by a "reach stop action short" when the production stage is A, and Fig. 53(b) shows a decorative pattern production accompanied by a "reach stop action middle" when the production stage B is used. 53(c) shows a case where, in the case of production stage C, a decorative pattern production accompanied by a "reach stop motion long" is executed. Note that the performance stages A to C in FIG. 53 are the same as the performance stages A to C in FIG. 51.

The characteristic point of this example is that, as shown in the figure, even if the reach fluctuation is the same, the reach stop movement pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the tenpai timing of each stop movement pattern is the same (almost the same) timing. (Refer to the time point when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation = 15 seconds). This point that "the tenpai timing is the same regardless of the reach stop operation pattern" is the same as the example described in FIG. 52.

Note that FIG. 53 differs from FIG. 52 in that "the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the performance stage", and other contents (matters related to tenpai performance, etc.) are substantially the same. In this example, even if the reach variation is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be varied depending on the production stage. Moreover, the tenpai timing of each reach stop operation pattern can be set to the same timing regardless of the production stage. This can greatly contribute to improving the degree of freedom of performance related to the performance stage, improving the variety of performances, and the like.

(Variation examples of stopping operation patterns: Figures 54 to 57)
In the above embodiment, the stopping operation pattern shown in FIG. 45 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stopping operation patterns shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 may be adopted. In addition, in FIGS. 54 to 57, the maximum stop operation period of the stop operation pattern (the period from when the first symbol to stop starts its stop operation to when the last symbol to stop stops and is confirmed and displayed), that is, , the left stop operation period LST is divided into the following categories according to the time width of the left stop operation period LST.
(τ1) Stop action short: 0≦LST<2 seconds (τ2) Stop action middle: 2 seconds≦LST<4 seconds (τ3) Stop action long: 4 seconds≦LST

In this embodiment, the stop motion pattern types are classified as (τ1) to (τ3) above, but if there are multiple stop motion pattern types that belong to the same stop motion pattern type, If there is a first stop action middle and a second stop action middle that belong to each other, the one whose left stop action period LST is relatively shorter is treated as the "stop action short", and the left stop action middle whose left stop action period LST is relatively shorter. The longer one can be treated as the "middle stop action". Specifically, stop action middle B (LST=3.0s) in FIG. 54, stop action middle D (LST=3.5s) in FIG. 55, and stop action middle E (LST=2.5s) in FIG. If so, the stop action middle E can be treated as a "stop action short", the stop action middle D can be treated as a "stop action middle", and the stop action middle B can be treated as a "stop action long".

Each stopping operation pattern shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 will be explained below.

In the stop motion short B shown in FIG. 54(a), the period during the stop motion of each symbol is zero (LMT = RMT = CMT = 0 (approximately zero)), there is no low speed fluctuation period, and the high speed fluctuation period ends. Immediately thereafter, each symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, in terms of performance, it appears that after the three decorative patterns fluctuate at high speed for a while, the three decorative patterns suddenly stop and display almost simultaneously. For example, "Don! (temporarily stop all symbols)". In particular, this stop action short B has a shorter stop action period (main In the example, it ends in LST = 0.5 seconds), and its greatest feature is that when applied to the same fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), it can create the longest high-speed fluctuation period among all operation patterns. be. Such a stop operation pattern is suitable for use in a performance with a relatively long performance time (for example, a performance with a longer performance time than the performance A in FIG. 46 or the performance D in FIG. 52). In addition, since the stop operation period is extremely short, if you want to start the next game at a good tempo in a short time, for example, a game state (time saving state, It is suitable for use in normal fluctuation patterns of (probable variable state).

Stop action middle B and stop action middle C shown in FIGS. 54(b) and 54(c) differ in the stopping action of the middle symbol in the stop action middle shown in FIG. 45, and the middle symbol stops quickly (short stop of the final stop symbol). It is characterized by the fact that it performs actions). The point that the medium symbol performs this "short stop motion of the final stop symbol" is the same as the long stop motion shown in FIG. 45. Therefore, it is suitable for starting the next game at a good tempo (when there is at least one pending ball) in a situation where the loss is known, such as when the game is not in tenpai (non-reach). be.

The stop motion middle D shown in FIG. 55(a) and the stop motion long B shown in FIG. In-operation period LMT>Right stop-in-operation period RMT>Middle-stop-in-operation period CMT"). In terms of performance, these stopping motion patterns appear to be such that after the left symbol enters the stopping motion, the right symbol and the middle symbol stop in sequence in a rhythmic manner. For example, "Turn ♪ (temporary stop on the left symbol) → Turn ♪ (temporary stop on the right symbol) → Tan! (temporary stop on the middle symbol)". Also, stop action middle D or stop action long B, like the stop action long shown in Fig. 45, starts the next game at a good tempo in a situation where it is known that there will be a loss, such as when "not at tenpai (when not reaching)" It is suitable for cases where

The stopping action middle E and stopping action middle F shown in FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b) are characterized in that they enable "left and right simultaneous stopping" as shown. In the case of the stop action middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop action while the left and right symbols are in the stop action. Therefore, in terms of presentation, the left and right symbols appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol appears to stop midway through. On the other hand, in the case of the stop action middle F, the middle symbol appears to stop slowly at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right sides at the same time) → Turn ♪ (temporary stop on the right symbol)". Since the stop motion middle E and the stop motion middle F form a simultaneous left and right temporary stop, in addition to stopping a losing eye (for example, a loose eye), the reach stopping motion of FIG. 52(a) or FIG. 53(a) It is suitable for forming a reach state by using a reach stop operation pattern like a short circuit.

The stopping action middle E and stopping action middle F shown in FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b) are characterized in that they enable "left and right simultaneous stopping" as shown. In the case of the stop action middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop action while the left and right symbols are in the stop action. Therefore, in terms of presentation, the left and right symbols appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol appears to stop midway through. On the other hand, in the case of the stopping action middle F, the middle symbol starts the stopping action at substantially the same timing as the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. Therefore, in terms of performance, the middle symbol appears to stop slowly at the timing when the left symbol and right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on both sides at the same time) → Turn ♪ (temporary stop on the right symbol)". Since the stop motion middle E and the stop motion middle F form a simultaneous left and right temporary stop, in addition to stopping a losing eye (for example, a loose eye), the reach stopping motion of FIG. 52(a) or FIG. 53(a) It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it in a reach stop operation pattern like a short circuit.

For each stop operation pattern described above, the relationships when focusing on each period (periods LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) are as shown in FIGS. 54 to 57. The matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the height and low of transmittance, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, etc.) are self-evident, and the present invention included in the scope of the technical idea of the invention. Further, it goes without saying that any of the stopping operation patterns shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 can be used as a reach stopping operation pattern.

<Processing on the production control unit side: Figures 16 to 19>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, the effect control processing on the effect control section 24 side of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the production control unit 24 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (production control side main processing: Fig. 16) and a timer interrupt process (production control side timer interrupt processing: It is composed mainly of (Fig. 17).

<16. Production control side main processing: Figure 16>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the production control section side (production control side main processing). When power is turned on to the gaming machine main body from the outside, the production control unit 24 starts the main processing on the production control side shown in FIG. 16.

In the main processing on the effect control side, the effect control section 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting processing before starting the gaming operation (step S1001). Here, the initial setting processing includes, for example, command reception interrupt setting, processing to return to the starting point of movable objects, initial setting of CTC, permission of timer interrupt, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

After the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1012 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as a process during normal operation, and at other times, the production software random number update process of step S1013 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The above-mentioned main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the production control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, main loop processing is performed approximately every 16 ms, and the main loop update counter value is determined in the determination process of step S1002, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, and the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed; otherwise, the decorative pattern is Random numbers for various effects drawings used for drawings such as preview effects during the variable display game are updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update period has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, setting of a production scenario for error notification during an error and error cancellation processing when the error is canceled are executed. Note that errors related to the performance means (movable accessory errors, audio IC errors, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, demonstration/power saving mode processing is executed (step S1005). In this demo/power saving mode processing, a pre-waiting for a customer presentation (demonstration start waiting display), a presentation for waiting for a customer (demonstration display), and a setting process necessary for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, a production switch input process is executed (step S1006). In this production switch input process, the operating state of the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, production control processing is executed in accordance with the operation. The input state of the operating means is monitored in button input state update processing (step S1052) in FIG. 17, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1007). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a production control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if a production control command is stored, this command is read out, and the production process corresponding to the read production control command is executed. do. Note that when an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. Through this command reception interrupt processing, the production control command is acquired, and its data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, if at least a variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, a variation pattern specification command and a decorative pattern specification command are received and they are stored in the reception buffer). case), in the command analysis process, one or more types of performance patterns are determined based on the information (fluctuation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The performance pattern determined here works as a "parts performance" as an element constituting the performance scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined for when and for how long the performance pattern (parts performance) determined above will appear, and based on this, a performance scenario is constructed and its The performance scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. A "performance scenario" in a broad sense is realized by developing various performance patterns (parts performance) incorporated in this performance scenario one after another or multiple at the same time.

After the command analysis process is finished, scenario update process is executed (step S1008). In this scenario update process, the contents of a timer necessary for executing the performance scenario are updated, and processing is executed to proceed with the performance scenario based on the timer value. A typical example of the timer is a performance scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the timing of production. For example, within a variable period in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (decorative pattern variable period), which is substantially the same period as a variable period in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (special pattern variable period), that time This timer manages the temporal schedule of what kind of performance pattern, time width, and what kind of performance means to appear on the axis. Such a performance scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) and the performance accessory motion update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this performance scenario timer is monitored, and when the time for a certain performance arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and liquid crystal commands for controlling the image display are created, and each is stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) described later, and the motor control data for the movable accessory is created in the performance accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. Ru.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1009). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be played, the phrases, volume, etc. are adjusted based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control section (sound source LSI), and a sound effect is produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control section. As a result, sound production is realized in accordance with the production scenario.

Next, an LED drive data update process is executed (step S1010). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for optical display devices such as the decorative lamp 13 and various performance LEDs is created based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, LED output processing is executed (step S1011). In this LED output process, the LED data created in the LED drive data update process is output to the light display control section, and the light emitting means such as the decorative lamp section 45 and the performance LED are turned on and off through the light display control section. As a result, a light production in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the production software random number update process of step S1013 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<17. Performance control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, timer interrupt processing on the production control side will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the production control side timer interrupt processing. This performance control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the performance control side main process.

In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051), and then executes button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 in a predetermined location. Store in area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) in FIG. 16 when displaying information related to player participation effects, menu screens, menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect single presses, long presses, repeated presses, etc.

Next, performance accessory motion update processing is executed (step S1053). In this performance accessory motion update process, processing is performed to create motor control data for the movable accessory based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output process, the control data for the movable accessory created in the performance accessory motion update process is output to the drive control section. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable accessory motor of the movable accessory to be operated, and controls the operation thereof. As a result, a movable performance using movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) in accordance with the performance scenario is realized.

Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) in FIG. Executes display control. As a result, image production in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

Next, RTC information acquisition processing is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when presenting effects based on the RTC information.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is finished, the saved contents of the register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is ended, and the main process on the effect control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Contents of received command analysis processing: Figure 18, Figure 19>
18 and 19 show processes that are closely related to the present invention among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S1007 in FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the cases in which a "pending addition command" and a "decorative design designation command" are received will be explained respectively.

(Pending addition command reception process: Figure 18)
In FIG. 18, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a winning command reception confirmation process (step S2201). When the production control unit 24 receives a winning command, it first analyzes the content of the winning command, obtains prefetching determination result information (prefetching variation pattern information, and stores the obtained information in the prefetching information storage area of the RAM 243). A winning command reception process (not shown) is performed to store the winning command.Here, a reception confirmation process is performed to confirm that the winning command has been correctly received and the information has been acquired.The prefetch information storage area is Similarly to the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 on the main control side, pre-read information storage areas corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side are provided. A reservation 1 look-ahead information storage area to a reservation n look-ahead information storage area (in this embodiment, n=4) corresponding to the number of held balls are provided, and each can store look-ahead judgment result information for the maximum number of active pending balls. It becomes.

Next, it is determined whether the prefetching determination result information indicates that prefetching is prohibited (step S2203). If it is the pre-reading prohibition period (step S2203: YES), the process exits the pending addition command reception process without doing anything.

If pre-reading is not prohibited (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2204, and it is determined whether the "continuous notice counter" is zero (step S2204). This "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of duplicate advance notice effects. Specifically, if the current pending ball is selected as the target of the pre-read notification performance by the pre-read notification lottery in step S2205, which will be described below, the current pending ball will be used until the current pending ball is used in the symbol variation display game. , is a counter to prevent a newly generated action pending ball from being targeted for execution of a look-ahead effect. Note that the "continuous notice counter" stores the value of the current number of pending pitches N for the above-mentioned reason (see step S2208, which will be described later).

If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S2204: NO), it is assumed that the pre-read notice lottery is prohibited, and the process exits the pending addition command reception process without doing anything. If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step 2204: YES), it is determined that the advance notice lottery is permitted, and the advance notice lottery process is performed (step S2205). In this look-ahead performance lottery process, as a result of pre-reading the fluctuation pattern that will be determined at the start of the fluctuation, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead notice performance based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information specified by the winning command. It is something. The "winning command" and "pending addition command" in this embodiment are in a form that includes information regarding each of the pre-read fluctuation pattern and the special symbol type. Therefore, this information is used for the pre-read preview lottery.

There are two types of pre-read notices according to this embodiment. One is the advance notice of winning time series (pending change notice) that is mainly generated when a game ball enters the starting hole and the starting condition is satisfied (that is, at the time of winning or when the starting condition is satisfied). The other one is a look-ahead notice of a symbol change medium system (a look-ahead notice during variation) that occurs during a symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order. Therefore, there are two types of pre-read preview lottery: one for whether or not to give a pending change notice, and the other for whether or not to give a pre-read notice during change.Here, both are performed independently.

In the above pre-reading effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice is drawn (step S2205) using the pre-reading variation pattern information specified by the winning command and a pre-reading effect lottery table (not shown) (step S2205), and the result of the pre-reading effect lottery is Based performance information (information regarding the pre-read performance lottery results) is set (step 2206). This performance information is used when displaying a preview preview. The performance information set here includes (i) information specifying a pending change notice, for example, a performance scenario related to a pending change notice such as pending color and timing specification information of a pending change, (ii) a look-ahead notice during fluctuations. Information to be specified, for example, production scenario related to the fluctuating pre-read preview such as preview image type (thunder cloud image, rain image, lightning image) and execution number information, (iii) pre-read production lottery non-winning (loss) information (pre-read preview) (information not to be executed). In this example, the lottery for whether or not to give a pending change notice and the lottery to determine whether to give a look-ahead notice during fluctuation are conducted independently, so there are cases where only the pending change notice is executed. , There are cases where only the look-ahead notice during change is executed, and cases where both look-ahead notices such as pending change notice and look-ahead notice during change are executed, and cases where both pending change notice and look-ahead notice during change are executed. , the expectation of winning is higher than when the advance notice is executed alone.

When executing the pre-read notice of (i) and (ii) above, the production control unit 24 executes the pending change notice and/or the variation based on the production information (performance scenario related to the pre-read notice) based on the result of the pre-read production lottery. Performance control processing necessary for the medium preview is performed, thereby realizing the pre-read preview shown in FIG. 5B, for example. On the other hand, in the case of not winning the pre-reading effect lottery in (iii) above, the pre-reading notice is not executed, and the white pending in the normal pending display (normal pending display mode) is displayed in the corresponding pending display area (a1 to d1, a2 in FIG. 4). ~d2) will be displayed.

As a result of the above-mentioned pre-read effect lottery process, if a pre-read notice is to be executed, the value of the current number of active pending pitches is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S2208). As a result, the advance notice lottery for new balls with pending operation is prohibited for a certain period of time. Note that this counter value is decremented by 1 each time an old operation pending ball that occurs earlier is consumed in the decorative symbol designation command reception process shown in FIG. 19, which will be described later. reference). As mentioned above, by setting the value of the existing number of pending balls in the "continuous notice counter" when you win the pre-reading lottery, new pending balls will be added for the number of symbol changes corresponding to the number of pending balls. Even if a ball occurs, the lottery of the advance notice performance is prohibited for it (step S2204: NO route). For example, when the current number of balls on hold is three, the pre-read notice lottery is prohibited during three symbol changes corresponding to the number of pending balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the pre-read notice. Note that the above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding advance notice winnings. In other words, if the "continuous notice counter" is zero, it can be determined that the advance notice has not been won (the state of not executing the advance notice), and if it is a value other than zero, it can be determined that the advance notice has been won (the state of executing the advance notice). can.

(Decorative design designation command reception process: Figure 19)
Referring to FIG. 19, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a fluctuation pattern designation command reception confirmation process (step S2301). When the production control unit 24 receives a variation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the contents of the command, obtains variation pattern information (variation pattern information at the start of variation), and stores the obtained information in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 243. A process (not shown) for receiving a command specifying a variation pattern to be stored is performed. Here, confirm that the fluctuation pattern designation command has been correctly received and the information has been acquired.

Next, the content of the decorative symbol designation command is analyzed to obtain symbol information regarding the special symbol type and winning type (design lottery result) (step S2302).

Next, a production scenario type lottery is executed (step S2303). Here, based on the current production mode (if a production stage is set, the current production stage) and fluctuation pattern information, one of the production scenarios in which the symbol is changing this time is selected by lottery from among multiple types of production scenarios. Determined by. The performance scenario includes various performance scenarios related to the preview performance to be executed during the current symbol change. Once the performance scenario is determined, the specific type of preview performance that belongs to the determined preview performance type is further determined. For example, there are performance scenarios A to C, where performance scenario A is a performance scenario related to a step-up performance type, performance scenario B is a performance scenario related to a player participation type performance type, and performance scenario C is related to a background change notice. In the case of a performance scenario, it is assumed that performance scenario A is determined by a performance scenario type lottery. This performance scenario A is a performance scenario related to step-up performance types (for example, step-up performance C that ends in one stage, step-up performance B that develops to two stages, and step-up performance A that develops to the final stage). , which of the step-up performances A to C belonging to the step-up performance type is to be executed is determined by a predetermined preview performance type lottery. The lottery probabilities for these step-up performances A to C are determined according to the variation patterns, and the higher the probability of winning is in the variation pattern, the more likely it is that step-up production C, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, will be drawn. ing. In addition, other effects (setting suggestion effects and non-advance effects) to be executed in conjunction with the execution of the step-up effect are also determined here.

Then, when a specific preview performance (here, one of step-up performances A to C) is determined, a variation pattern of decorative symbols related to the current performance scenario is determined. Step-up performances A to C have a predetermined performance execution time depending on the content of the performance. For example, step-up performance C for the 1st stage is 9 seconds, step-up performance B for the 2nd stage is 10 seconds, Step-up performance A, which develops to the final stage (3 stages), is set to last 12 seconds. Therefore, if step-up performance C (performance execution time 9 seconds) is determined by this preview type lottery, a decorative symbol performance with a long stop motion is determined as the decorative symbol performance, and step-up performance B ( If the production execution time is 10 seconds), a decorative pattern production with a stop action middle is determined as the decorative pattern production, and if the step-up production A (production execution time is 12 seconds) is determined, As the decorative pattern presentation, a decorative pattern presentation accompanied by a short stop motion is determined. As a result, the decorative pattern effects shown in FIGS. 46 to 53 are realized. To be more specific, if the current variation pattern is the normal variation 13s, a decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 46 will be realized.

Regarding other examples (FIGS. 47 to 53), if the current variation pattern is the normal variation of 16 seconds, and if step-up performance A is determined and the stop action long is determined, then as shown in FIG. It is possible to realize a decorative pattern production like this. In addition, if the current fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation of 16 seconds and step-up effect A is determined, it will be possible to select stop action long or stop action middle, and if the normal fluctuation is 13 seconds, it will be possible to select stop action short. For example, a decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 48 can be realized. Furthermore, if it is possible to select the stop operation pattern according to the step-up effects A to C for the normal variation 16s, normal variation 13s, and normal variation 4s, decorative pattern effects such as those shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 can be realized. can do. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the performance stages A to C, a decorative pattern performance as shown in FIG. 51 can be realized. Further, when the current variation pattern is a reach variation, decorative pattern productions as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 can be realized depending on the type of production to be performed and the current production stage.

Next, a decorative pattern stop pattern lottery process is performed (step S2304). In this decorative pattern stopping pattern lottery process, based on the performance scenario and pattern information, the temporary stopping pattern and the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern (combination of decorative pattern stopping pattern) to be finally stopped are determined by lottery. For example, if the content of the fluctuation pattern is that there is a hit fluctuation pattern specified by reach effect, and the winning type information is 10R probability variable jackpot, then in order to determine the combination of decorative symbols related to that jackpot, the left symbol is first determined by lottery. Then, a decorative symbol that can form a reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol, and based on the determined left symbol and right symbol, the decorative symbol row related to the 10R probability-variable jackpot is finally stopped. Decide on the middle pattern as follows. Further, if the variation pattern is a normal variation pattern (for example, normal variation 13s), a combination of decorative symbols that will be finally stopped is determined so that the losing number is stopped and displayed. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol fluctuation display game is completed is determined, and a series of fluctuating performances (pre-announcement performance scenario, decorative symbol performance scenario (decorative symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed during the current symbol fluctuation are determined. A production scenario)) is determined. Then, scenario data regarding the determined fluctuating performance is set (step S2305).

Next, continuous preview performance management processing is executed (step S2306). Here, performance processing regarding the look-ahead notice during fluctuation is performed. For example, it performs the effect processing necessary for executing the fluctuating look-ahead notice, such as subtracting the continuous notice counter due to the execution of the current game, and displaying a notice image related to the fluctuating look-ahead notice.

When the continuous notice performance management process in step S2306 is finished, various setting processes at the start of decorative pattern variation (step S2307) are performed, and the process exits from the decorative pattern designation command reception process. Thereafter, a decorative symbol variation display game based on the above production scenario will be started.

Preferred embodiments of the decorative pattern production (decorative pattern stop motion pattern) described above can be summarized as the following configuration examples 1B to 8B.

[Configuration example 1B]
(1) A pattern display that variably displays a plurality of patterns (for example, a plurality of decorative patterns such as a left pattern, a middle pattern, a right pattern, etc.: Fig. 5A, Fig. 5B) depending on the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state. means (liquid crystal display device 36);
In a gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means (performance control unit 24) capable of executing a performance during symbol variation by the symbol display means,
In the predetermined variation display for the predetermined variation time (for example, the variation display of the decorative pattern related to the normal variation 13s in FIG. 46),
A first variable display in which the first period is a stop motion period from when at least one symbol first starts a stop motion until all symbols stop (for example, a variable display in which a short stop motion is executed: FIG. 45(a) ), FIG. 46(a)), or a second variable display in which the stop action period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, a variable display in which the stop action middle is executed: FIG. 45(b), FIG. 46(b)) may be implemented;
The effects include a first effect that ends at a first end timing within the predetermined variable time, and a second effect that ends at a second end timing later than the first end timing (for example, the second effect shown in FIG. 46). The difference in the end timing of production A and production B),
When executing the first effect, execute the first variable display (FIG. 46(a)),
When executing the second effect, execute the second variable display (FIG. 46(b)),
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) In this configuration example 1, the first effect is ended before at least the first symbol to stop in the first variable display starts its stopping action (for example, effect A shown in FIG. 46(a)) ,
The second effect is characterized in that it is ended before at least the first symbol to stop in the second variable display starts its stopping action (for example, effect B shown in FIG. 46(b)).
(3) In the above (1) or (2) of configuration example 1, in the variable display of the predetermined variable time, the stop operation period is a third period longer than the second period, and the third variable display ( For example, a variable display that executes a long stop action: FIG. 45(c), FIG. 46), the third variable display can be executed.

[Configuration example 2B]
a symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols according to a lottery result as to whether or not a profit state is to be generated;
A gaming machine comprising a production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production while the symbol display means is changing symbols,
In the symbol variation display,
A first variable display in which the first period is a stop motion period from when at least one symbol first starts a stop motion until all symbols stop (for example, a variable display in which a short stop motion is executed: FIG. 47(c) ))and,
a second variable display in which the stop operation period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, a variable display in which a middle stop operation is executed: FIG. 47(b));
There is a third variable display in which the stop operation period is a third period longer than the second period (for example, a variable display in which a long stop operation is executed: FIG. 47(a)),
When executing the predetermined effect when the variation time is the first variation time, execute the first variation display (for example, when the normal variation is 13 seconds, the stop operation is short: FIG. 47(c)),
When the predetermined effect is executed when the variation time is a second variation time longer than the first variation time, the third variation display is executed (for example, when the normal variation is 16 seconds, the stop action is long: Fig. 47) A gaming machine characterized by: a)).

[Configuration example 3B]
(1) A symbol display means that variably displays a plurality of symbols depending on the lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
Effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects during symbol variation by the symbol display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined variation display of the first variation time (for example, normal variation 13 seconds) and a second predetermined variation display (for example, normal variation 4 seconds) whose variation time is shorter than the first variation time,
The first predetermined variable display is one of a plurality of types of variable displays, each of which has a different stopping motion period from when at least one symbol first starts its stopping motion until all the symbols stop, depending on the effect to be executed. Execute one of the fluctuation displays (for example, FIGS. 50(a) to (c)),
In the second predetermined variable display, the number of types of variable displays that are smaller than the number of types of variable displays that can be executed by the first predetermined variable display among the plurality of types of variable displays is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 50(d) (e)) A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) In this configuration example 3, the second predetermined variable display can execute a specific one variable display among the plurality of types of variable displays that can execute the first predetermined variable display (for example, , executes only a variable display accompanied by a stop action short circuit: FIG. 50(d):).

[Configuration example 4B]
a symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols according to a lottery result as to whether or not a profit state is to be generated;
A gaming machine comprising a production execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of production while the symbol display means is changing symbols,
In the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined variation display of the first variation time and a second predetermined variation display whose variation time is shorter than the first variation time,
The first predetermined variable display is one of a plurality of types of variable displays, each of which has a different stopping motion period from when at least one symbol first starts its stopping motion until all the symbols stop, depending on the effect to be executed. Execute one of the fluctuation displays (for example, FIGS. 50(a) to (c)),
In the second predetermined variation display,
Among the variable displays for which the first predetermined variable display can be performed, other variable displays other than the variable display of the longest stop operation period (for example, a variable display of a stop operation other than the long stop operation (stop operation middle or stop operation short)) : A gaming machine characterized by executing the steps shown in FIGS. 50(d) and (e).

[Configuration example 5B]
(1) A symbol display means that variably displays a plurality of symbols depending on the lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
A gaming machine comprising a production execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of production while the symbol display means is changing symbols,
In the predetermined fluctuation display for the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the performance executed by the performance execution means, at least one of the plurality of symbols constituting the ready-to-reach state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) first starts a stop motion, and then the plurality of symbols Executing one of a plurality of types of reach variation displays each having a different reach configuration operation period until a reach state is formed (for example, FIGS. 52(a) to (c)),
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing when the above-mentioned reach state is reached (for example, the timing when both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporary stop) and a reach state is formed: Fig. 52 (a) ) to (c)) are substantially the same.
(2) Further, in configuration example 5, the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (tenpai performance) when the reach state is reached, and when any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific performance can be executed (for example, the Tenpai performance after reach in FIG. 52).

[Configuration example 6B]
(1) A symbol display means that variably displays a plurality of symbols depending on the lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state;
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect during symbol variation by the symbol display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The production executing means is capable of executing a production corresponding to a production stage set from among a plurality of types of production stages (for example, production stages A to C: FIGS. 51 and 53),
In the predetermined fluctuation display for the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the production stage, the reach-constituting operation period from when at least one of the plurality of symbols forming the reach-to-reach state first starts a stop motion until the reach-to-reach state is formed by the plurality of symbols is different. Execute one of the multiple types of reach variation display,
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing when the above-mentioned reach state is reached (for example, the timing when both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporary stop) and a reach state is formed: Fig. 53 (a) ) to (c)) are substantially the same.
(2) In this configuration example 6, the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (tenpai performance) when the reach state is reached, and when any of the plurality of types of reach variation displays is executed. Even if there is, the specific performance can be executed (for example, the Tenpai performance after reach in FIG. 53).

[Configuration example 7B]
(1) A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops displaying a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then displays a fixed stop display;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display for the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let LMT (seconds) be the time during the first stopping operation from when the symbol to temporarily stop first starts the stopping operation until the symbol stops temporarily,
The following relational expression (1) is satisfied when the time during the second stopping operation from when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts its stopping operation until the corresponding symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds). 44(a), (c) of FIG. 45: Description of the relationship between the left stop action period LMT of the stop action long and the middle stop action period CMT).
LMT>CMT (1)
(2) Further, in configuration example 7, the symbol display means includes a high-speed variable display in which the symbol is displayed at a first transmittance, and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, as the fluctuating display of the symbol. It is possible to perform the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined variation display for the predetermined variation time, during the first stopping operation, the second and subsequent symbols to be temporarily stopped are being displayed in the high speed variation display (for example, FIG. 44(a), FIG. 45(c)): It is characterized by the fact that while the left symbol is in a stopping motion, the right symbol and the middle symbol are in high-speed fluctuation.

[Configuration example 8B]
(1) A symbol display means that variably displays a plurality of symbols according to a lottery result as to whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops displaying a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then permanently displays a combination of symbols;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display for the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let RMT (seconds) be the time during the first stopping motion from when the second temporarily stopped symbol starts its stopping motion until the symbol temporarily stops,
If the time during the second stopping operation from when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts its stopping operation until the corresponding symbol temporarily stops is defined as CMT (seconds), the following relational expression (1) is satisfied (for example, FIGS. 44(a) and 45(c): description of the relationship between the right stop action period RMT of the stop action long and the middle stop action period CMT).
RMT>CMT (1)
(2) Further, in configuration example 8, the symbol display means includes a high-speed variable display in which the symbol is displayed at a first transmittance, and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, as the fluctuating display of the symbol. It is possible to perform the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined variation display for the predetermined variation time, during the second stop operation, the last symbol to temporarily stop is displayed in the high speed variation display (for example, FIG. 44(a), FIG. 45(c): right symbol During the stop operation, the medium symbol is characterized by a description of high-speed fluctuation).

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the explanation has been mainly given to a gaming machine provided with "support time saving". In the second embodiment, which will be described next, an embodiment will be described in which a "ceiling function" that provides a predetermined profit status is provided as a relief function when the player becomes addicted to the game. Note that substantially the same components (including processes) as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of components that are substantially the same as those in the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description, and the description will focus on points that are different from the first embodiment.

(About ceiling function)
In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, first, the above-mentioned "ceiling function" will be explained.

In conventional gaming machines, the transition to the time saving state or variable probability state is limited to when a jackpot is won, and the game tends to become monotonous. In particular, if the player encounters a big problem before winning the jackpot (for example, not winning the jackpot even after playing the game twice or more than the jackpot probability denominator), the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced. Therefore, a gaming machine that can shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from the opportunity to win a jackpot is desired. Therefore, in this embodiment, a gaming machine is provided that has a "ceiling function" that provides a predetermined profit status as a relief function when the player becomes addicted to the game. Thereby, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from the opportunity to win a jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly even if the player gets addicted to the jackpot.

The above-mentioned "ceiling function" is such that when a predetermined number of games (a predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached (digested) without winning a jackpot (in other words, when a predetermined number of games are played), the player This is a function that grants a predetermined profit status (ceiling benefit) in order to relieve the situation. In this respect, it differs from support time reduction, where profits are awarded through a lottery. From the perspective of a stress relief function, the ceiling benefit is naturally at least in a more advantageous profit state than the normal state.

As mentioned above, the ceiling function has a strong implication of being a relief function, so basically it is a time-saving state or a normal state with a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is low, preferably a normal state (normal mode) It is preferable to activate the game when a predetermined number of games are played without winning a jackpot (when a ceiling number of games is reached). However, in this embodiment, in addition to winning the jackpot, there is a "support time reduction" that grants a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state (see Figure 4), so it is possible to win at least the jackpot and the support time reduction during the normal state. If the number of games reaches the ceiling without any problems, the ceiling function will be activated (ceiling benefits will be granted). Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ceiling function without providing a support time-saving function, or may be a gaming machine that has a support time-saving function and a ceiling function.

(About ceiling benefits)
The types of the above-mentioned "ceiling benefits" will be explained. As shown in the list of "Examples of Ceiling Benefits" in Note 2 of Figure 61B, the types of ceiling benefits include, for example, "Infinite Time Saving", "Limited Time Saving", "Infinite Variable", "Finite Variable", " There are "infinite potential", "finite potential", "forced hit", etc. Broadly dividing these benefits, "infinite time saving" and "finite time saving" are "ceiling time saving types", "infinite definite variation" and "finite definite variation" are "ceiling definite variation types", and "infinite potential" and "finite potential" are "ceiling definite variation types". ``Definite'' is a ceiling benefit that belongs to the ``ceiling potential type'', and ``forced hit'' is a ceiling benefit that belongs to the ``ceiling hit type''. Below, these ceiling benefit types will be explained one by one.

(Infinite time saving)
(A) "Infinite time saving" is a privilege that grants a time saving state until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite time saving, the number of time saving times is "unlimited (infinite)", but the number of time saving times until the next jackpot, for example, 10,000 times, 65,535 times, etc. due to the jackpot lottery probability. For example, in cases where there is no possibility of ending the time reduction state by reaching the number of time reductions (it is safe to think that it is 0%), or in cases where the number of time reductions that cannot be completed during the pachinko hall's business hours is granted ( For example, 65535 times, etc.) can also be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction in the present invention. The same applies to "infinite time reduction" related to support time reduction.

(Limited time saving)
(B) "Limited time saving" means that a time saving state is granted up to a predetermined number of times in order to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. This point differs from the above-mentioned infinite time saving, which has no limit on the number of times. A typical example of the number of time savings awarded is 100 times, which is the same number of time savings as the time saving jackpot (4R time saving jackpot), but it is not limited to giving the same number of time savings as the time saving jackpot; It's okay. For example, if the number of time savings due to the time saving jackpot is M times (for example, 100 times of the 4R time saving jackpot) and the finite number of time savings due to the ceiling bonus is N times, "Number of time savings N<Number of time savings M" (M = 100 times, N = 50 times, 75 times, etc.) or a number that satisfies "Number of time savings N>Number of time savings M" (M = 100 times, N = 200 times, 400 times, etc.). In addition, in the above-mentioned "infinite time saving", when the number of time saving times is "substantially until the next jackpot", it can be said that it belongs to this finite time saving in that there is a limit on the number of times, but as mentioned earlier, the present invention In this case, it can be treated as belonging to the infinite shortening of time. The same applies to "limited time reduction" related to support time reduction.

(Specific example of granting limited working hours)
Here, when granting limited time savings through ceiling benefits, the following grant forms (1) to (5) can be used. Note that although the explanation here focuses on the form of granting finite time savings, the concept does not completely exclude granting infinite time savings.

(Limited time saving form 1)
(1) If there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to a jackpot (the number of time reductions granted due to winning a jackpot (worktime reduction state)), the type of number of time reductions due to ceiling benefits (worktime reduction state) is more than one type. Decide on a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B<number of types A". For example, if two types (number of types A) are provided as the number of time reductions due to jackpots: 100 times (number of time reductions A) and 50 times (number of time reductions B), the number of time reductions due to the ceiling benefit (finite time reduction) is set to one type (for example, , 100 time saving times (time saving number A)). Note that, as long as the relationship "Number of Types B<Number of Types A" is satisfied, a different number of time saving times (for example, 150 times) than the number of time saving times due to the jackpot may be given. In addition, if there are two or more types of number of working hours reduced (working hours reduced state) due to ceiling benefits (in the case of "2 ≦ number of types B < number of types A"), one of the number of reduced working hours (time reduced state) will be selected by a predetermined lottery. ) can be configured to be decidable. Moreover, the above-mentioned "number of types A" may be the number of types of time reductions (finite time reductions) due to support time reduction. Note that as an exception to this embodiment, infinite time saving may be included as long as the relationship of "number of types B<number of types A" is satisfied.

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of time saving times (working time saving states) due to ceiling benefits, one of the working time saving times (working time saving states) can be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling benefit lottery).
For example, if there are multiple types of time savings due to the jackpot, for example, if there are 50 time savings and 100 time savings, then in the ceiling bonus lottery, the same number of time savings as the jackpot (50 and 100 times) will be drawn. It can be targeted. In this case, as a ceiling benefit, the number of time savings equivalent to the jackpot can be given. Of course, a plurality of times (for example, 100 times, 75 times, and 25 times) including times of time savings different from the number of times of time savings due to the jackpot may be subject to the ceiling privilege lottery. In this case, since the number of time savings that is different from the jackpot is given, it does not become an excessive ceiling benefit. Of course, the number of time-savings to be drawn can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. It can also include the number of time reductions and, in exceptional cases, infinite time reduction. In addition, the ceiling bonus lottery may include a "loss" option in which the ceiling bonus is not awarded. When providing a loss, in the case of a ceiling benefit that includes infinite time reduction or a high number of time reductions (for example, 1000 times), it is suitable to reduce the ceiling benefit grant rate and prevent excessive ceiling benefits from being granted. .

Such a ceiling bonus lottery function can improve gameplay in that a fixed ceiling bonus is not given each time the ceiling is reached.

In addition, the lottery probabilities (selection rates) of the ceiling benefit types (here, multiple time saving times) that are subject to the ceiling benefit lottery may be the same or approximately the same, or may be different in whole or in part. good. Further, the lottery target may include a "ceiling privilege loss" in which a ceiling privilege is not given. In the case where a ceiling bonus loss is included, the ceiling bonus is not necessarily awarded even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling bonus lottery" will serve as a relief function for addicts.

Alternatively, a lottery probability may be determined according to the "set value", and the number of time reductions (time reduction state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling award lottery according to the setting value). For example, the configuration is such that as the set value becomes higher, a relatively larger number of time saving times (time saving state) is likely to be selected. In other words, the configuration is such that as the setting value increases, benefits with relatively high profit levels are more likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Specifically, if "100 times, 75 times, and 50 times" are set as the types of time saving times, and these lottery probabilities are "setting 1", "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting" In the case of 6”, it is “45%, 30%, 25%”, etc. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the more likely it is to become addicted, the configuration may be such that the lower the set value is, the more likely a relatively large number of time saving times will be selected. In other words, the configuration is such that as the set value becomes lower, benefits with relatively higher profit levels are more likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which "a specific set value is determined when a specific ceiling benefit is granted." For example, if 25 time saving times are given, "setting 6 is confirmed", and if 75 times is given, "setting 4 or more is confirmed", etc. In this way, the ceiling benefit determination method related to the setting value can provide the player with useful information such as the setting estimation factor, and is therefore useful in increasing the motivation of players who are addicted to the game.

(Limited time saving grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of time savings due to jackpots is N and the average number of time savings due to ceiling benefits is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 1) to (Formula 3).
(Equation 1) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N<average number of time reductions M". For example, when there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the jackpot, the average number of time savings N is 75 times, so the average number of time savings M due to the ceiling benefit is set to be a greater number of time savings. In this case, the ceiling benefit is relatively higher in profit than a normal jackpot win, so it is a nice benefit for players who are addicted to playing and have significantly decreased their desire to play. Note that the average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of time reductions M is set to an infinite number of times, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction" is provided.
(Equation 2) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship: "average number of time reductions N=average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit from the jackpot (the number of shortened hours) and the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Equation 3) The system is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of time reductions N>average number of time reductions M". In this case, the degree of profit from the jackpot is relatively lower than the degree of profit from the ceiling benefit, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being provided.

(Limited time reduction grant form 4)
(4) Similarly to the above (Formula 3), focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, set the number of time reductions to satisfy at least the relationship "number of time reductions due to ceiling benefits ≦ maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot". For example, if there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the jackpot, the maximum number of time savings is 100 times, so the number of time savings due to the ceiling bonus is set to, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. Further, focusing on the minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot, the number of time savings may be the number that satisfies the relationship "minimum number of time savings due to a jackpot ≦ number of time savings due to a ceiling benefit < maximum number of time savings due to a jackpot". For example, if there are 100 times and 75 times of time savings due to the jackpot, the number of time savings is determined to satisfy the relationship "75 times ≦ the number of time savings due to ceiling benefits < 100 times".
(Limited time reduction grant form 5)
Although there is no particular restriction on the number of time reductions in the finite time reduction, it is preferable to determine the number of time reductions that satisfies the following relationship.
(5) If the number of finite time savings is "Z" and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/M) at low probability is "M", then "0.4M≦Z≦3.8M~4.0M" It is preferable that the following relational expression is satisfied. For example, if the maximum number of time savings is about 4 times the probability denominator M, the possibility of winning the jackpot within that number of time savings is very high (the incidence of non-winning is about 2%), and it is a ceiling game. This can be said to be appropriate as a benefit for players who have continued playing the game until the number of players. Note that the value of M may be based on the jackpot lottery probability of any of Settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability with an intermediate setting of 3, more preferably with a minimum setting of 1 or a maximum setting of 6 is used as the standard.

(infinitely variable)
(C) "Infinitely variable" is a privilege that grants a variable probability state until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite probability variation, the number of STs is "unlimited number of times (infinite)", but like the same event as the above "infinite time saving", the number of STs until the next jackpot (for example, 10,000 times) or 65,536 times).

(finite definite variation)
(D) "Finite probability variation" is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, and is a state in which a probability variation state is given within a predetermined number of STs in order to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In addition, in the above-mentioned "infinite definite variation", when the number of STs that are "substantially until the next jackpot" is given, it can be said to belong to this finite definite variation in that there is a limit on the number of times, but it is the same as the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction". It may be treated as belonging to infinite definite variation, as in the case of the elephant, or it may be treated as belonging to finite definite variation (the same applies to infinite definite variation, which will be described later).

(Specific example of adding finite definite variation)
Here, when granting a finite variable, the following ceiling benefit granting forms (finite variable granting forms) 1 to 5 are the same as those explained in the finite time saving granting forms 1 to 5 of "finite time saving" above. It can be set to 4. In addition, in the following finite variable granting forms 1 to 5, the "time saving number" explained in the above "finite time saving giving forms 1 to 4" has been replaced with "ST number", "time saving state" has been replaced with "definite variable state", etc. as appropriate. Since the contents (concepts) are substantially the same, the contents will be omitted as appropriate in the description for convenience of explanation and to avoid duplication.

(Finite variable grant form 1)
(1) Number of STs due to a jackpot (There are multiple types (number of types A) of STs given due to winning a jackpot (variable status), but the number of STs (variable status) due to ceiling benefits is less than that ( The number of types is B).In other words, the configuration is such that the relationship "Number of types B<Number of types A" is satisfied.

In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs (variable state) given due to winning in a variable probability jackpot is one type of infinite number (65,535 times), so for convenience of explanation, here, the number of STs is 100 times. The explanation will be given assuming that there are three types (number of types B) of variable probability jackpots that give out three types (number of types B): (probability variation A), 75 times (probability variation B), and 25 times (probability variation C). In this case, for example, the ceiling privilege is configured so that only one type of ST count of 100 (probability variable A) is awarded.

(Finite variable grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of ST times (probability variable states) based on ceiling benefits, one of the ST times (probability variable states) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling benefit lottery). Regarding this point, it is substantially the same as the content explained in "(Limited time reduction granting form 2)" in the above finite time reduction, where the "number of time reductions" is replaced with "ST number", "time reduction state" is read as "variable state", etc. as appropriate. It is.

(Finite variable grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to variable probability jackpots is N, and the average number of STs due to ceiling benefits is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Formula 4) to (Formula 6). Regarding these (Formula 4) to (Formula 6), the wording of "Number of time saving" in (Formula 1) to (Formula 3) explained in "(Finite time saving provision form 3)" in the above finite time saving is changed to "ST number of times". ” is substantially the same as the other words.
(Equation 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship “average number of STs N<average number of STs M”. Note that the average number of STs M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of STs M is set to infinite, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite probability variation" is applied.
(Equation 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N=average number of STs M".
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Finite variable grant form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of STs is determined to satisfy at least the relationship "Number of STs due to ceiling benefits ≦ maximum number of STs due to jackpot". For example, if the number of STs due to a jackpot is 100 times (probable variable A), 75 times (probable variable B), and 25 times (probable variable C), the maximum number of STs is 100 times (probable variable A) or less, for example, 100 times, It can be set to 90 times, etc. Further, focusing on the minimum number of STs, the number of STs may be one that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to jackpot ≦ number of STs due to ceiling privilege < maximum number of STs due to jackpot". For example, the number of time reductions is set to satisfy the relationship "25 times ≦ the number of STs due to ceiling benefits < 100 times".

(infinite potential)
(E) "Infinite Potential" is a privilege that gives you a potential status until the next jackpot. In addition, in the case of infinite potential, the number of STs is "unlimited (infinite)", but as with the infinite time shortening and infinite probability variation above, even if you give the number of STs that will essentially be until the next jackpot. good.

(finite potential)
(F) "Finite potential" differs from the above-mentioned infinite potential, and gives a potential state up to a predetermined number of STs in order to achieve an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, there is no potential jackpot that triggers the transition to the potential state, but if a part of the variable jackpot is a potential jackpot, the finite variable grant form 1 explained in the finite variable It is possible to use the same configuration as in 4 to 4 (configuration related to assigning the ST number of times). Regarding this point, the content is essentially the same as that of finite definite variation (the wording of "definite variable state" is replaced with the wording of "potential state" as appropriate), so detailed explanation will be omitted to avoid duplication. .

(per force)
(G) "Forced win" means a forced jackpot win, regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Unrelated to the jackpot lottery" means that the jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and it means that the jackpot lottery is completely unrelated. Not limited to meaning.

The types of jackpots due to forced hits are variable probability jackpots (finite probability variable jackpots, infinite probability variable jackpots), time-saving jackpots (finite time-saving jackpots, infinite time-saving jackpots), or potential probability jackpots (finite potential probability jackpots, infinite potential probability jackpots). There may be. Furthermore, the maximum number of rounds or the round game mode can be determined as appropriate. Furthermore, the destination gaming state after a forced win can be determined as appropriate. For example, the destination gaming state may be the same as when the variable probability jackpot or time saving jackpot shown in FIG. It is also possible to shift to the same gaming state (time saving number, ST number).

However, in order to avoid giving excessive benefits, it is preferable that the forced win be any one of the jackpot lottery targets. More preferably, the profit level is not higher than the total jackpot. The profit here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the destination gaming state." In this embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the following relationship: "Profit from forced hit≦10R profit from variable jackpot (jackpot with the highest profit level among all jackpots)".

The above-described ceiling benefit is useful as an addictive relief function because it can provide a profit equal to or different from the profit level given by the jackpot lottery result.

Further, although various ceiling benefits have been explained above, it is free to choose which ceiling benefit to adopt. In addition, for ceiling benefits, we can provide multiple types of benefits with different characteristics (for example, finite time reduction and finite variable rate), or benefits with the same characteristics but different advantages (profit status) (for example, finite time reduction of 100 times). It is possible to provide multiple types of time saving A, limited time saving B with a limited number of time saving times of 50, etc.). In this case, what types of multiple types of ceiling benefits (two or more ceiling benefits) are provided can be determined as appropriate. For example, it is possible to provide a finite time reduction and a finite fixed variation, and determine which ceiling benefit to be granted by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the lottery probability may be set to be the same regardless of the setting value, but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the setting value, as in the above-mentioned "ceiling bonus lottery". Specifically, as the setting value increases, benefits with relatively high profit levels (for example, in the case of a lottery between finite time saving and finite definite variable, the "finite definite variable" side) are likely to be granted, and conversely, As the setting value becomes higher, the structure can be such that a benefit with a relatively low profit level (for example, in the case of drawing a lottery between finite time saving and finite fixed variable, the "finite time saving" side) is more likely to be granted. Note that compulsory In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of ``providing multiple types of benefits with different characteristics'' includes cases such as ``providing at least two of the time-saving jackpot, the variable jackpot, and the potential jackpot,'' and the case of ``providing multiple types of benefits with different characteristics.'' However, cases in which multiple types of benefits with different advantages (profit states) are provided include, for example, cases in which multiple jackpots with different number of time-savings (time-saving jackpots) are provided, and cases in which multiple jackpots with different number of STs (probable variable jackpots) are provided. There are also cases where a "potential jackpot" is established.

In addition, after a ceiling benefit is granted, the gaming state (gaming mode) related to the ceiling benefit remains until the ceiling benefit is consumed or at least until a jackpot (in this embodiment, a jackpot or a support time reduction) is won. controlled. Specifically, if it is a "finite benefit" such as finite time saving, finite variable variable, or finite potential, it is possible if the specified time saving number or ST number ends without winning the jackpot, or if the jackpot (real time) In the case of the embodiment, if the player wins a jackpot or shortened support time, the benefit state is ended and the ceiling benefit is not granted until the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite type benefit" such as infinite time saving, infinite probability change, or infinite potential, the benefit status will continue until the next jackpot, and after winning the jackpot (in the case of this embodiment, jackpot or support time reduction), The benefit status will be terminated.

In addition, when the ceiling privilege is a finite probability variable, it may be a "finite probability variable time saving type" ceiling privilege that shifts to a time saving state (finite time saving or infinite time saving) when the prescribed number of STs ends. This "finitely variable time-saving type" includes the following types (A) to (D).
(A) A ``finite variable/finite time saving'' type ceiling benefit that transitions to a finite time saving (for example, 100 time saving times) when the specified ST number of times (for example, 75 times) ends.
(B) A ``finitely variable/infinite time saving'' type ceiling benefit that transitions to infinite time saving after the specified number of STs ends.
(C) When the first prescribed ST number (for example, 75 times) ends, only the electric support state ends, and the state shifts to the second prescribed ST number (for example, 100 times). ” type ceiling benefit (the first prescribed number of STs and the second prescribed number of STs may be the same number of times or may be different numbers of times).
(C) A ``finitely variable/infinitely certain'' type ceiling benefit that only ends in the electric support state when the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) ends and shifts to infinitely certain.

(About the number of ceiling games)
Next, the number of ceiling games will be explained. The number of ceiling games according to this embodiment is the number of games (the number of ceiling games) taking into account the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of settings 1 to 6, and is 1000 games in a normal state (a game mode belonging to the normal mode may be used). The number of games (for example, the number of addictive games is about five times the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability setting 1). That is, in the normal state, if the player continues to lose 1000 games, the ceiling function is activated and a ceiling benefit is granted.

Although the number of ceiling games can be determined as appropriate, it is preferable to set the number of ceiling games as follows.
(Ten 1) When the number of ceiling games is “H” and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/M) at low probability is “M”, the relational expression “2.5M≦H≦3.0M” is satisfied. It is preferable. The reason for doing this is that if the number of ceiling games is within 2.5 to 3 times the probability denominator, the probability of getting addicted to it will be about 8% to 5%, and many players will hit the jackpot before reaching the ceiling number of games. This is because it allows players to win prizes, and it prevents players from playing games blindly aiming for the ceiling number of games (suppresses the desire for gambling). Note that the value of M may be based on the jackpot lottery probability of any of Settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability with an intermediate setting of 3, more preferably with a minimum setting of 1 or a maximum setting of 6 is used as the standard (Italy 45). In the case of this embodiment, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability setting 1 is "1/200", then M=200, so "500 (2.5 x 200)≦H≦600 (3 It can be said that it is preferable to adopt a ceiling game number that satisfies the relationship ``.0x200)''.
(Ten 2) In this embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make the ceiling game different for all or part of each setting value. can. For example, settings 1 to 6 may each have a different number of ceiling games (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the fewer the number of ceiling games), or the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) may have a different number of ceiling games. For example, the medium/low setting area (settings 1 to 3) may be set to 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, the highest setting, setting 6) may have a ceiling number of games that is different from other setting values. In this way, when the number of ceiling games is determined according to the set value, it becomes possible to provide the player with a setting estimation factor based on the number of ceiling games. If players get addicted to reaching the ceiling, they will become discouraged and their interest in the game will decline, but as a benefit of reaching the ceiling, in addition to the ceiling benefit, we also give a setting guess element (double benefit grant), which increases the player's enjoyment of the game. It is possible to prevent a person's interest in playing from decreasing.

(About the gaming mode and variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode (variable pattern selection mode): Figure 74)
In the case of this embodiment, since a ceiling function is provided, unlike the first embodiment, a game mode and a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) as shown in FIG. 74 are provided. As shown in FIG. 74, the types of internal gaming states include a normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, etc., which is the same as in the first embodiment (see column "YJ" in FIG. 74). On the other hand, the types of gaming states (gaming modes) related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) include "general mode", "premonition mode", "probable variable mode 1 to 3", "time saving mode 1 to 3", "ceiling mode", ""HeavenMode" (see the "Tcode" column in FIG. 74). Although details will be described later, the "general mode" and the "foreshadowing mode" are game modes that belong to the normal mode, and the general mode is a game mode that corresponds to the "normal mode" in the first embodiment. Further, the "ceiling mode" is a game mode that occurs in the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and the "heaven mode" is a game mode related to the ceiling privilege. Note that "variable probability modes 1 to 3" and "time saving modes 1 to 3" are substantially the same game modes as in the first embodiment.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to each of the above game modes, FIG. )", and FIG. 71 shows the "hit/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (for ceiling, heaven)" that is referred to when a jackpot or support time-saving win is achieved in ceiling mode or heaven mode (heaven time-saving). Figure 72 shows the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general use)" that is referred to when a loss is made in the general mode, and FIG. Pattern distribution table (for omen, ceiling, and heaven time saving)" is shown. Note that the "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general use)" shown in FIG. 72 has substantially the same table configuration as the "normal medium loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. 32 of the first embodiment. .

<30. Game mode transition form: Fig. 61A, Fig. 61B>
Next, referring to FIGS. 61A and 61B, the contents of the "gaming mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) and the transition control between each gaming mode (between each gaming state) according to the present embodiment are explained. , performance mode related to the game mode will be explained. FIGS. 61A and 61B are game flows outlining each game mode and the production mode related thereto. Note that since the variable probability mode and the time saving mode are the same as those in the first embodiment, their descriptions will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61A and FIG. A plurality of types of game modes are provided, such as ``mode'', and the progress of the game is controlled under these game modes. In the following explanation, it will be assumed that the player follows the advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of left-handed hitting (normal state), the game will be called "Special Figure 1 Side Symbol Variation Display Game 1". is executed, and when the right-hander is advantageous (variable probability state, time saving state), the description will be made assuming that "symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed.

(30-1. Regarding “normal mode”)
The normal mode is a gaming mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the normal state (YJ=00H), and this normal mode is an initial mode that is started when the internal RAM is cleared by a RAM clearing operation or a setting change operation. This is the game mode.

The normal mode of this embodiment includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "precursor mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "08H". In this point, the present embodiment differs greatly from the first embodiment, which does not have a precursor mode. Among the normal modes, the "general mode" is the game mode in which you can stay the longest during the game, and basically, from this general mode, you can win a jackpot or win a short support time, or by reaching the ceiling as described below. When the ceiling privilege is granted, the player can move to other game modes (variable probability mode or time saving mode).

(30-1A. About general mode)
During the above-mentioned "general mode", the controller stays in the "normal performance mode (air combat mode: FIG. 7B(b))(c)" which provides a performance related to the normal mode (general mode). This point is the same as the first embodiment.

(30-1A-1. Special effects during normal mode)
(Italy 51) During the normal mode, especially during the general mode, an information notice regarding the existence of the "ceiling function" is given. This information preview is not a performance that belongs to either a preview performance that informs the winning expectation level or a setting suggestion performance. The content of the performance provided by the information notice is to inform players, such as those who are new to the game or who are seeing the game for the first time, that the game machine is equipped with a ceiling function (relief function). For example, this information notice will notify you that the ceiling function is installed, information about the number of games until the ceiling is reached (number of ceiling games), information about the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached (remaining number of ceiling games), etc. . In addition, the information notice may appear as part of the winning performance related to the jackpot game, appear while waiting for the customer (at least a part of the performance before the customer is waiting for the customer, or during the game setting). It can be made to appear on the screen or as an effect during a symbol variation display game. In any case, the information preview is not an effect that suggests the winning expectation level or setting, so it may be displayed at an appropriate timing.

(30-1B. About the omen mode)
The above-mentioned "foreshadowing mode" is a game mode that is shifted to when the ceiling game is almost reached. For example, it is provided as a game mode for executing a "premonitory effect" to notify that the ceiling is almost reached. In this embodiment, during the general mode, the transition is made when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a jackpot or shortening support time. Specifically, if you get addicted to 989 games (continue to lose) during the normal mode, you will be transferred to the omen mode from the 990th game (the block frame of "normal mode" in Figure 61A and the block frame of "omen mode" in Figure 61B) (See (α)).

(30-1B-1. Regarding production during omen mode)
During the omen mode, the mode is shifted to the "omen performance mode" which performs an effect related to the omen mode (omen performance). During the omen production mode, a background image different from the normal production mode related to the general mode (for example, from the "day background image (general mode background image)" with the shining sun in the normal production mode) to the "night background image (background image for general mode)" with shining stars) The background image for the omen mode)") is switched and displayed to notify that the omen mode is in progress. In the case of this embodiment, the normal production mode and the omen production mode differ only in the background image color, and basically the production related to the "air battle mode" shown in FIGS. 7B (b) and (c) appears. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, during the omen effect mode, for example, a "countdown display" is executed as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling (remaining number of ceilings) (foreshadow mode in Fig. 61B). (see block frame (δ)). This remaining ceiling number display performance may be made to appear during a part of the period in the precursor mode, and for example, the remaining ceiling number display performance may be started (countdown display starts) from the 996th game, which is close to the ceiling. Specifically, considering the maximum number of pending memories of 4, it is possible to display a countdown (for example, suggest a count of zero in a ceiling game) between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 and 1000 games including ceiling games. can. If the number of games until the ceiling is known, there is a performance advantage in that if there are balls on hold, the player can prevent unnecessary hits until the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, during the portent effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from that in the general mode is displayed. For example, in the normal production mode, the pending display format is based on a simple "round icon" as shown in Figure 5, but in the precursor production mode, a dedicated pending display format based on the "character icon" is displayed. (See the block frame (ε) of the precursor mode in FIG. 61B, and FIG. 62 described later). In general mode, one or more pending displays that exist immediately before the transition to portent mode (989th game) will be changed all at once to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to portent mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the pending display to be consumed during the sign mode may be changed to a dedicated pending display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are three pending balls during the execution of the 988th game, the pending display for the 989th to 991st games will be changed to a round icon (in general mode). ``Character icon (Pending consumption target during portent mode: 990th game)'' ``Character icon (Pending consumption target during portent mode: 991st game)''. In addition, from the start of the harbinger production mode until the predetermined number of games are played, the same hold display (round icon) as in the normal production mode is displayed, and when the ceiling is almost reached (for example, considering the maximum number of pending memories of 4, 996 game to 999 game), the display may be switched to a hold display (character icon) dedicated to the omen. Further, during the omen effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" and/or "hold display exclusively for omen" may be displayed.

(About fluctuation patterns related to precursor mode)
If we pay attention to the "precursor mode ("precursor"column)" of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. It is set to be in a fluctuating state (during the normal mode, the game mode with the fastest average consumption time). This is done in consideration of the player's state of mind. Many players are thought to have a strong desire to ``I want to reach the ceiling as soon as possible'' or ``I want to get the ceiling benefit quickly'' when they get close to the ceiling. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time during the precursor mode is increased. Further, in the case of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 70, the same winning fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB6 as in the general mode are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning fluctuation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, a "variation per omen" can be provided as a win variation exclusively during the omen mode (see note 4 "variation per omen" in FIG. 70).

(30-2. About ceiling mode)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 61B. In this embodiment, as already explained, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in case of a serious jam. The number of ceiling games in this embodiment is the 1000th addictive game in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in this 1000th game, and is limited to one game (limited to one rotation). This is the game mode.

Note that the ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to a time-saving state, a variable probability state, etc., depending on the ceiling privilege. This will be explained as giving the same time-saving performance as the 4R time-saving jackpot. Hereinafter, the ceiling benefit according to this embodiment will be referred to as "ceiling time reduction."

(About the activation timing of ceiling benefits)
““Activated at the beginning of the ceiling game” and “Activated at the end of the ceiling game””
Here, if you reach the ceiling game (the 1000th game you are addicted to), you can either activate the ceiling time reduction at the start of the ceiling game ("activation type at the start of the ceiling game" that gives ceiling benefits at the start of the game), or It is possible to decide as appropriate whether the time reduction is activated at the end of the ceiling game (the end of the variable time or the end of the fixed display time) (“the type that triggers at the end of the ceiling game” where the ceiling benefit is given at the end of the game). . If the former type that is activated at the start of the ceiling game is adopted, the ceiling mode becomes a game mode (ceiling mode α) related to the time saving state (YJ = 02H), and in the case of the latter type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game, The game mode (ceiling mode β) is related to the normal state (YJ=00H). No matter which method is adopted, when the ceiling game is reached, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "09H" in order to select the variation pattern dedicated to the ceiling, and as a result, the game mode is "09H". (See note 3 in FIG. 61B and ceiling mode α and ceiling mode β in the Tcode column of FIG. 74). Note that if the ceiling time reduction is triggered by the end of the variable time, the time reduction state will occur before the fixed display time elapses. Therefore, strictly speaking, the time saving state starts from the middle of the game, but in reality, the ceiling time saving is activated at the end of the game, so in this embodiment, the time saving state belongs to the above-mentioned "type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game". treated as

(Italy 87) The above-mentioned "activated at the end of the ceiling game" is the same as the "special electric non-activated support time reduction" in that the time reduction state (ceiling time reduction) occurs upon the end of the current game (ceiling game). It is. As already explained, in the special electric non-operating type support time saving, a time saving state occurs upon completion of the current game (support time saving winning game). On the other hand, the type that is activated at the start of the ceiling game differs greatly from the special electric non-activation type support time reduction in that the time reduction state occurs with the start of the current game (ceiling game). Therefore, the appropriate start timing for executing the time-saving entry notification effect to notify that the time-saving state has entered is as follows.
"Special electric non-activation type support time reduction" is announced at the end of the game (notified at the timing when the symbols are stopped and displayed).
"Special electric activation type support time saving" is notified at the end of the game (notified at the symbol stop display timing), or at a predetermined timing during the period from the start to the end of the support time saving opening/closing game. Preferably, this is executed at the start of the support time-saving opening/closing game).
"Activated at the end of the ceiling game" is notified at the end of the game (notified at the timing when the symbols are stopped and displayed).
``Ceiling game start type'' is notified at the start of the game.
becomes.
(Italy 89) Also, the appropriate execution timing for the right-handed batting instruction performance is as follows.
"Special electric non-activation type support time reduction" is executed at the end of the game (executed at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed).
"Special electric activation type support time saving" is executed at the end of the game (notified at the symbol stop display timing), or at a predetermined timing between the start and end of the support time saving opening/closing game. Preferably, this is executed at the start of the support time-saving opening/closing game).
"Activated at the end of the ceiling game" is executed at the end of the game (executed at the timing when the symbols are stopped and displayed)
``Ceiling game start type'' is executed at the start of the game.
becomes.
(Italy 90-1) In summary, the "activated at the end of ceiling game type" and the "shortened support time" can use the same execution timing for the right-handed hitting instruction performance. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction performance may be the same performance mode or may be a different performance mode.
(Italy 90-2) The execution timing of the right-handed instruction performance can be set to be different between the ``type activated at the start of the ceiling game'' and the ``shortened support time''. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction performance may be the same performance mode or may be a different performance mode.

(About performance information)
(Italy 46) As described above, the internal game state during the ceiling game is different between the above-mentioned "type activated at the start of the ceiling game" and "type activated at the end of the ceiling game." Regarding the performance information, in the case of the type activated at the start of the ceiling game, it is measured as a normal state until the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game is started. On the other hand, in the case of the type activated at the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling time shortening state occurs when the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game ends, so the measurement is interrupted at the timing when the variation time or the fixed display time has elapsed.

(About the jackpot lottery in the ceiling game)
In the ceiling game (1000th game), the jackpot lottery is executed as usual. Therefore, in the ceiling game, if you win a jackpot or shorten support time, the question is whether to give priority to the ceiling benefit (or to give priority to the winning result.In this embodiment, at least if you win a jackpot, Activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) (conditions for prohibiting ceiling activation are met), and priority is given to processing jackpot wins.On the other hand, between support time reduction and ceiling benefits, priority is given to the one that is more advantageous to the player. In the case of this embodiment, considering that the ceiling benefit is "a limited number of time reductions of 100 times", that is, it grants the benefit status of support time reductions A to C, In this case, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) and priority is given to processing the support time-saving winnings.Specifically, as follows.
(Italy 71) When a jackpot is won, a jackpot winning process is executed without giving a ceiling time reduction (ceiling privilege), and a jackpot game is started after the ceiling game ends.
(I72) If the support time reduction is won, the support time reduction winning process is executed without giving the ceiling time reduction. In addition, if the winning support time saving is "special electric activation type support time saving", the support time saving opening/closing game is executed after the ceiling game ends, and after the support time saving opening/closing game ends, the time saving state by the support time saving is started. If the winning support time reduction is "special electric non-activated support time reduction", after the ceiling game ends, the time reduction state by support time reduction will start.

(Variation example of jackpot lottery in ceiling game)
(Italy 73) Furthermore, if the ceiling benefit is more profitable than the reduction in support time, priority can be given to giving the ceiling benefit. In other words, the configuration does not prohibit (allow) activation of the ceiling function even if the support time reduction is won. In this embodiment, support time reductions A to C are provided, but if only support time reduction D (number of time reductions: 50 times) is provided, ceiling time reduction (number of time reductions: 100 times) is better. The profit level will be higher. In such a case, in order to provide an advantageous profit state to the player, even if the support time reduction D is won in the ceiling game, it will be treated as invalid, the activation of the ceiling function will be allowed, and the ceiling time reduction that is the ceiling benefit will be treated as invalid. Give. Here, we compared the degree of profit between support time reduction and ceiling time reduction based on the number of time reductions, but the normal power release game mode during the support time reduction state and the normal power release game mode during the ceiling time reduction state (time reduction state due to ceiling time reduction) If the opening/closing operation patterns of the lower starting port 35 are different (for example, if the opening/closing operation patterns of the lower starting port 35 are different), instead of comparing only the number of times saved, consider the normal power release game mode and prohibit/allow the activation of the ceiling function. It is preferable to specify.
(Italy 74) In addition, if the degree of profit related to the shortening of support time is different between the special drawing side 1 and the special drawing side 2, the special drawing side with the higher degree of advantage will give priority to processing the winning of the support time saving, and the special drawing side with the lower degree of profit will The side can prioritize the granting of ceiling time reduction. The degree of profit related to the support time reduction of this embodiment is higher on the special map 2 side than on the special map 1 side (see the support time reduction winning type and its symbol lottery rate in FIG. 4). Therefore, if you win the support time reduction on the special drawing 2 side (support time reduction B or support time reduction C: see Figure 4), the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited and priority is given to processing the winning of the support time reduction, and the special drawing If the support time reduction on the first side is won (support time reduction A to C: see FIG. 4), activation of the ceiling function can be allowed and priority can be given to the granting of the ceiling time reduction.

As mentioned above, for the 1000th game, which is a ceiling game, activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) at least when a jackpot is won (in this embodiment, when a jackpot or support time reduction is won). (See step S920 during the ceiling activation management process in FIG. 65, which will be described later). Therefore, the case where the ceiling benefit is always given is when the ceiling game is a "lose". In addition, if a regular small win is provided, even if you win the regular small win in the ceiling game, you will be given the ceiling benefit in the same way as if you lost. This is because normal small hits do not control the transition of internal gaming states. This point is not limited to the case where the ceiling benefit is finite time saving, but also applies when it is infinite time saving, infinitely variable, finitely variable, infinitely certain, or finitely likely. However, if you win the support time reduction, it is preferable to decide which one to prioritize by considering the profit level of the ceiling benefit and the support time reduction (details on this will be explained later).

In addition, if the ceiling benefit is "forced win", the jackpot lottery will be forcibly controlled, so the 1000th game jackpot lottery itself will not be executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result will be invalidated. Treat it as if the jackpot for the ceiling has been won. Therefore, if the ceiling benefit is a "forced hit", the jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the ceiling jackpot will start after the end of the 1000th game, just like when a normal jackpot is won. becomes. The winning performance during the forced jackpot game may be the same as a normal jackpot, or a winning performance exclusive to the forced jackpot may appear.

(About the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction state)
(Italy 52) The condition for ending the ceiling time reduction state according to this embodiment is when the number of time reductions is exhausted or when a jackpot is won (including when a support time reduction is won if a support time reduction is provided). It is set to be terminated. However, other termination conditions may be adopted. For example, if a normal open game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), if a normal small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when a small win game based on a normal small win is played a predetermined number of times) , when one special figure (either one of special figure 1 or special figure 2) fluctuates a predetermined number of times, or when a specific support time reduction is won among a plurality of support time reductions, etc. can be employed. Note that (Italy 55) one or more termination conditions can be provided. Thereby, the conditions for ending the ceiling time saving state can be varied, the range of gameplay is widened, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Timing for setting end conditions for ceiling time reduction)
(I53-1) After the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction. For example, in a case where there are multiple jackpots 1 to 4, if you win jackpot 1, the ceiling time is reduced to 100 times, and if you win jackpot 2, the ceiling time is reduced to 200 times, and jackpot 3 is reached. If you win, you will receive a ceiling of 1200 time reductions, and if you win the jackpot 4, you will receive a ceiling of 0 time reductions (actually, there is no ceiling benefit). The feature of this configuration is that the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction can be changed depending on the type of jackpot, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling benefit (relief content when the ceiling is reached) can be changed. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function and improves the fun of the game.
(I53-2) When the ceiling time reduction is activated, the end conditions for the ceiling time reduction can be set. For example, if the ceiling time reduction is "activated at the start of the ceiling game", the end condition for the ceiling time reduction can be set using the start of the ceiling game as an opportunity. If the ceiling time reduction is "activated at the end of the ceiling game", the end condition for the ceiling time reduction can be set using the end of the ceiling game as an opportunity. In this case, when setting the end conditions for the ceiling time reduction, the above-mentioned "ceiling benefit lottery" can be used to determine what kind of end conditions the ceiling time reduction is to be granted. For example, one of the following ceiling time reductions can be determined by lottery: a ceiling time reduction of 100 time reductions, a ceiling time reduction of 200 time reductions, a ceiling time reduction of 1200 time reductions, and a ceiling time reduction of 0 time reductions. . The feature of this configuration is that the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction are changed when the ceiling function is activated (in other words, when the ceiling benefit is granted), and the degree of advantage of the ceiling benefit can be changed. It is possible to do so. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function and improves the fun of the game.
(Italy 53-3) It is possible to set an end condition for ceiling time reduction when RAM is cleared. In this case as well, as in (I53-2) above, clearing the RAM will trigger one of the ceiling time reductions (at least one with different time saving performance). can be determined by lottery. The feature of this configuration is that the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction are changed when the RAM is cleared, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling privilege can be changed. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function and improves the fun of the game.

(About fluctuation patterns related to ceiling mode: Figures 71 and 73)
When the ceiling mode (1000th rotation) fails, in order to secure the production time width of the "ceiling effect" described later, a specific variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (ceiling variation pattern: "ceiling variation" in Figure 73) is used. is now selected. As this ceiling variation pattern, a variation pattern with a variation time longer than at least N reach is selected, but there is no particular restriction as long as the production time width of the "ceiling production" can be secured. For example, the variation pattern may have a variation time longer than the SP reach in the normal mode (at least longer than the pseudo-unless SP reach).

In addition, in the ceiling mode, in the case of a loss, a common ceiling variation pattern (ceiling variation) is selected, regardless of the "special pattern type and number of active pending balls" ("ceiling variation" in Figure 73). ). In the case of this embodiment, since there are a plurality of loss types, "ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of the "special symbol type, operation pending ball number, and loss type". The reason for this is that, firstly, it is important to notify that a ceiling benefit will be given when the ceiling is reached, so a common ceiling effect is performed regardless of the special symbol type or the activated ball. It is preferable to do so. Secondly, for the ceiling game only for one game (limited to one rotation), we prepare multiple fluctuation pattern distribution tables according to the special symbol type and the operation pending ball, and execute various effects based on this. This is because the control burden increases unnecessarily, which is undesirable from the viewpoint of control burden. In addition, in the case of a win, the common "win variation in the ceiling" is selected from the viewpoint of performance and control burden reduction, as in the case of "loss" described above (" (See “Ceiling” column).

(Italy 103) In addition, in the fluctuating effect (effect that can appear during the game) related to the winning variation when the support time reduction is won, after once announcing the loss via reach (reach loss), the support time reduction There is a "Support Time Shortening Winning Performance" that announces the winning of , but in the fluctuating performance related to ceiling fluctuations, there is no performance such as giving a ceiling benefit (entering the ceiling time shortening) after losing the reach. This is because ceiling benefits are not based on the concept of "winning" through a jackpot lottery, but rather are benefits awarded based on the number of games played. However, when executing the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery", the effect related to the ceiling fluctuation may be configured to be able to execute a "ceiling privilege winning effect" that notifies you that you have won the ceiling privilege lottery after losing the reach. .

(Regarding ceiling fluctuations and shortened support time winning fluctuations)
Ceiling time reduction and support time reduction both grant the same time reduction state, but ceiling time reduction is a profit state that is activated when the ceiling number of games is reached, and support time reduction is a profit state that is activated after the jackpot lottery. different. For this reason, the confirmed display time related to the ceiling variation and the confirmed display time related to the support time-saving winning variation can be determined as follows.
(Italy 84) The confirmation display time differs depending on the ceiling fluctuation and the short support time winning fluctuation.
(Italy 85) The confirmation display time for the ceiling fluctuation is longer than the confirmation display time for the support time-saving winning fluctuation.
(Italy 86) The confirmation display time for the support time-saving winning variation is longer than the confirmation display time for the ceiling variation.
According to (Italy 84) to (Italy 86) above, when notifying the entry into a time-saving state using each symbol stop period, the type of time-saving state (ceiling time-saving state, support time-saving state) ) Appropriate notification effects can be executed depending on the situation.

(Variation example related to fluctuation pattern selection processing: Fluctuation pattern forced overwriting processing)
(Italy 42) In addition, in the ceiling game, a variation pattern is selected by the usual process with reference to the variation pattern distribution table (Fig. 70, Fig. 72 to Fig. 73) related to the general mode or omen mode, It is also possible to forcibly overwrite the variation pattern designation command depending on the winning type. For example, if the jackpot lottery result in the ceiling game is a loss, refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode (or general mode) shown in FIG. Therefore, here, we will refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the precursor mode even in the ceiling game: refer to one of FH70 to FH73 depending on the lottery result, the number of active pending pitches, etc.), the first fluctuation pattern ( However, in the case of a ceiling game, the fluctuation pattern is forcibly updated to a specific fluctuation pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern designation command "A014H" (ceiling fluctuation), and the corresponding fluctuation is selected. Make sure to set the time. Even in this manner, it is possible to determine a specific variation pattern in the ceiling game. In this case, it is possible to select the ceiling variation and execute the effect related to it without changing the program as much as possible.
(Italy 43) In addition, in the case of a jackpot or shortened support time (including the normal small hit if a normal small hit is provided), after performing the normal fluctuation pattern selection process, a specific The winning variation pattern (specific variation pattern designation command) may be overwritten.

(30-2-1. Regarding production during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, a transition is made to a "ceiling presentation mode" in which a presentation is made to notify that the vehicle has reached the ceiling. This ceiling presentation mode is a presentation mode exclusively for the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, is a presentation mode for only one game (one rotation only). An example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode is, for example, "ceiling entry effect 781" shown in Note 1 of FIG. 61B. As this ceiling entry effect 781, for example, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern for ceiling) different from at least the normal mode (number symbols 1 to 9) is displayed. The reason why it is said to be "at least a decorative pattern that is different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling will be reached when you encounter a big hit in normal mode (normal state), and the decorative pattern that has been appearing in normal mode for a long time will reach the ceiling. This is because it is appropriate to display a different decorative pattern to notify that the ceiling has been reached.

Specifically, the decorative pattern for the ceiling is a dedicated pattern (decorative pattern for ceiling) that displays a special character, item, or text, and is preferably a pattern that has a strong impact in terms of presentation. For example, Fig. 61B This is the decorative pattern 785 (decorative patterns of "Heaven", "☆", and "Well") shown in Note 1 of . Although there are usually three decorative pattern rows: a right pattern, a middle pattern, and a left pattern (see FIG. 61B), the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be three pattern rows. For example, there may be four symbol rows of "heaven," "well," "reach," and "tatsu," or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well." Furthermore, in order to emphasize that the object has reached the ceiling, a huge decorative pattern with a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern or a pattern with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding the decorative symbols related to the ceiling game, when displaying a variable display, normal decorative symbols are used (all or part of the same decorative symbol), and only the decorative symbol that is finally stopped (decoration stop symbol) is used as the decorative symbol for the ceiling. Good too. Further, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 shows the same character image as the one that won the support time reduction (see Figure 6 (a)), but even if it is a special character image (special effect) that appears only in the ceiling game. good.

In addition, in the illustration, the same text image 778 that says ``We will enter into time saving'' as when the support time saving is won is displayed, but this is because the ceiling time saving (ceiling benefit) is the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game. '', and informs during the ceiling game that a time saving state will occur after the ceiling game ends (the same applies if infinite time saving, finite definite variable, or infinite definite variable is given as a ceiling privilege). The ceiling entry performance 781 can be said to be one aspect of the above-mentioned "time-saving entry notification performance" in that it notifies that the ceiling time will be reduced.

On the other hand, if the ceiling time reduction is the above-mentioned "activated at the start of the ceiling game", the time reduction state will be triggered by the start of the ceiling game (1000th game), so the player should not be disadvantaged. Therefore, it is preferable to use the start of the game as an opportunity to display a "right-handed batting instruction performance (launch guidance notification performance)" that encourages right-handed batting (immediately informing that right-handed batting is advantageous at the start of the game). (The same applies if infinite time reduction, finite definite change, or infinite definite change is granted as a benefit).

In addition, when granting a gaming state with an electric support state as a ceiling benefit (especially when a type activated at the start of a ceiling game is adopted), at least a part of the period during the omen mode (for example, immediately before the ceiling game) In the game (the last time in the omen mode (999th rotation)), it is preferable to display a "pre-launch guidance notification effect" that notifies you in advance that the game will soon be shifted to a "game state advantageous for right-handed players." In order to make the "pre-launch guidance notification performance" appear, a configuration can be adopted in which a specific variation pattern (the final precursor variation) can be selected when the final game in the precursor mode is a "lose" (see Figure 73). (See Note 1 “Final fluctuation of precursors”).

The above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification performance" is a performance that instructs "how to shoot" in a game before the game in which the electric support state occurs. In this regard, conventional launch guidance notification effects such as instructing "right-handed firing" when an electric support situation occurs, or "left-handed firing" when an electric support condition is not available, are used. In other words, the character is different from the notification effect that instructs how to call when there is actually a presence or absence of electric support. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification performance is a performance unique to gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function.

The above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification performance" is unique as a performance unique to gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function, but the following unique performances can also be produced.
(Italy 35) After the ceiling fluctuation (see the "Ceiling" column in Figure 73) ends (after the symbol is confirmed), if there is no pending ball, the "wait after reaching the ceiling" effect is performed as a pre-wait for the customer effect. It can be made to appear. This "waiting performance after reaching the ceiling" is a performance that indicates that the vehicle has reached the ceiling and is in a time-saving state, and is one aspect of the performance before waiting for customers. Further, the waiting effect after reaching the ceiling can be made to appear overlappingly during the customer waiting effect (demonstration display).
(Italy 36) After the ceiling fluctuation is finished (after the symbol is confirmed), even if there is no action pending ball, the right-handed hitting instruction performance continues to appear. This right-handed instruction performance can continue to appear even during customer waiting performance (demonstration display). Note that this right-handed instruction performance can continue to appear at least between the pre-waiting-for-customer performance and the waiting-for-customer performance. In this case, it is possible to create a dedicated right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting instruction performance while waiting for a customer) that appears while waiting for a customer and is different from other right-handed hitting instruction performances.

Further, in the case of a "lose" in the symbol change display game of the ceiling game (1000th game), it is preferable not to display a specific preview effect. For example, at least the highly anticipated advance notice effect does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-link, reach-to-reach effect, and player participation type effect does not appear. The reason for this is that there is no need for an exaggerated preview performance that stirs up expectations of winning the jackpot when the game reaches its ceiling. However, this does not apply when a pseudo-run, a reach effect, a player participation type effect, or the like is provided as a preview effect exclusively for the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, in a ceiling game, it is preferable not to display a preview effect that will blindly arouse expectations of winning, and when displaying a preview effect such as a pseudo-link, a reach effect, or a player participation type effect. It is preferable to use a presentation mode exclusively for the ceiling, which is different from presentation modes that appear in other presentation modes.

Furthermore, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a bonus for reaching the ceiling. For example, it is possible to display a setting suggestion effect exclusively for the ceiling. This is because providing players with useful information such as setting estimation factors is useful in increasing the motivation of players who are addicted to the game. In addition, when the setting suggestion effect is made to appear at the ceiling, the appearance rate may be set to 100%, or it may be made to appear based on a predetermined lottery probability. Further, although it is possible to decide as appropriate what kind of setting suggestion effect to appear, it is preferable that the appearance rate is at least higher than in the normal mode (general mode, omen mode). Further, it is preferable to display a setting suggestion effect with a high setting inference factor (for example, a setting suggestion effect such as confirmation of setting 4 or more, confirmation of setting 6, denial of setting 1, etc.).

(Italy 44) On the other hand, if you happen to win a jackpot (including support time reduction) in the ceiling game (1000th game), instead of appearing in the ceiling production mode, the normal production mode ( For example, it may be configured such that a preview effect related to the winning of the jackpot (in the general mode or in the omen mode) appears. Specifically, with reference to the "Win/Support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table (general, for omen)" shown in Figure 70, the same variation pattern as the normal mode (general, omen mode) is configured to be selectable. (See notes in Remarks column 5 in Figure 71). This is because even when a jackpot is achieved in a ceiling game, if a ceiling effect is displayed, it becomes unclear whether it is a jackpot or a ceiling privilege is given, which confuses the player.

(Italy 63) Also, if you happen to win a jackpot (including support time reduction) in the ceiling game (1000th game), the ceiling rush performance 781 (see note 1 in Figure 61B) or the time reduction notification display (for example, , FIG. 61A (A), FIG. 6 (A), etc.), there is a contradiction in that a time-saving entry is announced even though it is a jackpot, so it is preferable to perform a winning performance without such a performance. However, if you want to display a so-called "resurrection effect" type of effect that once pretends to lose and then announces that you have won, for example, you may want to display ceiling rush effect 781 (time-saving rush notification effect), which is the same as when you lose. After issuing, you can make a winning performance appear.

In the case of this embodiment, a variation pattern exclusively for winning (winning variation during the ceiling) is configured to be selectable (see the "ceiling" column in Fig. 71), and a performance exclusively for winning at the ceiling related to the variation pattern is displayed. It is made to come out. In addition, if support time reduction is provided, it may be configured so that different fluctuation patterns can be selected for when winning a jackpot and when support time reduction is won (see "ceiling support time reduction winning variation" in Note 5 of Figure 71). ). Further, in order to reduce the control burden, a common variation pattern (mid-ceiling winning variation) may be selected for the jackpot winning and the support time shortening winning. In this case, it is preferable to display different performance contents in order to notify the winning type. The winning type can be grasped by the decorative design designation command, and even if a common variation pattern is configured to be selected, different effects can be executed.

(30-3. About heaven mode)
Heaven mode is a game mode that is transferred after the ceiling game ends (after the 1000th rotation) or to the next game (1001st game) of the ceiling game, and the internal game state changes to a time-saving state or a fixed-variable state depending on the ceiling privilege. This is a game mode related to ``Ceiling time reduction (100 times of time reduction)'' as a ceiling benefit, so the ceiling mode according to this embodiment is a time reduction state (YJ =01H). In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is a case of a ceiling privilege other than "forced hit" (finite time saving, infinite time saving, infinite definite variable, finite definite variable, infinite potential definite, finite potential definite, etc.).

In addition, during heaven mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to a dedicated "0AH" in order to select a fluctuation pattern dedicated to heaven (here, the fluctuation pattern selection mode dedicated to the time saving state due to ceiling time reduction) (updated to (Tcode)).

The heaven mode is terminated at least when a jackpot is won, or, in the case of the above-mentioned finite ceiling privilege, when a prescribed number of time reductions or ST times are completed without winning a jackpot. Here, the ceiling privilege is explained as "finite time saving (100 time saving times)", so heaven mode is either when 100 time saving times are completed (transition to general mode (normal state)) or If a jackpot is won during the number of rounds, the game will end. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, if the ceiling benefit is finite probability variable or finite potential, it will end when the ST number ends or if you win the jackpot within the ST number. In this case, the game will be terminated if the jackpot is won.

(Out of heaven mode production)
(Italy 64) In the present embodiment, as a ceiling benefit, a ceiling time saving is given that has a relatively small number of time savings compared to the probability of winning a jackpot. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the 100 time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction will be used up without winning the jackpot (for example, with setting 1, the probability of winning the jackpot within 100 time reductions is about 39%). On the other hand, if the number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction is 1000 times, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 99%, but in any case, once the ceiling time reduction state is passed, the player will not be addicted to the jackpot. Moreover, I felt a strong sense of disappointment that I was not able to take advantage of the ceiling time reduction. Therefore, for the final fluctuation related to the ceiling time shortening state, for example, it is possible to select a normal fluctuation with the shortest fluctuation time in the event of a loss, without creating a flashy effect or randomly adopting a long fluctuation pattern ( (The selectivity may be 100%), and it is preferable that the selection rate be 100%.

(About the lottery process for support time reduction during the time reduction state due to ceiling time reduction)
Here, if support time reduction is provided as in this embodiment, whether or not it is possible to transition to a time reduction state due to support time reduction during a time reduction state due to ceiling time reduction (hereinafter also referred to as "ceiling time reduction state"); To be more specific, the question is whether or not to select a support time saver as a lottery target during the ceiling time saver state, or whether to make the support time saver a lottery target and to validate or invalidate the winning. Therefore, depending on the gameplay, the following lottery formats (Italy 76) to (Italy 80) can be adopted.
(Italy 76) During the ceiling time reduction state, support time reduction is excluded from the lottery. Specifically, by executing a jackpot lottery in which the support time reduction is excluded from the lottery target, the support time reduction is treated as invalid and the support time reduction state is not granted. In this case, the support time reduction state is not granted during the ceiling time reduction state, so for example, if the support time reduction is lower in profit status (advantageous degree) than the ceiling time reduction, a downward transition may occur due to the support time reduction winning. It is suitable when you want to avoid storing it away ((Italy 77) described below is also the same).
(Italy 77) During the ceiling time reduction state, a jackpot lottery will be held that includes support time reduction as a lottery target, but even if a support time reduction is won, the winning will be treated as invalid and the support time reduction state will not be granted. In this case, the same process as when winning a short support time can be carried out as when winning a loser (if there are multiple types of losers, the same process as when one of the losers wins) can be performed. can).
(Italy 78) Even during the ceiling time reduction state, a jackpot lottery including support time reduction is held, and if a person wins the support time reduction, it is treated as valid and the system shifts to the time reduction state due to the support time reduction. In this case, contrary to the above (Italy 77) and (Italy 78), it is possible to grant a support time reduction state during a ceiling time reduction state, and for example, the support time reduction is more profitable (advantageous degree) than the ceiling time reduction. If it is high, it is suitable if you want to make a promotion-like transition by shortening support time.
(Italy 79) During the ceiling time reduction state, a jackpot lottery including support time reductions is held, and the number of time reductions granted by the winning support time reduction is greater than the number of time reductions granted by the ceiling time reduction or the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state. If there are many, the system shifts to a time-saving state based on the winning support time reduction. In this case, only in the situation where "Remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state < Number of time reductions due to support time reduction", the number of time reductions for the winning support time reduction will be updated (overwritten) with the remaining number of time reductions in the current ceiling time reduction state, It is possible to give the player an advantageous time reduction number.
(Italy 80) The jackpot lottery target on the special map 1 side has one or more types of support time reduction, but the jackpot lottery target on the special map 2 side does not have any type of support time reduction, and even during the ceiling time reduction state, support time reduction can be won. shall be treated as valid. As in this embodiment, when there is no electric support, it is advantageous for left-handed players (it is advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special map 1 side), and when there is no electric support, it is advantageous for right-handed players (the player is advantageous to play on the right side) In a game machine in which it is advantageous for a player to receive a lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to win a support time reduction during a ceiling time reduction state in which right-handed players are advantageous. During the ceiling time reduction period, the main game is to receive the jackpot lottery on the special drawing 2 side, where the support time reduction is not subject to the drawing, so unless there is a special drawing 1 action pending ball due to irregular winnings, etc., the support Don't get elected quickly. In this case, the special map number 1 side performs the jackpot lottery targeting the support time reduction and its winning processing (granting the support time reduction state), and during the normal state (left-handed player advantage), the support time reduction functions as a relief function for addicts. On the other hand, during the ceiling time reduction state (right-handed player advantageous), this is suitable when it is desired to avoid that the time reduction state is substantially extended due to the support time reduction win or that the ceiling time reduction ends due to the support time reduction win.

In addition, if the winning of support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state is treated as valid, that is, when it is possible to grant the time reduction state by winning support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state, the following (Italy 81) to (Italy 81) ~ (Italy) 83).
(I81-1) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the number of support time reduction is added to the above-mentioned "special symbol time reduction number counter (remaining time reduction number counting means)". In this case, since the time-saving state can be extended, the degree of freedom in playing the game can be expanded, and an advantageous situation can be created for the player.
(I81-2) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the counting (subtraction) of the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is interrupted, and the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is used preferentially. When the number of time reductions due to support time reduction is exhausted (when the support time reduction state is ended due to the number of time reductions being exhausted), the configuration is such that counting of the remaining number of time reductions in the suspended ceiling time reduction state can be restarted. In this case, a first counting means (ceiling time reduction remaining number counter) for counting the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state and a second counting means (remaining support time reduction number counter) for counting the remaining number of time reductions in the support time reduction state are provided. Bye. According to this configuration, by preferentially extinguishing the number of times of support time reduction, the time reduction state can be substantially extended. In addition, because the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is not updated to the number of time reductions due to support time reduction due to the support time reduction win, it is possible to give the player both the benefit of the ceiling time reduction and the benefit of the support time reduction win. .
(Italy 82) If you win the support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state, the use of the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction is put on hold (stock state), and first, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is used preferentially (the above-mentioned ceiling Count (expire) the time saving remaining number of times counter preferentially). When the number of time reductions due to the ceiling time reduction is exhausted (when the ceiling time reduction state is ended due to the exhaustion of the number of time reductions), the number of time reductions due to the support time reduction that has been in a pending state is exhausted (counting by the support time reduction remaining number counter starts). According to this configuration, even if the ceiling time reduction state is exited without winning any jackpot, if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the time reduction state due to the support time reduction ends after the ceiling time reduction ends. starts, so the time saving state can be substantially extended. In addition, because the remaining number of time reductions in the ceiling time reduction state is not updated to the number of time reductions due to support time reduction due to the support time reduction win, it is possible to give the player both the benefit of the ceiling time reduction and the benefit of the support time reduction win. . In addition, since the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are not executed alternately, it is difficult to determine whether the current time saving state is granted due to ceiling time saving or support time saving. It becomes easier.
(Italy 83) If the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, the support time reduction remaining number counter is also depleted in parallel with the ceiling time reduction remaining number counter. In this case, if the value of the support time reduction remaining number counter is greater than the value of the ceiling time reduction remaining number counter, the time reduction state is substantially extended, and if the value of the support time reduction remaining number counter is less than the value of the ceiling time reduction remaining number counter. For example, the ceiling time reduction state can be ended as usual. According to this configuration, if the player wins the support time reduction at a good time without impairing the benefit of the ceiling time reduction, the time reduction state is substantially extended, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

(Regarding the ceiling time saving general power opening game and the jackpot normal power opening game) The ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, but the operating mode of the general power opening game related to the ceiling time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling time saving" The relationship between the general power open game (abbreviated as "general power open game") and the jackpot general power open game can be configured as follows.
(Italy 24) At least the ceiling time saving general power release game and the jackpot power release game are common. In addition, the ceiling time-saving general power release game, the jackpot general power release game, and the support time-saving general power release game may be the same or different. By making the ceiling time saving general electricity release game and the jackpot electricity release game common, the number of programs related to the general electricity release game can be reduced. In addition, during the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the payout rate during the electric support state. Furthermore, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in a ceiling time reduction state or a jackpot time reduction state.
(Italy 25) At least the ceiling time saving general power release game and the jackpot general power release game are different. In this case, the advantage level (profit state) of the jackpot general electricity release game may be lower or higher than that of the ceiling time saving general electricity release game. From the point of view of the big addictive relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time saving general electricity release game has a higher degree of advantage (higher ball payout rate) than the jackpot general electricity release game. In the case of this configuration, even if the time saving state is the same, the winning rate can be made different between the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state, so that the gameplay is improved. In addition, the jackpot general power release game, the ceiling time saving general power release game, and the support time saving general power release game may be different from each other. Further, the jackpot general electricity release game, the ceiling time saving general electricity release game, and the support time saving general electricity release game may be the same.

(About the ceiling time-saving power supply release game and the support time-saving power supply release game)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the relationship between the ceiling time saving power switch opening game and the support time saving power switch opening game can be configured as follows.
(Italy 91) At least the ceiling time-saving general power opening game and the support time-saving general power opening game are common. It should be noted that the ceiling time saving general electricity release game, the support time saving general electricity release game, and the jackpot general electricity release game may be the same or different. By making the ceiling time-saving general power release game and the support time-saving general power release game common, the number of programs related to the general power release game can be reduced. In addition, during the development stage, it becomes easy to calculate the payout rate during the electric support state. Furthermore, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the game is in a ceiling time reduction state or a support time reduction state.
(Italy 92) At least the ceiling time-saving general power opening game and the support time-saving general power opening game are different. In this case, the advantageous degree (profit state) of the support time-saving power supply opening game may be lower or higher than that of the ceiling time-saving power supply opening game. From the viewpoint of a major addictive relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time-saving utility power release game has a higher degree of advantage than the support time-saving utility power release game. In the case of this configuration, even if the time saving state is the same, the winning rate can be made different between the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state, so that the gameplay is improved. In addition, the jackpot general power release game, the ceiling time saving general power release game, and the support time saving general power release game may be different from each other. Further, the jackpot general electricity release game, the ceiling time saving general electricity release game, and the support time saving general electricity release game may be the same.

(About decorative patterns during ceiling time saving state)
The display mode of the decorative pattern in the support time saving state can be configured as follows.
(Italian 28) At least a decorative pattern (e.g., arithmetic numerals) during the ceiling time-saving state and a decorative pattern (e.g., Chinese numerals) during the normal state or a decorative pattern (e.g., Roman numerals or Chinese numerals) during the jackpot time-saving state. and have different decorative designs. In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the player is in the ceiling time reduction state. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during a performance before a customer is waiting), when a player selects a game machine, they can easily confirm that the ceiling time is being shortened by simply checking the display screen. can be identified.
(Italy 29) At least the decorative pattern (for example, arithmetic numerals) in the ceiling time saving state is different from the decorative pattern (for example, Chinese numerals) in the normal state. In addition, the decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state may be the same as either the decorative pattern during the ceiling time saving state or the decorative pattern during the normal state, or may be different from each other (for example, when the decorative pattern is different during the jackpot time saving state). The decorative pattern may be Roman numerals). In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during a performance before a customer is waiting), when a player selects a game machine, they can simply check the display screen to check whether the ceiling time is being shortened or not. can be easily identified.
(Italy 30) At least the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the ceiling time saving state and the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the normal state are different stop display eyes. When players and hall personnel check the state of a game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily understand whether it is in a ceiling time saving state or in a normal state. In addition, either the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state is the same as the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state. The stop display may be the same as the stop display and/or the stop display after the power is restored during the jackpot time saving state, or it may be a different stop display. According to this configuration, when players and hall personnel check the state of the game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily understand whether it is in the ceiling time saving state or in the normal state. In addition, either the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state is the same as the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state. The stop display may be the same as the stop display and/or the stop display after the power is restored during the jackpot time saving state, or it may be a different stop display.

(About decorative patterns during the ceiling time-saving state and decorative patterns during the support time-saving state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be configured as follows.
(Italy 97) The decorative pattern (for example, arithmetic numerals) during the ceiling time saving state and the decorative pattern during the support time saving state are made a common decorative pattern. The decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state may be a common decorative pattern or may be a different decorative pattern (for example, Roman numerals). In this case, even if a support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state, there is no need to change the decorative pattern each time, and a common decorative pattern can be used, so the player may feel that the appearance is strange or uncomfortable. It can make it difficult to give pleasure. It also contributes to reducing the control burden.
(Italy 98) At least the decorative pattern (for example, arithmetic numerals) during the ceiling time saving state is different from the decorative pattern (for example, Chinese numerals) during the support time saving state. In addition, the decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state, either the decorative pattern during the ceiling time saving state or the decorative pattern during the support time saving state may be the same, or the decorative symbols may be different from each other (for example, the decorative pattern during the jackpot time saving state). The decorative pattern inside may be Roman numerals). In this case, since the decorative symbols are different depending on the game state, the effects become more diverse. In addition, since decorative patterns can be displayed while waiting for a customer (for example, during pre-waiting for a customer), when a player selects a game machine, they can simply check the display screen to display the time-saving state type (at least during the ceiling time-saving state) or in the support time reduction state).
(Italy 99) At least the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after power failure recovery during the ceiling time reduction state and the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after power failure recovery during the support time reduction state are common stop display eyes. In this case, if the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same production mode, when the player selects a game machine first thing in the morning, it is not possible to check whether the player is in the ceiling time saving state or not by simply checking the display screen. Since it is not possible to identify what is inside the hall, it is necessary to actually play the game, which can contribute to the occupancy rate of the hall. In addition, the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state is the same stop display as the stop display in the normal state after the power is restored and/or the stop display during the jackpot time reduction state after the power is restored. It may be a display eye or a different stop display eye.
(Italy 100) At least the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the ceiling time saving state and the stop display eye of the decorative pattern after the power failure is restored during the support time saving state are different stop display eyes. According to this configuration, when players and hall personnel check the state of the game machine first thing in the morning, they can easily understand whether it is in the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state. In addition, either the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the ceiling time reduction state or the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the support time reduction state is the same as the stop display of the decorative pattern after the power is restored during the normal state. The stop display may be the same as the stop display and/or the stop display after the power is restored during the jackpot time saving state, or it may be a different stop display.
In addition, in this configuration, in the case where the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state have a common stop display and are in a common time saving production mode, it is at least possible to identify whether or not the support time saving state is in progress. be. Further, if the jackpot time saving state and the support time saving state have a common stop display and a common performance mode, it is possible to identify at least whether or not the jackpot time saving state is in the ceiling time saving state.
Note that the normal state is the "normal performance mode", so if you look at the background image etc., you can identify that you are in the normal state even if the stop display eyes are the same. Of course, if there are time-saving effect modes with different time-saving states, it is possible to understand which time-saving state the mode is based on, for example, the background image related to the effect mode.

(About the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the hold display mode (hold icon) can be configured as follows.
(Italy 101) At least the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state are different. In this case, the hold display can be made different depending on the game state during the ceiling time reduction and during the support time reduction, so that the variations in performance become more diverse. Further, since the hold display changes between the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state, it becomes easier for the player to identify which time saving state is in effect.
(Italy 102) At least the hold display mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the hold display mode during the support time reduction state are common. Even if the support time reduction is won during the ceiling time reduction state and the state shifts to the support state, there is no need to change the hold display each time, leading to a reduction in control burden.

(About advance notice during ceiling time reduction state and advance notice during support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the pre-read notice can be configured as follows.
(Italy 66) A look-ahead notice that indicates the expectation of winning the support time reduction, and a look-ahead notice performance that notifies in advance that a ceiling benefit (in this embodiment, a ceiling time saver) will be given to the suspended ball for the number of ceiling games. This is a different style of performance. The reason for the different performance mode is that it is known that ceiling benefits are awarded for a predetermined number of games, whereas for support time reduction, the winnings are determined through a jackpot lottery, and they are awarded for a predetermined number of games. This is because it is not given in numbers. It should be noted that the look-ahead preview that suggests the expectation of winning the support time reduction and the look-ahead notice that suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot may have a common performance mode, or may have different performance modes.
(Italy 104) A common look-ahead notice is configured to be executable during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state. A common look-ahead notice can be executed during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state, leading to a reduction in control burden. If diversification and diversification of performances is important, a configuration may be configured such that different pre-read notices can be executed during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state. Note that the pre-read notice during the ceiling time reduction state and/or the support time reduction state and the pre-read notice during the jackpot time reduction state may be the same or may be different.
(Italy 105) Before entering the ceiling mode (before reaching the ceiling game: before 1000 games), the first predetermined number of games (corresponding to the advance notice in a part of the period of the omen mode) and the winning operation hold ball to shorten the support time occur. The second predetermined number of games after the second predetermined number of games can be set as a pre-read notice prohibition period in which execution of the pre-read notice is prohibited. In this case, "first predetermined number of games = second predetermined number of games" (for example, four times, which is the same as the maximum number of pending memories), or a different number of games (for example, the first predetermined number of games is one time, The second predetermined number of games may be 4, etc.).
(Italy 106) For the first predetermined number of games before entering the ceiling mode (corresponding to the pre-read notice during a part of the period of the omen mode), execution of the pre-read notice is prohibited (for example, see Figure 62 described later), and the support time is shortened. Such suspended balls do not prohibit advance notice.
(Italy 107) Balls with pending operation related to ceiling fluctuations prohibit the execution of advance notice (see Figure 62 described later), and balls with pending operation related to short support winnings do not prohibit advance notice.

(About setting suggestion effect during ceiling time reduction state)
(Italy 26) A plurality of setting suggestion performances can be executed, and during the ceiling time reduction state, execution of some or all of the plurality of setting suggestion performances is prohibited (restricted). Alternatively, the execution probability can be set to be different when compared with other gaming states. These include the following (Italy 26-1) to (Italy 26-4).
(Italy 26-1) During the ceiling time reduction state, the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance can be lowered than in the normal state. In this case, the probability of executing one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be lowered.
(Italy 26-2) During the ceiling time reduction state, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects can be made higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be increased.
(Italy 26-2) During the ceiling time reduction state, execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). There is no particular restriction on the specific setting suggestion effects, but for example, if the settings suggestion effects shown in (a) to (b) above can be executed, execution of at least one setting suggestion effect may be prohibited. can. Specifically, during the ceiling time shortening state, execution of setting suggestion performances that have low usefulness as setting guessing factors, such as the even number setting suggestion performance in (g) above and the odd number setting suggestion performance in (y) above, is prohibited. It is preferable.
(Italy 26-3) There is one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the ceiling time reduction state. For example, only during the ceiling time saving state, the setting N confirmation effect described in (me) above, which is highly useful as a setting guessing element, can appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of setting suggestion notices can be varied depending on the gaming state. Further, only in a specific gaming state (ceiling time saving state), a specific setting suggestion performance can be made to appear. Thereby, the effects can be varied and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Regarding the hold display area related to the ceiling time reduction state)
(Italy 31) End of the ceiling game (here, at the end of the symbol fluctuation time related to the ceiling fluctuation (see Figure 67), during the final symbol display time, or when the symbol final display time has elapsed (Figures 68A to 68B) Refer to )), the reservation display area 77 (the reservation display area on the special drawing 2 side) can be displayed in the above-mentioned manner (priority). When displaying the reservation display area 77 in an emphasis manner, As already explained, the hold display area 77 may be displayed preferentially, the hold display area 77 may be displayed in a large size, the hold display area 76 may be hidden.
If you win the short support time in the symbol fluctuation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the pending display from the special figure 1 side to the special figure 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends ( During the support time reduction state, right-handed hitting is advantageous and the symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side becomes the main one). By changing the priority of the pending display at the timing when the game on the special map 1 side ends, before the first symbol fluctuation display game on the special map 2 side starts during the support time shortening state, The reserved display of special figure 2 can be displayed preferentially.

(About the production mode during the ceiling time reduction state and the production mode during the support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the production mode can be configured as follows.
(Italy 108) The presentation mode related to the ceiling time reduction state and the presentation mode related to the support time reduction state can be made into a common presentation mode. For example, both can be set to heaven production mode, or both can be set to time saving production mode. When setting the time-saving production mode, it may be any of the time-saving production modes 1 to 4, starting from time-saving production mode 1, and then changing the time-saving production mode 1 ⇒ time-saving production mode 2 ⇒ time-saving production mode 3 according to the number of games. (See FIG. 7B). By using the same production mode, the control burden can be reduced.
(Italy 109) The performance mode related to the ceiling time reduction state and the performance mode related to the support time reduction state can be different production modes. For example, the production mode related to the ceiling time saving state is the heaven production mode, and the production mode related to the support time saving state is the time saving production mode (any of the time saving production modes 1 to 4 may be used, starting from the time saving production mode 1, the game Depending on the number, the transition may be made as follows: time-saving performance mode 1 ⇒ time-saving performance mode 2 ⇒ time-saving performance mode 3 (see FIG. 7B). By setting different production modes, it is possible to create a variety of productions.

(About the management form of ceiling time reduction state and jackpot time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state are the same time saving state, the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 32) As the internal gaming states managed on the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electronic support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving state is in effect and the flag indicating that the jackpot time-saving state is in effect may be managed by a "common flag (second specific time-saving state flag)". By using a common flag for both, the RAM capacity can be reduced. In addition, data to the effect control section 24 and its transmission processing can be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 33) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be configured to be manageable as different winning easy states. For example, the gaming state determination number YJ relating to the ceiling time saving state may be set to 04H, the gaming state judgment number YJ relating to the jackpot time saving state may be set to 07H, etc., and these may be managed as different internal gaming states. According to this configuration, since the ceiling time saving state and the jackpot time saving state can be managed with separate flags, the main control unit 20 side can easily grasp each gaming state. Further, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the performance control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state. Thereby, on the performance control section 24 side, it becomes possible to shift to different performance modes or easily execute different performances during the ceiling time reduction state and the jackpot time reduction state.
(I61) As an internal gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side, the ceiling time saving state is configured to be manageable as being different from other internal gaming states. Specifically, if the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing the definite variable state, the probable state, the time saving state, and the normal state (four states) as internal gaming states other than the ceiling time saving state, none of these four states is possible. To manage a ceiling time saving state as a different internal game state. That is, the ceiling time saving state is managed as the fifth internal game state. In other words, if the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing one or more internal gaming states other than the ceiling time saving state, the ceiling time saving state is configured to be manageable as an internal gaming state different from any of them. In this case, there are the following advantages.
(A) Based on winning a jackpot during the ceiling time saving state, for example, the start INT and/or end INT during the jackpot game are different from other time saving states (for example, jackpot time saving state and support time saving state). It is possible to execute jackpot games with different time widths. In particular, if you hit a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state, it will be treated as a "first hit" in the same way as if you won a jackpot during the normal state, so the ceiling time reduction state is managed as a separate internal gaming state from other internal gaming states. This is because it is preferable to be able to do so. The reason for this is, for example, if you treat the ceiling time-saving state in the same way as other time-saving states (for example, jackpot time-saving state), it will be judged as a jackpot during the time-saving state, when in reality it is a "first hit". This is because the problem arises that the property will be treated as a multi-family property. This is also because it is necessary to distinguish the jackpot in the ceiling time-shortening state from the jackpot time-shortening state when counting the number of consecutive games or when producing a result effect. In addition, the time saving state includes a jackpot time saving state due to a time saving jackpot, a time saving state after exiting the variable state due to a variable time saving jackpot (time saving state after the ST number is exhausted), a support time saving state, etc., and this configuration is a ceiling time saving state. This has a big advantage when you want to treat it as a time-saving state different from these time-saving states.

(About the management form of ceiling time reduction state and support time reduction state)
Although the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are the same time saving state, the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(Italy 110) As the internal gaming states managed on the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be configured to be manageable as one winning easy state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time reduction state is in effect and the flag indicating that the support time reduction state is in effect may be managed by a "common flag (third specific time reduction state flag)". By using a common flag for both, the RAM capacity can be reduced. In addition, data to the effect control section 24 and its transmission processing can be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(Italy 111) As the internal gaming states managed by the main control unit 20 side, at least the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be configured to be manageable as different winning easy states. For example, the game state determination number YJ related to the ceiling time reduction state may be set to 04H, the game state determination number YJ related to the support time reduction state may be set to 05H, etc., and these can be managed as different internal gaming states. According to this configuration, since the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state can be managed with separate flags, the main control unit 20 side can easily grasp each gaming state. Further, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, different information can be transmitted to the production control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time reduction state and the support time reduction state. Thereby, on the production control section 24 side, it becomes possible to shift to different production modes and easily execute different productions during the ceiling time reduction state and during the support time reduction state.
(Italy 112) As the internal gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side, either the ceiling time reduction state or the support time reduction state can be configured to be manageable as a winning easy state common to the jackpot time reduction state. In this case, like the above (Italy 111), the ceiling time saving state and the support time saving state are managed as different winning easy states (internal game states), so there is the same advantage as the above (Italy 111).

(Regarding performances after power outage recovery)
(Other 1) If the gaming machine loses power and returns before reaching the ceiling game (before entering heaven mode) (the number of remaining ceiling games will not be cleared by a simple power outage, but will be cleared by RAM clearing processing) ), it is possible to perform an effect (notification effect upon power outage recovery) according to the number of remaining ceiling games. For example, even if the mode is the same at the time of a power outage and when the power is restored, it is now possible to perform a power outage recovery notification effect (for example, a different background effect) depending on the number of remaining ceiling games. Can be configured. Specifically, the number of remaining ceiling games is 1 to 300 (first remaining ceiling game number section), 301 to 600 (second remaining ceiling game number section), and 601 to 999 (third remaining ceiling game number section). Executes notification effect when power is restored. Note that the remaining ceiling game number section can be determined as appropriate. According to this configuration, when a player selects a game machine first thing in the morning, it is possible to provide an advantageous situation to the player in that he can select a machine with a game on the ceiling that is close to the game machine. On the other hand, since the hall side can easily see which machines are close to the ceiling games, they can try to adjust the profits of the hall by clearing the RAM of the machines close to the ceiling (clearing the number of remaining ceiling games) or leaving them as they are. becomes possible.

(Other 2) Note that the power failure recovery notification effect may be executed only for a predetermined period of time after the power is restored (for example, until a customer waiting effect (demonstration display) is executed or until a predetermined time elapses). Further, the above-mentioned "gaming status notification LED" may be changed depending on the number of remaining ceiling games (a gaming status notification LED exclusively for notifying the number of remaining ceiling games may be provided).

(Other 3) Furthermore, at least in the first game (first rotation) after the power is restored, a power failure recovery notification effect may be executed in accordance with the number of remaining ceiling games. In this case, the player who first starts a game on the gaming machine can be given an estimate of the number of remaining ceiling games. Note that since it is not desirable to blindly give an element of estimating the number of remaining ceiling games, it is appropriate to perform a power failure recovery notification effect only for the first game after the power is restored.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation status related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-described fluctuation states such as the high-speed fluctuation state, medium-speed fluctuation state, and low-speed fluctuation state can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state during heaven mode according to the ceiling benefit type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is finite time saving or infinite time saving, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes the gameplay such as ``enjoying the performance'', as in the time saving mode. However, in consideration of the fact that there is no limit to the number of time reductions when infinite time reduction is granted, a dedicated high-speed fluctuation state (for example, a fluctuation state in which the game completion speed is equal to or faster than time reduction mode 3 or variable variable mode 1) Good too. In addition, in this embodiment, taking into account that the heavenly time saving is a finite time saving, the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving mode 2 can be selected, and it is determined that the fluctuation state is approximately the same ("Heaven (" in FIG. 73) (Refer to the distribution rate of the fluctuation pattern in the ``Time Saving)'' column). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the fastest changing state among all game modes. Further, it may be the same as any of the time saving modes 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, the jackpot lottery probability is high in addition to the electric support state, so it is the same as the fastest variation state of all game modes or the fast variation state of probability variation mode 1. Alternatively, it is preferable that the fluctuation state be substantially the same. On the other hand, when infinite potential or finite potential is granted, the jackpot lottery probability is high, but since it is controlled without electric support, it is difficult for balls to be activated to occur as in the normal state. . Considering this point, when infinite latency or finite latency is applied, the fluctuation state is the same or almost the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state slower than time saving mode 3 (time saving medium high speed fluctuation state) (average It is preferable to set the state to a fluctuating state that takes a relatively long time.

(7-5-2. About the production during heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, a transition is made to a "heaven production mode" which makes a production related to the heaven mode (a production for heaven). This heaven production mode is a production mode that is transferred to after the end of the ceiling game or is exclusive for the next game or later (1001st game or later), and is ended at the end of the heaven mode. During this heaven production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space) to notify that the heaven mode is in progress. Furthermore, it is possible to perform the remaining time reduction number notification effect even during the heaven mode.

In addition, when granting limited time saving or infinite time saving as a ceiling benefit, as already explained, when shifting the game mode to a game mode belonging to the time saving mode, the time saving production mode (for example, Any one of time-saving production modes 1 to 4) can be adopted. Of course, other time-saving production modes (not shown) exclusively for heaven may be provided. In any case, the production mode corresponding to the game mode may be used.

(Heaven mode benefits)
During the heaven mode, in order to increase the desire of the addicted player to play, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be made higher during the heaven mode than in other game modes. In other words, the heaven mode may function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone" in which the setting suggestion performance is varied with high probability. For example, the heaven mode changes the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects (particularly setting suggestion effects that may appear during the symbol variation display game) at a higher probability than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode).

(Variation example of heaven mode)
(Other 4) In addition, in the game of the first rotation in the heaven mode, a specific loss variation pattern (variation when entering heaven: see note 2 in FIG. 73) can be configured to be selectable. This fluctuation at the time of entering heaven is determined as a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern longer than at least the longest losing fluctuation pattern: here, 36 seconds), and this fluctuation time is used. Then, in the first rotation after entering heaven mode (preferably, triggered by the start of the game in the first rotation (symbol change display start)), at least a right-handed hitting instruction performance, or at least a time-saving entry notification performance that includes a right-handed hitting performance. can be executed. In addition, since many players are thought to start hitting right after seeing this effect, it is possible to use the long fluctuation time of the fluctuation at the time of entering heaven to accumulate the activated reserved balls on the special figure 2 side. (It is possible to avoid the lottery on the special map 1 side, which has a lower advantage). Note that this example is suitable when a ceiling time reduction that is activated at the end of a ceiling game is adopted.

In addition, if by chance you win a jackpot in the first game in the first spin in heaven mode (including the case where the support time saver is won if the support time saver is included as a jackpot lottery target), a specific winning fluctuation pattern ( Winning variation upon entering heaven (see note 6 in FIG. 71) can be configured to be selectable. As a performance related to winning fluctuations when entering heaven, for example, after executing a performance that is common to a part of the time-saving entry notification performance (a performance that is partially common to the time-saving entry notification performance and the performance related to the jackpot), It is possible to execute a performance related to winning (for example, a performance notifying that it is a jackpot). As a result, even if you win a jackpot in the first spin of the game in heaven mode, the same effect will be performed until the middle of the game for jackpots and losses, and after that, the jackpot and loss will be the same. Since different performances are executed in the game, it is possible to prevent the player from easily realizing whether he won or lost during the game (for example, immediately after the game starts). In addition, at least when the winning fluctuation upon entry into heaven is selected, a right-hitting instruction performance (firing guidance notification performance) may be performed with the game start as an opportunity. Of course, it is also possible to perform a performance that immediately makes it clear whether the game is a success or a loss. For example, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot performance may be performed without executing the time-saving rush notification performance.

<9. Regarding the function of prohibiting specific preview performances during the omen mode: Figure 62>
Here, in this embodiment, a specific preview performance prohibition function (specific preview performance prohibition means) operates during the precursor mode. In detail, we will focus on the fact that the omen mode is a game mode related to the notification that the ceiling is near, and the fact that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of ceiling benefits. mode) prohibits the appearance of specific preview effects. In the case of the present embodiment, the prohibition function is provided with a "pre-read notice prohibition means (specific pre-read notice prohibition means)" which prohibits the execution of pre-read notice. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 62, the "pre-reading notice inhibiting means during a sign" will be described in detail.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a pre-read notice is prohibited by the pre-read pre-notice prohibition means. In FIG. 62, an explanation will be given of a form in which "pending change notice" is treated as a prohibited object by the look-ahead notice inhibiting means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prohibited object is "pending change notice" and/or "variation change notice". It can be used as a "pre-reading notice."

(A. Configuration in which no means for inhibiting advance notice during warning signs is provided (normal case): Figure 62 (a))
The "normal case" will be explained with reference to FIG. 62(a). This "normal case" refers to a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during a sign is not provided, and a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during an omen (see figure 1) and 2 is provided, which will be described later. ) is shown as a comparative example. Note that the shown hold icon 770 is a “normal hold display (white hold)”, the hold icon 771 is a “high expectation hold display” of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772 is a “high expectation hold display”. indicates "ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". In addition, the reservation icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow reservation (this reserved reservation display)" that may appear when a jackpot is won among the special reservation displays.

In addition, for convenience of explanation, in Figure (A), when there are currently three activated suspended balls from games 997 to 999, the activated suspended ball related to the 1000th game (ceiling game) is used as the fourth activated suspended ball. (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game held ball") is a representative example of a case where this occurs.

In the case of the comparative example shown in Figure (A), since the configuration does not include the "pre-reading notice prohibition means", the presence or absence of a special hold display (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") before the ceiling game is reached depends on the configuration. Regardless, execution of the ceiling suspension display (ceiling suspension change notice) is permitted for the 1000th game suspension display. Here, "permitting" the ceiling hold display means that it may always appear or it may appear only when a person wins a predetermined lottery (described below). ) (The same applies to Ha-1) (Ha-2)). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of change in the hold of the third rainbow-colored hold (this secured hold), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is changed to Fujimaru-kun's hold icon 772 (for the ceiling). (on hold display).

However, if a jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function will not be activated (the number of ceiling games will be reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling pending display. In addition, if a pending change notice (special pending display) that foretells the winning expectation level and a pending change notice for the ceiling (ceiling pending display) that foretells that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, the notices have different characteristics. The displays will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, a means for inhibiting a pre-read notice during a sign is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Example of a configuration in which a means for inhibiting advance notice during a sign is provided: Figure 62 (B), (H-1), (H-2))
Hereinafter, an example of a configuration in which the above-mentioned "pre-predicting notice inhibiting means" is provided will be described. There are two forms of this: ``a case in which ordinary advance notice is executed with priority'' as shown in Figure (B), and ``a case in which priority is executed in advance with ceiling advance notice'' as shown in Figures (HA-1) and (HA-2). be.

(Case where normal look-ahead notice is executed with priority: Figure 62 (b))
Figure 62 (b) shows a case in which the normal pre-read notice is executed with priority, and specifically, a case in which the pre-read notice for the ceiling is prohibited (ceiling game held ball Cases in which advance notice is prohibited for Here, similar to the case in Figure (A) above, a case is shown in which the third operation holding ball is the "current securing stop".

In this example, if the current hold exists before the ceiling game is reached, the hold display for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice) but becomes the "normal hold display". appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the "pre-reading prohibited target suspension" by the pre-reading notice prohibition means is made into "ceiling game pending ball".

The reason why the suspension subject to look-ahead prohibition is referred to as the "ceiling game suspension ball" is as follows. If this reserved hold exists before the ceiling game, the jackpot will be won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling benefit is granted), so there is little need to display the hold display for the ceiling. In addition, if the configuration is such that the ceiling hold display is prohibited when the current secured hold exists, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, there is an inference factor that ``this secured hold is present before the ceiling game is reached.'' There is also a performance advantage in that a player who knows this can prevent unnecessary hits until the ceiling is reached. However, if the reserved retainer exists, ceiling display is not prohibited at all, but if the retainer change notice (rainbow reservation) related to the secured retainer is not displayed, in other words, the pre-reading for the reserved retainer is not prohibited. If the preview lottery results in a "lose", a ceiling pending display may be displayed (allowed). If the reservation change notice related to the reserved hold is not displayed, the player will not be able to know that the reserved hold exists before reaching the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for the ceiling has appeared. However, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the ceiling hold display when a hold change notice (rainbow hold) related to the reserved hold is displayed, a high expectation hold change notice or higher (for example, green hold or higher) is prohibited. It may be configured to prohibit the appearance of the ceiling suspension display when the suspension change notice is displayed.

(Case where pre-read notice for ceiling is executed with priority: Figure 62 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, a "case where ceiling pre-read notice is executed with priority" will be explained.

Figure 62 (Har-1) is an example of “a case where ceiling pre-read notification is executed with priority”.
(α) A configuration example in which “while in the precursor mode, some normal look-ahead notices are prohibited, while ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) are allowed”;
(β) This shows a configuration example in which “during the precursor mode, normal look-ahead notices are completely prohibited, while ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) are allowed.”
The configuration example shown in this figure (H-1) does not set the target for which look-ahead is prohibited as the "ceiling game suspended ball" as shown in the above figure (B), but instead sets the target for which look-ahead is prohibited to be suspended during the precursor game. This is an example of a configuration in which the ceiling game pending balls are excluded from the prohibited targets.

In (α) above, "prohibiting a part of the normal look-ahead notice" means, for example, among the normal pending change notices (special pending display), while allowing the appearance of low expectation pending change notices, The configuration is such that the appearance of a notice of pending change in the level of expectation is prohibited. Specifically, the following configurations 1 and 2 are used.
(Configuration 1) Appearance of reservation change notices below yellow reservation (blue reservation and yellow reservation) is allowed, and reservation change notices of green or higher that have higher winning expectations than the yellow reservation (green reservation, red reservation, and rainbow color) are allowed. A configuration that prohibits the appearance of (reserved).
(Configuration 2) A configuration that allows the appearance of a pending change notice (a pending display other than rainbow-colored pending) that indicates something other than correct, but prohibits the appearance of a pending change notice that indicates a correct.

The above-mentioned "Configuration 1" prohibits only high expectation reservation change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of the reservation reservation. On the other hand, the above-mentioned "Configuration 2" prohibits only the "Rainbow color reservation" of the reservation reservation display among the high expectation reservation change notices. Therefore, in the case of configuration 2, the occurrence of reservation change notices other than "rainbow reservation" indicating accuracy is allowed.

"Completely prohibiting advance notices" in (β) above means that normal advance notices (here, pending change notices) are completely prohibited, and the appearance of ceiling pending change notices (ceiling pending display) is prohibited. The configuration is that it is allowed. Therefore, in the case of the configuration (β) above, no normal pre-read notice is displayed during the precursor mode, and only the appearance of the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) is allowed.

The reason for doing as shown in Figure (C-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is allowed to appear, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time, and the player (especially the This may cause confusion for players (beginners to the game). In particular, if the high expectation level pending change notice and the ceiling pending change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion among the players increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead notice itself or at least prohibit the high-expectation pending change notice. Additionally, if some or all of the advance warnings are prohibited during the precursor mode, the player may not know that the current reservation exists or is likely to exist before the ceiling game is reached. This is because, even if a high expectation pending change notice indicating that the player has not reached the ceiling, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player if he wins the jackpot before reaching the ceiling game. Furthermore, if the advance notice itself is completely prohibited during the precursor mode, it will also lead to a reduction in the production control burden.

Figure (H-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike the above-mentioned Figure (H-1), a part of the period in the precursor mode is defined as a look-ahead prohibited section, thereby preferentially executing the pending change notice for the ceiling. As a representative example, Figure (H-2) shows an example in which the maximum number of reserved pitches before the ceiling game (section of the 996th to 999th games) is set as the look-ahead prohibited section. In the case of this example, any advance notice is prohibited in the section of the 996th to 999th games. However, instead of prohibiting all advance notices in this section, it may be configured to "prohibit part of advance notices" as shown in (α) in the above figure (C-1).

In addition, in all of (a), (b), (c-1), and (c-2) in Figure 62, the number of ceiling games is determined by a specific notification effect such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (remaining ceiling number display effect)". The number of games remaining until the end of the game can be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not foretell the degree of expectation of winning, but merely informs of remaining ceiling games, and does not perform a notice function like a pre-read notice. However, it is also possible to foretell the degree of expectation of winning using a countdown display, that is, to notify the possibility of the existence of the reserved spot. For example, in the case of preferentially executing the pre-read notice for the ceiling as shown in Figures (Ha-1) or (Ha-2), the suspended balls (1 to 2) that occurred chronologically earlier than the current secured bullet (3rd bullet) A special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that differs from the normal countdown display (the display format when the corresponding reservation does not exist) is performed each time the number (item) is consumed, and the result is confirmed. It may also indicate the existence of a reservation. For example, if a normal countdown display uses white number images, a special countdown display may change the number image to a color other than white (red) or make the number image larger. be.

This embodiment can include, for example, the following configuration regarding the pre-read notice.
Acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) that acquires predetermined game information based on the establishment of a starting condition (triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding winnings based on the gaming information acquired by the acquisition means;
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol fluctuation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to a symbol stop display mode;
Reservation storage means (retention storage area of RAM 203) that stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means on hold up to a predetermined maximum number of storage items until the game information is displayed in a variable display operation of the game symbols on the symbol display means. , S311 to S314 in FIG.
A look-ahead determination means (S320 in FIG. 11) that looks ahead and determines at least the lottery result by the lottery means before the variable display operation of the game symbols based on the suspended memory is executed;
A look-ahead notice performance control means (performance control unit 24, FIG. 18) configured to be able to execute and control a look-ahead notice that notifies information related to the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means;
a pre-read notice prohibition control means (FIG. 62) that prohibits execution (display) of the above-mentioned pre-read notice based on predetermined prohibition conditions;
Ceiling benefit control means (FIG. 61B, S420, S421, S412 in FIG. 63, FIGS. 64 to 66, etc.) that grants ceiling benefits that are more advantageous than in the normal state (controls execution of ceiling benefits) based on predetermined grant conditions. and,
The above-mentioned ceiling benefit is granted (for example, the ceiling game is close, or the ceiling benefit is granted within the existing number of active pending balls, or the symbol fluctuation display game related to the target active pending balls is a ceiling privilege advance notice control means for controlling the execution of a pre-ceiling notice presentation (for example, the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) in FIG. 62) that notifies in advance that a ceiling privilege will be granted when executed; , and can be configured to be able to control multiple types of gaming states (gaming modes). The above-mentioned pre-read notice prohibition means prohibits execution of the above-mentioned pre-read notice during the entire period or a part of the period in a specific game mode (FIG. 62(b), (c-1), and (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to ceiling mode), and specifically corresponds to a precursor mode immediately before reaching the ceiling game (game mode immediately before shifting to ceiling mode). In addition, specifically, the above-mentioned ceiling benefit control means controls the winning game after a predetermined starting condition is established (for example, after the end of electric support, after playing a jackpot game, or after transitioning to a gaming state with a low probability state, etc.). Normally, when the number of symbol changes (number of games) executed in a play state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (ceiling number of games) without occurring (or without winning the jackpot) It functions as a functional unit that controls ceiling benefits (privilege game state) that are more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to potential state)
In addition, when providing a potential state, for example, as shown in FIG. What is necessary is to provide a "potential mode" as the mode and a "potential production mode" as a production mode related to the probability mode.

<Processing on the main control unit side (second embodiment): Figs. 63 to 68B>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68B, gaming operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment will be described. Note that components (processing contents) that are substantially the same as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals (step numbers), and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

Regarding the processing on the main control unit side according to the second embodiment, "main processing on the main control side" in FIG. 8 and "timer interrupt processing on the main control side" in FIG. 9 related to the processing on the main control unit side in the first embodiment. , "Special symbol management process" in FIG. 10, "Special symbol 1 start opening check process" in FIG. 11, "Special electric accessory management process" in FIG. 15, etc. have substantially the same processing contents. . Therefore, a detailed explanation of these processing contents will be omitted, and here we will explain the differences between the second embodiment and the first embodiment, specifically, the "special symbol fluctuation start processing" and "special symbol fluctuation start processing" in FIG. We will mainly explain "processing during symbol fluctuation" and "processing during special symbol confirmation time".

<21. Special symbol variation start processing: Figure 63>
With reference to FIG. 63, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 63, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls operated by special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), Processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of active pending pitches in FIG. 2 is executed. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 activated reserved balls is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is zero (step S402), and the number of special figure 1 activated reserved balls is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) targeting the number of special figure 1 action pending balls is executed.

If the number of operation pending balls for both the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls and the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the process advances to step S417, and the special symbol operation status is It is determined whether or not the state is "on standby (00H)" indicating the state of "no ball pending operation" (step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "on standby (01H)" when the state of "no action pending ball" is reached (step S417: NO), the special symbol operation status is changed to "on standby (00H)". ” (step S418). Then, as a performance control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the performance control unit 24 (step S419), and the process exits from the special symbol variation start process.

If the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls or the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. It should be noted that, unless there is a particular need, the explanation will be made without distinguishing which operation-holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of pending balls on the special figure side to be used for the current variable display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including the information on the number of pending balls after the subtraction is sent to the production control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405).

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407).

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the gaming state information transmission process, a "gaming state designation command" is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command here includes gaming state information that can specify the gaming state at the start of the game. When the production control unit 24 receives the gaming state designation command, it grasps the gaming state based on the information included therein, and manages the production mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed by the main control unit 20 side. do. The configuration can be such that a "specified command" can be sent. In addition, here, as necessary, a "time saving number command" including information regarding the special symbol time saving number counter (time saving number information) and an "ST number command" including information regarding the special symbol probability changing number counter (ST number information) are provided. It is transmitted and used by the performance control unit 24 when displaying the remaining time reduction count notification performance. In addition, when infinite ceiling benefits are granted, specifically, "infinite time saving" where there is no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite probability change" and "infinite potential" where there is no limit on the number of STs, or When an infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite potential is granted, which can be considered an infinite number of times, in the gaming state (heaven mode) related to the benefit, the time reduction number command and ST number command will not be sent in order to reduce the control burden. It can be configured not to.

Further, the above-mentioned "remaining number of times display performance" can be configured to be able to appear in any of the game modes, such as the time saving mode, variable probability mode, and heaven mode. As for the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite series, as already explained, a mode of effect that notifies that the remaining number of times is infinite is preferable. For example, if it is an image display performance, it may be "infinite times remaining" or "continue until the next jackpot".

(About the remaining ceiling number display effect)
In addition, in the gaming state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling number command" including information regarding the number of remaining ceiling games (information regarding a ceiling counter to be described later) is also transmitted. The performance control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling based on the information included in the ceiling number command, and controls display of the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display performance". In the case of this embodiment, this remaining ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the omen mode (omen effect mode).

The above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" can appear during all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can appear in "general mode" and/or "in precursor mode". Further, when displaying the remaining ceiling number display performance in the normal mode, different performance modes can be used in the general mode and the omen mode. For example, during general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in a small display area at the corner of the LCD screen (displaying a small countdown display), and during precursor mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in a large display area in the center of the LCD screen. It is possible to notify (display a large countdown display).

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route that follows S420)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409:≠5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is sent to the effect control section 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 64 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling function management processing: Figure 64>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be explained. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of remaining games up to the ceiling number of games.

In FIG. 64, the CPU 201 first determines whether the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901).

(ceiling counter)
The number of ceiling games is counted by a "ceiling counter (specific game number counting means)" which is a functional part of the main control unit 20. This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of this embodiment, it is used as a counter for managing the number of trigger games for setting data regarding ceiling privilege granting (described later). Steps S903 to S904 (ceiling flag turned ON), see step S915 in FIG. 66 showing details of the gaming state transition preparation process (step S412A) in FIG. 63).

(Italy 40) In the case of this embodiment, the initial value is set to the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared (step S031), when the time saving state ends (step S481A in FIG. 68B), and when the variable probability state ends (step S481A in FIG. 68B). Step S486A), when the jackpot game ends (step S509 in FIG. 15), when the support time saving opening/closing game ends (step S504 in FIG. 15), when transitioning from another game mode to the normal mode, from another internal game state to the normal state (Steps S481A and S486A in FIG. 68B, which will be described later), when the ceiling is reached (when the symbol fluctuation related to the ceiling mode stops), etc. The reason why the support time saving opening and closing time is included is that in this embodiment, priority is given to the support time saving winning process over the ceiling time saving.

The above-mentioned "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of times a specific event is executed, the number of times it is established, or the number of times it occurs, and functions as a functional unit that monitors the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (a ceiling privilege granting trigger). "Specific events" as used herein include execution of a symbol fluctuation display game (win fluctuation or loss fluctuation), winning a jackpot, winning a small hit, winning a loss, winning a shortened support time, transitioning to a specific gaming state (specific (transition to a gaming mode, transition to a specific variation pattern selection mode, transition to a specific internal gaming state, etc.), execution of a jackpot game, small win game, execution of a support time-saving opening/closing game, fulfillment of specific conditions regarding the game, It is a specific event such as. In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine whether an opportunity to activate the ceiling function has arrived. Such a counting means can be used, for example, in Modification 1 and Modification 2 (FIGS. 75 and 76, Granting Forms (α) to (μ)) of the benefit granting form described later, when the ceiling activation trigger or the predetermined benefit granting It is used as a functional unit to monitor the arrival of an opportunity. Further, a plurality of ceiling counters can be provided as necessary. This makes it possible to deal with cases where there are multiple specific events to be monitored.

(Counting form of ceiling games)
The ceiling counter can function as follows. Which counting form to adopt can be determined as appropriate depending on the gameplay. The details will be explained below.

(Italy 38) When clearing the RAM (see step S031 in FIG. 8), the timing for setting the initial value in the ceiling counter is the activation process of "main control unit side timer interrupt processing" shown in FIG. S036: Setting of CTC) is preferably a previous step. In this configuration, the initial value of the ceiling counter is set when the RAM is cleared, so the hall side either continues the counter up to the ceiling or clears the counter up to the ceiling and sets the initial value. You can choose which. Further, it is preferable to set the ceiling counter before the main control unit-side interrupt process including the process related to game progress is activated. If the ceiling counter is set after the main control unit side timer interrupt processing has started, there is a risk that the game will start before the initial value is set for the ceiling counter, which may lead to complicated processing in terms of control. Therefore, it is preferable to set the ceiling counter before the main control unit side interrupt processing is activated.

The ceiling counter according to this embodiment can function as shown below (I71) and (I72) depending on the gaming state.
(Item 71) At least during the support time reduction state, the value of the ceiling counter is not updated (counted) (the value of the ceiling counter is held (the count of the number of remaining ceiling games is stopped)). Since the value of the ceiling counter is not updated during the support time reduction state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling function from being activated due to reaching the ceiling number of games during the support time reduction state. For example, it is possible to prevent a ceiling time reduction from being applied (the number of time reductions being updated) during a time reduction state. However, since the number of games during the support time reduction state is excluded from the monitoring target (count target) of ceiling games, the number of ceiling games may increase, and the player may be disadvantaged.
(Item 72) At least during the support time reduction state, the value of the ceiling counter is updated (counted). In this case, since the number of games during the support time reduction state is counted as the number of ceiling games, the player can aim to reach the ceiling while benefiting from the electric support state during the support time reduction state. However, there is a possibility that the ceiling function is activated during the support time reduction state, and a control process is required when the ceiling number of games is reached during the support time reduction state. For example, if the number of ceiling games is reached during the support time reduction state, will the ceiling benefit be prioritized (the current remaining number of time reductions will be updated (set) to 100 times due to the ceiling time reduction), or will the ceiling benefit be treated as invalid ( It is necessary to determine whether to prohibit the activation of the ceiling function. Also, when ceiling benefits are treated as valid, for example, when ceiling time reduction is granted during support time reduction state, do you want to update the current remaining number of time reductions to 100 time reductions due to ceiling time reduction, or do you want to update the current number of time reductions to 100? It is necessary to decide whether to add on (+100 times). Please note that you are free to decide either way.

If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited without doing anything. In this embodiment, in order to count the number of addictive games (number of ceiling games) in the normal state, an initial value is set to the ceiling counter when transitioning to the normal state or when a jackpot game ends. If you want to monitor (count) the number of games executed during a specific internal game state or a specific game mode, such as time saving state, support time saving state, heavenly time saving state, fixed change state, etc. The number of games executed during a specific gaming state may be monitored by appropriately determining the timing for setting the initial value and the timing for updating (counting) the ceiling counter.

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1 (step S902), and if the subtraction result is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is directly exited and the value is zero. If so (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process of step S412A, which will be described later (see step S915 in FIG. 66, which will be described later). Also, the ceiling flag is cleared when the player wins a jackpot or wins a support time reduction. With the above steps, the ceiling function management process is exited.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63 again, when the ceiling function management process in step S420 is finished, a random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric accessory is executed (step S410).

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 65 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling activation management processing: Figure 65>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. 63. In this ceiling activation management process, it is monitored whether or not the ceiling function is activated, and necessary setting processes regarding the granting of ceiling benefits when the ceiling function is activated are executed.

In FIG. 65, the CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied (step S920). The "ceiling activation prohibition condition" is a condition that prohibits (restricts) activation of the ceiling function. Ceiling benefits will not be granted if the conditions prohibiting ceiling activation are met.

In the case of this embodiment, as already explained, if you win the jackpot or win the support time reduction in the ceiling game (1000th game), even if you reach the ceiling game, the ceiling function activation prohibition condition Assuming that is established, the ceiling activation management process is exited without performing the process of granting the ceiling benefit.

Here, if the jackpot determination flag is ON (5AH) (in the case of a jackpot win), or if the support time reduction determination flag is ON (5AH) (in the case of a support time reduction win), the ceiling activation prohibition condition is met. If so (step S920: YES), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, if a jackpot or support time reduction is won, even if it is a ceiling game, the game is controlled to be in a "ceiling activation prohibited state", and the process related to the winning is executed preferentially. Therefore, in order to be granted a ceiling benefit, the condition is that the player must be addicted to the game for 1000 games (continue to lose for 1000 games). In this embodiment, the game period to be monitored for the number of addictive games (the number of consecutive losses) is set to 1000 games in the normal state (normal mode), and if the player is addicted to the game during this period, a ceiling benefit is given.

If the ceiling activation prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S920: NO), then it is determined whether the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to give a ceiling benefit), and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), the ceiling privilege If the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it is specified that the ceiling benefit will not be granted. The ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state when the ceiling counter reaches zero in the gaming state transition preparation process of step S412A, which will be described later (see steps S915 to S916 in FIG. 66, which will be described later).

If the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921:≠5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation opportunity has not arrived, and the process exits the ceiling activation management process without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S921:=5AH), the process necessary for granting the ceiling benefit (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the values of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) described later are set in the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting process). As a result, a ceiling benefit (in this example, a ceiling time reduction) occurs. In other words, when the ceiling game is reached (at the start of the ceiling game), the ceiling benefit is granted (activated at the start of the ceiling game). In the case of this embodiment, the values of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process of step S412A are data set for the 999th game, that is, one game before the ceiling game. In this embodiment, since the ceiling game is activated at the start of the ceiling game, the ceiling counter is actually activated during the game that triggers the execution of the ceiling activation preparation process (processing route of steps S915 to S917 and S914 in FIG. 66). It is designed to count the number (999th game).

Through the status flag setting process in step S922, data regarding the ceiling bonus is set in the status flag and counter, thereby controlling the specified ceiling bonus status. In this embodiment, since ceiling time reduction (100 time reductions) is handled as a ceiling benefit, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) will be updated from "08H" in the omen mode to "09H" in the ceiling mode. Become.

When the status flag setting process is completed, each status buffer is cleared as a termination process when ceiling privilege is granted (step S923: various setting processes when ceiling is activated), and the ceiling flag and ceiling activation flag are set to OFF status (00H). ) (steps S924 to S925).

Next, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S926). This ceiling activation flag is a flag that specifies that a ceiling benefit is in progress, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a ceiling benefit is in progress; In this case, it indicates that there is no ceiling benefit. In the case of this embodiment, it functions as a flag that specifies whether or not the ceiling time reduction state is in progress.

Game state information transmission processing (step S926) is executed. In the gaming state information transmission process here, a gaming state designation command including finite time saving (time saving state) information is transmitted to the production control section 24. As a result, with the start of the current game (1000th game), the control is made into a finite time saving state, and in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) described later, a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected, and the ceiling effect mode is selected. The performance below will be revealed. With the above, the ceiling activation management process is exited.

(Variation example 1 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In addition, when winning a jackpot, a ceiling benefit may be given without controlling the ceiling function to a prohibited state. However, in this case, the ceiling benefit will be limited to this game (one game only). This is because the jackpot game starts after the current game (ceiling game) ends. However, even if it is a ceiling benefit that is only for one game, if a time-saving state or variable probability state is given with an electric support state, you will receive the electric support benefit until the end of this symbol change display game. be able to. Specifically, there is an advantage that it becomes easier to enter the lower starting hole 35, and it becomes easier for the ball to be held on the special drawing 2 side to occur. When providing a game state with an electric support state as a ceiling benefit, it is preferable that at least a right-handed hitting instruction effect be displayed in the current game to encourage the player to play right-handed.

(Variation example 2 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In this embodiment, the configuration of the above-mentioned "ceiling game start type" in which ceiling benefits are granted upon the start of the game has been described, but the above-mentioned "ceiling game end type" in which ceiling benefits are granted upon the end of the game has been described. It may be configured as follows. In the case of the type activated at the end of the ceiling game, the ceiling benefit is granted immediately after the symbol change display game ends. For example, if the ceiling privilege is a finite time reduction, the time reduction state occurs immediately after the end of 1000 games. In addition, when the ceiling privilege is a "forced win", after 1000 games are completed, a jackpot game (forced win game) based on the forced win will be started. When the end of the game is used as the trigger for ceiling activation, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed, for example, in step S495 during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 68B described later) related to the process at the end of the symbol variation display game. It can be executed after processing.

(Variation example 3 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that a ceiling benefit is given for the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the satisfaction of the second granting condition after the first granting condition is satisfied, You may also give benefits. For example, if you are addicted to 1000 games (the first granting condition is met), the right to grant a ceiling benefit is established, and the ceiling benefit is granted after a predetermined number of precursory games are played (the granting of the ceiling benefit is temporarily suspended, and multiple games (schedule in advance). In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of types of numbers of portent games (for example, 1 to 16 games) and determine the number of portent games by lottery (lottery for number of portent games). When determining the number of precursor games by lottery, the lottery probability for each number of precursor games may be the same for all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the setting value. For example, the higher the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of games, and the lower the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of games. If this is determined, it is possible to give the player an element of guessing the setting based on the difference in the number of games. Further, when a specific number of portent games (for example, 7 games) is selected, a lottery probability can be determined according to the set value, such as a high setting confirmed or a setting of 6 confirmed.

(Variation example 4 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the above modification 3, an example has been described in which the right to grant a ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended until a predetermined number of precursor games are played, that is, the right suspension period depends on the number of times the game is played. However, the rights reservation period may not depend on the number of times the game is played, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, this is a "timed" ceiling award form in which a ceiling benefit is awarded when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, a ceiling benefit is given at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display game related to a ceiling game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63 again, when the ceiling activation management process in step S421 is finished, a special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411), and then a gaming state transition preparation process is executed (step S412A).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Figure 66>
The above gaming state transition preparation process (step S412A) will be explained. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the gaming state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a jackpot or support time reduction is won, data for specifying the destination gaming state (see FIG. 4) after the jackpot game is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (steps S911 to S914), and processing to store data for specifying the ceiling benefit in a predetermined buffer in the case of a loss and the ceiling flag is in the ON state (steps S915 to S917). I know. First, the contents of the process in the case of winning the jackpot will be explained.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S910:=5AH), the "gaming state transition table (FIG. 42)" corresponding to the jackpot type is acquired (step S912), and various data are stored in the corresponding state buffer. (Step S914). As already explained, "JTTBL1" is referred to in the case of 10R and 4R variable jackpots, and "JTTBL-4" is referred to in the case of 4R time-saving jackpots. This specifies the gaming state after the jackpot game.

(If you win the support time reduction)
When the support time saving determination flag is in the ON state (step S911:=5AH), the "gaming state transition table (FIG. 42)" corresponding to the support time saving type is acquired (step S912), and various data are stored in the corresponding state buffer. The information is stored (step S914). As already explained, in the case of support time reduction A, "JTTBL-4" is referred to, in the case of support time reduction C, "JTTBL-5", and in the case of support time reduction C, "JTTBL-6" is referred to. Thereby, the gaming state after the support time saving opening/closing game is specified.

(If you lose and the ceiling flag is ON)
If the jackpot determination flag is not ON (5AH) (step S910:≠5AH), the support time saving determination flag is not ON (5AH) (step S911:≠5AH), and the ceiling flag is ON (step S915: =5AH), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) as part of the ceiling activation pre-processing (pre-processing for granting ceiling benefits) (step S916). The "ceiling activation flag" set to the ON state in this process is checked in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 69 is obtained (step S917). In FIG. 69, as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits, JTTBL-10 to JTTBL-15 (tables for granting finite time reduction, infinite time reduction, finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite potential probability, and infinite potential probability) are shown. ) is shown as an example. In reality, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be prepared depending on the ceiling benefit type.

Next, the data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table is stored in the above-mentioned state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (step S421, see step S922 in FIG. 65), and are stored in the predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (each flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to the state buffer. As a result, the gaming state related to the ceiling privilege is designated. Note that "* (times)" and "* (H)" shown in the figure are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the gameplay and design values. For example, in the case of this embodiment, a ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction: 100 times of time reduction) is typically explained as a ceiling benefit, so in this case, the data value as shown in the "finite time reduction" column shown in the figure is is determined.

(Italy 39) If you want to achieve infinite time saving with the ceiling privilege, set the data to cause the time saving state (set 5AH in the utility power release extension buffer ~ special symbol time saving state transition buffer), and set the number of time saving times. Infinite time saving can also be achieved by setting the counter to 0 so that the time saving number counter is not decremented. To be more specific, when the number of time saving times is 0, the determination result in step S478 during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 68A becomes YES, and as long as the loss continues, the time saving state end setting process of S481A will not be executed forever. Further, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) may also not be changed (setting the special symbol variation number counters 1 to 3 buffers to 0 so that the determination result in step S488 follows the processing route of YES).

Note that if the jackpot determination flag, support time reduction determination flag, and ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (steps S910 and S911 are ≠5AH, and step S915 is ≠5AH), you can continue playing the game without doing anything. Exit state transition preparation processing.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 63 again. After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, as already explained, the desired variation pattern is distributed based on the current game mode (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)), jackpot lottery results, special symbol type, number of pending balls, etc. Obtain the table (see FIGS. 70 to 73).

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413 is finished, the fluctuating flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414).

Next, a decorative symbol designation command that can specify the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is created, and this is sent to the performance control section 24 (step S415).

Then, as a fluctuation start setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to "Fluctuating (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for judgment (cleared to zero) (step S416 ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is completed, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started. Thereby, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

<23. Special symbol fluctuation processing: Figure 67>
Next, the special symbol variation process (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be explained. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation process (step S307) in FIG. 10.

In FIG. 67, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol fluctuation time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is fluctuating, so do nothing and perform this special symbol fluctuation processing. Go through.

If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (step S451: YES), a "variation stop command" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the production control unit 24 as a production control command (step S452). With this fluctuation stop command, the production control section 24 grasps that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, and causes the decorative symbol currently being fluctuated to be stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is ended, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also ended.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, a special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and a determined display time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. Switch the special symbol operation status to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), store 00H (OFF state) in the special symbol fluctuation flag (step S453), and perform this special symbol fluctuation processing. Go through. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is the margin time to ensure the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal that notifies the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. It is. Moreover, the "confirmed display time" is the time (stop display time) for which the stop display is maintained when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol ends. During this fixed display time, the decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed (main stop).

(Variation example of fixed display time)
Here, the fixed display time according to the present embodiment includes the usual 500 ms, and is set according to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, it is possible to set a final display time that satisfies the following relationship. In addition, among the ceiling fluctuations, fluctuations related to support time-saving winnings (fluctuations per support time-shortening), final sign fluctuations, fluctuations when hitting the ceiling, and loss fluctuations during general mode, the loss fluctuations during general mode are shown in the notes column of the illustration. The normal 500 ms is set as the fixed display time, and for other variation patterns, a fixed display time different from the normal 500 ms can be set. For variation patterns other than the loss variation in the general mode shown in the figure, a final display time longer than 500 ms can be set.

(Italy 84) At least the fixed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation (see the ceiling column in Figure 73: especially the ceiling fluctuation related to the type that is triggered at the end of the ceiling game) and the fluctuation pattern related to the winning of support time reduction (for example, the fluctuation pattern in Figure 70) See Note 3: The confirmed display time W (hereinafter referred to as "support time saving winning variation") differs from the confirmed display time W (confirmed display time V≠confirmed display time W). In this case, when using each confirmed display time to perform a performance that notifies you of entering a time-saving state (time-saving entry notification performance), depending on the type of time-saving state (here, ceiling time-saving state or support time-saving state), an appropriate time-saving rush notification effect can be executed (the same applies to (Italy 85) and (Italy 86) described later).
(Italy 85) At least the confirmed display time V of the ceiling variation (especially the ceiling variation related to the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game) is longer than the confirmed display time W of the support time-saving winning variation (confirmed display time W< Confirmed display time V).
(Italy 86) At least the confirmed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation (especially the ceiling fluctuation related to the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game) is longer than the determined display time W of the support time-saving winning fluctuation (confirmed display time V < confirmed Display time W).

When the above-described special symbol fluctuation processing is completed, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management processing is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management processing in step S095 in FIG. 9.

<26. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): Figure 68A and Figure 68B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be explained. 68A and 68B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10.

In FIGS. 68A and 68B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol accessory action timer is zero (step S471). The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set with a "determined display time" (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation processing). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process exits from this special symbol confirmation time process without doing anything.

If the special symbol accessory motion timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the current special symbol fluctuation display game is assumed to have ended, and the special symbol motion status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol motion 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and current gaming state information is stored in the gaming state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) in the determination at step S474 (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475A). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the conditional device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the jackpot has been won, and the low probability and electric support are set during the jackpot game. Set to no state (clear various flags and counters). (Italy 40) Also, flags related to the ceiling function (ceiling flag, ceiling activation flag, and ceiling activation flag) are each set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
If the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) in step S474 (step S474:≠5AH), then the state of the support time saving determination flag is determined (step S476). If the support time reduction determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476:≠5AH), the process advances to step S478. When the support time saving determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the support time saving symbol is stopped (step S477), and the process proceeds to step S478.

When the process proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time saving number counter is subtracted by 1 as the amount of the current variation number (step S479), and the special symbol time saving number counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), a setting process is performed at the end of time saving (step S481A).

(Setting process at time saving end: step S481A)
Here, as the setting process at the end of time saving, as shown in the figure, the electric chew support function is set to OFF state, Tcode is set to "00H (general mode)", and the consecutive play count counter is cleared (00H), etc. , performs transition setting processing from the time saving state to the normal state. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the special symbol variation pattern related to the "general mode" will be selected.

The case where the "setting process at the end of time saving" in step S481A is executed is the case where the gaming mode shifts from the "time saving mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal gaming state is the "time saving state". This is a case of transitioning from the state to the "normal state". Therefore, here, as the next game shifts to the normal state (general mode), the ceiling counter is set to an initial value (999 times) in order to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games. In this embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (the 999th game), and in the game immediately before the ceiling game, various setting processes and specific details are performed before the ceiling benefit starts. In the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 63), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for specifying the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 66). steps S915 to S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 63) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set in various flags and counters related to game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 65). As a result, ceiling benefits are awarded at the start of the ceiling game. Note that the ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value; in this case, it is monitored whether the ceiling counter reaches zero, that is, whether it is the 1000th game, and if it is zero, For example, the process may be such that the specified data regarding the ceiling benefit is directly set in various flags and counters without going through the state buffer.

(Regarding the control process for the above-mentioned "ceiling game activation type" that grants ceiling benefits upon the end of the game)
(Italy 34) Here, if the above-mentioned "ceiling game is activated at the end of the game", the subroutine "ceiling activation management process (step S421, FIG. If you want to give a ceiling benefit upon the end of the symbol change display game, execute the ceiling activation management process (step S421) after the last process (step S494 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time process related to the end of the symbol variation display game. Just let it happen. In addition, if you want to generate a ceiling privilege at the end of the fluctuation time, for example, after the process of step S451 (after the fluctuation time elapses) during the special symbol fluctuation process in FIG. 67, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed (in the case of a jackpot win, the ceiling benefit will not be awarded (steps 474 to S475A)). In this case, if the ceiling counter is set to 999 as in this embodiment, a ceiling benefit will be awarded at the end of 999 games, and if 1000 is set, a ceiling benefit will be awarded at the end of 1000 games. In any case, a specific event related to the game (in this case, the number of losses during the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (in this case, zero), a ceiling function activation trigger or a ceiling benefit is activated. It is sufficient if the configuration is such that it can be granted. Note that if the processing method of this embodiment (see FIGS. 63 to 68B) is adopted, for example, in the old model, the start of the game was used as the trigger for ceiling activation (a configuration in which the trigger is activated at the start of the ceiling game), but in the new model, This has the advantage that if you want to use the end of the game as a trigger for ceiling activation (a configuration in which the ceiling is activated at the end of the game), you can easily change the design and increase compatibility between old and new models.

After completing the time saving end setting process in step S481A, the game status information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control section 24. The gaming state designation command here includes information designating that the time saving state has ended. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the time saving state has ended in the current game, and shifts the performance mode to the normal performance mode. Note that the gaming state designation command can include information that can specify the type of time saving state that has ended (such as a jackpot time saving state, a support time saving state, a ceiling time saving state, etc.).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability change count counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process advances to step S488. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 as the number of variations of the current special symbol (step S484), and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is It is determined whether the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST number of times has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

If the special symbol probability variation count counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the prescribed ST number (65535 times in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486A). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the functions related to the probability change state are set to OFF state, the Tcode is set to "00H (in general mode)", and the ceiling counter and consecutive winnings counter are cleared ( 00H), etc., to perform transition setting processing from a variable probability state to a normal state.

After completing the setting process at the end of probability variation in step S486A, next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482 above, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, but information included in the gaming state designation command here includes the end of the high probability state (probable variable state or potential state). Contains information specifying. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps that the variable probability state has ended in the current game, and shifts the performance mode to the normal performance mode.

If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 as the current variation count (step S489), and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that it is not the update timing (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the process exits during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and a gaming state update process is executed (step S491).

After completing the gaming state update process in step S491, a gaming state information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482 above, a gaming state designation command is sent to the production control unit 24, but the information included in the gaming state designation command here is such that the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be specified. Contains information. When the performance control section 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps the updated variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) and shifts the performance mode to the performance mode corresponding to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

Next, a precursor mode transition management process is executed (step S494). In the portent mode shift management process, the ceiling counter is checked to determine whether the value of the ceiling counter is the number of games that trigger the shift to the portent mode. In the case of this embodiment, the portent mode enters from the 990th game (see FIGS. 100A and 100B), so if the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in the current game (ceiling counter N = 10), the portent mode enters the portent mode. Perform the migration setting process. Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" in the general mode to "01H" in the precursor mode. As a result, a transition is made to the omen mode from the 990th game of the next game, and a special symbol variation pattern related to the omen mode is selected. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 320 (Ha-2), the 996th to 999th games in the precursor mode are set as the look-ahead prohibited period, but at this time, the value of the ceiling counter is checked, It is determined whether it is the 996th game to the 999th game. If the CPU 201 determines that the current game is in the look-ahead section, the CPU 201 sets the determination processing result of step S316 (determination process of whether or not special figure 1 look-ahead is prohibited) shown in FIG. As described above, a winning command with prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and prefetch notices are prohibited.

Further, the precursor mode transition management process includes a game status information transmission process, and transmits a game status designation command as in step S482 above. The gaming state designation command transmitted here includes information regarding transition to the precursor mode (which may include pre-reading prohibited section information). Based on this game state designation command, the production control section 24 understands that the mode has been shifted to the omen mode, and shifts the production mode to the omen production mode.

When the foreshadowing mode transition management process in step S494 is finished, the process exits from the special symbol confirmation time process, performs the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10, and exits from the special symbol management process (step S093). Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

[Modified example 1 of privilege grant form: Figure 75]
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling benefit is given when a predetermined number of games are played without winning a jackpot during the normal mode (at least when the internal gaming state is in the normal state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, the following application forms (α) to (ζ).

<Assignment form (α): Figure 75 (a)>
(α) The number of games executed is counted regardless of the gaming mode or internal gaming state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without at least winning a jackpot. (See Figure 75 (a)). In the case of this configuration, the number of games executed not only in the normal state (normal mode) but also during the time saving state (time saving mode) and the variable probability state (variable probability mode) is counted. Therefore, ceiling benefits can be given purely depending on how many games the player has become addicted to since winning the jackpot this time.

<Assignment form (β): Figure 75 (b)>
(β) Count the number of games in the "gaming state with low probability state (low probability gaming state)", and ensure that the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) without winning at least a jackpot. A ceiling benefit will be given if the target is reached. Hereinafter, the form in which the number of games in the "low probability gaming state" is counted as the number of ceiling games will also be referred to as the "low probability gaming state counting form".

The low-probability gaming state count format includes ``Ceiling benefits can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the ceiling time reduction state'' and ``Ceiling benefits can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the jackpot time reduction state.'' Includes count forms such as "a ceiling benefit can be granted" and "a ceiling benefit can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the support time reduction".

In this example, the number of games executed during a gaming state with a high probability state (high probability gaming state) is excluded from the count. Here, the "gaming state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and the "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the gaming mode. "Mode" is applicable.

FIG. 75(B) typically shows the 4R time saving jackpot (support time reduction may be included) (time saving state with 100 time reductions: hereinafter referred to as "time saving A") and the ST number of 100 times (not shown). The ST numbers are different: definite variable jackpot 1, definite variable time saving jackpot 2 (not shown) of "25 ST times + 75 time saving times", and definite variable time saving jackpot 3 (not shown) of "25 ST times + 75 time saving times" This shows a case where this example (granting form (β)) is applied to the jackpot. In the illustration, in order to make it easier to compare the three, all three are shown as "a jackpot that grants 100 electric support points." For each jackpot, the required number of games (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) is as follows.

Referring to FIG. 75(b), in the case of a jackpot that grants time saving A, the game is transferred to a time saving state in which the number of time reductions is 100 after the end of the jackpot game, and these 100 time reductions are counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time Saving A" in FIG. 75(b)).
On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving variable jackpot, the number of games from the end of the electric support until the ceiling is reached differs depending on the number of STs.

“ST25”, “ST75”, and “ST100” in FIG. 75(b) indicate cases in which the above-described variable time-saving jackpot 3, variable time-saving jackpot 2, and variable time-saving jackpot 1 are won, respectively.
(A) In the case of ST25 (25 ST times + 75 time saving times), the 75 time saving times after ST25 are counted, so the required number of games X is "925 games".
(B) In the case of ST75 (75 ST times + 25 time saving times), the 25 time saving times after the end of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is "975 games".
(C) In the case of ST100 (100 STs), the probability is variable for 100 games until the end of the electric support, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In other words, the relatively lower the profit level of the time-saving variable jackpot, the smaller the number of games required from the end of the electric support until the ceiling number of games.

To summarize the relationships shown in the figure, regarding the above-mentioned "number of required games In other words, the more you move to a gaming mode with a relatively lower profit level (internal gaming gaming state), the more the required number of games from the end of the electric support until reaching the ceiling (the number of required games during normal mode (normal state)). This is a unique relationship in which it decreases. This "reducing the number of games required to be played in normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a relief function that is different from the ceiling benefit.

(If RAM is cleared)
(Italy 48) In this example (assignment form (β)), the number of games in the gaming state (normal state and time saving state) with low probability states is counted as the number of ceiling games. , a case where RAM clear is executed will be explained. When RAM clearing is executed, the current value of the ceiling counter (current number of remaining ceiling games) is cleared, and the initial value of the number of ceiling games (1000 games) is reset to the ceiling counter. Furthermore, after the RAM is cleared, the internal gaming state is set to the initial state, ``normal state,'' and the gaming mode is set to ``normal mode (general mode).'' Therefore, after clearing the RAM, the ceiling will be reached when 1000 games are played in the normal state. On the other hand, when going through a time-saving jackpot (for example, 4R time-saving jackpot with 100 time-savings), the ceiling number of games is set to 1000 games in the jackpot game, but in this case, "100 games in the time-saving state + 900 games in the normal state" ” If you digest it, you will reach the ceiling.

In other words, the number of games to reach the ceiling in the normal state will be different depending on the case where you clear the RAM and the case where you go through the 4R time saving jackpot (the number of games to be completed in the normal state is reduced by the number of time savings, and (The number of ceiling games will fluctuate). In this case, the following problem arises. When the RAM is cleared, the number of ceiling games is set to the initial value, so if you play first thing in the morning, you will always play under disadvantageous conditions to reach the ceiling, which may affect the customer attraction rate first thing in the morning. be. However, since there is a possibility of clearing the RAM by changing the settings, expectations for higher settings by changing the settings increase, but in the case of gaming machines that do not have a setting function, the above problem still remains. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to count the number of games in the normal state as the number of ceiling games as in this embodiment.

Further, as a means to solve the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of ceiling games that is advantageous when clearing the RAM can be set. For example, when clearing the RAM, 800 games is set as the first initial value, and if the initial value is set under other conditions, in this embodiment, after the end of the time saving state, after the end of the variable probability state, after the end of the jackpot game, There may be cases such as after the end of the support time reduction, but if a ceiling game is set based on these setting triggers, 1000 games is set as the second initial value. In other words, the number of ceiling games is set that satisfies the relationship of "first initial value (set when RAM is cleared)<second initial value (when set at a timing other than when RAM is cleared)". In this way, even when playing for the first time after clearing the RAM, the game will not be played under unfavorable ceiling reaching conditions, and it is thought that the customer attraction rate first thing in the morning can actually be improved. Note that, as described above (I53-3), when the RAM is cleared, one of the multiple ceiling time reductions can be determined by lottery.

(Italy 54) The following can be done depending on the case where the player reaches the ceiling after clearing the RAM and the case where the player reaches the ceiling after hitting the jackpot.
(Italy 54-1) The fluctuation pattern distribution table to be referred to is common (selectable fluctuation patterns are common).
(I54-2) The confirmed display times are the same.
(Italy 54-3) The time-saving rush notification effect is common when playing the ceiling game (ceiling mode) or the first rotation of heaven mode.

(Variation example of ceiling count in grant form (β))
(Italy 113) In this example (assignment form (β)), the number of games in a gaming state with a low probability state is counted as the number of ceiling games (low probability gaming state counting form), but it is time-saving. If the ceiling counter becomes zero during this state, the ceiling flag is turned on without executing the ceiling flag ON state (5AH) process (step S904) in the "ceiling function management process" shown in FIG. It is possible to maintain the OFF state, keep the ceiling counter at zero, and control not to execute the ceiling activation preparation process (processing route of steps S915 to S917 and S914 during the gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 66). . In this case, even if the ceiling is reached during a time-saving state such as during a support time-saving state, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) only for ceilings will not be changed, and the ceiling function will not be activated (ceiling privileges will not be granted). ) can be prevented from happening.
(Italy 114) In the low-probability game state counting form (which may include the configuration of (Italy 113) above), resetting the initial value after the ceiling counter reaches zero during the time saving state is normal. In this case, it is assumed that the
(Italy 115) In the low certainty game state counting form (which may include the configuration of (Italy 113) or (Italy 114) described above), even if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value during the time saving state, advance notice is prohibited in the section Configure it so that it is not judged as such. For example, in the case of this embodiment, as already explained, the 996th game to 999th game in the precursor mode is set as the look-ahead prohibited period, but at this time, the value of the ceiling counter is checked, and the 996th game to 999th game It is determined whether or not it is the 999th game. Therefore, the system is configured so that the prefetched notice is not determined as a prohibited section even though it is not in the precursor mode, and the prefetched notice is not prohibited during the time saving state (for example, during the support time saving state).
(Italy 117) In a low certainty game state counting form (which may include the configurations of (Italy 113), (Italy 114) or (Italy 115) described above), even if the ceiling counter reaches zero during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern The selection mode (Tcode) is configured not to be updated (the variation pattern table is not changed). For example, when the ceiling counter is updated during the support time reduction state, if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value (zero), the support time reduction state During this process, processing related to ceiling mode, ceiling activation preparation processing, and activation of ceiling functions (granting ceiling benefits) can be prevented from being executed.
(Italy 65) In the low-probability gaming state counting form (which may include the configurations of (Italy 113), (Italy 114) or (Italy 115), (Italy 117) mentioned above), the ceiling counter is updated during the jackpot time saving state. However, the ceiling counter update process can be configured not to be performed during the ceiling time saving state. During the jackpot time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction has not yet been activated, so the ceiling counter is updated. On the other hand, while in the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction is already activated, so the update of the ceiling counter is interrupted, and each time the ceiling counter reaches zero, the ceiling function is activated (ceiling benefit is granted) and the ceiling time reduction is looped. It is possible to prevent this from happening.
(Italy 118) In the low-probability game state counting form (which may include the configurations of (Italy 113), (Italy 114), (Italy 115), (Italy 65) or (Italy 117) mentioned above), during the support time reduction state. performs ceiling counter updating processing, but it can be configured such that ceiling counter updating processing is not performed during the ceiling time saving state. During the support time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction has not yet been activated, so the ceiling counter is updated. On the other hand, while in the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling time reduction is already activated, so the update of the ceiling counter is interrupted, and each time the ceiling counter reaches zero, the ceiling function is activated (ceiling benefit is granted) and the ceiling time reduction is looped. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<Application form (γ): Figure 75 (c)>
(γ) The number of games in a specific variable pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and a ceiling benefit is given when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games without winning a jackpot. To make this example easier to understand, we will use a virtual gaming machine to create two game modes corresponding to the normal mode, ``Normal A mode'' and ``Normal B mode,'' which have different variable pattern selection modes. This will be explained by taking as an example a gaming machine that can control mode transition.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 75(c), for example, the number of games to be counted is the number of games executed in the "normal B mode". In this case, games played in "Normal A mode" are not counted, so no matter how many games are played in Normal A mode, ceiling benefits will not be awarded. It may be configured such that a ceiling benefit is awarded when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number. In addition, the transition conditions between "Normal A mode" and "Normal B mode" (transition conditions of variable pattern selection mode) include, for example, "mode transition occurs when winning a small hit" or "number of games executed ( mode transition occurs depending on the number of fluctuations). By using this example, it is possible to create gameplay as shown in (A) or (B) below.

[(A) Case where the change pattern selection mode shifts due to a small winning win]
A case will be described in which a change in the variable pattern selection mode occurs due to a small winning. As an example of this case, for example, if a small hit (probability of winning 1/50) is set on the special map 1 side and the small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition to the variable pattern selection mode. If you win a small win again (fall lottery) during the "normal B mode", the game will change to "normal A mode". Shift (shift to normal A mode after small winning game). Regarding the granting of ceiling benefits, if you get addicted to a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) without winning a small hit or a jackpot during "normal B mode" (normally if you lose 70 games in a row during normal B mode) case) Grant ceiling benefits. In this case, no matter how much you get addicted to normal mode A, you will not be given a ceiling benefit, but if you get addicted to 70 games during normal B mode, you will be given a ceiling benefit. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel gaming experience in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege awarding chance period", that is, a "chance zone" that is advantageous to the player. Note that multiple small wins may be provided; for example, if the first small win is won during the normal A mode, the mode will be shifted to the normal B mode, and if the second small win is won during the normal B mode, the normal A mode will be transferred. mode. In this case, the first small win and the second small win may have different winning probabilities or may have the same winning probability. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the probability of winning a small win according to the set value. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the first small win (the small win that normally triggers the transition to B mode (chance zone)), and the higher the probability of winning the second small win (the trigger that normally triggers the transition to A mode). If the probability of winning (small win) is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. In other words, it is possible to create a gaming experience in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of awarding the ceiling benefit. Note that the probability of winning a small win, the variable pattern selection mode for counting, and the number of games with ceiling benefits can be determined as appropriate in consideration of gameplay.

[B: Case where the variation pattern selection mode shifts due to the number of variations]
Next, a case will be described in which the change pattern selection mode is caused to change due to the number of changes. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition to the variable pattern selection mode, if the first number of games (for example, 50 games) is played during the normal A mode, the transition is made to the "normal B mode"; If a second number of games (for example, 40 games) are played during the playback period, the mode is shifted to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 400 games), a ceiling benefit is given. In this example, if the mode is shifted to the normal B mode 10 times, the ceiling number of games can be reached at 400 games. In addition, instead of setting the number of games that reach the ceiling as a fixed number, for example, multiple types of number of games such as 400 games, 600 games, 800 games, etc. can be set, and one of the number of games can be determined by lottery. It's okay. In this case, the number of games reaching the ceiling is randomized, making the game more interesting. In addition, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games (400 games), and the lower the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games (800 games). If the lottery probability is determined according to the setting value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, it is also possible to give the player a setting guess factor based on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

Furthermore, instead of counting the number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode, the count may be based on "the number of times transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode" are made. In this case, a ceiling benefit can be given when the number of times of transition to a specific variation pattern selection mode (in this example, normal B mode) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of the number of transitions described above are provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times, etc.), and any one of the number of transitions can be determined by lottery (transition number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of transitions (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of transitions (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, it is also possible to give the player a setting guess factor based on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of times the regular symbol fluctuation display game is executed (the number of fluctuations of the regular symbol)" is counted. Good too. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of fluctuations of normal symbols" during a gaming state with a low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, when the number of executions of the normal pattern fluctuation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling benefit can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
Furthermore, the number of wins of "small wins" in which the (ε) conditional device does not operate is counted, and a ceiling benefit can be given when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number without winning a jackpot. For example, if the probability of winning a small winning is set to 1/100, and the winning of a small winning reaches 10 times, a ceiling benefit is given. In addition, instead of the number of winnings of the "small winning", the number of times the special electric accessory is operated (the number of times the small winning game is executed) when winning the small winning may be counted. Note that this example can also be applied to short winning support time reduction.
Alternatively, a plurality of types of winning numbers may be provided (for example, 7, 8, 9, and 10), and one of the winning numbers may be determined by lottery (ceiling shift winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of wins (for example, 7 times), and the lower the setting value, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of wins (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability for each number of winnings is determined according to the setting value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege, or conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to grant the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling, a setting estimation element can be given to the player (the same applies to the "giving form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
In addition, (ζ) The number of winnings of "assistance winnings" is counted, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached, a ceiling benefit can be given. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of wins at least in a gaming state (normal state and/or potential state) in which the lottery probability of winning the assistance is low (normal symbol probability changing function is not activated). In addition, instead of the number of winnings of the "assistance win", the number of times the general electricity release game is executed may be counted.

The awarding forms (ε) and (ζ) described above are characterized in that the conditions for awarding the ceiling benefit do not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations).

Note that in the above embodiment, the award form (α) and the award form (β) are explained as giving a ceiling benefit when a predetermined number of games (ceiling number of games) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the above-mentioned grant form (γ), the number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (a lottery for the number of ceiling games). Specifically, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of ceiling game numbers (for example, 500 games, 700 games, and 1000 games), and make it possible to determine one of the ceiling game numbers by lottery. In this case as well, the lottery probability for each number of ceiling games is adjusted according to the setting value, such that the higher the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively smaller number of games, and the lower the setting value is, the easier it is to select a relatively larger number of games. can be determined.

[Modification 2 of benefit provision form (divided benefit provision form): Fig. 76]
In the above-mentioned embodiment and modification 1 of the benefit provision mode, the ceiling activation trigger is once (the ceiling benefit is awarded in the 1000th game), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting multiple (at least two) triggers for triggering benefits (minimum benefit granting triggers), it is possible to grant major benefits (e.g., benefits equivalent to ceiling benefits) through the minor benefits granted by each trigger. (divided benefit provision form). Modified Example 2 utilizes multiple opportunity to activate the benefit, and the purpose of this modification is to increase the base during a specific gaming state, rather than to "provide the benefit to relieve the player from getting hooked". For example, the purpose of "base up during normal state (normal mode)" is strong.

As a representative example of this second modification, for example, an upper limit is set on the number of times saved between jackpots, and the upper limit number of times saved is divided into a plurality of times and provided. Specifically, the "major benefit" (equivalent to a ceiling benefit) of a finite time reduction of 100 times is divided into four "small benefits" of a finite time reduction of 25 times (divided award). It is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of time reductions to be granted (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit number of time reductions") is X times, the number of times of grant is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit number of time reductions is divided (hereinafter referred to as "number of divided time reductions") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Z"),
"ΣZk=X k=1~Y"...Formula (10)
satisfy. For example, if the upper limit number of time reductions X is 100 times and the number of split grants Y is 4 times, the total number of split time reductions (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) in the case of 4 grants before winning the next jackpot is 100 times of the upper limit number of time savings. The time saving state is applied so that the number of times (Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4=100) is obtained. Note that the number of divided time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of time reduction divisions, or may be the number of time reduction divisions at least one of which is different. In other words, a structure may be adopted in which small benefits of the same or substantially the same benefit are provided in installments, or a structure in which different small benefits are provided in installments. As an example of the former, for example, the number of time reductions of 25 times is divided into 4 times and the upper limit of the number of time reductions is 100 times (the same number of divided time savings is given), and as an example of the latter, for example, the number of time reductions from the first to the fourth time is given. The number of divided time reductions is set to ``20, 20, 20, and 40'' (partially different number of divided time reduction), and ``15, 35, 20, and 30'' (each with different divided time reduction). number of times), etc. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a relatively large number of addictive games is provided with a small benefit that has a relatively high degree of profit. For example, the number of time reductions for the first to fourth divisions can be set to "10 times, 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times."

It should be noted that the values to be set for the upper limit number of time reductions X, the number of grants Y, and the number of divided time reductions Z can be determined as appropriate in consideration of the gameplay and the like. For example, the upper limit number of time reductions X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship "upper limit number of time reductions X>maximum number of time reductions due to jackpot". However, in order to avoid giving excessive benefits, the upper limit of the number of time savings It is preferable that the relationship satisfies "number of time savings X<maximum number of time savings due to jackpot (100 times)".

In addition, there only need to be multiple triggers for triggering the benefit (number of times Y). It is also possible to appropriately determine the number of games in a state to be awarded, and the number of games played in a specific game state to be awarded.

Furthermore, after the maximum number of time reductions (big benefit) has been granted, no further time savings will be granted, and no benefits will be granted until the next jackpot. After the granting of the big bonus is completed, it is assumed that a sufficient bonus has been granted, in other words, the relief function has been fulfilled, and the bonus will not be granted until the next jackpot. However, a ceiling benefit (FIG. 100B, FIG. 69) may be provided separately. For example, after the divisional benefit provision is completed, if a predetermined number of games is played for a predetermined number of 1000 games without winning the next jackpot, a ceiling benefit can be granted. Furthermore, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to appear in at least one of the plurality of privilege activation opportunities. In this case, when the opportunity for activating the bonus (a bonus awarding game) arrives, it is possible to obtain setting suggestion information in addition to the bonus award, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, here, a configuration has been described in which a finite time reduction is given as a major benefit, but it goes without saying that it can also be applied to a finite variable or a finite potential. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time saving number" is replaced with "ST number" and "time saving state" is read as "definite variable state" or "potential definite state", the finite variable (large benefit) can be divided and granted (small benefit). It is obvious that the concept is a configuration in which a finite probability variable is granted multiple times) or a configuration in which a finite potential probability (major benefit) is dividedly granted (a small benefit finite potential is granted multiple times). For example, the upper limit number of time reductions X may be read as "upper limit number of ST times X", the number of divided time reductions Z may be read as "number of divided ST times", etc. as appropriate. As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be granted (upper limit ST number) is set to (k=1 to Y), it can be interpreted as satisfying "ΣZk=X k=1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: Fig. 76)
This modification (modification 2) can be roughly divided into a "periodic grant form" in which benefits are given periodically (regularly), such as "a small benefit is given every time a predetermined number of games are played." ” and an “aperiodic allocation form” in which allocation is not performed periodically. First, the periodic application mode will be explained using FIG. 76.

[Periodic grant form]
<A. Specific example 1 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 76 (a)>
FIG. 76(A) shows an example of a periodic application form (application form (κ)). FIG. 76(A) shows that every time the symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of electric support due to a jackpot (p0 in the figure), p1, p3, p5, p7) shown in the figure, a small benefit of "limited time savings of 25 times (divided time savings 25 times)" is given. Here, the number of grants will be 4 times, and by granting these four small benefits in total, we will complete the granting of the major benefit, "Limited time reduction with 100 times of time reduction (time reduction state with upper limit of 100 times of time reduction)" This shows a case where

In detail, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the 100 games from the 1st to 100th games (p1) after the end of electric support (p0) are controlled to the normal state (period without split grants), and the control is maintained in the normal state for the 101st game. When the first benefit activation opportunity (benefit granting opportunity) arrives, a limited time reduction (25 times of time reduction) as a small benefit is granted, and the 25 games from the 101st to the 125th game (p2) are controlled to be in a time reduction state. (Controlled to shorten working hours due to initial small benefits).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th game (p3) are controlled again to the normal state (period without split grants), and the second benefit activation opportunity arrives in the 226th game, and the limited time reduction of the small benefit ( 25 times) is given, and the 25 games from the 226th to the 250th game (p4) are controlled to be in a time-saving state (controlled to be in a time-saving state due to the second small benefit).
Next, the 100 games from the 251st to the 350th game (p5) are controlled again to the normal state (period without split grants), and the third benefit activation opportunity arrives in the 351st game, and the limited time reduction of the small benefit ( 25 time saving times) is given, and the time saving state is controlled from the 351st to the 375th game (p6) (the time saving state is controlled by the third small bonus).
Then, from the 376th to the 475th game (p7), it is controlled again to the normal state, and in the 476th game, the opportunity to activate the final (4th) benefit comes, and the limited time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of the small benefit is activated. It is granted, and the time saving state is controlled from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (the time saving state is controlled by the 4th small benefit), and with this, the granting of the major benefit "Limited time saving with 100 time saving times" is completed. do. In other words, a small benefit (25 time reductions) will be given periodically (every 100 games) divided into 4 times, and if you get addicted to 500 games after the end of the electric support, you will receive all of the upper limit of 100 time reductions. Become. In other words, such a grant form is the same as granting a maximum of 4 sets, where 1 set is the playing period of "100 games executed during normal state + 25 times of time saving", and the limiter function is not activated. It can also be said to be a special benefit granting function. Although the presentation mode is not shown in the drawings, it may be configured to be able to control the transition to the presentation mode according to the gaming mode or the internal gaming state.

(In case of granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, a configuration has been described in which a finite time saving is given in installments as a major benefit, but it is also possible to have an arrangement in which the upper limit of the number of working hours is infinite, that is, an "infinite time saving" is given in installments. If the major benefit is "infinite time saving," for example, a predetermined number of times of divided time saving (minor benefit) may be permanently granted every 100 games until the next jackpot is won. Further, as in FIG. 76(A), 25 division time reductions are given every 100 games, but an infinite number of division time reductions may be given to the 476th game (p7 of the last assignment). In this case, the time saving state can continue even after the 501st game. Of course, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which infinite probability changes and infinite potentials with an infinite upper limit ST number are divided and provided. In this case, as described above, the above-mentioned "time saving number" may be read as "ST number", and "time saving state" may be read as "probable variable state" or "potential state" as appropriate.

<B. Specific example 2 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 76 (b)>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ), a periodic grant form in which "ceiling benefits are given in installments" has been explained. Next, as other periodic grant forms, the profit status granted by winning a jackpot is "infinite time shortening", "finite time shortening", "infinite definite variable", "finite definite variable", "infinite potential", or "finite A configuration (awarding form (λ)) in which bonuses such as "Possibility Definitely" are awarded in installments based on multiple privilege activation triggers will be described.

In this example, the benefits of time saving states (infinite time saving, finite time saving), variable probability states (infinite probability variation, finite probability variation), and potential states (infinite potential probability, finite potential probability), etc., which are granted by winning the jackpot, can be obtained multiple times. The structure is such that the benefits are awarded in installments depending on the trigger for the benefit activation. In other words, instead of immediately giving the total time saving number and the total ST number after the jackpot game as in the above embodiment (see FIG. 4, FIG. 100A, FIG. 100B, etc.), the total time saving number and the total ST number are not immediately given, but are given in small amounts over a long gaming period. This is a good configuration. In this example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the number of time-savings granted due to the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit number of time-savings" (major benefit), and the number of time-savings granted in installments corresponds to the above-mentioned "number of divided time-savings" (small benefit). do. In addition, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or a potential definite jackpot, the number of STs awarded due to the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit number of STs" (major benefit), and the number of STs awarded in installments corresponds to the "divided number of STs" (small benefit). corresponds to A specific example is shown in FIG. 76(b).

FIG. 76(b) shows, as a representative example of this example (granting form (λ)), time saving jackpots α to γ with different number of time saving times (for example, finite time saving jackpot with 50 time saving times, finite time saving jackpot with 100 time saving times). A case of winning a jackpot (infinite time saving jackpot) is shown as an example. Figure (A) shows the case of normal granting where the number of time savings is given without dividing it if you win the time saving jackpot of 50 time savings (corresponding to time saving jackpot 2 in Figure 4), and Figure (B) shows the case where the number of time savings is given without being divided. A case in which if you win a time-saving jackpot with 100 time-savings (corresponding to the 4R time-saving jackpot in Figure 4), the 100 time-savers are divided into two and awarded (50 times are divided into two. Figure (C) shows a case in which 50 time savings are awarded the first time, and 50 time savings are awarded the first time, and the second time This shows a case where an infinite number of times is given to .

Referring to FIG. 76 (B), as shown in FIGS. (A) to (C), if you win any of the time-saving jackpots α to γ, no matter which jackpot you win, you will first receive the number of time-saving jackpots. 50 times are awarded, and after that, different game transitions are followed depending on the type of jackpot won. Here, as shown in the figure, if the production mode is set to be common, the following gameplay can be created.

(Time-saving number of hidden games)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the type of jackpot won in the performance during the symbol variation display game (such as a preview performance including decorative stop symbols) and the performance during the win is kept secret. The production mode after the jackpot game is also a common time-saving production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode: see Figure 7B) up to the first time-saving number of 50 times (between 1 and 50 games) (section a0 to p0 shown). , and the subsequent 51st to 150th games are also in the same normal production mode (section p0 to p1 in the figure). Therefore, the winning type of jackpot is hidden from the performance until the 150th game has passed, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting to win the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode will continue from the 151st game (after p1), so at this point, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. That will become clear. However, if the winning jackpot is Time-saving jackpot β or Time-saving jackpot γ, the time-saving state will occur in the 151st game and the time-saving production mode will be entered again, so at this stage, the time-saving jackpot β or Time-saving jackpot Which of γ won is kept secret. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping that the time-saving state does not end after 200 games (p2 in the figure) (while hoping to win the time-saving jackpot γ). If the time-saving state continues after the 201st game, it is confirmed that the winning jackpot is a time-saving jackpot γ, that is, an infinite time-saving, and the player can continue playing under a high base state with peace of mind until the next jackpot. Can be done. In this way, by gradually disclosing the number of time reductions in the concealed state, we can stimulate players' expectations for the continuation of the electric support, a sense of nervousness when the electric support ends, and a sense of elation when it becomes clear that the electric support will continue. It is possible to create such gameplay (time-saving number of hidden games). In addition, under the time saving state after the 201 game where infinite time saving is revealed, the normal time saving production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time saving production mode different from the normal time saving production mode (Special time saving effect mode) may be displayed to definitively notify that the time is infinitely shortened.

In the above, we have explained the relationship between three time-saving jackpots α to γ with different number of time-savings (finite time-saving jackpot with 50 time-savings, finite time-saving jackpot with 100 time-savings, and infinite time-saving jackpot), but at least the number of time-savings If there are two time-saving jackpots with different numbers, it is possible to realize the time-saving number secret game as described above. Further, in the example of FIG. 76(b), the time-saving jackpots α to γ with different numbers of time-savings have been described, but the same phenomenon also applies to support time-savings with different numbers of time-savings. The same phenomenon also occurs for definite variable jackpots with different ST counts (for example, finite definite variable jackpot α with 50 ST counts, finite definite variable jackpot β with 100 ST counts, infinite definite variable jackpot γ), and in this case, the hidden state It is possible to realize a "ST number secret game" in which the number of ST's is disclosed in stages.

[Aperiodic grant form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-mentioned granting form (κ) (λ), we have explained the form in which small benefits are given periodically, but it is also possible to give small benefits aperiodically (aperiodic granting). form). For example, the privilege activation opportunities are the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, and the 800th game. In the case of non-periodic awarding, it may be configured such that multiple benefit activation triggers can be determined by lottery, or multiple benefit activation trigger scenarios (scenarios in which the number of multiple benefit activation trigger games is predetermined) may be configured. It may also be configured such that one of the benefit activation trigger scenarios can be determined by a lottery. Other points (matters related to major benefits, minor benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-mentioned grant form (κ) (λ), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned divided benefit provision mode, a mode has been described in which small benefits are dividedly granted with the profit of the large benefit as the upper limit. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit is not the profit of the large benefit. For example, a configuration is such that a "specific benefit" is granted periodically or aperiodically, but there is no upper limit to the benefit that can be granted. To put it simply, the major benefit is an infinite benefit (infinite time saving, infinite definite variation, or infinite potential), and the small benefit is a finite benefit (a time saving state of a predetermined number of times, a finite variable of a predetermined number of STs, or a predetermined ST This is a configuration in which small benefits are given periodically or aperiodically until the next jackpot, without any limit to the number of times Y of giving. This example differs from "divided grant" in that there is no limit to the number of grants Y (the number of grants is infinite). To explain this example using, for example, FIG. 76(a), the small benefit "Limited time reduction of 25 times" is periodically granted (awarded every 100 games in the normal state). This is a grant form in which the grant does not end at p8 (4th time) and is permanently granted until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, for example, if we explain using Figures 76 (B) and (C), at the point of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be granted to "Infinite time saving", we will change the small privilege "Limited time saving of 50 times". , P2 and thereafter, the bonus is given periodically (every 100 games in the normal state). Note that when the number of grants reaches a predetermined prescribed number of times or a prescribed prescribed number of games, the advantageous degree (profit state) of the small benefit may be increased. For example, to explain using FIG. 76 (a), if the number of grants reaches 10, the "Number of time reductions" which has a relatively higher advantage than the current small benefit "Limited time reduction of 25 times" 50 limited working hours” (medium benefit). The condition for switching from a small benefit to a medium benefit may be when a predetermined number of grants and/or a predetermined number of games are reached.

<Special grant form 1>
(Italy 50) When N is the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction and M is the number of ceiling games (initial value of the ceiling counter), a case that satisfies the relationship "M<N".
If the number of ceiling games is counted even if the game is in the ceiling time reduction state (case where the ceiling counter is updated during the ceiling time reduction state), if the above relationship "M <N" is satisfied, even if it is a finite time reduction, It becomes possible to generate ceiling time reduction (permanent time reduction) which is essentially the same as infinite time reduction. . To be more specific, if the number of ceiling games is 1000 (M = 1000) and the number of time savings due to ceiling time reduction is 1200 (N = 1200), 1200 ceiling time savings will be granted by reaching the ceiling for the first time. Become. Then, the number of ceiling games is counted again from the first ceiling game number (1000th game), so before the 1200th game, which is the end of the ceiling time reduction state, the ceiling is reached again (the second (reaching the ceiling), a second ceiling time reduction of 1,200 times is granted, and so on, unless the conditions for ending the ceiling time reduction are satisfied, the time reduction state is repeatedly provided. According to this configuration, even if a limited ceiling time reduction is granted, the time reduction state continues forever, so the ceiling time reduction state does not end without winning the jackpot. According to this configuration, if the ceiling time saving is granted even once, the time saving state can be maintained until the jackpot is won, so the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

<Special grant form 2>
(Italy 58) In this embodiment, one ceiling game has been described, but a plurality of ceiling games may be defined.
In detail, if you reach the first ceiling number of games without winning the jackpot, the first ceiling time reduction will be granted (activation of the first ceiling function), and if you exit without winning the jackpot during the first ceiling time reduction state. After that, when the second ceiling number of games is reached without winning a jackpot, a second ceiling time reduction is given (activation of the second ceiling function). According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of ceiling games that serve as triggers for ceiling activation, a major feature is that ceiling benefits can be awarded in stages.
Note that the first ceiling game number and the second ceiling game number may be the same or different. Moreover, the first number of time reductions related to the first ceiling time reduction and the second number of time reductions related to the second ceiling time reduction may be the same or may be different. Moreover, the performance of the first ceiling time saving and the performance of the second ceiling time saving may be the same or different. The "ceiling time saving performance" here means the degree of profit (ball payout performance) due to the operation mode (opening/closing operation pattern of the movable wing pieces 47) of the general electricity release game.

In the case of this configuration, from the viewpoint of providing ceiling benefits in stages to relieve players from becoming addicted, it is preferable that "the number of second ceiling games<the number of first ceiling games". If the player becomes addicted to the game, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly by giving the ceiling bonus earlier than the previous time. Moreover, it is preferable that the advantageous degree of ceiling time saving is set as "first ceiling time saving <second ceiling time saving". This is to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly by providing a ceiling benefit with a higher profit level than the previous time if the player becomes addicted to the game.

The embodiment described above can have the following configurations (1) to (6). Note that although the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A firing means (launching device 13, FIG. 3) capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area (gaming area 3a in FIG. 2);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 66) that performs a lottery for a plurality of types of winnings when the starting means (starting ports 34, 35) detects a game ball;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, a winning game execution control means (FIG. 15) that controls the execution of the winning game;
A gaming machine comprising symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) that displays symbols in a variable manner and displays the lottery results by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbols,
Game state control means capable of controlling a low probability game state accompanied by a low probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability, and a high probability game state accompanied by a high probability state in which the probability of winning is higher than the normal probability. (FIG. 4, FIG. 100A, FIG. 100B, S412 in FIG. 63, FIG. 66),
After the predetermined start condition is established, the winning game is not generated by the winning game execution control means, and the number of symbol fluctuations executed in the low probability gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times). Privilege game state control means (FIG. 100B (ceiling mode, heaven mode columns), FIG. 63 S420 to S421, S412A, FIGS. 64 to 66, FIG. 69, FIG. 75, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) Advantageous gaming state control means (see Fig. 6 (time saving mode column), S412 in FIG. 63, FIG. 66, FIGS. 68A to 68B, etc.),
The advantageous gaming state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous gaming state after the winning game.
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) The above-mentioned bonus gaming state and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state have different advantages for the player (for example, a case where the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction is different from the number of time reductions due to jackpot or support time reduction),
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(4) The above advantageous gaming state control means is
Depending on the winning type won by the lottery means, at least a first advantageous gaming state (for example, 100 time savings) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, 200 time savings) that is higher in advantage than the first advantageous gaming state. ) and configured to be at least controllable,
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(5) The above-mentioned bonus game state control means:
Controlling to the first advantageous gaming state as the bonus gaming state (for example, in the case where Heaven Time Saving is 100 time saving times),
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(6) The above-mentioned bonus game state control means:
Control to the second advantageous gaming state as the bonus gaming state (for example, in a case where the national time saving is 200 times);
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(7) It further includes a performance control means (performance control unit 24) capable of controlling multiple types of performance modes related to the gaming state, and the performance mode related to the above-mentioned bonus gaming state is different from the performance mode related to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. is a production mode (for example, time-saving production mode (FIG. 100A), heaven production mode (FIG. 100B)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above, characterized in that:

Further, the application forms (application forms (α) to (μ): FIGS. 75 to 76) relating to the above-described embodiments and their modifications can be the following (configurations A) to (configurations G).
(Configuration A)
a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a game area;
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winnings in response to the detection of a game ball by the starting means;
a symbol display means that performs a fluctuating display operation of symbols and displays a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol;
A gaming machine comprising a profit state generation means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on predetermined generation conditions,
The above means of generating profit status are:
A winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of a winning game when a lottery is won by the lottery means;
a first profit state generating means for generating a first profit state after the winning game ends;
a second profit state generation means for generating a second profit state when a specific occurrence condition is satisfied without the winning game being executed after a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by:
(Configuration B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
A gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that:
(Configuration C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different profit states,
The gaming machine according to configuration A above.
(Configuration D)
The profit state is lower in the second profit state than in the first profit state,
The gaming machine according to configuration A above.
(Configuration E)
The first profit state starts after the end of the winning game and ends when a predetermined gaming period has elapsed,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is met, and then ends once a predetermined gaming period has elapsed, and the second profit state is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is met again. ,
The gaming machine according to configuration A or configuration B above.
(Configuration F)
The first profit state starts after the end of the winning game and ends when a predetermined number of games have elapsed,
The second profit state starts after the specific occurrence condition is met and continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to configuration A or configuration C above.
(Configuration G)
The first profit state starts after the end of the winning game and ends when the first gaming period has elapsed,
The second profit state starts after the specific occurrence condition is met, ends when a second gaming period shorter than the first gaming period has elapsed, and ends when the specific occurrence condition is met again. 2 The profit state is resumed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the configuration A, the configuration C, and the configuration D.

(Variations regarding model type)
In this embodiment, an ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type model, but may also be a model in which the transition form of the gaming state is determined as follows, for example, the following models (machine 1) to (machine 4).

(Machine 1) "V fixed type"
A specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided in the grand prize opening, and when one or more specific jackpots (for example, a certain probability jackpot) are won, the game ball can easily pass through (pass through) the specific area. On the other hand, if you win another jackpot (for example, a time-saving jackpot) or a support time-saving jackpot, it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through the specific area, and if the game ball passes through the specific area (so-called "V winning"). ), it may be a so-called "V probability variation type" model in which a special symbol probability variation function is activated to shift to a probability variation state or a potential probability state.

(Machine 2) “Falling Lottery Type”
If you are in a gaming state with a high probability state (potential state or variable state), a so-called "falling lottery" is held to transition from a high probability state to a low probability state (falling lottery) with a predetermined probability of falling every game. It may also be a "lottery type" model. In this falling lottery type, if you win the falling lottery, the winning game (falling game) will be shifted to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability change function is set to OFF), and the jackpot lottery in the winning game will also be in a low probability state. The lottery will be held. There are the following cases (A) to (C) in the game state transition form when winning the falling lottery. (A) Definitely variable state (ST) → Time-saving state (Time-saving mode), (B) Definitely variable state → Normal state (Normal mode), (C) Definitely variable state (Possible definite mode) → Normal state (Normal mode). In such a falling lottery type, the falling game is shifted to a game state with at least a low probability state. Therefore, when a game executed in a normal state or a time-saving state is to be counted as a ceiling game, it is preferable to count a falling game as the first game. Note that, excluding the falling game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type machine described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) mainly refer to "presence or absence of a fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the fall lottery result". The only difference is the presence or absence of a fall transition control means. Therefore, regarding the matters related to the gameplay described in this embodiment (for example, FIGS. 100A and 100B), before winning the falling lottery (in the case of a gaming state with a high probability state), it is applied to the embodiment regarding the variable probability state. It is possible, and after winning the falling lottery (if you win the falling lottery and moving to a gaming state with a low probability state), the embodiment regarding the normal state and time-saving state (the gaming state to which the falling will transition) Applicable to

By the way, in the conventional falling lottery type, there is only one type of falling probability regardless of the type of jackpot (type of winning symbol), and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, multiple types of fall probabilities are provided depending on the type of jackpot. In this case, each jackpot may have a different falling probability, or some of the falling probabilities may be the same or different. If it is assumed that the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is of the "fall lottery type", the probability of falling is, for example, 1/200, 1/150, 1/100, 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 for probability variable jackpots 1 to 3 (special figure 1 side), Jackpots 4 to 7 (special chart 2 side) are 1/240, so if you win a jackpot that belongs to the special chart 1 side, there are different falling probabilities, and if you win a jackpot on the special chart 2 side, the falling probability is the same. It can be done. Moreover, as means for providing multiple types of fall probabilities, it is possible to determine fall probabilities according to set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, the fall probability can be configured to be different between at least the first set value and the second set value. For example, it can be determined that the lower the set value is, the higher the probability of falling is.

Further, regarding the number of STs, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different, or the number of STs may be partially different. Further, the number of ST times can include not only a finite number of times but also an infinite number of times. For example, like the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be set to 25, 75, or 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be set to 100 or an infinite number of times. However, in the case of the falling lottery type, if you win the falling lottery before the ST number is exhausted, you will be forcibly shifted to a low probability state (the ST number will be forcibly reduced to zero). Furthermore, when the player wins the fall lottery, the presentation means may be configured to be able to perform a setting suggestion presentation (a setting suggestion presentation at the time of a fall). In this case, the execution probability of the fall setting suggestion effect can be determined according to the set value.

Regarding the above-mentioned falling lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be adopted.
(T1)
Acquisition means (for example, FIG. 11 S314: In the case of this example, it is configured to be able to obtain a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for special symbol determination, a random number for fluctuation pattern, and a random number for fall determination),
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 63) that executes a lottery regarding multiple types of wins based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means;
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol fluctuation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to a symbol stop display mode;
A winning game execution control means (FIG. 15) that controls the execution of a winning game when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win);
After the winning game ends, a probability fluctuation control means (S412A in FIG. 63, FIG. 66) capable of controlling the lottery probability to a high probability state in which the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means is higher than a predetermined normal probability;
When in the high probability state, a fall lottery means (main control unit 20);
A gaming machine T comprising a fall transition control means (main control unit 20) that controls the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won,
The plurality of types of wins include at least a first win and a second win,
In the case where the above first win is won (when the winning game based on the first winning is executed) and when the above second winning is won (when the winning game due to the second winning is executed), the above The falling lottery probability by the falling lottery means can be configured to be different.

(T2)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on a set value that can be changed in multiple stages. In this case, the set values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first set value and a second set value, and the first set value and the second set value are configured to have different fall probabilities. be able to.

(T3)
The gaming machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result is different depending on a set value that can be changed in multiple stages,
The plurality of types of wins include at least a first win and a second win,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The falling lottery probability by the falling lottery means is configured to be different depending on when the first winning is won and when the second winning is winning,
When the set value is the first set value, the lottery result by the lottery means may not include at least a second win.

The gaming machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of gaming states (at least two gaming states including a variable probability state and/or a probability state among a variable probability state, a probability state, a time saving state, and a normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3)), it is possible to further include a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance that suggests the current setting value when winning the fall lottery by the fall lottery means. .

(Machine 3) “Limiter equipped type”
It may be a so-called "limiter equipped type" model that has a limiter function that limits the number of consecutive transitions to a high probability state to a predetermined upper limit number of times (limit number of times) when a jackpot is won. This limiter-equipped type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301.

In the case of the limiter-equipped type, until the number of jackpot wins reaches a predetermined limit (until the number of consecutive activations of the conditional device reaches a predetermined upper limit), the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to a gaming state with a high probability state ( (definite state or potential state). For example, if the limit number of times is 5, the gaming state after the jackpot game from the first jackpot to the fourth jackpot will be controlled to a high probability state, and the benefit of the jackpot lottery under the high probability state until the maximum of 4 jackpots. It is now possible to receive. However, when you win the fifth jackpot, the "limiter function" starts operating as the limit has been reached (limiter function ON), and the gaming state after the jackpot game is a gaming state with a low probability state (time saving state). or normal state). If you win a jackpot while this limiter function is active, the active limiter function will be canceled (limiter function OFF), and the gaming state after the jackpot game will change to a gaming state with a high probability state until the limit number is reached again. be done. In this respect, a limiter machine with a limit of 5 times is also called a "5 times pack machine".

By the way, conventional limiter machines have only one type of limit number, and the game tends to be monotonous, lacking the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided depending on the type of jackpot. In this case, the number of limits may be different for each jackpot, or the number of limits may be partially different.

For example, jackpots A to D can be provided, and the limit number of jackpots A to D can be set to 2, 3, 4, or 5. Further, the symbol lottery rate for each jackpot can be determined as appropriate. Further, depending on which jackpot has been won, it can be determined as appropriate whether to shift to the variable probability state or to the potential state. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be shifted to the variable probability state or the probability state, or only one or more specific jackpots may be shifted to the variable probability state (for example, if jackpot A is won, (If the other jackpots B, C, and D are won, the state will be shifted to a probable state.) Further, the number of STs is preferably an infinite number of times, but the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different for each jackpot, or the number of STs may be partially different. In addition, if the number of STs is limited, even if the ST number ends and the state is changed to the normal state or time saving state, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be changed to the high probability state again until the limit number is reached. It is possible to shift to a gaming state with In addition, when winning a specific jackpot among jackpots A to D, it is possible to shift to a gaming state with a low probability state (time saving state or normal state) without shifting to a high probability state, or to change to a time saving state. It can be determined as appropriate whether to transition or to the normal state.

In the case of the above-mentioned limiter machine, the matters related to the gameplay described in this embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 76) can be applied to the embodiment regarding the variable probability state with respect to the gaming state with a high probability state before the limiter number is reached. As for the gaming state with a low probability state after reaching the limit number of times, it is applicable to the embodiment regarding the normal state and the time saving state (gaming state after reaching the limit number of times).

(Machine 4) “Simultaneous variation type”
It may be a so-called "simultaneous variation type" that is configured to be able to perform the variable display of special figure 1 and the variable display of special figure 2 in parallel. For example, it is a so-called "simultaneous variable machine" disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-171527. In the simultaneous fluctuation machine, the target of monitoring the number of ceiling games is the total number of fluctuations (total number of games executed) of the number of fluctuations displayed for special map 1 (number of games executed) and the number of fluctuations displayed for special map 2 (number of games executed). In this case, when one of the special symbols wins a normal small hit and the other special symbol is forced to stop losing, the special symbol that is forced to stop losing is also counted as one fluctuating display.

<About the outer end signal>
Next, the outer end signal output from the frame external terminal board 21 will be explained. The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. The connector corresponding to each channel and the connector on the data counter DT or hall computer HC side are connected by a cable. Each connector (information terminal) outputs one signal to the outside.

The outer end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminal of the frame external terminal board 21 according to the present embodiment include, for example, the following (1) to (10) as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-058433. There's a signal.

(1) "Special symbol confirmation signal (information terminal 1)" that is output when the variable display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 stops. Output for 100ms after fluctuation stops.
(2) A "starting port signal (information terminal 2)" that is output when the starting port sensors 34a, 35a detect passage of a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time the passing of the game ball is detected.
(3) "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" which is output when the special symbol time saving function (special symbol time saving state flag) is in operation (during electric support state) and during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the special symbol time-saving function is in operation, it is synonymous with being in the electric support state, so the general electric accessory opening extension state flag and special symbol time-saving state flag specifying the presence or absence of electric support, and other electric power support functions are used. If the support state can be specified, another flag may be provided, and it may be determined whether the power support state is in progress based on the ON/OFF state of the flag. Further, whether or not a jackpot game is being played can be determined based on the ON/OFF state of the condition device activation flag and the accessory continuous activation device activation flag.
(4) “Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)” output while the accessory continuous operation device is in operation. Output when the accessory continuous operation device activation flag is in the ON state.
(5) "Special symbol 1 starting port signal (information terminal 5)" that is output when the upper starting port sensor 34a detects a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time when the upper starting port sensor 34a detects the game ball.
(6) "Special symbol 2 starting port signal (information terminal 6)" that is output when the lower starting port sensor 35a detects a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time of detection of the lower start opening sensor 35a game ball.
(7) "Special symbol 1 confirmation signal (information terminal 7)" that is output when the variable display of special symbol 1 stops. Output for 100ms after special symbol 1 fluctuation stops.
(8) "Normal symbol starting port signal (information terminal 8)" that is output when the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a detects a game ball. Output for 100ms from the time the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a detects the game ball.
(9) When there is a prize in the winning slot, the number of prize balls is added up, and each time the total value becomes 10 or more, 10 is subtracted from the total value, and the main prize ball signal (information terminal 9 )”.
(10) When RAM is cleared (output for 30,000ms after RAM is cleared), when fraudulent winnings are detected for the big winning slot 50 or lower starting slot 35 (output for 30,000ms after release from when fraudulent winnings are detected), when fraudulent magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor (Output for 30,000ms after cancellation from magnetic detection), When fraudulent radio waves are detected by the radio sensor (Output for 30,000ms after cancellation from radio wave detection), When fraudulent winnings are detected for the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (Unauthorized winnings for the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a) A security signal (information terminal) that is output when an event related to fraud occurs, such as detection (200ms continuous ON detection) and output for 30,000ms after release) or when a vibration sensor detects unauthorized vibration (output for 30,000ms after release from unauthorized vibration detection). 10)"

Note that the main control unit 20 outputs the corresponding outer end signals from the information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, for 100 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing when the output trigger for each signal arrives, but the output signals are not continuous. The output is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms). Furthermore, the external terminal signals of information terminals 1 to 8 are output from external terminal port 1 (8-bit output port (not shown)). (corresponding to the information terminals 9 and 10, respectively), and the external terminal signals of information terminals 9 and 10 are output from external terminal port 2 (8-bit output port (not shown))) (bit 0 of external terminal port 2 corresponds to information terminal 9, bit 1 corresponds to information terminal 10, and bits 2 to 7 correspond to unused bits).

The data counter DT described above is currently installed at each gaming machine in most pachinko halls, and the hall computer HC is an essential computer for the hall that manages the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko hall. For example, when the data counter DT receives the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" that are output during a jackpot, it notifies that a jackpot has occurred. , update the number of jackpots. This not only notifies the player of the occurrence of a jackpot, but also informs surrounding players and hall staff that the machine is in the process of winning a jackpot, making it easier to identify the occurrence of a jackpot. . The hall computer HC calculates the ball output status of each gaming machine (calculates the base according to difference ball information and playing status, the base (number of special prizes) during jackpot, etc.) and the operating status (symbol pattern) based on various external terminal signals. You can monitor the execution of variable display games, the number of times they are played, the number of jackpots, etc.) in real time, monitor whether the gaming machine is operating normally (monitor for cheating and errors), and share the necessary information exclusively. Display on monitor. Data counter DT and hall computer HC generally monitor the signal input status, such as from non-reception (no input) to reception (input present) or from reception (input) to non-reception (no input) of the outer end signal. (monitoring ON/OFF edges of signals) to grasp the gaming situation and notify necessary information.

(Regarding the judgment of first hit and consecutive hits during ceiling time shortening state: Figure 83)
Here, when the above-mentioned "ceiling time saving" is provided, if the outer end signal is output in the same way as before, there will be a problem that the external devices (data counter DT, hall computer HC) will not be able to determine the "first hit". It can occur. For example, when the data counter DT reports the number of consecutive wins, it cannot be determined whether or not the current jackpot is in a consecutive winning state. The "first hit" used in FIG. 83 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state or a jackpot win during the ceiling time reduction state. The above problem will be explained using FIG. 83.

<Conventional case: Case where the jackpot was won during normal conditions>
Referring to FIG. 83(A), in the conventional case, the method of determining whether the external device has won the "first hit" or "successful win (winning the jackpot during the electric support state)" is as follows. .

(Wave 1-1) When transitioning from the normal state to jackpot (jackpot game), the above two signals, "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" Output. Therefore, on the external device side, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" transition from the state of no reception (no input) to the state of reception (with input). When this happens, it is determined that the player has won a jackpot during the normal state, that is, the "first hit."
(Wave 1-2) Also, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (Information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received. Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" transition to the received state, the jackpot was won during the electric support state, that is, the current jackpot is a jackpot during the "succession". I judge that. In addition, the notation of "time saving exit" shown in the figure means that the number of time saving times due to the jackpot time saving state has been exhausted and the state has shifted to the normal state.

<Conventional case: Case in which a jackpot was achieved during the ceiling time reduction state>
(Wave 2) However, with the conventional method of judgment, a problem may occur if a jackpot is hit during the ceiling time shortening state. During the ceiling time-saving state, it is a special figure time-saving state (during electric support state), so as shown in the diagram, the above-mentioned "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" is output, and "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" is output. is not output (the same signal output state as during the jackpot time saving state). In this state, if a jackpot is won, as in the above (wave 1-2), the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received, and the "jackpot / fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received. From this state, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" will transition to the state in which it is received, even though this jackpot is the "first hit". Instead, he concludes that he has hit the jackpot during a series of successive games. In this case, for example, there is a risk that the data counter DT may not function properly (for example, it may not be able to correctly notify that the player is playing consecutive games or the number of consecutive games).

<Case of this embodiment: Case in which the jackpot was achieved during the ceiling time reduction state>
(Wave 3) Therefore, in this embodiment, a new information terminal X is provided (for example, unused bit 3 of external terminal port 2 is assigned to information terminal Configure so that an identifiable signal (ceiling signal) can be output. This makes it possible to specify whether or not the player is in the ceiling time reduction state, and to determine whether or not there is a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state.

Specifically, from "a state in which at least the 'ceiling signal (information terminal When the state changes to "reception state", it can be determined that the "big hit signal (information terminal 4)" is due to "first hit (jackpot in ceiling time saving state)". This makes it possible to solve the above problem (the problem of determining the first hit as a jackpot in a series of games). As for whether or not to output the ceiling signal, it is sufficient to check the ON/OFF state of the above-mentioned "ceiling activation flag", and if the flag is in the ON state, output the ceiling signal.

(Italy 21, Italy 22) Please note that the external device receives information regarding the ceiling time reduction state (for example, whether the current gaming state is in the ceiling time reduction state, the base during the ceiling time reduction state, the number of game executions during the ceiling time reduction state) , the number of times ceiling time reduction is executed (the number of times the ceiling function is activated), etc.), the outer end signal will not be output even if the ceiling time reduction state occurs (even if the ceiling activation flag is ON). It may be configured as follows. Further, as described above (wave 2), it may be common to the signal related to the time saving state after the jackpot (jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)).
(Italy 57) Also, in FIG. 83(C), the ceiling signal is output during the ceiling time saving state, but if the external device has limited necessary information regarding the ceiling time saving state (for example, When the ceiling function activation is only notified to the data counter DT, or when there is no need to distinguish between the jackpot time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction state, etc., the ceiling signal is output for a predetermined period of time only when the ceiling time reduction state occurs. It's okay. For example, when the ceiling activation flag is turned on, it is output for 100ms.

(Regarding the judgment of first hit and consecutive hits during support time reduction state: Figure 84)
In the case where the above-mentioned "support time reduction" is provided, even if the outer end signal is output in the same way as before, is the jackpot during the support time reduction state the "first hit" as in the ceiling time reduction state described above? There is a problem in that the external device (data counter DT, hall computer HC) cannot determine whether or not this is the case. The "first hit" used in FIG. 84 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state or a jackpot win during the support time reduction state.

The above problem will be explained using FIG. 84. 84(A) to (C) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 83(A) to (C) above, in which the notation of ceiling time reduction (ceiling time reduction state) is replaced with support time reduction (support time reduction state). Therefore, in FIGS. 84(A) to 84(C), content that is substantially the same as that in FIG. 83 will be omitted to avoid duplicate description. Here, a description of FIG. 84(A) will be omitted, and FIGS. 84(B) and 84(C) will be described focusing on the differences from FIGS. 83(B) and (C).

<Conventional case: A case where a jackpot was achieved during a short support time period>
(Similar 1) If a jackpot is hit during the support time reduction state, a problem may arise with the conventional judgment method (FIG. 84(B)). To explain in detail, during the support time saving state, the special figure time saving state (electric support state) is in progress, and as shown in Figure (B), the above-mentioned "jackpot/fluctuating shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is output, and the "jackpot" Medium signal (information terminal 4) is not output. In this state, if a jackpot is won, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal" is not received and the above-mentioned "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" is received, then the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal" is received. (Information terminal 3)" and "Jackpot signal (Information terminal 4)" transition to the received state, so similar to the ceiling time reduction state explained in FIG. 83, the current jackpot is the "first hit". Despite this, he concludes that he has hit the jackpot during a series of successive games.

<Case of this embodiment: Case where the jackpot was achieved during the support time reduction state>
(Similar 2) Therefore, in this embodiment, a new new information terminal Y is provided (for example, unused bit 3 of external terminal port 2 is connected to information terminal Y (information (allocated to the terminal 11)), and is configured to be able to output a signal (signal during support time reduction) that can specify that the support time reduction state is in progress. This makes it possible to determine whether or not it is a jackpot during the support time reduction state.

Specifically, from "a state in which at least the 'Support Time Reduction Medium Signal (Information Terminal Y)' has been received," the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and the "Jackpot Medium Signal (Information Terminal 4)" When the state transitions to the receiving state, it can be determined that the "big hit signal (information terminal 4)" is due to the "first hit (jackpot winning during the support time saving state)". This makes it possible to solve the above problem (the problem of determining the first hit as a jackpot in a series of games). As for whether or not to output the support time reduction signal, it is sufficient to check the ON/OFF state of the "support time reduction flag" and, if the flag is in the ON state, output the support time reduction signal.

(Italy 1, Italy 2) Note that the external device side receives information regarding the support time reduction state (for example, whether the current gaming state is in the support time reduction state, the base during the support time reduction state, the number of game executions during the support time reduction state) , the number of executions of support time reduction (number of times support time reduction has been won), etc.), the outer end signal is not output even if the support time reduction state occurs (even if the support time reduction flag is ON). It may be configured as follows. Further, as in (similarity 1) above, it may be common to the signal related to the time saving state after the jackpot (jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)).
(Italy 16) In addition, in FIG. 84(C), the support time reduction signal is output during the support time reduction state, but if the necessary information regarding the support time reduction state is limited on the external device side ( For example, when the support time reduction win is only notified to the data counter DT, or when there is no need to distinguish between the jackpot time reduction state and the support time reduction state), when the support time reduction state occurs, or when the support time reduction winning game When the period ends (when the variable time has elapsed), a support time reduction signal may be output for a predetermined period of time. For example, when the support time saving flag is turned ON or when the variable time of the support time saving winning game has elapsed (see S453 in FIG. 13), the output is output for 100 ms.

(Regarding the judgment of first hit and consecutive hits when ceiling time shortening occurs during support time shortening state: Figure 85)
Next, using FIG. 85, when at least "Jackpot" and "Support Time Reduction" are provided as the winning type, and "Ceiling Time Reduction" is provided as the ceiling benefit, the case where the ceiling time reduction occurs during the support time reduction state is shown. I will explain how to judge the first hit and consecutive wins. The "first hit" used in FIG. 85 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state, a jackpot win during the support time reduction state, or a jackpot win during the ceiling time reduction state.

When a support time reduction and a ceiling time reduction are provided, at least three internal game states belonging to the time reduction state may occur: a support time reduction state, a ceiling time reduction state, and a jackpot time reduction state. In order to distinguish between these three states, it is preferable to configure the system to be able to output at least the support time reduction signal (first time reduction corresponding signal) and the ceiling signal (second time reduction corresponding signal). In the illustrated example, the support time saving medium signal (information terminal Y; first time saving corresponding signal) and the ceiling medium signal (information terminal An example is shown in which an outer end signal (information terminal 3: third time saving signal) capable of specifying a jackpot time saving state can be output.

Regarding the information terminals according to this example, for example, unused bits 3 and 4 of external terminal port 2 may be assigned to information terminal X (information terminal 11) and information terminal Y (information terminal 12), respectively. In this case, if the technical matters explained in FIGS. 83 and 84 are applied, the current gaming state will be It becomes possible to determine whether the game is in the current state, in the ceiling time-saving state, or in the jackpot time-saving state. For example, when a ceiling time reduction state occurs during a support time reduction state, and a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state is determined to be a "first hit", refer to FIG. 85(A). (Information terminal・If the "Fluctuating Shortening Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and "Jackpot Signal (Information Terminal 4)" transition to the received state, this will be determined as a win during the ceiling time shortening state and will be treated as a "first win". can be processed. Although not shown in the figure, there is a way to determine that a support time reduction occurs during a ceiling time reduction state and a jackpot during that support time reduction state is a "first hit". Y)" is received (a state in which "Support time reduction medium signal (information terminal (Information terminal 3)" and "Jackpot signal (Information terminal 4)" transition to the received state, this can be determined as a win during the support time saving state and treated as a "first win." can.

(Italy 67, Italy 68) Note that if the external device does not particularly need information regarding the ceiling time-saving state, the "ceiling signal" may not be output. If not, the configuration may be such that the "support time reduction signal" is not output. In other words, depending on the performance of the external device (what kind of information the external device needs), it is possible to configure the external device to output at least one of the "ceiling signal" and "support time reduction signal". can. Furthermore, at least one of the "ceiling signal" and the "support time reduction signal" may be a common outer end signal with the "jackpot/variation reduction signal."

(Modified example of outer end signal output form: Fig. 85(B))
Next, a modification of FIG. 85(A) will be described using FIG. 85(B).

The characteristic point of the modified example shown in FIG. 85(B) is that, as can be seen from FIG. It is not output during the jackpot and during the jackpot time shortening state (see information terminal 3 (jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal α) in Figure (B)).

In the case of this modification, regarding signals related to the time saving state, only the dedicated "support time saving signal (information terminal Y)" is output during the support time saving state, and the dedicated "ceiling signal (information terminal Y)" is output during the ceiling time saving state. Terminal Therefore, when the external device determines the "first hit", the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" change from the state of no reception to the state of reception. If the transition occurs, it can be determined that the "big hit signal (information terminal 4)" is due to the "first hit". In addition, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" and " When the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) transitions to the received state, the current jackpot can be easily processed as a jackpot in a "successive win".

In addition, the above modification (FIG. 85(B)) includes the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" shown in FIG. 83(C) and the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" shown in FIG. 84(C). 3) can be applied to any of the above. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 83(C), the "jackpot/fluctuation reduction signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the ceiling time reduction state, but is output during the jackpot and jackpot time reduction state. It is. In addition, in the case of FIG. 84(C), the "jackpot/fluctuation reduction signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the support time reduction state, but is output during the jackpot and jackpot time reduction state. be.

(Stone 1) When this modification (Fig. 85 (B)) is applied to the case of Fig. 83 (C), the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the ceiling time shortening state, so the figure By using the same method as in 83(A), it is possible to determine whether it is a "first hit" or a jackpot during a "consecutive game". Specifically, when the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" transition from the state of no reception to the state of reception, the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" changes from the state of no reception to the state of reception. It can be determined that the information terminal 4) is due to the "first hit (jackpot win during ceiling time reduction state)". In addition, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" and " When the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) transitions to the received state, it can be determined that the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) is due to a jackpot in consecutive games.

(Stone 2) Also, when this modification is applied to the case of Fig. 83(C), the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the support time shortening state, so the case shown in Fig. 84(A) Using the same method, it is possible to distinguish between a "first hit" and a "long hit" jackpot. Specifically, when the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" transition from the state of no reception to the state of reception, the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" changes from the state of no reception to the state of reception. It can be determined that the information terminal 4) is due to the first hit (jackpot win during the support time saving state). In addition, from the state where the "Jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" is received, the "Jackpot/Fluctuation shortening signal (Information terminal 3)" and " When the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) transitions to the received state, it can be determined that the jackpot signal (information terminal 4) is due to a jackpot in consecutive games.

The configuration of FIG. 85(B) described above makes it possible to distinguish between the time saving states without increasing the control burden on the external device side, even when there are multiple time saving states. As a result, even if there are multiple time-saving states, it is possible to distinguish between the first hit and a jackpot during a consecutive game, count the number of jackpots during a consecutive game including the first hit, and calculate the base in each time-saving status. Processing etc. are not complicated, and it can contribute to reducing the control burden on the external device side.

(Example of effect when entering ceiling time reduction state from a certain game state: Figures 77 to 82)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82, an explanation will be given of an example of a performance in a case where the ceiling function is activated by reaching the ceiling from a certain gaming state and the ceiling time saving state is entered. Here, a case will be described in which a ceiling time reduction activated at the start of the ceiling game (FIGS. 77 to 79) and a ceiling time reduction activated at the end of the ceiling game (FIGS. 80 to 82) are used as ceiling benefits.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time shortening state (when the ceiling function is activated at the start of the ceiling game)>
(Italy 119-120) FIG. 77 shows an example of the effect when the ceiling is reached in the ceiling time reduction type activated at the start of the ceiling game in the low-probability game state count mode.

The production example in Fig. 77 shows a case where the ceiling is reached consecutively.Here, the first time is the case where the ceiling is reached from the normal state, and the second time is the ceiling time shortened state. The case where the ceiling is reached is shown. In this example, a representative example will be explained in which the number of ceiling games is 1000 and the number of ceiling time reductions is 1000 (the same applies to FIGS. 78 to 82 described later). If the ceiling is reached continuously, it is preferable to use the following effect.

(When reaching the ceiling for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling time shortening type that is activated at the start of the ceiling game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the start of symbol variation (game start) in the ceiling game (1000th rotation), and the ceiling time shortening state occurs (Figure 63 ~Figure 66). Therefore, when the game starts at the 1000th rotation, a ``effect screen transition effect'' appears. This performance screen transition performance is a performance that appears at the time of transition to the game mode, and is, for example, a "shutter performance" that changes the background image etc. before and after the shutter display to notify the transition to the game mode. Further, with the activation of the ceiling function, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S926 in FIG. 65). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, the CPU 201 outputs a ceiling inside signal as an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S099 in FIG. 9). As a result, the fact that the ceiling time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT).

Then, when the performance screen transition performance is finished, a performance screen for the ceiling performance mode is displayed, and the reaching of the ceiling is notified (ceiling entry notification shown in the figure). At this time, along with a predetermined fluctuating performance (for example, a performance including the ceiling-rushing performance 781 in Note 1 of FIG. 61B), a large message such as "⇒ Hit the right!" or "Oh! The production image and character image of "Mookaaajii!" are displayed in a large scale (the right-handed hit notification (large) shown), and a small "⇒" is displayed in the right corner of the LCD screen as the second right-handed instruction production. is displayed (right-handed hitting notification (small) shown), and the right-handed hitting notification LED (right-handed hitting display device 39b) lights up. As a result, the player understands that he has entered a state in which he is advantageous to playing right-handed, and starts playing right-handed. Note that the first right-handed hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting notification (large)) does not need to be displayed extensively forever, so it is ended in the middle of the game, and the second right-handed hitting instruction presentation (right-handed hitting notification (small) ) will be continuously notified. Further, the right-handed hit notification LED (right-handed hit display device 39b) remains lit until the power support state ends.

When the ceiling game ends, the game mode is shifted to "heaven mode", and the performance under the heaven performance mode is displayed. In addition, there is a "remaining number of ceiling games display effect (remaining number of ceiling games shown)" that visually informs the number of remaining ceiling games until the next number of ceiling games, and/or a "remaining time reduction display that visually informs the remaining number of time reductions." The series of effects appearing in the ceiling game in this example may or may not be executed (the same applies to FIGS. 78 to 82 described later). For example, it is an effect based on "ceiling fluctuation (see the "ceiling" column in FIG. 73)" (the same applies to FIGS. 78 to 82 described later).

(When reaching the ceiling for the second time)
As the game progresses, the player reaches the 2000th rotation, that is, the second ceiling game, without winning a jackpot, and the ceiling function is activated again, and a ceiling time reduction is provided. In this second ceiling game, the effects related to the ceiling time shortening, such as the "effect screen transition effect" that appeared in the first ceiling game and the first right-handed instruction effect that displays a large "right-handed hit →" image, are Since it has already been done, it will not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (ceiling continuation notification shown in the figure)" may be displayed to notify that the ceiling is continuing. Note that the illustrated "remaining ceiling number display effect (illustrated remaining ceiling game number notification)" may or may not be executed.

In this way, the performance during the second and subsequent ceiling games is different from the performance during the first ceiling game, but according to this configuration, by performing the performance according to the progress of the game, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable. The feature is that it can be prevented from being given. In addition, the number of consecutive games when the ceiling function is activated (reaching the ceiling) is managed by the main control unit 20 side, and the information can be sent to the performance control unit 24 side, so that the number of consecutive games can also be managed on the performance control unit 24 side. (The same applies to the production example shown in FIG. 80, which will be described later).

(Modified example: I121)
In the above, it has been explained that the performance during the second and subsequent ceiling games is different from the performance during the first ceiling game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes effects executed during the first ceiling game (when reaching the ceiling from the normal state) and during the second consecutive ceiling game (when reaching the ceiling from the ceiling time shortening state). ) may perform a common (same) performance with the performance performed in . According to this configuration, the player can easily understand that the ceiling number has been reset again, that is, that the ceiling function has been activated again and the ceiling benefit has been awarded. The same ceiling fluctuation is selected for the first time and the second and subsequent times, and the effects based on this are also the same, leading to a reduction in control burden. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in terms of the jackpot lottery probability, reaching the ceiling from the second time onwards is considered to be a very rare case. In such a case, it is considered that there is no particular problem even if the same effect is performed every time when the ceiling is reached repeatedly. Note that this example (Italy 121) also applies to FIG. 80, which will be described later.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state (in the case of the type activated at the start of the ceiling game)>
(Italy 122) The production example shown in FIG. 78 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving type that is activated at the start of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIG. 77 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 78, during the ceiling game at the 1000th rotation, a "effect screen transition effect (shutter effect)" appears at the start of the 1000th rotation. Further, as the ceiling function is activated, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S926 in FIG. 65). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, the CPU 201 outputs a ceiling inside signal as an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S099 in FIG. 9). This point is similar to the case in FIG. 77.

However, in the case of this example, before the ceiling time reduction occurs, the "easy winning flag" that specifies that the electric support state is in effect is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the outer end signal is used to indicate the jackpot time reduction. A "jackpot time saving signal" indicating the state is output (ON state = output, OFF state = output stop). The easy-to-win flag may be a general electricity accessory opening extension state flag or a special symbol time saving state flag that specifies whether there is an electricity support state, or it may be a separately provided flag to specify whether or not the electricity support state is present. There may be. As a result, the fact that the jackpot time saving state is in progress is sent to an external device (hole computer HC or data counter DT). In addition, at the timing when the ceiling function is activated (for example, when the ceiling activation flag is ON), the jackpot time saving signal and the easy winning flag are turned OFF, but the easy winning flag remains ON and the jackpot is not activated. It may be configured such that only the time saving signal is not output. Further, even if the winning easy flag remains in the ON state, the jackpot time saving signal may not be outputted on condition that the ceiling activation flag remains in the ON state.

If the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state occurs, the "right-handed hit notification (small) + right-handed hit LED" will be activated because the "right-handed hitter advantage" power support state is already in place before reaching the ceiling. This continues, and there is no need to announce again the situation that "right-handed players are advantageous" (see "Right-handed players notification (small) + right-handed players LED" shown in the figure). Therefore, in this example, the above-mentioned "first right-handed hitting instruction effect (right-handed hitting notification (large))" is not executed.

(Italy 123) When the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are not a common production mode but are composed of separate production modes (for example, time saving production mode and ceiling production mode), it is not possible to indicate that the ceiling has been reached. In order to make it easier for players to recognize, effects such as effect screen transition effects and ceiling entry effects are performed. In addition, when reaching the ceiling, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table ("FH90" shown in Figure 73: see the "Ceiling" column in the figure) is used, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 39, Fig. 40) is not used. If the jackpot time saving state and ceiling time saving state are in a common production mode, the production mode may be continued. Although the illustration shows an example in which the production mode during the jackpot time-saving state is the "time-saving production mode," the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the support time reduction state (when the ceiling function is activated at the start of the ceiling game)>
(Italy 124) The production example shown in FIG. 79 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction, which is activated at the start of the ceiling game, is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 77 and 78 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 79, as can be seen from the content shown, the performance during the 1000th rotation ceiling game is such that the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 78, the content is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIG. 78. Similarly, regarding the 999th rotation just before the ceiling, the content is substantially the same as that described with reference to FIG. 78, except that the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 78 is replaced with the support time saving state. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the illustrated outer end signals will be mainly described here.

In this example, before the ceiling time reduction state occurs, the support time reduction medium flag is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the "support time reduction medium signal" indicating the support time reduction state is output as the outer end signal. has been done. As a result, a message indicating that the support time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). In addition, at the activation timing of the ceiling function, the support time reduction medium signal and the support time reduction medium flag are set to OFF state, but the support time reduction medium flag is maintained in the ON state, and the configuration is such that only the support time reduction medium signal is not output. You may. Further, even if the support time reduction flag remains in the ON state, the support time reduction signal may not be outputted on condition that the ceiling activation flag remains in the ON state.

(Italy 124) In addition, if the support time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are not a common production mode but are composed of separate production modes (for example, time saving production mode and ceiling production mode), when the ceiling is reached In order to make it easier for players to recognize this, effects such as effect screen transition effects and ceiling entry effects are performed. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table ("FH90" shown in Figure 73; see the "Ceiling" column in the figure) is used, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 39, Figure 40) is not used. If the support time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are in a common production mode, the production mode may be continued. Although the illustration shows an example in which the performance mode during the support time-saving state is the "time-saving performance mode," the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided. This (I124) is also the same in FIG. 82, which will be described later.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time shortening state (when the ceiling function is activated at the end of the ceiling game)>
FIG. 80 shows an example of a performance regarding when the ceiling is reached in the ceiling time reduction type activated at the end of the ceiling game in the low probability game state count mode. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 77 to 79 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

The example of FIG. 80 shows a case in which the ceiling has been reached continuously, similar to FIG. 78 described above.

(When reaching the ceiling for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling time shortening that is activated at the end of the ceiling game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated when the fixed display time of the ceiling game (1000th rotation) ends (game end), and the ceiling time shortening state occurs (Fig. 63 to 66). Therefore, regardless of whether the next game is started or not, the ceiling time reduction state is entered after the ceiling game ends (see after the illustrated symbol stop period has elapsed). Therefore, in this example, a unique performance system is executed that is not available in the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game. The details will be explained below.

In the case of the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game, focus on the point that the ceiling time shortening state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, and if the symbol fluctuation time of the ceiling game (1000th rotation) has elapsed (for example, the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed) time to a predetermined timing before the elapse of the final display time), executes a "ceiling activation effect" that can notify that the ceiling function will be activated after the end of the current game. As shown in the figure, this ceiling activation effect can be executed until the next game starts. As a result, even if the number of balls on hold is zero at the end of the ceiling game and the player is waiting for a customer, the ceiling activation effect is still being executed, so the player is informed that the ceiling time reduction state will be entered at the end of the current game. can be notified to. The ceiling activation effect provides a ceiling benefit that is activated at the end of the ceiling game in that it can notify that the situation is essentially advantageous for right-handed players even if the right-handed hitting instruction effect has not appeared. Suitable for cases where In this example, as shown in the figure, even if the ceiling function is activated, if the number of pending balls is zero, the production screen under normal mode will remain in the waiting state until the next game starts. ing. In such a case, if a ceiling activation effect is displayed, the player can easily understand that the ceiling time is being shortened even if the player is waiting for a customer.

Note that the end of the ceiling game can also be used as a trigger to start a right-hitting instruction performance (which may be executed simultaneously (overlappingly) with the above-mentioned ceiling activation performance). In this example, as shown in the figure, after the symbol stop period of the ceiling game has elapsed, that is, after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the above-mentioned "first right-hitting instruction performance (right-handed hitting notification (large))" appears, and the right-handed hitting An example of notifying a player of an advantageous situation is shown. It is preferable that the first right-handed instruction performance can be displayed even during customer waiting performance (demonstration display). Moreover, when performing the first right-handed instruction performance, the above-mentioned ceiling activation performance does not need to be performed.

Further, as the ceiling game ends, the ceiling function is activated and the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S926 in FIG. 65). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, the CPU 201 outputs a ceiling inside signal as an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S099 in FIG. 9). As a result, a message indicating that the ceiling time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT).

If an action pending ball occurs, the game for the 1001st rotation is started. As can be seen from the figure, the presentation during the ceiling game of the 1001st rotation is substantially the same as the presentation contents of the 1000th rotation (performance screen transition presentation, ceiling entry notification, etc.) shown in FIG. Therefore, the description will be omitted here to avoid redundant description.

When the ceiling game ends, the game mode is transferred from the ceiling mode to the "heaven mode", and the performance under the heaven performance mode is displayed (same as the example of performance in FIG. 78).

(When reaching the ceiling for the second time)
As the game progresses, the player reaches the 2000th rotation, that is, the second ceiling game, without winning a jackpot, and the ceiling function is activated again, and a ceiling time reduction is provided. In this second ceiling game, the same effect as explained in FIG. Instructions and performances will not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (ceiling continuation notification shown in the figure)" may be displayed to notify that the ceiling is continuing.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time reduction state (in the case of the type that activates at the end of the ceiling game)>
The production example shown in FIG. 81 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the jackpot time saving state and the ceiling time saving type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling benefit. This example shows a case where there is a suspended ball in the 1000th rotation ceiling game. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 78 and 80 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

Referring to FIG. 81, at the end of the symbol stop display period of the 1000th rotation of the ceiling game (at the end of the variable time or when the symbol fixed display time elapses), the ceiling function is activated and a ceiling time shortening state occurs. In the case of this example, a case is described in which there is an operation-suspended ball at the end of the 1000th rotation, so the ceiling time reduction state is already in place when the next game starts. What should not be confused here is that in the case of the type that is activated at the end of the ceiling game, just because there is a pending ball during the ceiling game, the ceiling time shortening state will occur in the next game (the ceiling function will be activated). isn't it. The ceiling time shortening state only occurs at the end of the ceiling game. In terms of processing, after the fixed display time in the ceiling game has elapsed, the ceiling activation management process in FIG. 65 is executed during the special symbol confirmation time process in FIGS. 68A to 68B, and the ceiling function is activated. Therefore, if there is an operation pending ball at the end of the ceiling game, to be more precise, after the ceiling time shortening state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, in the next 4ms later interrupt processing, the oldest operation pending ball in chronological order The special symbol management process (S092 in FIG. 9) is executed, and symbol variation display is started, that is, the next game is started. Therefore, the ceiling time shortening state will not occur at the start of the next game; for example, if there are no pending balls at the end of the current game and no pending balls occur for a while, the ceiling time shortening state will continue to occur. , if the state enters the customer waiting state (pre-customer waiting performance) or if the time-saving rush notification performance can be executed, the ceiling time-saving state remains in place and the special electric non-operating type support time-saving state shown in FIG. 59 or FIG. It can be configured to follow the same transition of performance as described in the time-saving rush notification performance of No. 60.

Note that the presentation content during the 1001st rotation game is substantially the same as the presentation example shown in FIG. 78. Further, the outer end signal is also substantially the same as in FIG. 78. Therefore, these descriptions will be omitted here to avoid redundant description.

<Case where the ceiling function is activated during the support time reduction state (in the case of the type activated at the end of the ceiling game)>
The production example shown in FIG. 82 shows a case where the player reaches the ceiling during the support time reduction state and the ceiling time reduction activated at the start of the ceiling game is activated as a ceiling benefit. Note that content that is substantially the same as that explained in FIGS. 79 to 81 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Referring to FIG. 82, as can be seen from the contents shown in the figure, regarding the performance during the ceiling game of the 1001st rotation, the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 81, the contents are substantially the same as in FIG. 81. Similarly, regarding the 1000th revolution just before the ceiling, the contents are substantially the same as shown in FIG. 81, except that the jackpot time saving state shown in FIG. 81 is replaced with the support time saving state. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the illustrated outer end signals will be mainly described here.

In this example, before the ceiling time reduction state occurs, the support time reduction medium flag is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the "support time reduction medium signal" indicating the support time reduction state is output as the outer end signal. has been done. As a result, a message indicating that the support time is being shortened is sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). What should not be confused here is that in the case of the ceiling game activation type shown in Figure 79, the activation timing of the ceiling function is at the ``start'' of the game at the 1000th rotation, and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag is also at the 1000th rotation. In contrast, in the case of the ceiling game activation type in this example, the activation timing of the ceiling function is the 1000th rotation game ``at the end'', and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag is also 1000. This is the "end" point of the game of rotation. Note that in this example, as well as the type activated at the start of the ceiling game in FIG. 79, the support time reduction medium signal and the support time reduction medium flag are turned OFF at the activation timing of the ceiling function, but the support time reduction medium flag is turned ON. may be maintained, and only the support time reduction signal may be configured not to be output. Further, even if the support time reduction flag remains in the ON state, the support time reduction signal may not be outputted on condition that the ceiling activation flag remains in the ON state.

Also, in this example, like the ceiling game activation type shown in FIG. In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the player has reached the ceiling, a performance screen transition performance, a ceiling rush performance, etc. are performed. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table ("FH90" shown in Figure 73; see the "Ceiling" column in the figure) is used, and a time-saving fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 39, Fig. 40) is not used. If the support time saving state and the ceiling time saving state are in a common production mode, the production mode may be continued. Although the illustration shows an example in which the performance mode during the support time-saving state is the "time-saving performance mode," the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

The configuration may be a combination of one or more of all the embodiments described above (including all the various configurations and modifications described in each embodiment), and the contents described in each embodiment may be different from those of the individual embodiments. It is not limited to only.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a pinball game machine that uses game balls as the game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to a pinball game machine. For example, it may be an arrangement ball machine or a mahjong ball game machine, and other game media include a game machine that uses game medals (reel type game machine) and a game medium that uses electromagnetic recording means. It may also be a managed game machine or the like.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a Game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a Lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol starting port, normal symbol starting port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Normal symbol display device,
50, 52a Big winning opening, big winning opening sensor 41, 41c Normal variable winning device, normal electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 Out mouth,
94 Setting key switch,
95 Setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting display,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 Performance control CPU, performance control ROM, performance control RAM.

Claims (1)

a symbol display means configured to be able to perform variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols based on a predetermined variation pattern, and capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative symbols in a display mode according to a game result;
a production control means capable of controlling production modes;
Equipped with a special electric accessory that can open and close the grand prize opening,
A gaming machine capable of controlling the winning state of opening and closing the big prize opening,
a special state that can be transitioned to via the winning state;
has a specific state that can be transitioned to without going through the hit state,
The specific state includes a first specific state and a second specific state each having a different degree of advantage,
The effect control means controls to a first effect mode in both the special state and the first specific state, and the effect mode is different from the first effect mode in the second specific state. configured to control to a second production mode,
The variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns includes a first variable display in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a high transmittance state, and a low transmittance state lower than the high transmittance state after the first variable display is executed. It is possible to execute the second fluctuation display displayed in
The execution time of the first variable display of the decorative pattern that starts the stopping action first is configured to be different depending on the variation pattern, and the decorative pattern that starts the stopping action first starts the stopping action. It is configured to be able to execute multiple stop motion patterns with different stop motion periods from when the decorative pattern stops until all the decorative patterns stop.
The specific effect can be executed in both cases where it is scheduled to be controlled to the winning state and when it is scheduled to be controlled to the first specific state, and the second specific state is The specific performance is configured not to be executed when it is scheduled to be controlled.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images